Above the River, Chapter 34

Chapter 34

August 5-6, 1949

Gassmann-Bunke homestead

Near Varel, Germany

            The day is nearly here. Tomorrow morning, Marcus will drive Ethel and Lina to Oldenburg, to the train that will take them to Marseille. There, on August 7th, they will board their ship, and sail to New York, arriving on August 20th. Their trunks have been packed for days already and stowed behind the stairs leading up to the second floor, awaiting departure.

            Today, Ethel has finished sewing together the fabric pieces that will comprise the top of the quilt she is making for Marcus and Kristina’s wedding. Renate and Lina have been telling her for days not to push herself to finish it before she leaves, but she has been stubborn about it, and finally, this afternoon, she sews the last seam.  Now it is late afternoon, before dinner, and she has laid the quilt top out on the bed in the room she shares with Viktor, to get a sense of how it will look as a finished quilt.  She has smoothed it down as best she can and is standing at the foot of the bed scrutinizing it, when Viktor quietly comes into the room. He walks over beside her and looks at the quilt top, too. They stand there in silence for a minute. Then Viktor speaks.

            “It reminds me of the day we went to the Kropps’ together. When you were delivering the quilt for Hannah, and I was going to talk about plans for the wardrobe. Remember?”

            Ethel nods, and a smile – both happy and tinged with sadness – comes to her face.

            “You wouldn’t tell me anything about it while you were working on it,” he goes on. “I had to wait, like everybody else, until you spread it out on Hannah’s bed, just the way you’ve laid this out here now.”

            “Yes,” Ethel says softly. “I didn’t want you getting any ideas.” Then she laughs. “But it was too late for that, wasn’t it?”

            “Oh, yes,” Viktor tells her. “I was already gone by that point. Head over heels in love.”

            “Me, too,” Ethel admits.  But her tone is not light, as it would have been, had they had this conversation before the family’s second visit to Groening.

            “You were?” Viktor looks at her in surprise.

            Ethel nods. “I just never told you. Didn’t want it to go to your head.” Another smile, although she is still looking at the quilt top.

            Viktor leans over to study the design, resting his arms on his knees so as not to put them on the fabric.

            “Look!” he says, extending a hand to point to one spot. “You added a butterfly here! Like the ones on Hannah’s quilt. And is it out of the same fabric? I don’t quite recall.”

            “Yes, yes,” Ethel replies, more animated now.  She steps forward, too, and runs her finger over the spot where she has appliqued a large butterfly sewn from blue and pink fabric on top of the spot where three other fabric strips meet. “I remembered how happy it made me to create that quilt, so I wanted to tuck a butterfly into this one, too.”

            Now Viktor reaches out and points to a different swatch of cloth, pale yellow with tiny brown flowers. “I do remember this one,” he tells her. “It’s from the quilt you made for us, to mark our first wedding anniversary.” He leans over to inspect it, then, cautiously, places his hand on top of it.

            “That’s right,” Ethel says, and her voice is very soft. 

            Viktor can tell from the way she speaks that she is crying, and when he stands up and turns to look at her, there are tears in his eyes, too.  He takes both of her hands in his.

            “Ethel,” he says, running his index finger over the beechwood ring he carved for her so many years earlier, “when I asked you to marry me, I told you I didn’t want to ever force you to jump off a cliff in order to be my wife.  And then that’s exactly what I went and did.”

            “I don’t think you had any idea you were headed for a cliff yourself, did you?” Ethel asks.

            “No! I didn’t,” he tells her. “Please believe me.”

            In the next moment, he is on his knees before her, still clasping her hands in his. At first, he is staring down at the floor, but then he raises his eyes up to meet hers. His voice is hoarse and grief-stricken as he speaks. “I have no right to ask you to forgive me, Ethel. But I tell you with all my heart, that I regret all I have done to hurt you and the family… and all the others I have hurt.” He lowers his lips to her hands and kisses them. “But I intend to find a way to make it all right.  And if you can find it in your heart to forgive me, I swear to you that there will be no more cliffs.” Now he leans his forehead against her hands and begins to sob quietly. Ethel doesn’t pull her hands away, but neither does she give Viktor any encouragement.

            In the weeks since Peter’s and Lina’s healings, since the revelations about her husband’s wartime acts, Ethel has struggled as much as any of the other family members, perhaps as much as all of them put together, even. While the others got a respite from the situation each night, Ethel has had to face her husband – and herself – every evening when she and Viktor have gone up to their bedroom for the night. All day, every day, Ethel has found herself thinking obsessively about what she would, should, could say once the two of them were alone again.

            What she has most wanted to say to her husband is nothing at all, and for him to say nothing to her. And, in fact, that is the way things played out for a few nights after the family’s second visit to Groening. That first evening, when Viktor sat out by the goat pen until Ethel went out and led him back in, he tried to talk. But she made it clear that she was not prepared to discuss any of it at the moment, and that she would let him know when she was prepared – if that moment ever arrived.

            Now, on the eve of her departure with Lina, she feels far more prepared to take a trans-Atlantic voyage, than to initiate the conversation her husband so desperately wants – and his desperation is clear in his eyes every night when they get into bed. “Tonight?” he seems to be asking her with his gaze. And each night, her negative answer has been obvious in her face. Some nights, she looks long and searchingly into his eyes, while remaining silent. Other nights, she hugs him briefly, or, sometimes, for a minute or more.

            It seems to Viktor, during these longer embraces, that she is seeking to learn some deep, inner truth through her contact with his body. Meanwhile, he concentrates on telling her, with his heart, that he loves her, loves them all, and is prepared to do whatever she wants, if only she will agree to find a way to move forward, together. For he senses, as does everyone else in the family, that it is all up to Ethel now, this decision about how the family will proceed.

            This is just the way things played out during the “Schweiburg period”: It was Ethel who made the decision to go after Viktor, with Marcus and Peter in tow. Back then, when Ethel first began talking about following Viktor to Schweiburg, Renate’s mind immediately traveled back a few years, to when Hans chose to emigrate to America. The pain of being excluded from this decision, of being denied the chance to sway his thinking, was still fresh in Renate’s heart, and she wasn’t about to miss her chance this time. Unwilling to be silenced, she readily shared her views and advice with Ethel, pressuring her to stay on the homestead and let Viktor sort out his own life at a distance, where he couldn’t wound them with his lies.  But Ethel kindly, but forcefully, asked her mother to leave her to decide for herself. She chose to go to Schweiburg. AndRenate released her fiercely-guarded decision-making role only with great difficulty and anguish.

            Thus, we can see that years later, in 1945, when Lina summoned a similar forcefulness to demand (as Renate saw it) that she be allowed to take on chores, this was not, actually, the first time a Gassmann or Bunke child had had a say. That was just a convenient story that Renate told herself. That was easier than allowing her mind to revisit the devastating moments when her two children had exercised their free will – and she ultimately, had had no say in either matter. Back then, in Ethel’s case, just as in the case of Lina’s chores, Renate recast her own powerlessness as a story of consciously lending support to a choice she initially opposed. As Ethel prepared to leave the homestead for Schweiburg, Renate told Ulrich that Ethel’s decision was for the best. “Besides,” she told her husband, “They’ll be in Schweiburg. That’s well outside my jurisdiction.” Ulrich knew enough to simply nod and congratulate his wife on her clear thinking.  

            “And here we all are again,” Renate tells herself now, in August of 1949. “Another situation.” And yet, she recognizes that her response is different. She notices no fear inside, no impulse to push Ethel in any certain direction. In fact, she is surprised by the ease with which she is now able to wait, day after day, week after week, to learn how Ethel wants to proceed. She notices a bit of relief, too – relief that the weight of this decision is not resting on her own shoulders. And confidence that whatever Ethel ultimately does will be the right thing for all of them.

            Marcus, too, is content to allow his mother her free will. That hadn’t been the case in the 30s, when he was a teenager. They were back living on the homestead by then, but it was clear to all of them that Viktor was still involved with violent agitators in Varel and Schweiburg. Marcus was not shy about voicing his concerns, about urging his mother to drive “that monster” away. He got no further than Renate had, half a dozen years earlier.

            But now, Marcus seems the most at ease out of all of them with the uncertainty of how the present situation will play out. That’s because he has already had his say on the matter, at the breakfast table the morning after Lina’s healing. So, no matter what his mother ends up doing, his own path forward is clear to him. Groening may have urged him to not despise anyone, but he has decided for himself: He will not forgive his father.

            For her part, Lina has often thought in recent days, grateful for the distraction of getting ready to travel.  Thank goodness for all the preparations! Now, on the last day before she and her mother are to set off, everyone – especially Viktor – is on tenterhooks. She has to decide before tomorrow morning, doesn’t she? they all think. Even Ethel, who has, by now, made a decision, is nervous as she ponders how best to share her thoughts with her husband.

            As Viktor joins his wife in their bedroom, as they look at the quilt together, Ethel reviews the conclusion she has come to: She just cannot give Viktor the forgiveness he is pleading for. Nor does she feel she can send him away. The family has been through so much these past months – years, and even decades, really. It has become clear to her that she has to sort everything out, piece by piece, the way she’d plan a quilt, the way she created her “pictures” as a little girl. But she can’t simply force things to fall into place. She must wait for the creative impulse to arise, and then allow it to guide her to just the right solution, just the right arrangement. And for that, she needs time. “This trip will give me that,” she says. She realizes that she has spoken aloud only when Viktor lifts his head and looks up at her.

            “What do you mean?” he asks, barely breathing. “What will the trip give you?”

            Ethel looks down at Viktor where he is kneeling before her, and meets his eyes. “The peace and calm I need to decide how to proceed.”

            “But…” Viktor begins, but Ethel interrupts him.

            “I know, I know. You want me to tell you right now. Do I forgive you or not? Will we remain a family on this homestead, or not? But I’m saying to you that I just cannot answer those questions yet.”

            “Then… What…?” Viktor asks.

            “Lina and I will go as planned. I’ll think things over. And it will all fall into place.”

            Viktor makes no reply, but his head slumps forward in disappointment. He is still clasping his wife’s hands in his.

            Ethel lowers herself to the floor, too. Pulling her hands gently from Viktor’s, she wraps her arms around his neck and lays her head upon his shoulder. He brings his arms around her back and embraces her, but she can feel his uncertainty about how tightly he is allowed to hold her now. Then he lowers his head, so that the two of them are kneeling, cheeks touching. Their flowing tears mingle as the last rays of the day’s sun spread into the room and briefly illuminate the butterfly on the quilt top, before fading, suddenly, into the shadow of twilight.

*          *          *

            In the morning, they have a quick breakfast. They are all grateful that there is no time to linger over the meal: this day is so full of strong emotions, that it would be torture to have to make idle conversation. Ethel has shared her decision with Renate, who has informed the others. Except for Lina, who will have the trip ahead to distract her from the cares of life on the homestead, and Marcus, whose own way forward seems clear to him, they all feel at loose ends. How are we supposed to manage here, with all this uncertainty?

            They have all made their real goodbyes already, the day before, so now each member of the family heads off to his or her routine tasks, striving to treat this like just another day. Before going back into her room to sit for a few minutes before they leave, Lina calls out to her father as he turns to walk out the kitchen door.

            “Papa,” she tells him, “Don’t go yet! I have something for you.”

            With a look of surprise, Viktor stops. She walks up and hands him a small bundle of cloth. Unfolding it, he sees that it is a little sack, with a drawstring.

            “For your tin foil ball,” Lina tells him. “Like this one,” she explains, showing him the pouch where she keeps the ball Bruno Groening gave her. “I made this for you, so you can always carry the ball from Mr. Groening with you.” She shows him how he can loop his finger through the drawstring and wrap his hand around the sack. “So you’ll never lose it.”

            Viktor is so touched that he doesn’t know what to say. So, he just gently wraps his arms around Lina and holds her tight for a minute.  She allows him to do this, making no attempt to sort out the conflicting feelings that rush into her heart and mind. There will be time enough to examine them during her trip. As Viktor stands there, his feeling his daughter’s arms loosely wrapped around his waist, he hears her whisper something to him.

            “Trust and believe, Papa. Trust and believe.”

            And then, she is walking back across the kitchen. He watches her vanish into her bedroom. 

            Viktor looks down to study the pouch Lina has made for him.  He sees that it is made of the very same fabric that Ethel used to make their first anniversary quilt. Did she know that when she chose it? He turns and walks swiftly out of the house, across the yard, clutching the pouch tightly in his hand.  

            Even as he is crossing the yard, walking past the clotheslines, he hears Ethel in the kitchen, calling out to their daughter.

            “Lina? Marcus is pulling the car up.  Did you hear? Are you ready?”

            But before he can hear Lina’s reply, or the engine of the Opel Kapitän as Marcus pulls it up by the door, Viktor is stepping onto the path that leads into the forest. To the treehouse…

To be continued…

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 33

Chapter 33

Gassmann-Bunke homestead

            Lina awakens with the sun the next morning, and it takes a moment before she realizes that she is lying on her side, instead of her back. For four years, she has slept on her back, but here she is now, on her side.  She is confused at first. Then a smile spreads over her face. I must have turned onto my side in my sleep! she realizes. So, it’s true! I’m really healed! Rolling onto her back, she slowly raises herself up to a sitting position. Then, bending her knees, she scoots backwards, so that she is resting on her pillow against the headboard. And all this she does without any pain whatsoever.  Lina smiles and feels a deep well of gratitude within her.  It’s true!

            Moving aside the sheet she’d been sleeping under, Lina straightens out her legs, then pulls her nightgown up to her knees, so that she can examine her legs. After four years of such examinations, she knows the course of each scar, the outline of each discoloration, by heart. She has always had the feeling that if these spots where her skin and bones were broken could talk, they would whisper to her the secret of how and why the accident happened. Many, many times in the previous four years, she touched the white traces on her skin, the lichen-like blotches, and asked them to help her understand.  Funny, she thinks now, I haven’t looked at my legs since before the last time we went to see Bruno Groening. And that was the night when she did finally understand how the accident occurred. She runs her index finger lightly along one of the scars.  “Was it you who sent me that image?” she asks out loud, “So that I could understand?”  She spends the next few minutes bobbing her knees up and down and watching how these movements alter the way the scars and blotched patches of skin appear to her.

            Before this morning, her motionless legs always reminded her of dead tree trunks, lying helplessly on the forest floor, vulnerable to attack from all manner of insects and sharp human implements. Now, though, they seem to have sprung back to life, somehow reconnected to their roots, to their source of sustenance.  Even the scars and discolored spots have acquired a certain vibrancy, as the muscles beneath them undulate. Lina leans forward and then swings her legs over the side of the bed.  Stand up on the earth now, little saplings! she calls to them in her mind. Summon your strength up from your roots!

            The bed is just high enough that, when Lina lowered her legs, the soles of her feet come to rest against the floorboards. For the first time in four years, she feels the wood beneath her feet, really feels it. Wood to wood, she thinks, as her newly-enlivened trunk-legs meet the pine planks beneath them.  The floor is cool to the touch of her soles, and as Lina slides her feet this way and that, she notices that the pine is smooth here, roughened there.  She stretches out her right foot and touches her big toe to the edge of the hooked rug that lies half a foot from the bed. She smiles at the sensation of the wool against her skin as she moves her toe back and forth.

            It is this smile that Ethel sees on her daughter’s face when she walks into Lina’s room, just as she has done every day for the past four years.  Seeing Lina perched on the edge of the bed, Ethel’s first impulse is to rush to take hold of her daughter’s shoulder, lest she topple right over and onto the floor. But then she remembers what Groening said the evening before: that they should treat her like the healthy person she is. So, she just stands in the doorway, overcome with emotion at the sight of her daughter gently stretching out her fully-functioning leg.

            “Mama, can you believe it?” Lina asks, rising to her feet.  Slowly, not out of fear or discomfort, but out of the desire to savor each step, Lina walks over to her mother. Tears come to Ethel’s eyes, just as they did when tiny, one-year-old Lina took her first steps, in this very room. Joy and wonder, and gratitude, too, flood her heart as she and Lina embrace.

*          *          *

            When Lina comes out into the kitchen for breakfast, the others, who are bustling around either finishing the cooking or helping to setting the table and lay out the food, all stop what they are doing at the sight of her.

            “Aunt Lina,” Ingrid asks her, “why are you wearing boys’ clothes?”

            Indeed, Lina is dressed in one of the pairs of Peter’s dark gray pants that she always used to wear to work in, before the accident.  They are a bit big on her, since she has grown thinner over the years of inactivity. The white work shirt – also Peter’s – hangs loosely, too, but this suits her somehow:  As she extends her arms out straight to the sides and slowly spins to display her new-old look, the extra fabric in the sleeves and torso billows (although there is no breeze inside the house), and, for a moment, she resembles nothing so much as a dove that is just taking flight. Or, perhaps, a swallow.

            Ingrid has come over to her now, cloth napkins still clutched in one hand, and is looking her up and down in surprise. Lina reaches out and playfully tugs the little girl’s braids.

            “These are my work clothes,” she tells her gaily. Ingrid looks to Kristina for explanation, but Kristina is just as shocked as her daughter. She, too, has never seen Lina dressed this way, and it feels a bit much to grasp: first the healing, and now the clothes. Marcus and Viktor, too, are taken aback. After all, it was only after they both went off to the war that Lina began donning her brother’s pants and shirts and working alongside Ulrich in the forest. And when they returned home in 1945, it was after her accident, and she was once again wearing skirts. For Ulrich, Renate, and Ethel, seeing Lina dressed this way is not so much a surprise, as a welcome flashback to the wartime days before the accident. Here’s the Lina we knew! Ulrich finds himself thinking. For Peter, too, Lina’s garb is not unfamiliar.  After being discharged from the army due to his leg wound, he had more than a year to observe how natural his sister looked as she moved about the homestead in his clothes. And not once did he object: Seeing her head off into the forest wearing in his pants and shirts helped him feel that in some small and symbolic way, he was still able to participate in those efforts, if only by contributing the clothing his sister inhabited with such ease.

            Ingrid reaches out and touches Lina’s pants, then looks at the men in the room to inspect what they’re wearing in a way she never thought to do before. Then she rises up on tiptoes and brings her mouth next to Lina’s ear.

            “Isn’t it harder when you have to go to the toilet?” she asks in her stage whisper, a serious expression on her face.

            Lina laughs and puts her arm around the girl’s shoulders. “Well, I would say it is not,” she replies. “Fewer layers of fabric to keep track of,” she whispers into Ingrid’s ears.  This is evidently all Ingrid needs to hear.

            “Mama,” she calls out to Kristina, “can I wear pants, too?”

            They all laugh, perhaps more loudly than the question really warrants, for everyone is grateful to have something else to discuss besides the revelations that came to light in Bremen the night before.

            “I don’t think these will fit you,” Lina tells Ingrid, as she takes a plate of fried eggs from her mother and sets it down on the table. “So, you’re out of luck, at least for now.”

            Over the coffee and rolls and jam and eggs, the family members pepper Lina with questions: How does she feel? Any pain? What did it feel like to wake up and realize that her legs really did work? And this from Viktor:

            “Are you really intending to go out into the forest with us today?”

            He looks at her with eyes red from lack of sleep, and his usual upright posture has shifted. His shoulders aren’t exactly slumping, but there is a kind of listlessness in his muscles – the exact opposite of the way Lina’s legs feel now. Did my healing somehow come at the expense of his vibrancy? Lina wonders as she looks at him.

            “Yes, I’d like to. Nothing too heavy,” she tells them all and sees that they are relieved to hear this.  “But I’ve spent so many years not being able to help, that I see no reason to sit here doing nothing.”

            “And who, exactly, will help me hang out the laundry, then?” Kristina asks, her hands on her hips, feigning insult, although, to tell the truth, she really will miss Lina’s company during the day. Will she still want to take our walk tonight? she wonders.

            “Heavens!” Lina tells says, happy to be made a fuss of in a light-hearted rather than pitying way. “We’ll hang it out after dinner, before I go back out, all right?”

            “Nonsense!” Ethel tells them both. “We don’t want to work her to death on her very first day, do we, Kristina? I know you can manage on your own.”

            Catching sight of her friend’s crestfallen face, Lina says, “And I’ll help you take it down after supper. How about that? I can reach the clothespins now!”

            Kristina, relieved, smiles. “Agreed!”

*          *          *

            After breakfast, Ingrid is off to school, Marcus to work in Varel.  Lina heads out into the forest with her father, grandfather, and Peter.  They are all carrying various saws and other implements – except for Lina, who has reluctantly agreed to take it a little easy this first morning.  They are still seeing me as weak! she thinks in consternation.  But they are her family, and she loves them, so she carries nothing.  As they reach the beginning of the path into the woods, Lina pauses.  The others, who are walking ahead of her, turn.

            “Are you all right?” Peter asks, a look of concern coming to his face.

            “Yes, yes, I’m fine!” she tells him with a bit of irritation.  “I’m just greeting the trees. You go on. I’ll catch up with you.”

            It is the first time she has entered the forest under her own power in more than four years. There is so much happiness in her heart, that tears come to her eyes.  She looks up at the crowns of the aspens and pines, sees them waving ever so slightly in the summer breeze. Hello, friends! she says to them in her mind, and takes the increased waving as their response.  May I come in here with you today? she asks.  A moment later, a burst of energy comes into her feet from the earth beneath her.  It rises up through her legs, through her entire body, into the very tips of her fingers, and the top of her head.  That is a ‘’Yes”! she knows. She notices that her body is tingling and vibrating in just the same way as it was the evening before, in the Birkners’ parlor. Ahhh, she thinks. The Heilstrom?  She gazes again at the tops of the trees, then runs her eyes downward along their trunks, to the point where their roots meet the ground, where myriad small and middling plants are also growing, where mushrooms have poked their caps up after the rain that fell a few days before. Nature is God, Lina thinks. Groening said that. She closes her eyes and opens her palms. The tingling in her body increases, and joy floods her heart.

            “Good morning, nature,” she says aloud, taking in the rich scents of the pines and the fungi. “Good morning, God.”

            Moving along the path, Lina feels a lightness in her body, as if she could just float up off the ground. But she wants to be on the earth, to notice how it feels and sounds different beneath her feet as she walks on bare dirt, a cushion of pine needles, or a layer of several years’ worth of dried and decaying leaves. Each of these has its own give and bounce as she moves across it, and its own scent, too. This really is the heavenly, just the way Grandpa always says.

            Before long, by listening for her relatives’ voices, she finds the spot where she needs to leave the path and head into the woods in a different direction, to where the men are preparing several large oaks for cutting.  Selected for their straightness and size, they will eventually be transformed into tables and sideboards for clients by Viktor and Peter.

            “How beautiful they are!” Lina exclaims, as she joins her relatives. She walks over to one of the trees and lays a hand on its bark.  “Do you ever think,” she says, without directing her question to one or the other of them, “what the oak must think at this moment? Here it’s been growing, growing, growing for all of these years, straight and strong and handsome, only to be cut down one day without warning. Taken away from its family, isolated, alone. And without knowing the reason for it.”

            Ulrich smiles wistfully and nods, and they all recognize that his words pertain not just to the trees, but to Lina, too, and to Viktor. Perhaps even to all of them. “I have thought about that many times, Lina,” he tells her. “Especially when I was young.  Sometimes it felt like a monstrous thing, to cut a tree off at the roots, to fell it in such a violent way, with such sharp tools, to tear it away from its loved ones. As if it is being punished for some grave mistake. Except that it has no idea what it’s done wrong, or why no one gave it the chance to do things differently.”

            “Yes, Grandpa, I was thinking that now,” Lina tells him. Tears come to her eyes.

            “But then,” Ulrich says, “I came to a different view of it.  Like Mr. Groening said last evening, nature is God.  And God has created this beauty in the forest.”

            “The heavenly,” Lina adds, and Ulrich nods.

            “And so, when we cut down a tree like this beauty here, and create a table or chairs or a wardrobe out of it, then we are taking God’s beauty and moving it into someone’s house.”

            “But not everyone approaches the trees and the table-making the way you do, Ulrich,” Viktor interjects. “Plenty of woodworkers – I’ve worked with them! – see the wood just as a product to be shaped according to their idea. They don’t see their task as working with what’s divine in the wood to create something that’s in a different shape, but still divine.”

            “And some trees are just cut down for firewood,” Peter adds, thoughtfully. “Because they’re deformed, or damaged in some way, and nothing divine seems to come from them.”

            “No, that’s true,” Ulrich agrees, reaching out to touch the tree, too. “What both of you said. But the damaged tree… it still can give warmth.”

            Lina jumps in. “And if it can do that – provide warmth – then there still must be some bit of the divine in it, don’t you think? To keep people from freezing to death, to allow them to cook their food. That’s an act of kindness, too, isn’t it?”

            They all nod. And Viktor looks intently at his daughter’s face. He feels that she’s speaking to him, and about him, even if it is in a very indirect way. He wants to believe that this is the case.

            “I think it is an act of kindness,” Ulrich offers, nodding.

            “So, however we use the trees, then,” Peter adds slowly, “they’re all ways of allowing the trees to be of service in one way or another.”

            Here Lina thinks of the picnic they had out here in the woods the week before. She recalls the insight she gained then: that her accident had to happen, so that the whole family could come together in love. So, she thinks to herself, even those bone-breaking rounds of firewood were able to serve us all in a good way, and help us.

            “I reckon you’re right,” Ulrich told his grandson. “Even so, there’s something about transforming the tree’s wood into an object of beauty, a piece that preserves the divine … It takes a rare ability to be able to do that. And you,” he says, waving a hand in Viktor’s direction, “are able to do that. I see that especially in your carving.”

            Viktor, who is standing, axe in hand, glances at his father-in-law with gratitude. There is so much history between the two of them, both easy and trying… After the previous night, Viktor is thankful that Ulrich still has a good word for him.

            “But if I am able to do that, then I learned it from you,” Viktor replies.  “Before I met your grandfather,” he tells Peter and Lina, “I was one of those ‘other woodworkers’ myself. I couldn’t sense the heavenly in the wood. Probably because I never spent time in the forest before I came here.”

            Ulrich shrugs. “You can’t be faulted for that,” he tells Viktor. “Generations of our family have worked in this forest and lived alongside it. We came to feel its power as a matter of course.”

            “But you never took it for granted, Grandpa,” Lina says.

            “That’s true.  My father, and my grandfather, Wolf, they brought me into this forest from the time I was born – just the way your father did with you.” He gestures to Peter and Lina. “I felt God here before I could speak and put a name to what I felt. But I knew that here is where I would find it. And that I didn’t feel this same divinity when I was in town. Or on other folks’ homesteads.  That’s how I came to understand how special this forest is. How powerful.”

            Lina sighs and runs her fingers over the oak’s bumpy trunk.  “I never realized what the forest gives us until I couldn’t be out here in it every day.  In those early days, I thought I’d die from not being in with the trees.”

            Peter steps over and hugs her. “And now you’re back with them. With us and them.”

            Lina nods.

            Viktor looks from one to the other of them, and feels a mixture of love for them and shame in regard to himself. On the one hand, if Bruno Groening is to believed, he has made things right – with God. But then there is his family. Although no one has said anything yet, he is certain that they are all looking at him differently now. Even Ethel didn’t raise the question last night when they went to bed. She looked to him like she was in a daze, and she went to bed without a word. How to make things right with all of them? The answer to this question still eludes him.

            “This forest saved my life,” he says, his voice catching. He clears his throat and looks down at the axe.

            “It did?” Peter asks quietly.  “How?”

            “As I told your mother many, many years ago – in fact it was at supper that day with your Uncle Hans and Uncle Ewald, Grandma’s brother, the day when we all talked about God.”

            “And it was after that that Uncle Hans left?” Peter asks.

            Viktor nods. “Anyway, that day, I told everyone that I didn’t believe in God before I came into this forest, before I worked with your grandfather here, amongst the trees.”

            “But how did it save your life, Papa?” Lina asks.

            Viktor gazes at her gray eyes that matches Ulrich’s, then over at Peter, whose sandy hair came from him, and his mother’s hazel eyes.  Can they forgive me? God, please help me!

            “You are very lucky,” he says to the two of them, “to have grown up here, with this family – here I’m leaving myself out – and in these woods, where you could be with God.  I didn’t have that when I was growing up. I didn’t know God. Saw no evidence whatsoever that He exists. But here –” Viktor raises his right arm and makes a large arc with it, indicating everything around them. “Here I came to know that God does exist. And that saved me. Gave me hope – for myself, for our family.”

            Feeling he might have said too much, he looks down.

            All of them realize that he is speaking now about much more than his early years on their homestead. They each, like Viktor himself, feel a mix of emotions.  Here is this man they have loved – Peter and Lina, for all their lives, and Ulrich, for more than two and a half decades – and who has also committed acts that turn their stomachs.  His two children want to run to him and cry in his arms, beg him to explain it all to them, so that they can forgive him as God apparently has done. At the same time, they want to run from him.  This new side of him that’s been revealed terrifies and repulses them. They don’t know how to incorporate it into their vision of their father. 

            Certainly, they have seen him angry and, especially with Marcus, they have seen him act harshly. But somehow they have been able to ignore that aspect of his personality – perhaps because neither of them ever had to experience his harshness themselves. And in fact, they saw him as their protector: He was the one who kept them safe from Marcus. Or, at least, Lina thinks, He kept mesafe from Marcus. She remembers now what Peter told her about Marcus’ bullying, about how he knew he couldn’t go to their parents, that Marcus would only grow more brutal if he did.  So, did he nottake care of us after all? Lina wonders. 

            Peter, looking now at Viktor, realizes how torn up his father is feeling. The thought that perhaps their father did not care for them as he should have done – this is not a new thought for Peter. But he, like Lina, has long ago found a way in his own mind and heart to focus more on the love and care their father has shown them in the course of their lives, than on what he did not do for them. At this moment, too, Peter wants very badly to continue to love his father, to see the good in him.  But how? Peter asks himself. Can there be an explanation for what he did? An explanation that will make it all right? Or that will at least allow them to return to seeing him without the shadow of what Groening revealed.

            Then a memory comes into his mind. He sees a field on the Eastern Front, an operation that took place just a few days before the one in which he was wounded. His group of ten soldiers is moving through a forest that stands alongside what was once a field where crops of some sort were growing. Wheat, maybe? There have been reports of an enemy partisan force here, and Peter and his fellow soldiers are searching for them. They move more deeply into the woods, and then, suddenly, the partisans are upon them. Peter’s friend, Rolf, is shot at close range. Peter sees the partisan who made the shot, but this partisan has not seen him. The rest Peter remembers in clear detail, but also as if through a haze: pulling his knife from its sheath, coming up behind the partisan, grabbing him around the neck, and plunging the knife deep into the man’s back at the level of his heart.  To this day, Peter cannot make sense of how he could bring himself to kill another human being.  Of course, he tells himself, there may have been other times when he killed enemy soldiers at longer range, when shooting into a line.  Until that moment – when it is your knife drawing blood from another man’s back – it is easy to tell yourself you haven’t caused anyone’s death.

            As this memory fades, Peter looks once more at his father. What brought Papa to give that order? Viktor’s face provides no answer, and Peter is left – as are they all – to make his own choice: to find space in his heart to continue loving this man, despite the truths they now know, or to allow the horror he feels to take the upper hand.

            Ulrich, in a moment of outspokenness that surprises them all, listens to what Viktor has said and then asks, “And was it when you left the forest that you forgot that God exists?”

            A slight frown comes to Viktor’s face. “What do you mean, exactly?”

            Ulrich takes in a deep breath, and then lets it out. “When you went to Schweiburg,” he begins, “when you were away from this forest, away from the divine – was that how all those awful ideas were able to get in?”

            It is such a blunt question, and they are all taken aback that Ulrich has spoken without mincing any words whatsoever. And yet, they also notice, there is no anger in his eyes. He, too, seems to be wanting to find a way to hold onto the good that has existed between himself and Viktor, while explaining away the horrific.  Ulrich studies his son-in-law, who has, over these decades, felt like more of a son to him than his blood son, Hans. He has almost always seen Viktor as the human equivalent of the great oaks they are preparing to cut today: strong, straight, even in grain, with a bark impenetrable to parasites or nature’s calamities, its shade sheltering the small plants on the forest floor, so that they might flourish.

            But, what if they were to cut one of these oaks and, upon studying its core, find there a dark rot spreading throughout its center, from crown to roots?  Could part of the wood be salvaged? Could something beautiful still be created from the divine wood? Or does the rot at the center negate the divinity of the entire trunk and force it to be relegated for use as mere firewood – to burn down to ashes, leaving no trace of the grand beauty and power the forester mistakenly felt the tree possessed?  Even if, in the process, it provides crucial warmth to a human family inside, say, a long home? This is what Ulrich is wondering as he asks his question of Viktor.

            “Yes, Ulrich,” Viktor says finally, while looking also at Peter and Lina. “Yes, I believe that is what happened.  Here I was protected, safe, for the first time in my life.  And when I left this heavenly haven – then I lost the protection. I didn’t know how to carry it with me when I went out there.” He searches their eyes for clues to what they are thinking and feeling, and his sharp intuition picks up the absolute truth: They just do not know, yet, what they think. But Ulrich does speak again.

            “And you never regained that protection, not even after you and Ethel came back from Schweiburg. I don’t think you did, anyway. Your carving has not been the same since then.”

            This makes Viktor so sad he could cry, because he knows it is true. It is only in the past few weeks that he has once again fully felt the connection to the divinity of the forest, to God.  Did I get it all back too late? He nods, accepting Ulrich’s assessment.

            “And then I went to the war,” he says quietly.  “Without that protection. Without God.”

            “In that state,” Ulrich says softly, “anything can happen. And it does.”

*          *          *

            Two hours pass, and the four of them stop their work to have a snack of bread and cheese.

            “Lina,” Peter says, “let’s go to the treehouse and eat this there.”

            Lina is on her feet in a moment, for she has been having the same thoughts. Off the two of them go, heading deeper into the woods, hand in hand.

            “Reminds you of when they were tots, doesn’t it?”  Ulrich asks.

            Viktor nods, his heart aching with both love and regret as he watches them.

            Ulrich and Viktor are sitting, side by side, on the earth, atop the dry and decaying leaves, and amongst the small plants that have pushed their way up through them to expose their green shoots to the filtered sun and air. For the first few bites of Ethel’s sourdough bread and cheese, neither man speaks. Ulrich, on Viktor’s right, is sitting cross-legged, his long, branch-like arms resting awkwardly atop his knees, one hand holding a hunk of cheese, the other, bread. Viktor’s legs are straight out, the cloth that holds the food spread out atop his thighs, a flask of water leaning against his hip. He doesn’t have much of a stomach for the food. Then he hears Ulrich clear his throat.

            “Son,” he begins, “we none of us were prepared for what Mr. Groening said last night.”

            Viktor, who continues to look ahead of him, nods.  “I know I wasn’t.”

            “And you already knew all of what he said.” Ulrich lifts his left hand and takes a bite of the sourdough, chews it.  “Imagine,” he says, and Viktor can hear that he still has a small piece of the bread in his mouth, “what a shock it was for all of us to hear that, when we had no idea.”

            Viktor is looking at the piece of cheese he is holding, remembering his first days with the Gassmanns, and how he’d complimented Ethel’s cheesemaking. He chokes down a piece of cheese now, then turns to Ulrich and forces himself to look into the older man’s gray eyes. Ulrich’s sandy-colored hair, which has grown gray to match his eyes, was once so much the color of Viktor’s, although curlier, that the two of them really did resemble father and son. Viktor recalls how happy he was, the first time Ulrich called him “Son”. That was all he had wanted then – along with marrying Ethel: to be like a son to this man who taught him so much about the forest, forestry, God, and living. He never looked up to his own father – dead for thirty-two years now – the way he does to Ulrich. But now, he fears he has destroyed this relationship, too. Why did I tell Groening I wanted to make things right? Why didn’t I just stay silent? He tries to call back the memory of the lightness and relief he experienced the night before in the Birkners’ living room, the joy of those moments when he sensed God looking at him through Groening’s eyes and knew for certain that God had forgiven him. He can no longer feel what he sensed then. Even if I could still feel it, he asks himself, what good would it do me? Receiving God’s forgiveness is one thing. But gaining his family’s, which is what he is most wishing for now, is, he sees clearly, an entirely different matter.

            “But you had some idea, didn’t you?” he asks Ulrich.

            The older man shrugs. “Well, not in the particulars,” he replies. “But I felt it in your voice, saw it in the way you moved after you came back from Schweiburg.”

            “And in the way my carving changed.”

            Ulrich nods, chewing a bite of cheese.

            “You didn’t need to know the details to know something was wrong?” Viktor asks.

            Ulrich nods again. “You came here unsettled in ’21, Viktor. You got settled, through the grace of God –“

            “And through this family,” Viktor tells him, the emotion audible in his voice.

            Ulrich waves the hand that holds the bread. “It’s all the same, Viktor – the heavenly. Whether it flows through the trees, or these young plants here, or Renate and Ethel and me, or you. I’m not sure you ever realized that. Back then, anyway. Keep yourself in the flow of that heavenly, and you’ve got a fighting chance of coming out alive. Of coming out a human being.”

            Now Viktor folds the edges of the cloth over the remaining food and offers it to Ulrich, who shakes his head. So he lays it gently on the ground beside him.

            “You’re right, Ulrich,” he says. “About all of it. I can see it now. You’re right – I didn’t realize it then.”

            “And I didn’t care to learn any details,” Ulrich tells him. “I chose not ignore the signs. I regret that now. Perhaps I could have helped you somehow if I’d had the courage to talk to you about it.”

            Viktor doesn’t respond to this confession. But then, sensing that Ulrich wants to help him now, he goes on. “Last night, at the Birkners’, after it all came out, I looked into Groening’s eyes.  I felt God then, Ulrich.”

            “In Groening?”

            “I wouldn’t put it that way, exactly.  I’d say more that it was … as if, in his eyes, a door opened up, so that I could see God.”

            “And what did you see?” Ulrich asks, taking the last bite of cheese into his mouth.

            “I can’t say I saw anything,” Viktor tells him. “But I felt God there, and such joy and gratitude. And I knew that what Groening had told me was true – about God forgiving me.”

            “I felt it, too,” Ulrich tells him simply.

            “Felt what?” Viktor turns so that he is sitting cross-legged, facing his father-in-law.

            “That God has forgiven you,” Ulrich replies.  “And that God was looking out at each of us – through that door in Groening’s eyes, if you want to put it that way.”

            “And what did you see there?” Viktor asks, feeling now, for the first time since the evening before, the strong flow of the heavenly – the Heilstrom – in his body.

            “Nothing like what you did,” Ulrich tells him, a bit of a smile coming to his lips. “But I had a knowing, too, through a kind of inner hearing. Sort of the way I hear the trees telling me what they tell me.”

            Viktor nods. “What did you hear?”

            “That God gave Groening the message that you were forgiven as a challenge to the rest of us.”

            “What do you mean? What kind of challenge?”

            “What I heard was, ‘And you? Can you also forgive him?’”

            Looking into his father-in-law’s eyes, Viktor wonders what is behind them, in his mind, and in his heart. “And what did you answer?” he asks, his throat tight.

            Ulrich shakes his head. “I didn’t have an answer then,” he replies, reaching out and laying a hand on Viktor’s shoulder. “Still don’t.” Seeing Viktor close his eyes, he goes on. “I’m not a saint, Son. No one in this family is.  We all love you, but something like this… it’s not easy to forgive.  Or even to make sense of.  You went to the Birkners’ one person and came back somebody different. So did we. That’s how it seems to me. To all of us, I’d wager.”

            Viktor nods.

            “Like our Lina, there,” Ulrich went on, gesturing in the direction of the treehouse. “Sure, she looks different today, in Peter’s clothes again. But it’s not just the clothes. The second she got out of that chair, she was a different person than the second before. That’ll take us some getting used to, too. We all need some time.”

            “But can you all forgive me?” Viktor asks, although, even as he is posing it, he realizes how ridiculous his question is.

            “That depends on you – and on us,” Ulrich tells him. “If we can see you as the you we’ve always loved, then, yes, I think we can.”

            Viktor knows that Ulrich and Renate and Ethel all had the chance to see him when he was this man Ulrich is referring to.  But what about Lina? And Marcus and Peter, for that matter? Did they even know me before I changed?

            “But how do I make you see me that way?” Viktor asks, looking deeply into Ulrich’s eyes, seeking an answer there, seeking the older man’s guidance.

            “You can’t make us,” Ulrich says. “What we all need here is the heavenly, to not be away from it for a moment, if we can manage that. You’ve got that thingy Groening gave you, right?”

            Viktor nods and digs the tin foil ball out of his pocket. He passes it over to Ulrich, who wraps his fingers around it, closes his eyes, and sits silently with it for nearly a minute. Finally, he holds it out for Viktor to take back.

            “I don’t know how he got the power of God into it,” he says then, “but it’s there.  Keep it with you, like Groening said. I think it’s your lifeline to the heavenly, to the Heilstrom, if you want to call it that. So that you can be that man we remember. The one I know you want to be again.”

            “But what about the rest of you?” Viktor asks.

            “We’ve got our own connection to the heavenly, here on the homestead. We need to come to terms with ourselves, too”

            “But Ulrich,” Viktor persists, “will that connection be enough?

            “I can’t say. Marcus was right, you know. We do all have our free will. But unlike Marcus, I believe God can help us while we’re deciding how to use our free will.”

            “How? How does He help?”

            Ulrich is folding up his own square of fabric now. “I can’t say that for sure, either, Son.” He slides the cloth bundle into his shirt pocket. “But I suspect it’s through the heavenly Heilstrom. Viktor, if you and I were able to feel God last night when we were awash in it, and I know we feel it out here, too, and Lina got healed from being in it… Then I think anything can turn around to the good if we’re in it.”

            Viktor ponders this for a bit, then shares his thoughts. “It’s just as you said about the protection earlier.  The heavenly protects us. And when I left the homestead, I left the protection, and then I fell in with people I shouldn’t have.”

            Ulrich nods.

            “But the heavenly – or the Heilstrom, to use Groening’s word – it doesn’t just protect us. Is that what you’re saying? That it helps us? Heals us?”

            “That seems right to me,” Ulrich says. “I never thought of it in those terms, but that must be right.  I say that because I experienced it myself last night.”

            “Experienced what?”

            “Healing.” Now Ulrich looks straight ahead, out into the forest.

            “But you weren’t hurt, were you?” Viktor asks, scanning the other mans’ body for signs of an ailment.

            “Not physically, no,” Ulrich tells him.  “But inside, yes. In my heart.” He lets out a long sigh before continuing. “My mother left us when I was a tiny baby,” he says.  “I never knew her. But I missed her. Cried for months, my father told me once, when I was grown. And later on, I came to hate her for leaving us.”

            “Why did she leave?” Viktor asks, but Ulrich waves him off.

            “Not important,” he says. “What is important, is that the first time we went to Groening, we were sitting there, and all of a sudden, my mother’s face came into my mind.  I never saw her, mind you – or not so as I remember the way she looked – but I recognized her.  And I felt very warmly toward her.  For the first time in my life.” Ulrich reaches down and gently moves some dead leaves away from some new green plant leaves that are trying to make their way to the light. “Then last night,” Ulrich tells Viktor, “while Groening was talking to Kristina, I saw Mama’s face again. And in that moment, something shifted inside me, in my heart, like a clasp opening up and two cupboard doors spreading apart and letting love out.” He shows this motion with his hands. “I saw my mother – her whole body now – and she stretched out her arms to me. She embraced me, and I embraced her. I told her I forgave her for leaving us.  And I knew in my heart that it was true.”

            “Is such a thing possible?” Viktor asks. “To see someone that way, someone who’s dead?” He was thinking of Wolf again. He felt sure now that Ulrich must have seen him sometimes, too.

            “I don’t know,” Ulrich tells him. Then he smiles. “But whether it’s possible or not, I did! I saw her.  Maybe it’s not so different from your intuition, the way you pick things up, Viktor.”

            “You could be right,” Viktor says, “and it’s just a different kind of knowing.”

            “One that comes about when we’re in the heavenly. That’s what I think.”

            Viktor nods, and before him appears Wolf’s spirit. He’s also sitting amongst the leaves, nodding.  

            Ulrich points a finger in Viktor’s direction. “That’s why I said what I did about things turning around when we’re in the Heilstrom. Because of last night. That’s how I know it can happen. Because I experienced it myself.”

            “If we want to forgive, God will help us. Is that what you think goes on?” Viktor asks.

            Ulrich nods. Then he gets to his feet and stretches his arms up overhead and then straight out to the sides.

            “I do,” he tells his son-in-law.

            “But did you want to forgive your mother?”

            This gives Ulrich pause.  “You know, I never consciously asked God to help me forgive her.  But in my heart, I wanted to. I can see that now. Maybe that’s all it takes – to want it in the deepest part of your heart.”

            Viktor brightens at this. “And doesn’t the deepest part of everyone’s heart want to forgive?”

            Ulrich can tell where Viktor’s going with this thought.    

            “I can’t say, Son.  All I know is, as far as this family and forgiveness is concerned, it’s between each of us and God now.”

*          *          *

            “To think that less than a week ago, I never could have gotten up here!” Lina exclaims. She and Peter are sitting in the treehouse, their bread and cheese bundles open on their laps, looking out through the woven walls.

            “I wouldn’t have been able to do that two weeks ago, either,” Peter replies, speaking around the chunk of bread in his mouth. 

            Lina nods. “It didn’t hurt at all, climbing up here,” she tells her brother.  “After four years in that awful chair, how is it possible that my muscles work so well? That I don’t feel weak?”

            “I don’t know. Doesn’t make sense to me, either.  I feel lighter in my steps than I ever have, even before the war.”

            Lina reaches over and takes his hand. Her face is beaming. “It really is a miracle, isn’t it? For both of us!”

             “Oh, yes, a genuine miracle.” Peter says, with a nod.  “Isn’t there something odd about it – that the two of us were healed within a week of each other?”

            “Odd, why?” Lina is now breaking off little bits of her mother’s farmhouse cheddar and savoring the flavor. “You know,” she says, before Peter can answer, “I think Mama’s cheese tastes better to me now than it has for the past four years. Now, that’s strange!”

            Peter laughs.  “Yes. The whole forest looks brighter to me today, Lina. The greens look more vibrant. That’s strange, too!”

            “It is! But what about our healings?” Lina prompts him.

            “Right. Remember last week, when we were here – or, rather, down there – talking, and you said you felt responsible for me being wounded in the war? And you told me that vision you had at the Birkners’ place?”

            “Yes.” Lina is testing the bread now, to see whether it, too, tastes better than usual. It does.

            “Well, I’ve been wondering why in the world you would have done that. Caused the accident, I mean.”

            “And have you figured anything out?”

            Peter shrugs. “Not figured out, exactly.  But the whole past week, after my leg got healed, I was feeling that it wasn’t fair for my leg to be healed while you were still in the wheelchair.”

            “Peter,” Lina begins, but he holds up his hand.

            “Listen.  What I mean is, that it became so clear to me that you and I are more like twins than just brother and sister.”

            “Yes, I feel that, too. That’s nothing new, though, Peter. We’ve talked about it before.”

            “I know, I know. But because we are so close – and who knows why that is, but it’s true – maybe because of that, we can’t bear to be unlike each other.”

            Lina frowns and puts down the piece of bread.  “I don’t quite get it.”

            He sits up straighter and looks at her with shining eyes. He reaches out and touches her shirt.

            “I go off to war, and you start wearing my clothes and working in the forest with Grandpa.”

            “Well, I couldn’t very well wear my dirndl, could I?” Lina asks him with a laugh.

            “Hear me out, Sis,” Peter tells her. “You put on my clothes and learn my job.  I come back from the war and can’t do the forestry work anymore, so you keep it up for me. But, as you told me yourself, you’re feeling guilty that I got wounded and can’t use my leg properly.  And then…” He pauses and looks her straight in the eye. “Then, you’re feeling it’s your fault, and so, you cause an accident that makes it so that you can’t work in the forest or use your legs, either.”

            Lina’s jaw drops. “Wait, Peter! What are you saying?”

            “And next,” he goes on, “within a week of my leg being healed, you are miraculously healed, too.”

            “Peter, I don’t understand what you’re saying,” she tells him, shaking her head.

            “I’m not sure I do, either. But what if you and I are so connected – in our souls, if that makes any sense, or if it’s even possible – that we are constantly striving to reflect each other? We’ve known all our lives that we were so alike in our personalities.  Couldn’t that happen in our souls, too?”

            Lina frowns, but simply in confusion, not annoyance.  “Peter, for the life of me, I have no idea!”

            “But doesn’t it make an odd kind of sense?”

            Lina applies herself to the bread and cheese again, as she mulls this over.  Then, finally, she says, “As if we’re playing a constant game of copycat.”

            “Trying to keep up with each other, to be always in the same spot.”

            “In our bodies and in our souls,” Lina adds, and Peter nods.

            As they both ponder this, they finish their snacks and fold up their cloths. Lina looks at her own clothes and her brother’s.

            “Whyever this is all happening,” she tells him with a smile, “it’s convenient that I can wear your clothes. As for the rest of it, I don’t know what to think.”

            “Me, neither,” Peter admits. “But can we just tell our own souls and each other’s, that they can stop this game now?” A smile comes to his face.

            “Agreed!” Lina says. “Hear that, souls?” she calls out, lifting her head to look up high above her.  “Everything’s in order now. Can we leave it at that?”

            Peter laughs and reaches over to hug his sister. 

            “Lina, I’m so glad you’re well now.  You have no idea.”

            “I think I do. It has to be the same joy I feel that you’re well, too.”

            “And we had both better get back to Papa and Grandpa before they fine us a day’s wages!”

            Indeed, as they are lowering themselves down the ladder, they catch sight of Viktor, who is making his way through the woods toward him. Today he does not look as carefree as the last time, when the three of them shared the heartfelt chat beneath this old beech. Looking at him now, Peter understands why their father was reluctant to tell them about how the family came to live in Schweiburg for several years. “A story for another day. A sad story.” That’s what he said, Peter recalls.

            Viktor reaches the bottom of the old beech and, as he gazes up at his son and daughter, he is overcome with joy at the miracle of their healings.

            “Just look at the two of you!” he calls out tenderly. “Did you both really climb up there?”

            “We did!” Lina tells him, with a broad smile, and he sees the brightness in her eyes. He also notices another, more somber, emotion fleet across her face. He sees it in Peter’s expression, too, along with a joy in his eyes that matches that in his sister’s. Please, dear God, Viktor begs inwardly. Please help them forgive me!

            Once Lina and Peter have fully descended and are back on the ground once more, Viktor stands facing them. Then he walks up and wraps his arms around the two of them together. There is an awkwardness in this embrace that they all feel, as Viktor tightens his grip and pulls them to him, but then each of them finds a way to let go of this and lean toward each other. Viktor says nothing in words, but Lina and Peter sense all that his heart is expressing. After a moment, brother and sister both reach one arm around their father’s back. As he fights the tears that rush to his eyes as he feels their hearts’ complex messages, Peter’s hand meets Lina’s, and they lace their fingers together, and rest their intertwined hands against Viktor’s back.

*          *          *

            While at work in Varel that day, Marcus manages to keep at bay all the thoughts about his father that keep trying to invade his mind.  He is busy enough with his work that, in fact, he doesn’t have much time for reflection.  But by the time his coworker drops him off at the Gassmann-Bunke homestead, he notices that the thoughts are swirling in his brain.  He turns his focus to the brief exchange he had with Groening the evening before.

            “Mr. Groening, about the Heilstrom…”

            “Yes, Mr. Bunke?” Groening gazes at Marcus, giving him his full attention.

            “You said that it comes from God.”

            “That’s right,” Groening replies. He is looking intently into Marcus’ eyes.

            “But, my whole life,” Marcus tells him, slowly, cautiously, “I’ve felt a strong power deep inside me, here.” He lays a hand on his abdomen. “I’ve always felt it. But I don’t think it’s from God.” He watches Groening’s face for signs of disapproval, but sees none. “I think it’s my power. And when I’m trying to decide something, I go to that spot with my mind. And then I know what to do.”

            “Even though you don’t always do what the voice there tells you, do you?”

            Marcus holds Groening’s gaze and shakes his head. “That’s true. But what I’m wondering is this: Is it right to trust that power, to let it guide my decisions? Even though I don’t think of it as coming from God? I mean… maybe I’m wrong, but it feels like it’s my power.” He pauses. “And God did give us free will, didn’t He?” He looks intently at Groening now, happy to have given voice to all of these questions.

            Groening tips his head thoughtfully to one side, then nods, a small smile coming to his face. He places a hand on Marcus’ shoulder. “We do all have this power you speak of, Mr. Bunke, inside us. And you do have the free will to choose what to do.”

            Marcus, overjoyed, feels like he’s grown taller.

            “If we use this power carefully, and with love, then all is possible,” Groening continues. But then he wags a finger at Marcus, and his smile grows less broad.

            “Although it can be your guiding compass, you must take great care to seek its guidance properly,” Groening says. “Find calm within you, and only then listen to the voice that speaks with the power. This is very important. The other side – the evil – will try to masquerade as the good, Mr. Bunke, and trick you into hurting others. When angry thoughts come to you, listen carefully. Ask yourself, ‘Who am I hearing? The good power? Or the evil?’ That is your task now. Be on guard!”

            Then Groening reaches out and places a small, tin foil ball into Marcus’ hand.

            “Keep this with you. It will help you hear the voice of the good power inside you. It will help you recognize the evil and avoid its trap. Don’t engage with the evil!”

            Marcus nods solemnly.

            “And remember, Mr. Bunke. Let us not despise anybody. Let us absorb brotherly love, and be good to one another.”

            “Yes, Mr. Groening. Yes,” Marcus replies, nodding again.

            Running through this conversation in his mind now, as he nears the house, Marcus resolves to heed Groening’s advice – and his warnings. He knows that the evening meal with his family will be a great test for him.

*          *          *

            As the family sits down to supper, Ulrich jokingly laments the fact that Lina has been too busy out in the forest to read the newspaper and give them her usual report. 

            “On the other hand,” he says, “she has become reacquainted with some of her favorite trees.”

            “And the treehouse,” Peter adds.

            “She climbed the ladder herself,” Viktor tells them, smiling at Lina.  “So did Peter,” he says. He turns to look at his younger son. In his eyes is an expression of both pride and gratitude, as well as an indication of some greater closeness between the two of them. 

            Marcus sees this in Viktor’s gaze and cannot understand it – especially now, given what Groening revealed about their father the evening before. As he notices what passes between Viktor and Peter, Marcus also detects a bitter taste in his mouth, and an upwelling of anger in his chest.  Don’t they see right through him? This thought comes to him, and he wonders whether it is from his own inner power, or from the evil that Groening warned him against. He also has a fleeting thought: Let it go! He recognizes this as the voice of his inner power, and resolves to do what Groening told him: to heed it. So, he composes himself, wraps his hand around the tinfoil ball in his pocket, and decides to broach the subject that is on his mind.

            “So,” he begins. “About my job.” 

            Viktor shifts his gaze from Peter to Marcus, and Marcus immediately senses that his father is now on his guard. Strangely, though, Marcus does not detect any of the aggression he has felt coming from his father his whole life.  It is an entirely different complex of emotions emanating from the man now, although Marcus can’t yet decipher it. But what he does understand, without rationally examining it, is that things have shifted, and that he suddenly has the upper hand in the relationship. This comes as a shock to him, and the voice inside him says, “Go easy”.

            “Now that Lina is healed,” Marcus continues calmly, gesturing with his right hand at his sister, who is sitting next to him, “I will be staying at my job in Varel. I’ll tell Mr. Weiss tomorrow.”

            Ethel opens her mouth and looks from Marcus to Viktor, who makes no response. But this is not the Viktor of old, who consciously bided his time by feigning indifference and leaving his interlocutor to anxiously await his response. This time, he is simply not engaging with Marcus.

            “Did you hear me?” Marcus asks, raising his voice slightly. The tiny voice inside urges him to stay calm, but Marcus is once again feeling angry. It’s as if all the anger that he’s pushed down over the years is now pressing back up, demanding to be expressed.

            “I heard,” Viktor says, but without meeting Marcus’ gaze.

            “And?” Marcus asks, grasping his napkin with his free hand.

            “That was our agreement,” Viktor tells his son flatly, finally looking across the table at him. 

            No one else at the table is even eating. They have all laid down their utensils. Renate and Ulrich catch each other’s gaze.

            “You don’t have anything else to say?” Marcus asks him, his tone suddenly simultaneously incredulous and biting.

            Viktor shakes his head.

            Marcus notices the contrast between his inner power’s voice and a voice that seems to be connected to the anger. “The bastard!”it is saying to him.

            Now the anger gains the upper hand within him, shouting down Marcus’ own inner voice that is urging calm, but unheard.

            Marcus rises from his chair so swiftly that it falls back onto the floor, making Ingrid jump. He throws his napkin onto the table, then leans forward and places both hands on the table – the tin foil ball abandoned in his pocket – until his face is a foot from his father’s.

            “I bet you don’t have anything to say about last night, either, do you?” he asks Viktor, his voice full of sarcasm.

            Now Ulrich stands up and reaches an arm out to his grandson.

            “Marcus, Son,” he begins, but Marcus cuts him off.

            He straightens up and points his left hand at his father.

            “This man,” Marcus says, struggling not to shout, “whom I do not even want to claim as my father… This man ordered two hundred prisoners put to death.” He pauses and takes in all of his family members in a glance around the table.  “Two hundred!” he repeats.  “Are you all content to sit here in the same room with him, as if nothing has happened? Content to talk about the forest and the treehouse and about how Lina’s wearing pants again?”  His mouth is open in disbelief.

            “Marcus!” Ethel cries, rising to her feet, too.

            Marcus turns to face her. “What, Mama?” he asks, his expression a mixture of sadness and anger and disgust. “Are you going to defend him? The way you did after Schweiburg?” He shakes his head and grimaces. “I told you back then that he was a monster –“

            “That’s enough!” Ulrich says, raising his voice with a tone more ominous than any of them has ever heard from him. But even this does not cut short Marcus’ outburst. There is no way he can hear the voice of his own inner power now, urging him not to speak words he might come to regret.

            “No, Grandpa, forgive me,” Marcus says, making a small, tight bow in Ulrich’s direction, “but it is not enough!” His voice rises to a shout.  “A man sits here who has done unspeakable things, and you all say nothing! How can that be?”

            Once again, he looks around the table.

            Peter spreads his hands open before him. “But what do you want us to do?”

            Marcus looks at him, wide-eyed. His breathing has calmed a bit now, and he is no longer shouting, but his tone is still one of contempt and amazement. “How about at least talking about what Groening said last night?”

            “I don’t see what good that would do,” Renate offers, after clearing her throat.

            Marcus shakes his head.  “What? Are you all planning to sit here at this table, day after day, and pretend nothing has happened? Ignore what he did? Can you really do that? I can’t.” He turns around, walks behind his overturned chair, picks it up, and sets it carefully back in its place. Then he waves a hand at no one and everyone at the same time.

            “Groening says God has forgiven him, and what? We have to forgive him, too? Do we?”  He waits, but, once more, no one answers him. “Is that God’s will?” he cries. “For us to forgive Viktor Bunke, the way He has?”

            Again, Marcus hears a faint voice inside him. Enough. Ignoring the admonition, he closes his fist and brings it against his own chest.

            “Well, not me, my dear family. I am about to prove to you what I said at this table back in – whenever that was…  God can wish all He wants, but He cannot make a plan for me and force me to follow it. No. I have my own free will, my own power, that comes from inside me, and I am choosing to use that free will of mine to not forgive that man.” He points at his father. Then he leans over, facing Viktor, and brings the palm of his hand slowly down onto the table.  “I will never forgive you,” he says quietly, but in a chilling voice. “Not for what you did to this family. Not for what you did to all those others.”

            At this point, Viktor silently rises from the table. Without saying anything, without meeting anyone’s gaze, he walks slowly to the door and steps out into the yard, carefully shutting the door behind him.

            “Yes, leave!” Marcus calls after him. Then, facing his mother and grandparents, he adds, “So? Will you let him come back this time, too?”

            Again, still, silence reigns.

*          *          *

            Viktor does not leave, at least not in the way Marcus is expecting him to do.  Once outside the family home, he picks up a wicker chair from the sitting area near the door and carries it to the far side of the yard, beyond the goat pen.  He spends the rest of the evening sitting there, observing everyone else’s activities.  Kristina and Lina come out and take the laundry down from the line. Then he watches as the two of them begin to walk down the drive for an evening walk. He sees Ingrid come running up behind them, pushing the empty wheelchair. She hops up and down and tugs at Lina’s sleeve, while Kristina looks a bit put out. Then, Viktor can see that Lina is laughing. In the next moment, Ingrid has taken a seat in the wheelchair, and Lina is beginning to run, pushing the chair ahead of her, while Kristina walks heavily along, making no effort to catch up, until they turn around and wave to her.

            Ulrich and Peter leave the house and go into the workshop. A light goes on. A few minutes later, Ulrich comes out again, but Peter remains inside. Most likely working on those plans again, Viktor concludes, as Ulrich goes back into the house without even a glance in his direction.  Do they even know I’m here?

            Kristina, Lina, and Ingrid return, looking more buoyant, with Ingrid pushing Kristina in the chair this time.  Ingrid and Kristina kiss Lina on the cheek and go into the workshop. The light in their room goes on. It’s Ingrid’s bedtime. Lina pauses as she turns toward the house, and gazes over at her father. Ah, so they do know I’m here. She looks as if she is considering coming over to him. But then she hesitates, choosing to wave to him instead, before reentering their home.

            After that, there is a lull in the yard. Viktor notes the voices of the goats as they communicate whatever they need to communicate to each other before settling down onto the hay in their shelter. He hears the evening bugs buzzing and calling to each other, too. Errant fireflies float in the open space of the yard, hoping to catch a mate’s eye.  The sun is down now, and the dusk is growing deeper when the light in Kristina’s room goes out and she and Marcus come together to sit on the bench just outside the workshop door. Of course, Viktor is too far from them to hear anything, but he can see from their gestures that his son is still agitated, and Kristina concerned.  Then he watches as they tenderly kiss goodnight. Kristina follows Marcus with her eyes as he crosses the yard, opens the kitchen screen door, and steps inside. A lamp is burning in there, too.  Kristina heads back into the workshop.  Peter must still be working…

            The yard is illuminated only by the moon and the stars now, and by the faint light from inside the workshop. Viktor looks toward the forest, studying the way the dark shapes of the trees rise against the sky like a mountain range. An unconquerable range, it seems to him now.  How to get over it? He is pondering this, and recalling Ulrich’s words from earlier in the day, when he hears the sound of the screen door slapping shut.  Someone is moving toward him through the near-total darkness.  It is Ethel, he realizes, with both joy and dread in his heart. She walks to the edge of the goat pen, and he sees that she is dumping a bowl of scraps in for them, for their breakfast.  Then she walks over to her husband. Standing in front of him, she pauses, then speaks to him. In her tone, he senses his own mix of emotions.

            “Are you going to come in?”

            He wishes he could see her eyes, but then, in the next moment, is glad he cannot. And that she cannot see his. “Should I?”

            Ethel extends her free hand to him.  “Come on, then,” she says quietly, her voice tinged with exhaustion, sadness, disappointment, and yet, a bit of tenderness, too. “Nothing’ll be helped by you sitting out here alone all night.”

            He takes her hand and holds it tightly as they walk across the yard and into the house.

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 32

Chapter 32

Bremen

            Thursday evening found the entire household once more headed to Bremen – as before, in their pickup truck and the Opel Kapitän, which Marcus had borrowed once more from Mr. Weiss. And this time, even Ingrid was with them. Having heard so much about Bruno Groening during the previous week, she’d begged so much to come along, that Marcus had finally said that she could come and see what all the fuss was about.

            When they arrived at the Birkners’ house, Silvia Birkner ushered them all the house.  She even leaned down and gave Ingrid a special welcome.

            “Hello, Ingrid!  So, you’ve come to see Mr. Groening, too? How wonderful!”  She looked up at Kristina and Marcus, then back to Ingrid. “You can sit right with your mama and papa. Mr. Groening is always happy to have children come along, too.” 

            Kristina blushed at Mrs. Birkner’s assumption that Marcus was Ingrid’s father, but said nothing.  Indeed, Ingrid did share both her mother’s and Marcus’ wavy hair, although hers was a few shades lighter than Marcus’ and much lighter than Kristina’s dark, dark tresses. And her blue eyes matched her future step-father’s almost exactly. Marcus, feeling pleased by their hostess’ assumptions, thanked her, and they all filed into the parlor.

            Ulrich rolled Lina’s wheelchair into the spot at the end of the front row which Mrs. Birkner had already cleared for her, then sat down next to her with Renate. In the second row, Marcus took a seat on the end this time. Then came Kristina and Ingrid, who was sandwiched between her mother and Ethel. Viktor was next in the row, and finally Peter.  As Peter walked easily down the row of chairs to his seat, he saw that Mr. Handler was already there, in the chair in front of him, just where he’d sat the week before.  After getting settled, Peter leaned forward and tapped Mr. Handler lightly on the shoulder. When the latter turned, Peter told him that he, too, had been healed of a lame and injured leg.  Handler jumped up and held out his hand warmly to Peter.

            “Why, that’s just wonderful!” he cried, pumping Peter’s hand up and down in excitement. “I hear that this happens often with Mr. Groening – kind of a chain reaction of healing.  One person gets their hearing back, say, and then suddenly someone else in the room can hear, too, after twenty years of deafness.”

            Peter went on to tell Handler all about how he’d realized his leg was healed, about revealing it to the family at breakfast, about how he’d hopped around the kitchen, and how Ingrid – he pointed her out to Handler, had asked if the two of them could hop together.  Handler and Peter ended up dissolved in quiet laughter. No one in the room seemed to mind, or find the laughter inappropriate, especially since most of them had been present the week before and remembered Handler’s healing and Peter limping.  People began turning to each other with whispers of “the healing that young man there had after he left last time”.

            Ingrid was taking in the people in the room and also inspecting the décor. She peppered Kristina with questions: “Who painted those pictures of the forest and the lake?” “Who are the people in those photos on the mantel?” “Can I go up and look at them?” “When will Mr. Groening get here?” “When will Lina get out of her chair?”

            As Kristina fended off these inquiries as quietly as she could, she noticed that she was already feeling the same tingling that had flowed throughout her body the last time. To her dismay, she also began to notice a vague unease in the pit of her stomach.  A bit of fear. But why? she asked herself.   She turned to her right, to take Marcus’ hand, although whether out of anxiety or affection, she wasn’t sure. But as she did, she caught sight of the woman who had sat behind her the week before, the one who had come in doubled over in pain, and left fully upright and happy.  The woman recognized Kristina, too.

            “Hello, dear,” she said, stretching out her hand.  She looked at least ten years younger, now that pain was no long contorting her face. 

            “You look well,” Kristina told her.

            She nodded. “I am well. As you see, I don’t have to lean on my grandson at all anymore!”

             “Was it true what Mr. Groening said to you?” Kirstina asked. “That you might have those pains again?”

            “Yes, yes, that did happen. The night we were here, after we got back home, my stomach hurt so much that I was so afraid! But in the morning, I felt fine again.”

            “And did you go to the doctor?”

            “I did!” the woman told her, beaming. Then she leaned over across Marcus, so that she could grab Kristina’s arm. “He did the tests, and the cancer is gone!  It really is!”

            At this, everyone who was sitting within earshot stared at the woman, and the whispering began again. Marcus and Kristina exchanged glances, and both smiled, each for different reasons: For Kristina, it was because the woman’s experience had strengthened her faith that God could heal anything, while for Marcus, it was his belief in Groening’s personal power that had just received a boost.

            Nearly all the seats were full by now, mostly with people who had been there the week before, but there were some new attendees, as well.

            Lina also heard what the woman told Kristina, since they were talking right behind her.  This news, plus the knowledge of Peter’s healing, and the sight of Mr. Handler, who was clearly still walking with ease, without his cane, gave her hope.  She wrapped her hand a little more tightly around the fabric pouch in her hand.  She’d finished sewing the little bag that day when all of the women were talking in the kitchen.  The tin foil ball was now securely stowed in the pouch, its drawstring pulled tight, and the cord looped around Lina’s middle finger.  The warmth from the ball was flowing into her palm and on up her arm, and this comforted her. And when the woman who’d been talking with Kristina came up to her and said, “I know you’ll get your healing, too, Dear. I’m rooting for you!”, she felt even more encouraged.  At the same time, though, she told herself not to get her hopes up. Can I really be healed tonight?  Doubts started to flood in. She closed her eyes and frowned, and grasped the tin foil ball in her right hand even more tightly. Trust and believe. The divine power helps and heals.

            Meanwhile, Ulrich was saying hello to Helmut Birkner, who, once again, was seated three chairs down from him. The same scarf rested on the chair next to him – Mrs. Birkner’s, Ulrich assumed – and there was the other empty seat. Ulrich supposed that Egon-Arthur Schmidt would sit there, if he was present again tonight.  Indeed, after Ulrich and Helmut had shared their pleasantries, Mrs. Birkner strode energetically into the room, followed by the tall, light-haired Schmidt.

            Now Lina opened her eyes and looked toward the two of them.  This time she didn’t feel the need to observe everything in the room in detail, although she did note that the setup was the same as before: a little, round table to the right of the fireplace, with a small lamp and a glass of water.  Another lamp on the bookcase against the wall by the arched entranceway to the parlor was also lit.  The room seemed lighter to Lina than it had the last time, the wallpaper a bit less dingy.

            Mr. Schmidt was talking to them now, following Silvia Birkner’s introduction. Lina saw Silvia settle into the chair next to her husband, leaving the seat next to Ulrich vacant for now. Mr. Schmidt’s instructions were, presumably, for the new guests, but he did say some things that she didn’t recall hearingbefore, so maybe he wasn’t just saying the same things. She began paying closer attention.

            “You have come seeking healing,”Schmidt was saying. “Mr. Groening will only accept one gift from you – that is your illness.  Give it to him! In return, he will give you what you have been longing for for so long – your health.”

            Upon hearing these words, Marcus nodded and smiled. Yes, he will give that to us!     “What Mr. Groening expects from you in return,” Schmidt went on, “to help the effect of his healing power, is twofold: one is that you must be inwardly prepared to take up the Heilstrom that radiated from him, and, secondly, that you must have a deep, unprejudiced belief in the divine healing power and, therefore, in the Creator.”

            Can we really not have the healing power without believing in God? Marcus mused. Then he remembered the way Groening had admonished them before not to think but, rather, to feel. So, he turned his attention away from his own thoughts, and back to Schmidt’s instructions.

            Schmidt was showing how they were to sit: backs straight, with their hands open atop their laps, without crossing their arms or legs, so that they wouldn’t short-circuit the flow of the energy.  As Lina opened her hands, she heard Ingrid whispering to Kristina behind her.

            “Mama! I feel all fizzy inside!” A small laugh escaped her lips. Ethel looked at her and smiled.

            Kristina gently shushed her.  “Yes, Sweetheart. That’s the Heilstrom Mr. Schmidt is talking about. I feel it, too.”

            Lina looks around, too, to smile at Ingrid, and when she turns to face the front of the room once more, Bruno Groening is standing before them. He scans the room, nodding to those whom he has seen before, pausing a bit longer when his eyes meet the new visitors.  Then he speaks. He motions to a dark-haired man who looks to be in his late twenties, and motions for him to come to the front of the room. Viktor recognizes him as the man he saw the previous week, who walked in hugging his left arm, which was bent at the elbow, to his chest.  But now the man’s arm swings freely at his side.

            “Sir,” Groening says to him, “can you tell us what you experienced after our last gathering here?”

            “Yes, indeed,” the man says, although he looks at the gathered people rather shyly. Groening gestures with his hand, inviting the man to continue.

            “Well, those of you who saw me last week, perhaps you saw that I couldn’t move this arm.” He raised his left arm. “It was broken during the war. I was trapped underneath a jeep during a battle, with my elbow pinned under the wheel.  The elbow joint was broken – shattered, the doctors said. And by the time I was taken for medical care, well, they said the elbow couldn’t be made right again. They put it in a cast, but it never healed properly.  It was as if it was frozen.  I was given a disability card. These past five years, none of the therapies they’ve tried have helped at all. I just had to go around like this.” He moves his arm back into the bent position.

            “And what happened when you came here?” Groening prompts.

             “Yes, well, I was in attendance here, but when Mr. Groening asked what I felt, I said – and it was the truth! – that I didn’t feel a thing. I even thought, Oh, here you’ve come, and now you’ve wasted your time.  That’s what I was thinking when I walked home. I live not far from here, and when I got there, I thought, You’re going to go in, and everyone’s going to want to know what happened, and you don’t have a thing to tell them.  So, I walked into the back, where our garden is, and there’s a shed back there.  And I walked over to the shed and opened the door and went inside. Just to collect my thoughts about what I’d say. And for some reason – I can’t explain why – I thought, Try to stretch your arm out now.” He looks at Ulrich, who’s sitting right in front of where he’s standing, and smiles. “So, I did.  And I could extend it all the way out!” He demonstrates how his arm had moved, and smiles broadly, extending the arm and then bending it, then repeating the action a few times.  “Well, once that happened, I knew my elbow was healed!  So I ran right into the house, and everyone was confused about why I’d come in the back door!” He laughs.  “I was so excited I couldn’t even speak. I just walked into our living room and kept stretching my arm out and bending it again, to show them!”  The man is beaming now. “You should have seen their faces!”

            The man’s good humor is contagious, and everyone in the room is soon smiling.

            Next Groening calls up the woman whose cancer was healed, and she tells the story of the terrible pains, followed by the wonderful results of the doctor’s tests. “He just couldn’t believe it!” she tells them. “But I said to him, God is the greatest physician! That’s what you told us, isn’t it, Mr. Groening?”

            Groening nods.

            Peter is summoned to the front of the room next. 

            “Tell us,” Groening says to him, “how you noticed the healing.” And Peter obliges, happy to be telling tale again, since his earlier conversation with Mr. Handler had gone so well.

            “And do you know how it happened that you were healed?” Groening asks, in a friendly voice.

            Peter thinks for a moment and then shakes his head.  “I’m sorry, Mr. Groening. I don’t.  I remember you telling us not to think of anyone else, and to pay attention to our own bodies. But I wasn’t doing that!”

            “No?” Groening asks. “What were you doing at that moment?”

            Peter gestures at Lina. “I was looking at my sister, Lina, and wishing with all my heart for her to be healed.” Lina presses her lips together, and tears come to her eyes. She mouths the words “Thank you” to him.

            “Ah, yes,” Groening says, placing a hand lightly on Peter’s shoulder. “And in this case, dear friends, this was the right thing for Mr. Bunke to do.  Yes, I told you that night to think only of your own bodies. But I also said, Do not think of your illness! Do you recall that?”

            Some of them nod. Others cock their heads to the side, trying to decide whether this sentence is familiar to them or not.

            “But often this is too hard for you – to not think of your own burden.  And then, the Heilstrom – God’s divine power – cannot work.  But Mr. Bunke –“ he pats Peter’s shoulder once more. “Mr. Bunke, here, all his thoughts were going to his sister. He wasn’t sitting on his burden, as I like to say. No! And in the moments when he wasn’t thinking of his own injured leg, but instead was wishing for his sister to be completely healed – then the Heilstrom could work!  It did work! His leg was healed!” He looks over at Peter. “And now he can hop!” he adds, a smile spreading across his own face.

            As if on cue, Peter begins hopping, to show that Groening has not exaggerated. The crowd laughs, and Ingrid claps her hands and bounces up and down in her chair.

            “Yes, my dear friends,” Groening says as Peter moves back to his seat, “this is what can happen, when we tune in to the divine transmission, instead of the evil.  When we say No! to the evil and take in the good instead.

            Groening now begins walking slowly back and forth, from one side of the room to the other.“How did it actually come about that the human being became ill?The original human being was not ill. People have become bad, worse from generation to generation. The badness had escalated so much that it is almost impossible to live. Quarrels and strife in families, more war than peace between nations! Worries have brought emotional suffering to humanity and have taken such deep root that people are bound to get sick. People are miseducated; they have distanced themselves from what is natural; many have lost their belief in God. And whoever loses the divine path, also loses his health.”

            Marcus frowns. Did I ever have that belief at all? But I’m still healthy…

            Groening walks over to the window and points to the trees that stand just on the other side of it.

            “Do you see these beautiful trees? The flowering bushes, with the bees buzzing around them?” People crane their necks, straining to see what is beyond the windowpane.

            “Centuries ago,”Groening goes on, “man went on the path away from nature, gave up belief in our Lord God. Everyone believed that he could maintain things alone: ‘We are on this earth now. We’ll manage now as we see fit,’ they say. And everybody thinks, ‘We know how to help ourselves.” Here Groening stops his pacing and points at them with his finger. “But I let you know that nobody can be helped without our Lord God. And whosoever believes that he can withdraw from the nature that the Lord God has created so beautifully for us, let him go where he wants to. People have withdrawn from nature, going over to culture. But we cannot manage without nature. Man doesn’t have the right to withdraw from it. Nature is God.”

            Here the Gassmanns and Bunkes nod and exchange happy glances. Groening has confirmed what they have felt for many years: God is in the forest.Except for Marcus, that is. He sees his entire family nodding. And, for a moment, negative thoughts begin flooding his brain, telling him that he must not be one of them, that he doesn’t belong, since he certainly doesn’t believe that God is nature. Or perhaps even that God is. But then Groening’s eyes meet his, and he feels the same powerful stream of love coming from this small man that he experienced the week before.  And the disturbing thoughts fade away.

            “You can also be displaced,” Groening tells them. “You have truly been moved from the place where God put you. Why? Just because you listen to other people rather than to God. As you have now become obedient to God you tune into the divine transmission now –you will slowly get back to the place from which you were displaced.”

            At this moment, Kristina begins to cry.  Yes, she is thinking, Yes! I was displaced. Ingrid and I! The fear that has been lurking just below the surface of her awareness flares up now. She is suddenly back in the forest again, terrified that someone will kidnap Ingrid. Unable to control herself, she cries out and, wrapping her arms tightly around Ingrid, she pulls the girl to her.

            Lina turns around and sees a look of sheer terror in her friend’s eyes. Marcus has laid his arm around Kristina’s shoulder, but she seems not to notice.

            “Nature is God,” Groening says to Kristina kindly. “You and your daughter are safe now.”

            “But why is she still so afraid?” Lina asks him, recalling Kristina’s reaction when she fell from her chair in the woods.

            “This is not the original fear,” Groening says.  “Nor was it the other night in the woods, Mrs. Windel,” he tells her. “This is a Regelung.  The evil is mighty, but God is almighty. The evil is now coming out of your body, out of your mind.  You need not be afraid of this Regelung pain.  On the contrary: be happy about it, because when new life moves in, everything is straightened out again, and that sometimes hurts.”

            Now Kristina’s eyes grow a bit calmer, and she loosens her grip on Ingrid, who was frightened by her mother’s outburst.

            “I did feel so free after we were here last week,” Kristina tells Groening.  “For the first time since Ingrid and I left home, I felt calm. All the worries were gone. I felt peaceful. I knew everything would be all right.”

            “It is all right,” Groening replies.  “What you felt in the woods the other night, and what you felt just here, just now – it is all the Regelung. And now you are truly free.” Then he looks at Ingrid and leans toward her over Renate and Ulrich’s shoulders, so that he is closer to eye level with her.

            “And you, little Ingrid,” he asks. “What do you feel now?”

            “I was scared when Mama screamed and grabbed me,” she tells him.

            “And how about now?” he asks her, his voice soft and tender. It even seems to the little girl that his eyes are sparkling.

            “Fizzy!” she replies brightly.  “Fizzy. Like I could hop all day, with Uncle Peter!”

            The people in the room laugh, relieved to be able to release the tension that built up in them when Kristina cried out.

            “Do you feel happy?” Groening asks her.

            “Oh, yes!  Happier than ever!” Ingrid tells him.

            Groening nods. “And you don’t have to worry about that nightmare any more. You know which one I mean. We don’t need to say it here.”

            Ingrid gives him a surprised look. She is about to ask him whether he means the nightmare about the dogs – which she has never shared, not even with her mother – but Groening puts a finger to his lips. 

            “It’s gone now!” he tells her.

            Groening turns his attention back to Kristina. “What do you feel now?”

            “Calm again. Peaceful. Happy.” Now her tears are tears of relief.

            “No worries?”

            Kristina shakes her head.

            Good. You have taken in the good. Now keep it!” Groening tells her, moving to the center of the room now, in front of the fireplace. “Do you see, friends? You must not reconnect with evil any longer. Firstly, dissociate yourself from it. At the moment you disconnect, the disturbance in your body will be removed. Then, tune in to the divine stream. If once isn’t enough, do it twice. To be precise, you must always do so, daily.”He pauses and looks at one or the other of them.  “Do not tune in simply when you are here in kind Mr. and Mrs. Birkners’ parlor! No! You must do this not just every day, but every morning and every evening.” He leans this way and that, so that he can see how they are all sitting.  Here and there, he corrects a person whose legs are crossed, or whose fingers are interlaced.

            And now,” he tells them, “Free yourself from all the bad things and take in the good which is the healing wave here, which is not from humans, but from God. Give me your illness! Give me your worries! You can’t deal with them. I’ll bear them for you. I have broad shoulders.”

            He directs his gaze to Renate, in the front row.    

            “You, Madam. What do you want?”

            She clasps her hands together, but then, remembering Groening’s admonition, unclasps them and lays them back on her lap, facing up. She gives Ulrich a quick look, then replies.

            “Forgiveness, Mr. Groening,” she tells him quietly, and her face flushes.

            Behind her, Ethel knits her brows. What does Mama need to be forgiven for? She exchanges glances with Viktor, who shakes his head. I don’t know, either, his gaze tells her.

            Groening, meanwhile, is looking deep into Renate’s eyes. He stands silently for about ten seconds, looking a bit above Renate’s head, then tells her, “Mrs. Gassmann, do not worry. Your sister says she never blamed you for what happened.”

            As Renate takes in Groening’s words, all of the family members are wondering what Lorena might have blamed Renate for – all except for Ulrich, that is, who knows that Groening is referring to a sister the others never even knew Renate had had.

            “She’s forgiven me?” Renate asks.

            “What happened to her was not your fault. It’s very important to her that you know that.”

            Renate begins crying, softly at first, and then in wracking sobs that cause her shoulders to shake. Ulrich takes his wife’s hand and squeezes it.

            “How do you know?” Renate asks, wanting to believe Groening, but also wanting proof of some sort.

            “Because she is right here with you,” he says, matter-of-factly. “Spiritually, of course.  In the form of a girl of about ten.”

            “Oh! I saw a vision of her the night we were here, and she was just that age!” Renate announces, turning to Ulrich and then to Lina. 

            “But in case you don’t trust that vision,” Groening goes on, “she asks me to tell you that she was wrapped in a light yellow blanket the day she died, and that you had embroidered daisies along the edges of it for her.”

            “Yes! That’s true, that’s true! Oh, dear Anna-Liese!” Renate whispers through her tears, looking all around her, seeking to see Anna-Liese again.

            “She has been your guardian angel ever since that day,” Groening tells her.  “So you see, there is no need for her – or God – to forgive you. Just you must forgive yourself.”

            Renate, still overcome by what Groening has told her, simply nods and presses the handkerchief she’s dug out of her pocketbook to her eyes.

            “And you, Miss Bunke,” Groening says, turning slightly to face Lina. “What do you want?”

            “To walk,” Lina tells him fervently, encouraged by the stories the others have told, and by what her grandmother has just experienced, even if she doesn’t understand what it is all about.  “The same as last week. The same as always. To get up and walk and never need this chair again.”

            Groening nods.

            “Each one of you has come tonight with a wish in your heart, have you not? So, I tell you once again, do not give any attention to your burdens.  To do that is to deal with the evil, and we do not do that here! No! Pay attention to your body. Don’t feel just anything, but what really is in your body.  This is truth. It is also the truth, that today you are here, and you have been given the opportunity to reflect on your body.

            Everyone in the room closes their eyes to concentrate, striving not to think about their own illness, trying their best to notice what they are feeling in their body.  But at the same time, all of Lina’s family members, having just heard her express her deepest wish, are all inwardly asking Bruno Groening to please take her burden, to please make her legs work again.  Groening can see this, just as he has been able to see all of the details he has already mentioned.  Now he steps over to the edge of the second row, where Marcus is sitting.

            “What do you feel?” he asks.

            Marcus takes an inventory of his body and replies, almost apologetically, but also with a bit of a challenge in his voice, “Nothing.”

            Groening lays his hand briefly on Marcus’ shoulder, and suddenly the young man sees two images in succession, in his mind’s eye. First, he is standing with his father in the workshop, Viktor’s arm gripping his shoulder like a vice as he whispers in his ear that there is no use fighting him about the Civil Service job. The second image is from just a few days earlier: Once again, he and his father are in the workshop, that afternoon when they were with Ulrich and Peter, talking about his wedding and the log sawing.  Again, Viktor’s arm is around Marcus’ shoulder, but now, he is smiling. The two of them look happy. Stunned that these memories have popped up at the moment Groening laid a hand on his shoulder, Marcus just looks up at the small man beside him with a questioning expression. He notices that Groening’s touch is both firm and warm. Loving. And Marcus now feels like a hot stream of something is flowing into him at his shoulder, and from there spreading out throughout the rest of his body. But before he can say what he is experiencing, Groening removes his hand (although the sensation stays in Marcus’ body for the rest of the evening).

            “I have said,” he tells them all, walking back to the front of the room and taking a small sip from the glass of water that stands on the small table there,“that it depends upon the person whether I can help them, irrespective of what ailment they have. It does not depend upon me. It depends upon the person! Each person has a choice. To accept the divine power, or not.It is out of the question that I will be able to help everybody, because it is about good and bad people here.  For example, my friends can bring just about anyone to me. When I know that the person will not change, nothing can be done.  Some people are still carrying their weaker self inside. There are people who say, ‘I will give him a good dressing down!’ Friends, don’t ask me to carry on now. Otherwise, I might get personal. I might even name individuals. This type of person is still serving evil today.”

            Marcus has a fleeting thought: Is Groening talking about me? But before he can even begin to consider this, before the frown that is wanting to come to his face can even take shape, the thought flies out of his head. He recalls that this is just what happened the other day in the workshop, when he’d been unable to actually say the words that would provoke his father. Instead, now, as then, he feels the calm that has arisen as the current flows through his body.

            Groening goes on. “Each and every person has the duty and the obligation to do good here for as long as he is allowed to be here on this divine Earth, so that nothing evil happens to him. Woe to the person, though, who does evil here and who burdens his own conscience. And, if a person would, to sum it up, walk over dead bodies here – without a concern for a human life, if he has fallen for this greed, this selfishness, and works on how he can get a lot of money, and if he then believes that he can do a better job of forging his own destiny… No, dear friends, those who fall for the evil, who serve the evil, they really won’t fare well.“

            Here Groening slowly scans the assembled group. His gaze comes to rest on Viktor, who is suddenly feeling extremely hot. His stomach is burning inside.

            Groening asks him, “What do you want?”

            Viktor pauses, looks into Groening’s eyes, and replies, “I just want to make everything right.”

            “What, precisely, do you want to make right?” Groening asks, holding Viktor’s gaze.

Viktor looks at his lap and says nothing.  Ethel has turned to him and is staring at him intently.  Everyone else in the room is doing the same.

            Groening clasps his hands behind his back and begins pacing slowly to and fro across the front of the room.

            “Does God forgive, Mr. Bunke?” Groening asks, his voice stern. Viktor snaps his head up, hoping that Groening will give him the answer he so wants to hear.

            “Mrs. Gassmann’s dead sister has forgiven her.” He indicates Renate with a nod of his head.  “But then again, there was nothing really to forgive in that case. Mrs. Gassmann mistakenly took the blame upon herself.  But what about when there is blame? Then what happens? Does God forgive the kind of ‘everything’ you ‘just want to make right’?”

            “I don’t know,” Viktor replies, his voice so soft that most of the people in the room can’t make out what he’s said. They each turn to their neighbors and whisper, “What did he say?”

            “Let’s start with what those things are, Mr. Bunke,” Groening goes on, still pacing.

            When Viktor continues to sit silently, Ethel calls softly to him. “Viktor?” But he can’t bring himself to look at her. He is feeling tremendous pain in his chest and stomach now.

            “All right, then,” Groening says. He has stopped walking and is standing at the front of the room again now, facing them all. It just so happens that Viktor is right in the middle of the second row, directly opposite Groening. 

            “Let’s start with Schweiburg,” Groening suggests.

            At this, Renate, Ethel, and Ulrich all begin to feel uneasy.  How does he know we lived there? Ethel wonders. Viktor is sitting stock still.

            “We’ll take just one example from Schweiburg. The Jewish family’s bakery where you and your ‘friends’ broke the windows and set the fire.”

            A collective gasp rises in the room.  Renate and Ethel and Ulrich, who never knew any actual details of what Viktor was up to in Schweiburg, and later, in Varel, feel their stomachs start to turn.  Ethel takes hold of Viktor’s arm with her right hand.

            “Viktor,” she whispers, tugging on his sleeve. “Tell him to stop! Don’t let him lie about you!” But Viktor remains mute and motionless.

            Groening continues. “Plus other additional incidents. There and in Varel.  Is that correct?”

            Viktor nods, almost imperceptibly.  He is sitting ramrod straight, and in his posture, he still resembles, as he always has done, the strong oaks of their family’s woods. But just as trees that have suffered an attack by insects, or a limb broken in a high wind, decay and die from within long before they ever topple to the forest floor, Viktor’s cornflower blue eyes betray his inner struggle: He has almost stopped breathing and is wondering how he will manage to keep from bursting from the pounding in his chest.

            Ethel has pulled her hand back in shock, and uses it to cover her mouth instead. Her pale skin has grown even more pale.

            “And then there is the war to consider,” Groening says. His voice does not seem angry to any of them, but neither do they sense there the kindness and love that has reigned in it until this point.  “Shall I go on, or would you like to tell about the ‘things’?”

            Without looking up, Viktor lifts a hand and gestures to Groening, indicating that he should continue.

            “As a member of the Death’s Head Unit, you were second in command of the Concentration Camp Administration.” Groening pauses. “Please stop me if I make any mistakes, Mr. Bunke.” When no reply is forthcoming, he goes on, his arms now crossed in front of his chest.

            “Throughout your tenure in this position, which you held from 1940 to 1945, while prisoners in German concentration and death camps were starving, as were many Germans living throughout this country, you and your colleagues routinely received bonuses in the form of special foodstuffs – such as cigarettes, chocolate, and coffee, for example.  These goods you regularly sent along to your own family, outside of Bockhorn.”

            Every single person in the room is quiet now, not shifting the slightest bit in their seats, so as not to miss anything.  Ethel is slowly shaking her head, and her body begins to sway forward and back, and then side to side, like a bird trying to free itself from a trap that’s tethering it to the ground. We accepted those packages, she recalls, and a chill comes over her. Renate is looking straight ahead, at the fireplace, tears rolling down her cheeks. Her hazel eyes, both guarded and challenging, look up at Groening. She wants to protest, We didn’t know! Ulrich’s shoulders have slumped, and his arms, instead of resembling the upward-striving branches of the aspens he loves, droop to his sides, as if suddenly deprived of the life force.

            “In April of 1944, as part of your duties, you were dispatched to the Bergen-Belsen Concentration Camp. There you personally gave the direct order to the Camp Commandant to inject 200 prisoners with phenol, thereby causing the deaths of these human beings.”

            People in their seats let loose cries and gasps. Audible crying can be heard. 

            “Mr. Bunke,” Groening says softly, leaning forward, “are these the things you just want to make right?”

            Viktor has now propped his bent elbows on his knees and leaned forward to rest his head in his hands, which are compulsively clutching and releasing his thick, sandy hair. All he can manage at this moment is a nod.

            There is complete silence for perhaps fifteen or twenty seconds.  Then Marcus, who now notices intense rage rising up within him, beings to lean forward. He fully intends to attack his monster of a father, throw him to the ground, do whatever is warranted in such a case… But then, for some reason, he glances in Groening’s direction. The small man, while still holding his gaze on Viktor, has extended his left arm toward Marcus, who understands what Groening is communicating to him: Now is not the time. Sit back. So, Marcus runs a hand over his hair, then settles back into his chair. He wants to try to sort out the thoughts that were coming into his mind a moment earlier, but he finds they are gone now.  So he tries his best to do what Groening asked them all to do earlier, and observe what he is feeling. Aside from the anger, which is more muted now, there is a disorienting feeling of dizziness, as if the floor beneath him has turned to sand, or water.  

            “I ask again,” Groening says, lifting his eyes to look at each of them in turn now, “Does God forgive?” Here some of those present nod tentatively, while others have crossed their arms angrily in response to the litany of Viktor’s sins that they have just heard recited. Groening reminds them with a movement to open their posture once more.  “I tell you,” he offers, finally, “that God does forgive. If,” and here he raises one finger in the air, “If we regret the evil acts we have done. If we hold onto the evil, we cannot be free, cannot be healed.” Now he watches the reactions of the people before him. “But if we say, ‘Dear God, I know I have done evil, I know it was wrong, and I regret it, and I will never do evil again…’ Then, dear friends, yes, then God does forgive. But those who cling to their actions, saying, ‘I was right to do it!’ ‘I would do it again tomorrow!’ – They will not receive God’s forgiveness.”

            Now Groening pauses and stares for a moment at the space above Viktor’s bowed head.  Then, he says, firmly, “Mr. Bunke?” Viktor can tell by Groening’s tone that he must look at the man before him.  Reluctantly, he raises his eyes and meets Groening’s gaze.

            “It is forgiven,” Groening tells him. Now the kindness reigns in his voice once more.

            Viktor keeps his eyes focused on Groening for half a minute or so. Just as Renate wanted some proof that what Groening had told her about Anna-Liese was true, now Viktor is not sure whether he can accept what Groening has told him.  Does he really know this? But as Viktor continues to look into the small man’s gleaming, blue eyes, everyone in the room around him seems to fade away into clouds, into silence, and in Groening’s gaze, he glimpses something he cannot name in words, something he cannot even fully grasp. It is a knowing, more than something tangible that he can see. But in his body, which is shaking uncontrollably now, he feels a lightness that grows, until it expands to fill every cell. It feels as if some spiritual being’s gossamer arms are embracing him, and as he looks into Groening’s eyes, a deep peace comes into him and takes him over, along with a feeling of the greatest gratitude: for this moment of connection with God (for he knows for sure that this is what this is), for the forgiveness he now knows God has granted him, and even for the horrible moments he somehow feels he had to endure in order to gain this connection with God.  In the months to come, there will be times when he wonders whether he really did experience God when he looked into Groening’s eyes, because he will not be able to call these feelings back into his body and mind and heart.  But then, each time, he will tell himself, No. It did happen. And that knowledge will carry him through what he has to go through next.

            But as Viktor is staring into Bruno Groening’s eyes and feeling God’s boundless love, many around him in the room have begun to feel anything but loving.  The whispering has started up once more.

            “Is there any person here who does not need God’s forgiveness for some act?” Groening asks, sounding genuinely curious.  “Raise your hands.” Some of the guests look at the floor, others to their companions. Shrugs and pursed lips can be observed.

            “I thought not,” Groening tells them, his voice again soft and loving.  “Dear friends, what you have done in the past – what others have done… Hand that over to me now, too.  All of it!  For those memories – of your own evil deeds, and of others’ – they only burden you. One should not do this – think back about the evil, about the war, about how others have wronged you.  Or how you have wronged others – once you have repented of your evil actions, it goes without saying.” He scans the crowd and knows that some of those present are not yet feeling able to release incriminating thoughts, whether about themselves or those close to them.

            “Haven’t you learned from it yet?” he asks them. “When you thought back, looked back, even one time, to the evil of the previous yearsor even just to two days ago –  weren’t you sad? Please look back now on an evil hour, an evil moment! On a moment of fear, when you – when your whole body – was seized, when it was petrified.  Such as Mrs. Windel, here. Think about it now! And keep thinking about it! Then evil will soon have a grip on you. And so I ask you: Do you want to always bring up the past, throw it down in front of your own feet – or your loved ones’ – again and again, and always walk over it, and be reminded of it again and again?”

            Each person shakes his or her head. Some even have sheepish expressions on their faces now.

            “Forgiveness,” Groening tells them softly, “comes not just from God. It comes from each of us. Do not keep the evil in your hearts!”

            While the people in the room mull over these statements, Groening once again walks over to the little table and picks up the glass of water. He takes a leisurely drink and sets the glass back down. Then he strides quickly across the room and halts three feet in front of Lina.

            “Stand up!” Groening tells her stridently, in a voice that brooks no opposition.

            And Lina stands.

            “Now, walk!” Groening commands her, stepping backwards to give her room.

            Lina looks at him and begins to reach for the arm of her wheelchair, but Groening shakes his head. “Now, walk!” he repeats.

            Lina takes first one tentative step toward Groening, and then a second.  A third step follows, and a fourth, until Groening, who has been taking one step backwards with each of Lina’s toward him, has backed all the way up against the wall.

            “Now turn around and walk back,” he tells her.

            As she slowly puts one foot in front of the other, Groening motions – without taking his eyes off Lina – to Egon Arthur Schmidt. Schmidt gets up, picks up his own chair and comes around behind Groening, who is matching Lina’s movement forward, step by step. Groening motions to Schmidt with this left hand, and his helper deftly rolls Lina’s wheelchair away and replaces it with the wooden chair.  When Lina reaches the chair that now stands where her wheelchair had been, Groening instructs her to turn around and sit down.  This she does.  In a daze, she, like her father a minute before, is unaware of any of what is going on around her. She hears only Groening’s voice instructing her, and feels only the sensation of her legs moving beneath her.

            Now that she has sat back down, Lina assumes that she is done, but that is not the case.

            “Stand up again, please,” Groening tells her, and then instructs her to walk back and forth across the front of the room.  She does so, slowly at first, and Groening walks alongside her, his smile growing broader with each turn, as he sees her movements gaining in both strength and speed. Lina, too, is beaming.  I am walking! she tells herself. Walking! She starts to turn to look at her family, but Groening tells her quietly to focus.

            “Just walk now.  You can look at them in a bit. I can tell you that they are all smiling. Your mother is crying,” he says with a smile, at which Lina laughs a bit. She is crying, too.

            “That’s enough for now,” Groening tells her tenderly, after they’ve walked to and fro before the guests five or six times. “The muscles are still a bit weak. But you are walking! You are healed!”

            Lina, who is, indeed, feeling tired now, but pleasantly so, turns to Groening before returning to her seat.  “But Mr. Groening,” she asks, a puzzled look on her face, “How did it happen? Why now?”

            Those present are leaning forward in anticipation of the reply.  Groening looks at her, and there is a twinkle in his eye.

            “All evening, instead of handing your burden over and trusting the Heilstrom to work, your family has been thinking only about your healing. Wishing for it so strongly that the divine power could do nothing.  But when I was talking with your father here, everyone’s thoughts turned to him. For a second, they forgot about you. Then there was an opening. Then IT could work! And you were healed.”

            Lina barely notices how the rest of the evening passes.  She is in a daze of exhilaration and exhaustion and joy. She notices that Groening gives a photograph of himself to each one of them.

            “The power of the Heilstrom is contained in it,” he tells them.  “I do not need to be physically present in order to help you.  You need only address me in your thoughts, and I will help.”

            Lina holds the photo he gives her in her hand gently, so as not to bend it.  Somehow, she understands that it is time to go, and stands up. As she is walking out of the room alongside her father, Bruno Groening comes over to him. “I will be in touch with you,” Groening tells him. “I am going away for some time now, but I will get word to you about when and where to come. But for now, use the photo to connect with me. And this.” Then Lina sees him hand Viktor a tin foil ball just like hers.

            What Lina does not see is when Marcus approaches Groening, just as the crowd of guests is beginning to disperse. But Kristina sees this, because Marcus whispers to her that he’ll return in a minute, and then walks up to Groening. Kristina sees that her fiancé’s manner is humble and thoughtful. He and Groening exchange a few words. Marcus places his hand on his own abdomen. Then, it seems to Kristina, Marcus asks Groening a question. She can tell by the intensity of Marcus’ expression, and by the focused way he gazes at Groening, that the answer to whatever question he has posed is very important to him.

            As Kristina looks on, Groening takes a moment to look Marcus in the eye. Then he tips his head slightly to the side, as if considering his reply. Then, finally, he nods and gives a slight smile, an expression that is both warm and a bit stern. He lays his hand on Marcus’ shoulder and nods. Marcus immediately rises up a bit taller, and Kristina can tell that he is pleased by Groening’s answer, excited, even. Groening’s smile broadens, and, at the same time, he wags a finger at Marcus. Marcus nods, and Groening places something into his hand. Then, a moment later, the small, unassuming man moves out into the hall. Marcus looks over at Kristina and gives her a little wave. “We’re going now,” he mouths to her across the room. He rejoins her and Ingrid, and they, too, exit the Birkners’ parlor.

            The next thing Lina notices is that she has walked all the way to the car on her own – after Groening cautions her family to believe that she is fully healed, and to treat her accordingly, after giving her a few days to rest up.  Then, she is in the car, with Marcus driving and Renate, Ulrich, Kristina, and Ingrid squeezed into the back seat. Before they have been on the road for even ten minutes, she is fast asleep.

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 30

Chapter 30

Marcus and Kristina planned to announce their engagement to the family the next morning at breakfast, over coffee and sweet rolls. It was either that, or wait until the evening meal. They both knew that Kristina wouldn’t be able to keep the secret all day, so they decided to tell everyone first thing. 

Kristina did tell Ingrid the news as soon as the little girl got up, but asked her not to say anything at breakfast until she and Marcus told the rest of the family.  But Ingrid, who was excited that there would be a wedding, and that she would be allowed to be a flower girl, found it hard to sit still at the kitchen table. She fidgeted so much on her chair, looking up at her mother, or nudging her elbow, that Renate finally asked whether she had ants in her pants.

Instead of answering, Ingrid glanced up at her mother again, her eyes wide. “Mama?”

Everyone laughed, thinking that Ingrid was asking Kristina to answer Renate’s question. Kristina obliged.

“Not actual ants,” she said, smiling. “Ingrid’s just excited.” 

“About what?” Renate asked. “Something at school?”

Ingrid shook her head and smiled, thrilled that there’d be a game. “Guess again!” she said eagerly.

“Is Stick going to have puppies?” Peter asked, playing along.

“No, Silly,” Ingrid replied indignantly. “Stick’s a boy. He can’t have puppies!”

“True enough,” Viktor said, reaching up to pat Ingrid on her shoulder. “Good girl.”

“Keep guessing!” Ingrid seemed to be fidgeting even more now.

“Did you make a new friend at school?” Ethel asked.

Ingrid shook her head again. “I told you, it’s not about school.  It’s about here!”

“Is one of the goats going to have babies?” Lina asked, inspired by Peter’s question.

“No, no, no!” Ingrid told them.  Then she burst out with, “But maybe Mama will!”

Kristina’s face went crimson, and she put her arm around Ingrid and whispered something in her ear.  Then she looked over at Marcus with an expression that said, “Help!”

“What Ingrid means, I think,” he said, for some reason rising to his feet, “is that, last night, I asked Kristina to marry me, and she said yes!”  Clearly, he wanted to make a toast to his future bride, but, lacking any drink that would be suitable to the occasion, he picked up his coffee cup and raised it. “To my dear Kristina!”

A bit awkwardly, everyone at the table followed suit, except for Ingrid, who raised her glass of milk. “But there might be babies, right Mama?” she asked Kristina in a whisper so loud that the others couldn’t help but hear. 

Lina stifled a laugh and called out, coffee cup raised high, “To puppies and goat kids and human kids!”

Ingrid put down her glass and clapped her hands, bouncing up and down merrily on her chair.

The others also raised their cups, but it was clear that they were all feeling uncomfortable.  It was partly the suddenness of the announcement. Ever since they’d been to see Bruno Groening, the whole homestead seemed to be in motion: There was Peter’s healing, and Lina’s tumble in the woods, and her discovery that being in the trees helped her pain fade, and now this.  There were also the insights and subtle interior changes that many of them were experiencing as a result of the trip.  It was so much to take in, to make sense of, and they all felt a bit off balance. 

Maybe that was why Peter had asked whether Stick was expecting puppies.  With so many parts of their physical and interior landscapes shifting, he thought that he might not have been surprised at all for a male dog to give birth! Later that day, when he considered this new development, he told himself he shouldn’t have been surprised.  After all, I saw Marcus and Kristina  kissing outside the workshop that evening a while back. But still…

Renate seemed the least surprised of them all. Why did they think I sent him out with the tea last night? she wondered as she looked at her family’s confused faces.  I guess they haven’t been paying attention. She was pleased. Kristina would now be a true member of the family. She’d be a Bunke soon, with full rights to stay here forever.

Lina’s voice, as she offered her impromptu toast to puppies, kids, and kids, carried more enthusiasm for this match than she actually felt in her heart. Why is that? she wondered. Was the strong pain that had crept back into her legs overnight impairing her ability to feel joy?  Or was it her disappointment that Kristina hadn’t told her how much she cared for Marcus?  Or perhaps it was her concern that her best friend was now engaged to the man who had terrorized Peter when they growing up? Both of these possibilities ran through her head as she studied Kristina’s face.  Although clearly still embarrassed by the way Ingrid had shared the news, she looked happy and more at ease than she had in the four years since she’d come to live with them.  That’s a good thing, Lina told herself. A good sign.

But it wasn’t just these thoughts that left everyone not quite sure how to respond to what Marcus had said.  It was the way he’d said it. “My dear Kristina.”  No one in the family had ever heard him talk that way to anyone, or about anyone. And they certainly had never heard in his voice what sounded like genuine affection, like love.  Ethel glanced over at Viktor during the coffee toast and caught his eye. “Is that our Marcus?” she seemed to be asking him.  He shrugged, and his slightly raised eyebrows told her that he was as mystified as she by their son’s new demeanor. Is this a new Marcus? Viktor was asking himself. Or just a more skillfully manipulative old Marcus? He wasn’t alone in his wondering. Among the Gassmanns and Bunkes around the table, Renate was the only one who didn’t share the skepticism and wariness which crept immediately into the other family members’ thoughts and hearts.  Perhaps these feelings had arisen in her mind, too, but if they had, she had ignored them, choosing instead to trust her heart and its devotion to Detlef Gassmann’s long-cherished wish to see the log cabin he built full to bursting with new life.

            Despite the new family composition that was now on the horizon, breakfast finished up in the usual way,: Renate, Ethel, and Lina cleared up from the meal, Kristina saw Ingrid off to school; Ulrich and Viktor headed out into the woods, and Peter into the workshop; and Marcus was waiting at the end of the driveway for his office colleague from Bockhorn, who picked him up each day on his way to work in Varel.

            As Kristina walked back into the kitchen, she saw that each of the other women was already settling into her task for the morning, as if nothing at all was different. Do they not care? Kristina thought to herself. The joy and lightness she’d felt after they saw Bruno Groening were nowhere to be found now. They had been usurped by doubt. The feeling of terror she’d experienced so often as she and Ingrid were fleeing their home – and which had lain in her heart and chest as a layer beneath every other emotion for the past four years – was beginning to make itself felt anew, creeping stealthily into her mind.  Maybe they won’t really accept me after all… That’s the thought that had just risen up in Kristina’s mind, when Ethel suddenly turned from where she’d been standing at the counter, measuring out some sourdough starter for the day’s bread.  She brushed a curl out of her eyes and then, opening her arms wide in that odd, but graceful way she had of spreading them as if they were wings, she walked over to Kristina and embraced her.

            “I’m so happy for the two of you,” she said warmly, taking a step back to look at Kristina, and then placing her hands on the younger woman’s shoulders.  “Marcus couldn’t have found a better woman for his wife,” she went on. 

            Renate looked back over her left shoulder at them. “That’s the absolute truth!” she said, tapping her hand on the counter for emphasis.  “These last four years, I’ve been afraid some local lad would snatch you away from us.  Now I don’t have to worry about that anymore.”  She smiled and turned back to the cucumbers she was getting ready for pickling.

            Lina, who had rolled up to the table with some mending, raised her threaded needle in a repeat of her earlier toast. “Here’s to your future wedding dress! We had better sit down today and start designing it.” She shifted her gaze to Ethel. “Don’t you think so, Mama?”

            “Oh, yes,” Ethel said, bringing one hand to the side of her face, index finger pointed up, to express that there was thinking to be done. “Unless, of course,” she added, smiling widely, “you want to follow the family tradition and get married in a flour sack!” Ethel looked back at her mother, and the two of them laughed heartily.  But since it was clear from Kristina and Lina’s faces that they didn’t get the joke, she explained it for them.

            “Both my mother and I felt – at first! – that we had no need of a nice dress to get married in. Why make such a fuss and spend all that time on it?”

            Lina knitted her brows. “But Mama, your wedding picture is right there on the wall. You wore a beautiful dress! Not a flour sack at all. I’m confused.”

            Ethel went over to where the photo of her and Viktor in their wedding clothes hung on the wall, near the door that led into the addition.  It had been a long time since she’d looked at it, and when she did, now, she was struck by the joy in their faces. They looked so young and radiant.  She smiled, grateful that she and Viktor were once again beginning to regain the closeness and intimacy they’d had at the beginning, and had then gradually lost. She took the photo off the wall and handed it to Kristina.

            “Lina’s right,” she said.  “Mama,” she went on, gesturing at Renate, “convinced me that it really was right to make a fuss over a wedding dress, because it marks the beginning of your new life with your husband.  Nothing will be the same after you get married,” she told them, coming around to look at the photo over Kristina’s shoulder. “It’s a new stage of life, and dressing up for it helps you – and your husband – recognize that you’re leaving some things behind. And that other things will be required of you in life now, things you can’t even imagine on the day you get married.” 

            “You make it sound a little scary,” Lina told her, sounding like a normal twenty-year-old young woman who has yet to find the man she’ll marry, and who isn’t quite sure she’s up to what that new stage of life might demand of her.

            Ethel raised one eyebrow and tilted her head to the right. “Well,” she finally replied with a sigh, “married life can have its scary moments. Mine has had them. I won’t deny it.” She looked down at her wedding photo again. 

            “But knowing about them now,” Lina asked, her mending forgotten in her lap, “you’d still marry Papa, wouldn’t you?”

            Ethel paused so long that Renate stopped slicing the cucumbers and turned around, a curious look on her face.

            “Yes,” Ethel said slowly.  “Yes, I would. I imagine every couple goes through very hard times. Do you think so, Mama?”

            Renate shrugged.  “I imagine so, Sweetheart. Your father and I have been very lucky. Hardly a disagreement in all these years.”

            “That,” Ethel said with a smile, “is because Papa manages the forest, and you manage the family. We all know that!”

            “You do?” Renate asked, looking genuinely surprised that her secret was out.

            Ethel nodded. “Now, your father and I,” she said, nodding to Lina, “we both think we know what the other should do, and we haven’t hidden those opinions from each other.”

            “But that seems like the right thing to do,” Lina told her.  “Why wouldn’t you talk about everything?”

            “Ah, Lina, Darling,” her mother said, coming over and smoothing her daughter’s hair, “that is the question, isn’t it?  When to talk about things and when not to.”

            “As you may have noticed, Kristina,” Renate threw over her shoulder, since she’d turned back to her cucumbers by this point, “our family is not big on talking about things.”

            “Mine isn’t – wasn’t – either,” Kristina replied, not sure how much she should say about her own views on this topic, although this response seemed sufficiently neutral.  The last thing she needed was to offend her future in-laws on the morning of her engagement by giving them the impression that she would be too outspoken or too meek in her relationship with Marcus. Without even realizing it, she was still doing what she needed to do to protect her position on the homestead.

            “Now, that’s true,” Ethel said, placing the photo back on its nail on the wall, “About us not liking to get into big conversations as a family.”

            “Only leads to trouble,” Renate put in, shaking her head. They could hear the rhythmic thud of the knife she was using to slice the cucumbers.

            “But, just think,” Lina objected. “If I hadn’t mentioned Bruno Groening, and if we hadn’t talked about it over supper that day, we never would have gone to see him. Peter never would have gotten his healing.”

            “Not necessarily,” Renate announced. Her remark was rendered all the more enigmatic by the fact that they couldn’t see her face. All they saw were her elbows bobbing along in a motion that matched the sound of the knife against the cutting board.

            “I think what Mama – Grandma – means,” Ethel said, as if translating from a foreign language for Kristina and Lina, “is that there are various ways one can help a situation move in the direction you want, aside from bringing it up to the whole family for discussion.”

            “Amen to that,” Renate said, and they could hear the smile in her voice as they saw her head nod.

            “What does that mean?” Kristina asked, quietly and hesitantly. She was still standing just inside the doorway, but she didn’t move, fearing that this would somehow cause the conversation to shift its focus. And the current conversation suddenly seemed desperately important to her and her future married life. Somehow, it had never occurred to her to think about this when she was married to Artur, Ingrid’s father. With him, she’d never felt the need to nudge anything in a given direction.  Things just flowed. But maybe that’s just the way it seems to me now… Kristina thought to herself. I was so young then…

            Renate finally turned around.  She took her apron in her hands and slowly wiped them clean as she spoke.

            “Get to know what is most important to your husband, what he knows the most about.  And let him make all the decisions about that part of your life. Then get to know what is most important to you, what you know the most about. And make it clear to him that if he tries to encroach on your territory, he’ll regret it.”

            Ethel and Kristina and Lina exchanged glances, and it was clear that all three of them were shocked as much by what Renate had said as by the fact that she had said it at all.

            “But Mama,” Ethel said, her hands spread wing-like once again, “you never told me that when I got married.”

            “You never asked me,” she replied, a gleam in her eye. “Kristina here did.”

            Open-mouthed, Ethel stared at her mother. “But you might have shared that with me, as a bit of motherly advice, on my wedding day, for example.”

            Renate shook her head. “You wouldn’t have listened.” When Ethel raised one finger, in preparation for objecting, she asked her, “Would you?”

            “I don’t know,” Ethel answered honestly, and then she smiled. “Maybe not. But still, Mama –“

            “Don’t ‘Still, Mama’ me, Dearie,” Renate told her lightly.  “Kristina here asked, and it’s a good thing she did.  Took me long enough to figure this out myself –“

            “But Grandma,” Lina objected, “didn’t you know this all along, with Grandpa?”

            Renate’s eyes twinkled. “I just really understood it last night,” she admitted. “Isn’t that something?”

            “So,” Ethel clarified, “you couldn’t have told me when I got married, then, even if I had asked?”

            “I don’t imagine I could have,” she said simply.

            Ethel shook her head in amused dismay, and she felt both relieved that her mother hadn’t consciously withheld valuable advice from her more than two decades earlier, and also sorry that Renate hadn’t had this insight into things sooner. She could have used the guidance.

            “But now I can,” Renate went on. “And given our Marcus, I think it might come in handy for you, Dear.” Here she nodded at Kristina.

            Kristina was not quite sure how to interpret the remark, especially since Renate turned back around to her cucumbers before she could interpret the expression on the older woman’s face. Lina and Ethel gave her no help, either. 

            “Do you have any other words of wisdom for us married or soon-to-be married ladies?” Ethel asked, only half joking.  “Now that we’ve opened that door?”

            Renate shook her head sharply.  “Nope. A one-time special.” And with her left hand, she made a gesture of pushing a door closed.

            “Then that makes Kristina very, very lucky,” Lina announced, picking up her needle and thread again.  “And what about you, then, Mama?” she added, looking up at Ethel.

            “Well,” Ethel began, as she retrieved a crock with flour from the shelf on the wall near the stove, “I may have missed out on the key advice, but I’d say I’ve gathered a bit of knowledge in the past twenty-seven years.  Mostly the hard way.”

            “That’s always the way it is,” Renate put in, matter-of-factly. “For all of us.”

            “So, what did you learn the hard way?” Lina asked the question she knew Kristina was eager to have answered, and she herself wanted to hear her mother’s thoughts, too. She knew enough from growing up in this household that moments of such openness were rare indeed.

            Ethel paused, wrapped her arms loosely around the flour crock, and stared off across the room, past Lina. “What have I learned the hard way?” she asked, as if posing the question to herself. 

            “About things being required of you that you didn’t expect, maybe?” Lina piped up, impatiently.

            “Just let her tell it herself,” Renate chided her. “She’s spent her whole life raising you and your brothers and living through a war, and not philosophizing about how she’s lived her life.”

            Ethel gazed affectionately at the older woman. Although Ethel knew that her mother loved her, Renate didn’t often directly offer words of support, so she took some time to savor this moment before speaking.

            “What I would say,” she began finally, “is this.  When things happen that you don’t expect, things that make you wonder who the man in front of you is… I mean, when it seems to you that some stranger has replaced the man you married… When that happens, you have to look into his eyes and struggle as hard as you can to see – in the eyes of that stranger – the man you married, the man you fell in love with.  That’s the only thing that will give you a fighting chance.”

            Neither Kristina nor Lina had expected such a serious and disquieting bit of advice. Kristina wasn’t about to say anything here, since she sensed it was a delicate family moment that she couldn’t possibly grasp. Lina, who had no more insight than Kristina into what events had enabled her mother to gain such insights, did speak up.

            “What happens otherwise? If you don’t fight to see him?”

            Ethel looked Lina in the eye and then Kristina. “Then your marriage is over,” she said, simply, in a deadly serious tone.

            Kristina and Lina exchanged glances. Then Kristina, who hadn’t had enough years with Artur to encounter such a situation before he was killed on the Eastern front, asked, “But what do you do then?”

            Ethel pursed her lips, then replied. “Either you stay, or you leave.”

            The two younger women looked to Renate, hoping she would clarify things somehow. But the Gassmann family matriarch remained where she was, her back to them, slicing cucumbers for pickles, just as she had done in this very same kitchen for more than forty years.

*          *          *

            During the days that followed, before the family’s next trip to Bremen to see Bruno Groening again, each of them was engaged in the process of not only understanding what had or had not changed for him or her in the time since the first meeting, but also observing what was different with others in the household. This was a week of changes, both visible and unobserved, physical and internal. The healing of Peter’s leg was clear to them all, and all of them, at this point, applied the word “healing” only to the physical body.  Although they all found themselves looking at the world, each other, and themselves, in new ways during these days, none of them would have claimed that they had been “healed” of anything, despite the fact that they each underwent shifts after the meeting with Bruno Groening. Rather, the whole Gassmann-Bunke clan spent that week in something of a daze, experiencing certain thoughts and feelings, but without analyzing them.

            For some of them, like Renate, long-suppressed memories came to mind. One day in the forest, Ulrich found himself thinking of his mother with kindness, even though she had died when he was just a babe, leaving him to be raised by his father and volatile step-mother.  Others, like Ethel, felt unexpected lightness and joy. The closeness that she and Viktor had regained of late only deepened after they went to see Groening, and by the middle of the following week, Ethel found herself singing in the kitchen and looking forward to sinking into her husband’s arms at night.

            Kristina, who at first was filled with relief and happiness, then sank suddenly and inexplicably into the terror of the past. Had she been able to ask Groening about what had happened that evening in the forest, when Lina fell from her wheelchair, he would have told her not to worry. He would have explained that this was simply part of her healing, a release of the old fears – the evil – that had settled into her body. “Regelungen” is what he would have called it, even though he’d spoken only of physical Regelungen that evening in Bremen, and not of the sometimes terrifying way the mind and heart also release long-held burdens.  But Groening was not there to reassure Kristina. So, she ended up spending the next week alternating between joy at her engagement to Marcus and a low-level, but still perceptible, concern that her old fears would come back again and spoil her new-found happiness.

            Marcus, whose sudden expressions of affection stunned those around him, was not at all aware that he seemed to them like an entirely different person.  He just delighted in the openness of his heart and in the warmth and love that now filled it, sensations he never recalled having experienced in his whole life. He spent no time analyzing why this was happening now. But while he strode around the homestead with unprecedented lightness of bearing, his brother and sister and parents seemed to be holding their breaths, as if waiting for the “old” Marcus to reappear in an outburst of rage or recrimination.

            Viktor was the only one among them who was able to place the breathtakingly painful sensations he had felt at the Birkners’ house into a larger context: He understood that the energy of the forest and the power that Groening called the Heilstrom affected both his body and mind, and in nearly identical ways: this power somehow enabled deeply-held terrors to be freed and released. For some reason, he didn’t try to explain this to himself. Rather, he found himself picturing the injured swallow Lina had mentioned to them. He kept seeing, in his mind’s eye, the moment when the swallow gained the strength to lift off the ground, free. And he knew that, although what he had gone through both times – in the forest, and in Bremen – disturbed, and even frightened, him, it was all meant to help him.

            Lina, who was able to detect a persistent sense of inner peace during this time, nonetheless struggled to maintain her faith that the pain that came and went in her legs really was the Regelungen Groening had described, and that the Regelungen would lead to complete healing for her. During this time, she also strived not to compare herself to Peter, not to entertain the thought that perhaps he had been healed, while she hadn’t, because he somehow believed more perfectly than she did. When the temptation to invite these thoughts in did arise, she would, through force of will, shift her attention back to repeating the phrase Groening had whispered in her ear: Trust and believe. The divine power helps and heals.

            Lina also felt the loving support of her family in a way that she hadn’t before.  It wasn’t that she had felt a lack of concern before. Or, at least, she hadn’t felt that for four or five years now. But when they all enthusiastically jumped on the Bruno Groening bandwagon, when they all went to see him with her, she began to sense that they had come together as a kind of team to help her. That was something new.  She believed – unlike in those darker moments early on – that each member of her family, did think about her situation, that they did want to help her. But until Bruno Groening came along, there just hadn’t been any force that could unite them to fight for her and for her return to health. That’s exactly how Lina thought of Groening: as a force that somehow managed to give everyone in her family the hope that she would be able to walk again. 

            Thinking about Bruno Groening in this way, Lina was also, like her father, reminded of the swallow with the injured wing. She recalled what she’d told her family about how she’d first despaired that it would die, and how she’d then seen it summon strength from somewhere and rise up and fly off.  She remembered telling them that she felt that power must have come from God. The day after they visited Groening, as Lina called to mind the image of that swallow, she knew that she’d been right about how the wing had been healed, and about how the swallow had been able to fly again: It took in the power of God and was healed, she told herself. And now, here’s Bruno Groening, giving us all hope and strength, by connecting us to God’s power. That’s the way Lina saw it, even though she couldn’t begin to explain how Groening was able to do that.  But she saw no need to strive to explain it rationally. She was just grateful that he could do it. More and more often during the week between the first and second trips to see Groening, Lina thought of the swallow, of its injured and then healed wing, and of her own legs. Trust and believe, she repeated to herself. The divine power helps and heals.

            Once the swallow made its way back into her consciousness, Lina also found herself reflecting back on the day she had caused such controversy at the supper table the month before by asking, “Does God have a plan for us?” Lina recalled Marcus’ vigorous rejection of this idea, based on his belief in our absolute free will: There was no use in God making up a plan for our lives – a “wish”, as Marcus had called it – since He was, in fact, powerless to affect our actions in any way.   Given that Marcus thought this way, it wasn’t surprising, Lina thought now, that he had also scoffed at her when she suggested that perhaps any suffering we experience is really part of God’s plan for us. She and Kristina had gone on to discuss this question on their own.  Was it God’s plan for her to become paralyzed? For Peter to be injured in the war? For Kristina’s husband to die in the war, and for Kristina and Ingrid to experience those horrors as they fled to safety? The two of them hadn’t come to any conclusion about whether such things really could be in God’s plans for them, much less why this would be the case if it was the case.  But now this question arose once more in Lina’s mind.  Maybe she would have the chance to ask Bruno Groening about it when they saw him next.

            One clue to the answer Lina was seeking was actually right in front of her, although she didn’t realize it. But what she did notice, the very first day after their trip to Bremen, was that everyone in the household was suddenly going out of their way to let her know they believed she’d be healed.  Throughout the day, one or the other of them would lean over and pat her on the shoulder and say, “Just a few more days until we go back,” or “You’re looking stronger already,” or, in Ingrid’s case, “Will you push me in the wheelchair after you’re healed?”  Kristina was always reminding her to keep hold of the tin foil ball. Lina guessed that Kristina must have told Ethel and Renate Groening’s parting words, because one day she heard the two of them in the kitchen softly singing, ‘Trust and believe, trust and believe,” to some made-up tune.  All of this shored up Lina’s own belief that she would actually walk again soon.

            She was also strengthened by daily trips into the heart of the woods. This new daily routine came about in the following way: Thanks to her foray to the treehouse with Peter and also to those heavenly minutes she spent lying on the forest floor that same evening as she waited for Kristina to bring help, Lina was able to convince herself that she did, indeed, feel less pain in her legs when she was amongst the trees. No one could explain why this was, at least not in words.  But Ethel surmised, and the others agreed, that this shift was connected to the divine energy they associated with the forest, with God’s energy that somehow circulated through the trees.   So, already on Saturday, the day Ingrid announced that her mother and Marcus were getting married, Viktor decided that they should make sure Lina spent a good amount of time in the forest each day, so that she could absorb the heavenly there.

            That first day Viktor carried her into a lovely, sunny clearing in the woods and lowered her gently onto a thick fallen log so that she could sit.  But Kristina, who had also come along, noticed right away that Lina wouldn’t be comfortable sitting like that for long, since there was nothing to lean back against.  So, she ran back to the house and enlisted Peter, who soon reappeared in the clearing, carrying a wicker chair from the porch. He and Viktor lifted Lina off the tree trunk and eased her down into the chair.  She smiled as she leaned back and rested her arms on the rounded chair arms.  Kristina sat down on the forest floor, using the fallen log as a back rest. 

            “Go off back to work, you menfolk,” she said to Peter and Viktor. “We’ll be fine here for a couple of hours, won’t we Lina?”

            Lina nodded, indicating the knitting bag she’d brought with her.  And Kristina pointed to her basket.

            “I’ll collect some berries, and Lina will knit.”

            Later on, toward supper time, a whole parade of Gassmanns and Bunkes made their way into the woods to see how their Lina was faring.  She laughed as she saw both of her parents and grandparents, along with Kristina and Peter, walking gaily amongst the birches and alders.

            “Are you off on a picnic?” she asked them.

            “We just came to collect you,” Ethel told her, leaning over to kiss her daughter on the cheek and give her braid a playful tug.  

            “Now there’s an idea, though,” Renate exclaimed.  “A picnic!”

            Ethel, who was standing with her arm hooked around Viktor’s elbow, surveyed the treetops above her. Closing her eyes, she took in a deep breath and slowly let it out. 

            “It’s been so long since I’ve been out here at all,” she said. “I’ve forgotten how divine it feels.” She turned to Viktor and smiled. The light in her eyes made his heart fill with tender feelings of love for her. Afraid he might start crying, he summoned up a husky voice.

            “Then why not have a picnic out here tomorrow?” he suggested.

            Ulrich seconded the idea. “We’ll get that other spruce down by the end of today,” he said to Viktor. “A picnic will be a nice reward for us all.”

            “Can we have it at the treehouse?” Peter asked, sounding almost like a little boy in his joyful anticipation.

            “No, Peter, that’s too far for you to carry me again,” Lina said, not wanting to put anyone out.

            “Oh, I’m not planning to carry you,” he said, turning to her with a crafty smile.   

            Now Lina felt very awkward. “Well, we can’t ask Papa or Grandpa,” she began.

            “Nope,” Peter agreed. “But we won’t have to!”

            “Why’s that?” Renate asked.  Then she saw Ulrich smile.

            “Peter’s come up with something to spare his grandpa and papa’s backs,” he told them.

            “What is it?” Kristina asked.

            “Well, I took one of the other chairs like this one, and I lashed two poles to the sides of it, like this.” He indicated with his hands where the poles were, running front to back, and extending out about three feet in front and back.

            “It’s a palanquin,” Ulrich told her, smiling. 

            “Fit for a queen!” Ethel chimed in, leaning down to kiss the top of Lina’s head.

            “But…,” Lina replied, looking from one to the other of them, “someone will still have to carry me.”

            Peter nodded. “Yes, but there will be two of us in front and two in back, so it won’t be difficult at all.”

            “We’ll be your litter-bearers,” Ulrich said with a smile. 

            He had been so happy when he’d walked into the workshop a bit earlier and seen Peter’s contraption. Although he hadn’t talked about it these past four years, it had been a terrible blow to him, too, when Lina was paralyzed. In his view, she was the person in the family whose ties to the forest equaled his own, and the one he could count on to continue his collaboration with the trees with the same heart he possessed.  There was Viktor, of course, but his connection to the trees, while strong, had also waxed and waned over the years. It now seemed to be waxing steadily once more, but even so, it was in Lina that Ulrich had always seen the future of his life’s work.  Thus, he had been devastated by her accident, which seemed to deprive him of both his vibrant granddaughter and his rightful forestry heir. Already a taciturn man, Ulrich had grown even more so over the past four years, speaking little with the family, except about the running of the business. 

            Renate noticed during these years, that Ulrich barely listened to all her commentaries and calculations regarding the family. But she was at a loss when it came to knowing how to bring him out of the melancholy that had seeped back into him. It was only when she handed him the newspaper clipping about Bruno Groening that a hint of the old spark came back into his eyes. Seeing this convinced Renate that taking Lina to see Groening would be the right thing to do, and not just for Lina, but for Ulrich, too. What she didn’t realize then, was that it was the right thing to do for every single one of them.  

            Thus it was that all the members of the extended Gassmann-Bunke family, which Kristina and Ingrid were now just a few months’ shy of joining officially, made their way to the treehouse late in the morning on Sunday. The women wore their everyday dresses and aprons, the men an assortment of more of less clean work clothes.  Wicker baskets abounded, some brimming with loaves of bread, while others covered in worn, but still cheerful, kitchen towels concealed chunks of cheese and ramekins of butter. Yes, Renate assured Marcus, slapping his hand playfully as he bent to lift one towel to peer beneath it, there was sausage! There were also bottles of homemade cider and even their home-brewed beer.  And, of course, cake: a simple sheet cake topped with raspberry jam and dusted with powdered sugar.  

            If this group picture was all you saw on this morning, you’d say that this troupe looked like any other family heading into the woods for a mid-summer picnic. But if you shifted your gaze to the front of the group, you’d see Lina sitting erect in a wicker chair, while the four male members of her family walked along – two on her right, and two on her left – with the poles that Peter had lashed to sides of the chair resting on their shoulders. Their slow walking and the fact that Lina sat at their shoulder level, so that her head rose higher than theirs, lent a certain regal air to the whole procession. In fact, Lina’s bearers were making their way along the path at a measured pace because none of them wanted to be the one to trip on a branch and send Lina tumbling to the ground.  So, they directed their eyes downward as they walked. This also enhanced the impression that they were carrying a queen who commanded their utmost respect and devotion. For her part, Lina sat as still as she could, resisting the urge to look back over her shoulder and wave at the adoring masses – namely, Renate, Ethel, Kristina, and Ingrid – who were bringing up the rear.  Ingrid, who wanted to help carry Lina, but whose head barely came up to the shoulders of the men, made one brief foray to the front of the procession, walking between Marcus and Ulrich, her right arm raised and her little hand touching the pole, to symbolize her contribution to the effort.

            Even once they reached the old beech tree and Viktor, Ulrich, Peter, and Marcus gently lowered themselves – and thus, Lina – to the ground, Lina still felt quite queenly, since everyone around her took seats either on the ground or on the nearby large fallen tree trunk.

            “We’re not allowed to have our heads higher than yours,” Ingrid announced solemnly, as she walked around, bent over and carefully measuring her own height with her hand and comparing it to Lina’s.   They all laughed at this, and Lina found that she did, indeed, appreciate the higher vantage point that she’d enjoyed on her “ride” here and even now.  How liberating! she thought, realizing the toll that spending four years at the level of everyone else’s waists had taken on her. It was exhilarating! She swore that the cheese and sausage had never tasted as good as they did today. 

            Viktor noticed this, too: Renate’s cooking had grown even tastier since the visit to Groening. He hadn’t realized, back in 1921, when he complimented his future mother-in-law’s cooking, that the quality of her cooking would, like his step-mother’s, suffer under the sorrow she endured when Hans left for America.  In the past few days, though, Renate’s stews and side dishes had regained the sublime quality that Viktor had noticed when he first came to the Gassmann homestead. Now, it was finally beginning to peek out of her heart once more, and into the dishes she placed before her family.

            Even Marcus, who, to Lina’s surprise, had not balked at being one of the chair-bearers, looked relaxed and happy as he leaned back on one elbow, his crossed legs stretching out before him, alongside his fiancée. Peter, who was sitting opposite them, between Renate and Ulrich, was looking at Kristina with an intensity that surprised Lina.  How did I not see this before? she thought, as she grasped how her brother felt about the woman who would soon be his sister-in-law.  How much I’ve missed these past four years, she thought. But this realization did not sadden her. Rather, she delighted in what she was now able to observe about her family members.

            Viktor and Ethel had taken seats on the fallen log kitty-corner to Lina, and Lina was struck by the way they seemed to have eyes only for each other.  Occasionally, Viktor would reach out to take his wife’s hand, and his cornflower blue eyes looked brighter than Lina remembered them ever being. She also saw what appeared to be almost a halo around her mother’s head. Lina concluded that this was just the light through the trees playing on the strands of blonde hair that had escaped from Ethel’s braids and framed her head.

            “Can I go up?” Ingrid asked, addressing all of them.  She was standing at the foot of the treehouse’s rope ladder, one small foot already poised on the lowest rung.

            Marcus jumped up and brushed off his pants.  “Come on, then. Let me help you,” he offered.  She’s going to be my step-daughter before long, he was thinking.  But even he, so unused to being connected to his heart, noticed that the thought to help Ingrid climb the ladder had come not from his head, but from his heart, where he detected a little bit of happiness and warmth toward Kristina’s nine-year-old daughter.

            “I don’t need help,” Ingrid announced brightly.  “Just permission.”

            They all laughed, and Marcus, who had, by now, reached the ladder, demonstratively spread his arms wide, ceding her point, and directing a wink and a smile toward Kristina.

            “I think we all see who’s really going to be able to keep Marcus in line,” Renate joked, and the crowd laughed once more.

            Marcus stood alongside the ladder (and surreptitiously placed his foot on the lowest rung to steady it, once Ingrid began making her way up). The little girl confidently climbed upward, hand over hand, until her head and shoulders cleared the top. 

            Watching Ingrid, Viktor was overcome by the memory of watching Ethel climb up the ladder on that first day she brought him here. She’d seemed so self-assured, so strong and graceful, then – so free.  He looked at her now, took in her smile as she watched Ingrid, and smiled back at her when she turned and caught him gazing at her.  Their eyes met, and Viktor recalled the evening he proposed to her, how he told her that he wanted her to be guided by God to give him the answer that was right for her, even if that meant refusing him.  He told her that he would never want to lead her off a cliff. Looking at his wife now, Viktor recalled how confused she was by his words about the cliff.  She said she couldn’t imagine him ever leading her off a cliff.  And yet, he ended up doing just that. All the same, she had remained strong and graceful and confident to this day, even as she found herself pushed to the very edge of the cliffs that neither of them could have imagined as they sat up there in the treehouse.  He felt so much love for her now, as he stared into her eyes and saw in them her love for him.  The now-familiar pain had returned to his chest, alongside the joy and peace that the love brought.  I just want to make it all right.    

            Ingrid paused at the top of the ladder, trying to figure out how to maneuver herself up onto the treehouse floor.

            “Grab the second floorboard from the edge,” Ulrich called out.

            At this, Ingrid shot back, “I know, I know!”, and a moment later, they all saw her again. Now she was leaning over the treehouse railing and announcing what she had found up there.

            “Leaves. Some pine cones. But why pine cones?” she asked with a frown. “This isn’t a pine tree, is it?”

            “It’s a beech tree!” they all answered, nearly in unison.

            “She needs some tutoring,” Ulrich said, smiling.

            “Don’t worry about it, Kristina,” Viktor told her. “Your future grandpa-in-law will teach her everything about the forest.”

            “Just like he did me,” Lina affirmed with a nod.

            When Kristina heard these words, her heart melted. She gazed at each member of the Gassmann-Bunke family, these people who would soon be her family, too, hers and Ingrid’s. We are blessed, she thought. And for the first time since she’d been living here, she truly believed her own words. There was no trace now of the earlier terror that had descended on her when Lina fell out of her chair in the woods. Now she really did feel like she belonged.

            She glanced at Lina and was surprised to see a cloud-like figure standing behind her. Kristina immediately recognized this as the old man whose spirit she’d glimpsed in her room years earlier.  She couldn’t forget those gray-blue eyes and long gray beard. So, Wolf, she thought, You’re here, too. This seemed so fitting to Kristina that she nearly pointed him out to Marcus.  But then she restrained herself, afraid her fiancé would think her crazy. She could have mentioned it to Viktor, though: He was, at the same moment, also looking at the space behind Lina’s chair. It had been nearly twenty-five years since he’d heard the old man’s ringing laugh, but he heard it now, and he smiled to himself.

            Lina, however, did not sense her great-grandfather’s presence. She’d never seen him. But she did notice something that touched her deeply. She glanced over at Ulrich and saw how he was beaming as he looked up at Ingrid.  It reminded her of the way his face looked when she was Ingrid’s age, when he’d bring her out here into the forest and introduce her to each tree.  “Miss Lina,” she remembered him saying, “meet Mr. Pine.”  Now, it might seem that this memory combined with watching her grandfather and Ingrid now, might leave Lina feeling a bit sad, for any number of reasons. But this wasn’t the case at all.  Rather, Lina suddenly felt an upwelling of tenderness for Ingrid.  Maybe it was that she saw herself in the little girl, the way Viktor saw Ethel in her.  Or perhaps it was that, as Lina concluded from watching Renate’s face, her grandmother was glimpsing the bright future that this new addition would bring to their family. 

            Lina couldn’t put her finger on why she felt the way she did, but she didn’t feel any particular need to figure it out.  At that moment, she was content with the happiness that was filling her heart and lending a distinct lightness to her whole body. In the course of these hours spent in the company of her beloved family and the trees she adored, the pain in her legs had vanished entirely. And this was enough for her right now: for all of them to be here together, smiling, with love and affection flowing between them.

            Lina was certain that their family had never experienced a time together like this, at least never since she’d been alive.  Is this what happiness is? she wondered. Is this God’s plan for us all? To be together and to share this kind of joy and love? Lina caught sight of her grandmother’s face – her smile so broad, her eyes so brightly lit now – and as she did so, a swallow, iridescent black and purple in the sunlight, swooped down between the trees and landed on one of the beech’s low branches.  Lina’s mouth opened in surprise. A swallow here? I never see them in the woods.  The bird was looking right at her, and – Am I imagining it? –  it extended one wing down to touch the branch it was resting on.  Then, in one, swift, powerful movement, it lifted off the branch and, giving a sharp chirp, rose sharply into an opening between the beech tree and the surrounding pines, and vanished in the sky. 

            Lina was too shocked to speak, or to call anyone’s attention to the bird. Besides, it was gone in an instant.  But in the brief time of its visit, Lina felt herself filled up with power, a force that tingled throughout her body and brought her a lightness that gave her the sensation that she was floating above the seat of her chair.  She felt weak in the knees and, simultaneously, full of gratitude, for she knew that this was a gift from God.  And at this very moment, a flash of insight came to her: It was in God’s plan for me to have my accident.  She glanced around once more, shifting her gaze from one to the other of those sitting here with her; and then up at Ingrid, too, who was continuing to entertain them by piling dried leaves on top of her head as a crown, and striking the most regal pose she could. I had to have my accident, Lina thought, for this:  to bring us all together, in happiness.  

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 29

Chapter 29

Once the family came out of the Birkners’ house, they pushed Lina back out to the car and got her settled in. Marcus drove the car, and their grandparents rode in the back seat, just as they’d done on the drive to Bremen.  Peter rolled Lina’s empty wheelchair over to the pickup truck, easily hoisted it into the back, and then joined his parents in the truck, stepping lightly up into the cab and taking a seat next to his mother, who was sitting in the middle. 

When they arrived back home, it was already so late – after eleven – that everyone’s sole focus was on helping Lina out of the car and into the house, so that Ethel could get her ready for bed.  They were all dead tired, but, at the same time, each of them was also filled with a strange energy.  It was a mental alertness that was unfamiliar to them, and which made no sense, since Mrs. Birkner had not served any coffee or tea.  They all felt something in their bodies, but the something varied, and the intensity varied from person to person: Marcus barely noticed any physical sensations, but was surprised at his wakefulness. He also perceived a certain clarity regarding his situation, even though he couldn’t yet articulate it. Renate and Ulrich, too, just couldn’t get to sleep, so they lay awake, discussing the evening. 

At one point, Ulrich asked Renate to lay her hand on his arm and tell him whether she could feel the strong vibration he was sensing in his body.

“No,” she replied, after doing as he’d asked. “But maybe that’s because my own hand is tingling.”

“It’s odd, Renate,” he said then. “Mr. Groening was talking about the current – the Heilstrom, he called it, right?”

“Yes, that’s right.”

“Well, that’s what I feel when I’m amongst the trees,” Ulrich told her.  “I know I’ve always said that I feel God out there, feel God in the trees.” He saw Renate nod. “So is that what I’ve felt all these years? The Heilstrom?”

“I can’t say, my dear,” Renate replied, surprised at her own lack of certainty about this, after a lifetime of feeling certainty about everything.

“It felt pretty much the same,” Ulrich went on.  But then he noticed that Renate didn’t seem interested in exploring this fascinating topic.  She looked distracted.  “What is it?” he asked her.

“You know, it was strange,” Renate told him.  “There was a moment, when Mr. Groening was looking at each of us. Remember?” Ulrich nodded, and she went on. “Well, when he looked at me, I suddenly remembered Anna-Liese.”

Ulrich raised himself up on one elbow and looked at his wife with a shocked and concerned expression. “You did?”

Renate nodded. “I could see her face, Ulrich, so clearly. But not her face when she was a baby.” She paused. “Not when she was still alive.”

“How, then?”

“She looked older. Maybe ten? Eleven? But I knew it was her, Ulrich. I recognized her.”

Ulrich said nothing, but drew her to him.

“What can it mean?” Renate asked quietly.

“I don’t know,” Ulrich told her.  “You’re the expert when it comes to that kind of thing,” he said jokingly, although he could tell that this was nothing to make light of.

But Renate went on, as if she hadn’t noticed his tone, and she certainly hadn’t taken it amiss. “It was so, so long ago.  Why did I see her? An older her?”

“I can’t say,” Ulrich replied.  “But how did it make you feel when you saw her?”

Here Renate began crying.  Ulrich started to get worried, but she patted him on the arm. “At first, I felt a bit frightened. I’ve never seen her – that way, seen her face – since she died. I thought maybe she was coming to blame me.”

“No, no,” Ulrich said, seeking to comfort her. “You said it yourself. It was so long ago. If she wanted to blame you, she would have done it years ago.  And besides, she has nothing to blame you for.” He could feel Renate shaking her head.

“That’s not true. What happened was all my fault.” Now the tears poured out of her even more, and Ulrich held her tight as she cried.  The first, faint light was creeping into the sky by the time they finally drifted off to a restless sleep.

* * *

Viktor and Ethel were also too worked up to sleep.  Viktor was consumed with thoughts of the sensations he was feeling in his body.  Back in the Birkners’ house, when Groening came into the room, Viktor begun feeling hot all over. He’d been overly warm even before that, but once Groening began talking, he suddenly felt warmer than he had ever felt in his whole life, as if he was surrounded by a blazing fire. It also felt like flames were scorching him from the inside, especially in his stomach.  The pain from it was intense, right from the start, but he didn’t want to let on to anyone about it, not during the gathering, and especially not afterwards, because Lina was the one who was really suffering. They needed to get her home and into bed as soon as possible.  He was grateful that it was already dark by the time they were driving home, so that Ethel beside him in the truck couldn’t see his clenched jaw, or the way he gripped the steering wheel to keep his attention focused on the road.

But it wasn’t just heat that Viktor felt at the Birkners’ house, or pain in his stomach. Something also happened in his heart, although it was gone now.  If he hadn’t known better, he would have been certain he was having a heart attack. But he did know better. He recognized this pain: It was exactly what he’d felt in the woods the other week. Well, maybe not exactly, since he managed not to double over or scream or cry or vomit right there in the Birkners’ parlor, the way he did in the treehouse. But it was the same kind of pain as then. 

As unhappy as Viktor was to go through that again, he realized that something else about this second experience was familiar to him, too. Lying in bed now, with his stomach still burning inside, he noticed a little well of tenderness inside him, where the pains in his heart had been earlier.  That’s what he had felt after the afternoon in the treehouse: First the terrible dam opened up inside him, and all that pain and sadness came out, and then he suddenly begun to feel alive again.  Just a bit of joy emerged at first, just a bit of tenderness and love for Ethel. That was how it started. And over the next couple of weeks, he noticed that he was feeling more loving toward her. They were falling asleep each night holding hands, or embracing. 

Tonight, at the Birkners’, when Groening looked at him, when the pain in his heart began, and grew, that pain was accompanied – which made no sense to Viktor at all – by the sweetest feeling of love for every member of his family.  Lying in bed with Ethel now, Viktor recalled how he looked at each of them, one by one, as they sat in the parlor listening with rapt attention to Bruno Groening, and how he was overcome by such a wave of gratitude for each of them, and by the strong wish to make everything all right for all of these ones who were so dear to him.

Of course, he didn’t express any of this to Ethel, or ask her what he had asked himself: Could these pains be the Regelungen pains Groening spoke of? He contented himself with drawing his wife closer to him, holding his arm around her shoulder as she rested against his chest.  But he needn’t have worried that Ethel would ask him anything about his own experience that night.  She seemed to be floating on the clouds.  It’s a good thing I’ve got an arm around her! Viktor thought to himself with a smile.  This really was the Ethel of the period of their courtship and early marriage: so joyful and vibrant.  The only thing that tempered her flight into the ether was her concern about Lina.

“Viktor,” Ethel said, “she was never like this – in this much pain, I mean. Not even at the beginning, right after the accident.”

“They gave her some kind of pain medicine then, didn’t they?” he asked, as he gently stroked her blonde curls.

“Yes, in the hospital they did,” she told him. “But before that, right after it happened, before we got her to the hospital, she didn’t seem to be having any pain at all.”

“That happens,” Viktor said, “especially with serious injuries. I don’t know why it is. The brain seems to shut down. It’s as if the person doesn’t even understand that they’ve been terribly injured.”

Ethel realized that he must know this from the war, so she didn’t ask him to explain.  “But,” she did ask, “why would she be having pain now, if she didn’t have it then?  This kind of horrible pain?”

“And in her legs,” Viktor added thoughtfully.

Ethel nodded and raised herself up so that she could see his face. “She felt something in her legs tonight, Viktor.  For the first time in four years.  Surely that must mean something, something good.”

Viktor wrapped his other arm around her and leaned down to kiss the top of her head, so tenderly that he saw tears come to her eyes. 

“I do think it means something,” he said softly.  “Let’s pray to God that it means she’s going to get better.”

*          *          *

Alone in his own room, Peter undressed, and pulled back the bedcovers. Then he sat down and swung his right leg up up onto the bed. He followed with the left and lay down, pulling just the sheet over himself, since the summer night air was still warm.      He had barely closed his eyes – even though he, like the rest of his family, felt too full of energy to sleep – when a thought came into his mind.  He had not noticed it at the time, when they were getting ready to leave the Birkners’ house, or when they arrived back home, but now he realized something.  He’d been the one who helped Lina out of her chair and into the car. Then he’d rolled her chair over to the truck and stowed it there.  After that, he had hopped right up into the front seat of the pickup.  And hopped right down once they got home.  He’d rushed to get Lina’s chair for her, and he’d pulled her up out of the car and into her seat. Then he’d pushed her into the house.  And all – this was the part that gave him pause – without limping, without any pain whatsoever in his mangled right leg.

Peter stopped breathing for a moment or two, and went over all the details in his mind again.  Yes, there really had been no pain. He was sure of it.  Still lying down, he took a deep breath. Then he began slowly bending his right knee and tilting his leg this way and that.  It didn’t hurt.  Next, he sat up in bed, pulled the covers off, and swung first his left, and then his right, leg over the side, until both feet rested on the floor. He did it effortlessly, with no discomfort.  His stomach fluttering now, he stood up and looked down at his right leg, before taking a few steps across the room.  Still no pain. He strode back and forth across the room, faster and faster.  Nothing hurt. 

Next, he lifted his left leg and stood there on his right foot. He hadn’t been able to do that since before the war, because the muscles had been so damaged, and the break a bad one.  That’s what the doctors had said.  But now, he was standing on his “bad” leg. Eager to test what was now possible, he lifted himself up onto his tip toes, and back down again.  It was as if he’d never been wounded. After a few rounds of lifting and lowering himself, Peter suddenly found himself hopping on that right leg, hopping lightly and effortlessly, just the way he’d done as a child. He hopped around the room, his chest bursting with joy.  He had to stop himself from laughing out loud.  He didn’t want to wake anyone.   How? he asked himself in amazement, tears running down his cheeks? How did it happen?

In the room kittycorner from Peter’s, Lina lay in her bed, eyes swollen from all her crying, her jaw clenched from the pain that was coursing ruthlessly through her legs. One hand clutched the bedsheet, and in the other she held the tin foil ball Bruno Groening had given her. “Trust and believe.” That’s what he told me. “The divine power helps and heals.” Squeezing the ball tight with her fingers, she began repeating these two sentences, over and over, over and over. When the morning light streamed through the curtains of her bedroom window and Ethel came in to help her get up, Lina was still holding the tin foil ball, and Ethel could tell by her face that she hadn’t slept at all.  Her face was contorted by pain, but when Ethel leaned over to kiss her daughter on the forehead, Lina looked up at her and whispered, in a tired, but determined voice, “Trust and believe, Mama. The divine force helps and heals.”

*          *          *

The next day was Friday, and the family assembled for their usual breakfast of coffee and sweet rolls before Ingrid headed off to school and Marcus to the office in Varel. Despite the excitement of the previous evening – or perhaps because most of them had not slept so much during the night –no one seemed eager to talk about their visit to the Birkners, or Bruno Groening.  They could all see that Lina was in excruciating pain: Her face was pale, and she sat at the table with her eyes closed, except when she was eating.  Her left hand, which lay in her lap, was wrapped around the tin foil ball Groening had given her.

Kristina, who had helped Lina get washed and dressed that morning, looked across the table, hoping to catch her friend’s eye.  In the nearly four years since she and Ingrid had come to live with the Gassmanns, she had seen Lina hostile, bored, angry, lacking in hope, and full of hope.  But until this morning, she had never seen her in pain, as she was now.

“My God, Lina!” Kristina exclaimed when she walked into Lina’s room and saw her friend sitting, staring glassy-eyed at the door – not at Kristina – one hand gripping the wheelchair’s arm, the other folded around the tin foil ball.  Her lips were moving slightly, but Kristina couldn’t hear any sound.  “What is it?” Kristina asked her. “What did you say?”

Now Lina shifted her gaze to Kristina’s face.  It seemed to take her a few seconds to recognize Kristina, who had to repeat her question once more before Lina answered.

“Trust and believe,” she said, so softly that Kristina just barely caught the words. “The divine power helps and heals.”

Not knowing how to respond, Kristina just nodded.

“Mr. Groening told me that last night before he left,” Lina explained, having realized that Kristina wanted an explanation, but hesitated to ask.

“Ahhh.” Kristina stood looking at Lina for a bit before continuing.  She thought about asking whether she was in pain, but that was clear without even talking about it, so she forged ahead, to the heart of the matter. “Lina,” she said, crouching down next to the wheelchair, so she could look up into Lina’s eyes, “what do you think the pain means?”

“Kristina,” Lina said in a tired voice, “this is the first time I’ve felt anything in my legs in almost four years…”

“That has to be a good sign!” Kristina burst in, eager to encourage her friend.

  “That I’m feeling something?” Lina nodded. “I believe that. I do. But I’m also so scared, Kristina.”

Now Kristina saw that tears were forming in Lina’s eyes. She placed her hand on Lina’s, the one holding the ball, and noticed that her own hand began to tingle immediately.

“Why are you scared?”

“What if this is the way it’s going to be, for the rest of my life?”  Lina grabbed Kristina’s arm with her free hand. “What if it keeps on hurting like this, and I still can’t walk?  Or if I am able to walk, but the pain stays?” She looked at Kristina with genuine fear in her eyes.

Kristina stood up and wrapped her arms around Lina.  “No, no, it won’t be like that, Lina!  It can’t!”  Now she felt tears coming to her eyes, too. For she wondered – just for a brief second –  whether Groening could have somehow harmed Lina. What if he is a charlatan after all? But then she forced this thought out of her mind. She didn’t really believe it, anyway, but even if this was the case, mentioning her thought to Lina would only make things worse. So many people have tried to rob her of her hope and faith. I won’t be one of them. I have to trust and believe, too.

“But, Kristina, it might be like that – that I’m doomed to feel this way forever!  And then what will I do? I don’t think I could go on living like that.”

Kristina had nothing to say to this, so she just kept hugging Lina as she cried.

“That’s what I’ve been thinking about, all night long,” Lina said finally. “Here is how it goes for me: First the pain comes – really, it never goes away. It’s there – strong, strong strong. And I get so frightened that it’ll be this way forever.  Then I repeat, Trust and believe. The divine power helps and heals. And the pain quiets down a little. Then it starts up all over again. Again and again, that’s what I’m thinking and feeling, Kristina.” She leaned her head forward so that it rested against Kristina’s shoulder.

“So when you say that, it helps?” Kristina asked. 

Lina nodded.  “I realized that, toward morning, so now I’ve taken to repeating it.  It helps keep the fear out of my mind.  Not totally, but it helps.”

“Trust and believe,” Kristina said, trying out the words aloud. “The divine power helps and heals.” Then she repeated the phrases a few more times. This felt right to her, and the doubts she herself had been struggling with faded away.  “Let’s just keep saying that, all day long, if we have to.”  She took Lina’s hands in hers. 

“They’ll all think I’m crazy,” Lina replied, and she even managed a thin smile.

“Let them!” Kristina told her. “We need to do whatever we have to do to help you make it through this next week, until we take you to see Mr. Groening again.”

“Oh, Kristina,” Lina cried, “but what if we go back and my legs hurt even more?  I really couldn’t stand that.  I couldn’t!”  The look of fear returned to her eyes.

“Trust and believe,” Kristina told her sternly.  “And remember all those people who got healed in Herford.”

Lina looked her in the eye. “What if that was all a lie?” she said softly. “People planted in the audience to pretend they were healed?”

Oh, so that’s occurred to her, too… Kristina stood up and put her hands on her hips. “But what about that man last night, Mr. Handler? You saw with your own eyes how his leg was healed.  You saw the way he walked around the room, how Groening broke his cane!”

“He could have been a plant, too,” Lina whispered, as if simultaneously wanting to confide in Kristina, but also not voice her doubts.

But Kristina shook her head vehemently. Her own mind was clear now. No doubts!   “No, Lina! No!  I won’t believe that, and you shouldn’t, either!” She pointed at the tin foil ball in Lina’s hand. “How could that be fake, whatever it is that makes my hand tingle when I touch it?”

Lina’s mouth opened in surprise. “I’ve been holding it all night. It makes my whole body vibrate, just like I felt at the Birkners’. You feel that, too?”

Kristina nodded. “And it gives me a peaceful feeling, a feeling of being loved. He couldn’t fake that, could he?” Kristina asked.

Lina shook her head. “I feel that, too, despite how much my legs hurt.”

The two of them were silent for a moment. Then Kristina cried, “But Lina – the newspaper clipping!  We both felt something from that.  For me it was a tingling. And happiness. And I felt that last night in the room. You did, too. I know it. You told Mr. Groening.”

“Yes, but…”

“What I’m saying is this: Even if somehow he could put something in the room that could make us feel that way – although who knows how that would be possible – even if he did, how could he put something into a sheet of newspaper? Something that would cause us both to feel that way when we held it, when we looked at his photo?”

Lina considered this, stopping for a moment as a wave of pain flooded through her.  Then she said, “Yes, you have to be right. He couldn’t fake that.”

Kristina saw a bit of light come back into her friend’s eyes.

“All right then,” she told Lina, stern again. “Then we don’t spend a single minute thinking any more about whether it’s all true or not. You just hold that ball and remind yourself of what Mr. Groening told you. We’ll say it together when we’re working or walking. Agreed?”

Lina nodded. Then she added, “You really felt all of that last night, too, Kristina?” she asked quietly.

“I did.  It felt like a wave came up from the floor, into my feet and up through my body.  A wave of energy, I guess I’d call it.  Like the tingling I felt when I held the clipping, but stronger. Wider, I’d say, if that makes any sense.”

“It does.”

Now it was Kristina’s turn to look off across the room, as if she was thinking back to the evening before and trying to regain full awareness of what she’d experienced then.

“And I felt such calm, Lina.  For the first time since the war began, I felt at peace.  It’s as if a load has been lifted off my shoulders. All the worries. I’ve worried so much about Ingrid, about what I’ll do if another war comes. Even about how I can manage to stay here.” She could see that Lina was about to object, to reassure her, but she shook her head. “I know what you want to say, that we are like family now, that we can stay here forever.  But Lina, I have dreams all the time, where I’m rushing to pack things up, waking Ingrid up to drag her out into the night to flee.” She looked at Lina and took her hands again. “But last night, when Mr. Groening was talking to us, I started to feel so light. That wave – it was more of a trickle, really, but it was still there – it flowed through my body, and I had a feeling, that…  No, I knew it. Everything will be okay. Everything is okay. For the first time since the war began, I went to bed last night feeling at ease, and really knowing that we can stay here with you all.”

“That’s so wonderful, Kristina,” Lina told her. “But I’m so sorry.”

“Whatever for?”

“That I never knew you felt that way.  I mean, I knew you were happy to be living here, to have a more normal life again. But I didn’t know you had those dreams, that you were still so worried. I’ve been so consumed with my own state that I never asked about yours. Forgive me.”

“No, no. There’s nothing to forgive. I have to tell you, Lina, I wasn’t fully aware myself of how strong the worry has been, until it lifted last night. I guess I just lived with it.  But even if I had fully realized it, I wouldn’t have said anything.  After all,” she said with a smile, “it’s not the way we are, we Germans, right?”

Lina shook her head, and knew that she didn’t even need to ask Kristina not to share the conversation they’d just had.  And when she happened to open her eyes and look over at Kristina during breakfast, Kristina blinked once at her, and Lina could see her lips silently mouthing Mr. Groening’s phrases, encouraging her.  That was a good thing, too, because in the next moment, Marcus, holding a hard-boiled egg in his left hand, began gesturing toward Lina with his right.

“I know we don’t talk about things in this family,” he began sarcastically, “but don’t we have to talk about this?”

“What precisely do you mean?” Viktor asked in a flat tone. He had hoped they would be able to get through breakfast, at least, without this conversation.

Marcus tapped the arm of Lina’s wheelchair with the egg, to crack i. “This!  The fact that she is still using this!”

“First of all,” Ethel told him sharply, “you’re talking about your sister, who has a name. Lina.”

Marcus raised his hands in his familiar gesture of mock surrender, then put the egg back down on his plate and directed a challenging gaze at his mother. “And second of all?”

Ethel stared him down.  “Second of all, why do we have to talk about it at all? Mr. Groening asked us all to come back next week, and –“

Shaking his head, Marcus brought his hands to his forehead and ran them back, smoothing his hair. “That charlatan?” he said with a smirk, looking around the table.

“Don’t say that,” Lina told him softly.

“Why not? Let’s call a spade a spade, for once, in this family!”

“Marcus, please!” Renate asked, even reaching toward him. But he just looked at her hand as it approached him and kept talking.

“I agreed with this insane plan to humor you all,” he said.  “But now it’s clear that the experiment has failed. Why can’t we just admit it and get on with our lives?” They all heard the bitterness that had crept into his tone.

“No, Marcus,” Viktor replied, an edge to his voice now, too. “You agreed because there was something in it for you if Lina was healed. You’d be able to stay at your job. Remember?”

Marcus knew that his father was trying to embarrass him, but he wasn’t going to go down that road. “But now the whole thing is irrelevant, because Lina’s never getting out of that chair. She’s stuck there.  All because that fake, Groening, took you all in. And I’ll be stuck here on the homestead for the rest of my life, too.”

At this point, Ulrich and Viktor rose to their feet in unison. But before they could speak, Peter suddenly stood up, too. He’d been sitting at the opposite end of the table from Marcus, on the other side, next to Viktor, and no one had noticed that his shoulders and face went tense when Marcus began his tirade.  The last thing anyone expected was for Peter to get involved in a dispute, even verbally, and much less, physically.  So, all eyes turned to him, and they all fell silent.

“Groening is not a fake,” Peter said in a soft, but strong voice. 

“Peter,” Lina told him, “you don’t have to protect me. I know it looks bad –“

“I’m not protecting you,” Peter replied.  “Well, I am, I guess, but what I’m saying is that I know Groening is on the up and up.”

Marcus guffawed, and they all looked back to him. “Right.  And just how do you know that?” He shook his head, picked the boiled egg up again, which he’d peeled in the meantime, and shoved it into his mouth whole.

“There was that Mr. Handler last night,” Renate put in. “The one whose leg was healed.  We all saw it!”

Marcus shook his head again and spoke with his full mouth, but they all understood. “A plant.  Handler never had an injury in his life.”

“And the woman behind me,” Kristina boldly reminded him.  “Her pain went away.”

Marcus rolled his eyes. “So she said.  I can’t believe you were all taken in by him.”

“But thousands were healed in Herford,” Lina said, and then, silently, kept repeating in her mind, Trust and believe. The divine power helps and heals.

Marcus was about to offer a retort, when everyone noticed that Peter was now standing near the corner of the table, between Ethel and Ulrich, in the middle of the kitchen floor.

“And not just in Herford,” Peter said.

“What’s that supposed to mean?” Marcus asked, not even turning to look at his brother.

“This,” Peter replied simply.  Then he slowly lifted his left leg and stood there, balancing on his right leg, the one everyone knew was his “bad” leg.  At first no one grasped the significance of this posture. It was only when Peter began hopping on his right leg that it slowly dawned on them.  Ethel started out by wondering why Peter was jumping up and down like a schoolboy, but ended by springing from her seat and grabbing him by the elbow. Even so, she couldn’t get any words out. Nor could any of the rest of them.  Marcus finally deigned to turn his head, and when he saw what Peter was doing, his mouth fell open. Bits of hard-boiled egg dropped out and onto his shirt.

Peter stopped hopping and proceeded to walk the length of the kitchen, from the back door to the fireplace. His gait was as smooth as it had been before the war. 

Ingrid was the first to speak. “Mama,” she said, leaning over to Kristina, “Can I hop, too?” Kristina looked at her, as if she hadn’t even heard her daughter, and then shook her head.

“Peter?” Lina asked finally. “What –“

But he put up his hand and said to them all, “That’s not all.  Look at this.”  He walked through the doorway into the addition to the house. Although only Renate could see what was happening from her seat, all of them could hear that Peter was climbing the stairs to the second floor.  They could hear the sound of his footfalls on the wooden steps, moving steadily and evenly up, and then back down again.

When he reentered the kitchen, his face flushed and his eyes shining, with a broad smile on his face, everyone was speechless for a long moment, even Marcus.  Then Viktor and Ulrich, who had remained standing following Marcus’ earlier remarks, both made their way over to him.  A moment later, everyone was standing around him, except for Marcus, who remained seated on principle, and Lina, who had backed her wheelchair up and rolled over next to Peter. 

“You see, Marcus,” Peter said to his brother, speaking strongly and clearly now, “Groening really can heal. How could he have faked this?”

  A chorus of voices asked him to explain how and when it had happened, and he told them the whole story of when he had realized he was healed, and of his nighttime gymnastics.

“You should have awakened us,” Renate said.  “Our room is right across from yours.”

“You should have told us all!” Ulrich added, realizing too late, from the awkward look on Peter’s face, and from the way Lina had bent her head down, why it was that Peter had kept the news to himself.

In the silence that followed her grandfather’s words, Lina raised her head back up. She reached over and took Peter’s hand in hers.

“I understand why you didn’t wake the whole household,” she told him tenderly. “You’re always trying to protect me.  But you should have told us right away.”

Peter, who was experiencing a mixture of elation at his own healing and despair at the knowledge of how his success would affect his dear sister, leaned down and hugged her tightly around the shoulders.  At this gesture of loving affection, she began to cry, but then hastened to reassure them all.

“No, it’s all right. I am so happy for you, Peter.  It’s a miracle!”

Kristina, who was standing behind Lina’s chair now and also next to Marcus’ chair, spoke up. “But not just that.” They all turned to look at her. “Don’t you see? It proves that Mr. Groening isn’t a fake.”

Renate nodded. “Yes, it certainly does. The living proof is right before us!” She wrapped an arm around Peter’s waist and hugged him to her.

“And if Peter has been healed,” Kristina went on, more outspoken in this moment than she had been in her four years with this family, “then Lina can be, too.”

“Yes, yes!” Ethel affirmed. “She will be healed, too.”

“We’ll see Mr. Groening again next week,” Renate added. “You just have to hold out until then, Lina, dear.”

At this point, Ingrid, who saw no reason why she shouldn’t have some fun, if a miracle had just occurred, wedged her way between Renate and Peter and took Peter’s hand.

“Uncle Peter,” she said, “let’s hop, together!” 

This brought a laugh from everyone, even from Marcus.  Although he had remained seated during the flurry of activity and excitement around Peter, scowling, as if he was furious at having been proved wrong, now he pushed back his chair. He stood up and slipped an arm around Kristina’s waist. She turned and gave him a questioning glance, surprised that he would show her this affection in front of his family. She was also taken aback by the change she saw in him. Two minutes earlier, he had been filled with vitriol, but now his eyes were bright, his smile genuine.

“Hop to your heart’s content, Brother!” he called out to Peter, raising his right arm in an expansive, celebratory gesture.

Everyone turned to look at him, wary that his remark was but another sarcastic attack. But the change in his demeanor struck them all, too.

“Now that you’re back on your feet, soon you’ll be back in the forest, too.  Which means I’ll be staying in Varel for good!”

At this, the family members fell into an awkward silence. Marcus seemed not to understand why.  He felt Kristina slip out of his embrace. 

“Ingrid, come on,” she said a bit curtly, “let’s get you off to school.”

Even Ulrich sounded gruff when he said to Marcus, “Don’t you have a car to get back to your boss?”

Lina, without a word to anyone, slowly turned her chair. Rolling through the kitchen door that Kristina held open for her after she and Ingrid had gone out, she pushed herself down the ramp and into the yard, over to where the path led into the forest.  There she sat, squeezing the tin foil ball in her right hand, and soundlessly repeating Groening’s phrase over and over again.

It wasn’t long before Peter came out of the house, too. But instead of heading into the workshop as he usually did following breakfast, he strode over to where Lina was sitting and crouched down beside her, resting on his knees.

“Lina, I’m so sorry,” he said quietly, laying his hand on her arm.

When she turned to him, he saw not the blame he had feared he’d find in her eyes, but love.  Certainly, he could see the pain on her face, too, but he realized now that he was not the cause of it.

“Peter,” she asked quietly, “why are you apologizing? You have nothing to be sorry for!”

“But I do,” he told her. “For getting healed while you’re still in this damned chair!” 

“How could that be your fault?”

Peter shrugged. “I don’t know… Believe me, Lina, last night at the Birkners’, I wasn’t thinking of myself at all!  The whole time, I was just thinking of you and asking Mr. Groening for you to be healed.  I didn’t stop doing that – not for a single second!” 

“Peter,” Lina said firmly, “it’s not your fault that I wasn’t healed last night!”

“But then whose fault is it?” Peter replied, almost angry now. “Damn it, Lina! It should have been you, not me!”

Lina shook her head. “Don’t talk like that, Peter.  I’m really, truly, so happy that you got healed.”

“If I could trade places with you, you know I would,” Peter told her, grasping her arm more firmly now.

“I know you would, dear Peter,” Lina said, her voice as full of love as her eyes, even though her whole body seemed to be tensing with pain now.  “But I wouldn’t want you to.”

“Why not?  You should want that. I was the one who crippled you in the first place. It should be me who’s in that chair, not you!”

She pulled her arm from his grasp and, taking hold of the wheelchair’s wheels, turned herself so that she was facing him.

“How can you say that, Peter?” she said, leaning forward and taking his face in her hands. “It wasn’t your fault I got hurt.  I don’t blame you!”

“But I still blame myself,” he said. 

“Please, we’ve been over that! It wasn’t your fault! And besides,” Lina went on, “did you see the look on Marcus’ face this morning when you got up and started hopping around? Good God, Peter, you proved him wrong!  In front of everyone!” Here Lina began to smile as she remembered the scene.

Peter smiled back at her and nodded his head. “I have to admit that it did feel good to get the better of him, for once.”

“It’s not just that,” Lina told him. “Seeing you this way – the new you! – gives me hope, just like Mama and Grandma and Kristina said.  Hope that I can be healed, too.”

“I believe it, too!” Peter said earnestly.

“But you don’t know how many doubts kept rushing into my head last night, Peter.”

“Because of your pain?”

Lina nodded.  “And because I felt like a failure, somehow.”

“Why a failure?”

“Because that Mr. Handler got healed, and the woman behind Kristina, too.  And all I got was pain. The thought kept coming into my brain that I did something wrong, and that’s why I wasn’t healed, too.”

“Oh, God, Lina,” Peter cried, grasping her hands that were still cupping his face, “And then I come in this morning and announce that I got healed, too. I’m so sorry!”

“Stop that!” Lina told him sharply.  “You are my hope, don’t you understand? Now I can watch you walk, as if nothing ever happened to you in the war, and that reminds me that Mr. Groening is not a fake, not a charlatan.  You are living proof of that for me.”

As Peter listened to her speak, he noticed that his left cheek was feeling very warm beneath Lina’s palm, and that she was holding something against his cheek. Reaching up and taking her hand, he saw the tin foil ball that Groening had given her the night before.

“It felt so warm where it was touching my cheek!” he told her, leaning over and looking at it with curiosity.  “Is it just tin foil?”

She grasped it between her thumb and forefinger. “I think so.  But I feel heat when I hold it, too. And tingling. The way I felt it in the room last night.” She held it out to him. “Here, hold it yourself.”

Peter hesitated at first. “But Groening gave it to you,” he said.  But when Lina moved it toward him once more, he opened his hand so that she could lay it onto his palm. He felt the warmth again, and then a slight tingling appeared, first in his hand and then up through his entire arm.

“Did you feel that at the Birkners’?” Lina asked him.

“I’m not sure,” he told her.  “I don’t really recall feeling anything then. I was concentrating on watching Groening and watching you, too, to see if anything was changing. So, maybe I just wasn’t paying attention to what I was feeling, even when he asked us to do that.  But I feel it now, holding this.”  He closed his eyes and sat crouched there like that for a few moments, taking in the sensations that were flowing not just in his arm now, but through other parts of his body, too.  When he looked back up at Lina’s face, their eyes met, and Peter felt a great joy.  He could see that she felt the same way.

“You know what this is?” he asked her, indicating the ball.

  “Besides just a tin foil ball, you mean?”

Peter nodded, and Lina shook her head.  Then he leaned forward,

“It’s a fairy rune,” he said, a conspiratorial smile on his face.

Lina laughed now, a sweet, tinkling laugh that reminded Peter of their mother’s. “How did I not realize that?” she asked him, opening her eyes wide and then winking at him.

“I don’t know!” Peter replied. “It’s obvious!” He was so happy to see her smiling. “And do you know what this means?  This part here?” He pointed to a series of small wrinkles on the ball’s surface that did, in fact, resemble tiny versions of their old fairy runes’ letters.

Lina leaned over to scrutinize the wrinkle-letters, eager to play along.  She looked back up at Peter.

“No, I don’t.” She couldn’t wait to hear what he’d say.

“Hope,” Peter replied, with an impish grin, holding his sister’s eyes with his own. “Just the same as on our runes.”  He handed the ball back to Lina, who brought it up close to her eyes and examined it.

“You’re absolutely right,” she told him, taking his hand in hers now. “How did I not realize that, either?”  And when she began to cry, a frown came to Peter’s face. He was about to apologize for upsetting her, but she shook her head. “Mr. Groening knows us well, doesn’t he? To give me a fairy rune?”

“And thank goodness I was here to interpret it for you!” Peter said, smiling again now.

Lina nodded. “Yes, thank God.”

Peter lowered himself down until he was sitting on the ground, with his knees bent. He wrapped his arms around his knees and clasped his hands together, marveling at how comfortable he felt.  Lina, who had seen her brother struggle over the past four years to find a position in which he could comfortably sit or stand, was struck by how at ease he looked.

“So,” she asked him, almost gingerly, “your leg doesn’t hurt anymore?”

Peter shook his head. “It isn’t just that I can move it normally again. There’s not the least bit of pain.”  He didn’t want to go into it in detail, fearing that Lina might feel discouraged.  But she forged ahead.

“How did you realize you’d been healed, anyway?” she asked, and Peter could tell she was truly curious.  So he told her once more the story of what had happened when he’d gotten into bed the night before.  She smiled as he told her how he’d been hopping all over his bedroom.

“I can’t believe I didn’t hear you!” she said. “Or Grandma and Grandpa.  They’re just a stone’s throw away from your room.”

“But their hearing isn’t as good as yours,” he replied, and they both laughed.

For a few minutes, they both directed their gaze into the forest, which was coming alive in the early morning light, innumerable insects and spider webs visible in the thin rays of sunshine that made their way to the spaces between the trees.

“It’s so beautiful, isn’t it?” Lina asked, her voice calm.

“The forest? Yes.”

“Even though I haven’t been able to go in there,” Lina went on, “just sitting here these four years has helped me a lot.”  She looked over at Peter.  “Even from here I can feel God. Not as much as when I was amongst the trees, of course.  But I can still feel Him.”

Peter nodded.  Then his mouth opened, as if a thought had just come to him, and he jumped – easily! – to his feet.  He stood so that his back was to Lina, right in front of her chair.  Then he crouched down once more and bent his arms so that his hands stretched back toward Lina.

“Lean forward and put your arms around my neck,” he said to her. “Can you do that?”

“I… I don’t know,” she said, perplexed as to what he intended. “I can try.  But why?”

He turned and looked back over his shoulder at her. 

“Remember back after the accident, when I said I wished I could carry you to the treehouse?”

“Yes, but…”

“Well, now I can carry you.”

“But, no, Peter!” Lina cried.  “You’re not strong enough!”

He turned around again. “I don’t believe that, Lina!  I’m healed!  I am strong enough.  Do you doubt that Groening healed me entirely?”

This gave Lina pause.  She didn’t want to doubt that, because then she might start doubting that she could be completely healed, too…

“All right,” she said, finally. “Let’s try it. But if you get too tired –“

“Don’t even say that!” Peter told her.  “Just lean forward and put your hands around my neck.  I’ll reach back and hold onto you under your knees. And with any luck, I’ll be able to tip you forward and walk that way.”

“A piggy back ride,” Lina said, her voice growing light again.

“That’s right,” Peter told her. “Just like when you were a little girl.”

And that is exactly what they did.  It took a couple tries for Peter to lean forward the right amount so that he could both get Lina squarely onto his back and slip his arms beneath her knees without them getting caught on her skirts. But then, suddenly, there they were, moving slowly, but surely along the path that led into the forest. 

Lina was still holding the tin foil ball in her right hand, which made it harder for her to hold onto Peter, but he didn’t mind having it press against his collarbone. Quite the opposite, really: It helped him feel stronger, somehow. Since coming back from the war, he’d never hauled this much weight around, so he was surprised at how easy it was for him to carry Lina through the woods. It felt to him like Bruno Groening was walking along the path with them, helping him carry Lina, helping her hold onto him.

When they got to the old beech tree, Peter was all set to try to climb the ladder with Lina on his back, but she wouldn’t hear of it.

“That ladder may hold one of us, but it’ll never hold us both,” she told him, laughing. “Just lower me down here, and I’ll lean against the trunk.”

And so it was that Lina and Peter came to be sitting at the foot of the beech tree that had played such an important role in their parents’ lives.

“Remember how Mama would tell how she and Uncle Hans used to play up there when they were little?” Lina asked, leaning her head back to look up at the logs that formed the floor of the treehouse.

Peter nodded. “They played Hansel and Gretel, right?”

“I know she said they played that when they went out in the woods and built little lean-tos to play in, but probably they did it up there, too. It’d be easy to pretend that was a witch’s house, don’t you think?”

“I do!” Peter looked up, too, and reached out a hand to take hold of the rope ladder.  “Why do you think you and I never played Hansel and Gretel?” he asked as he absentmindedly swung the ladder to and fro.

Lina shrugged and stared off into the woods, noticing how happy she felt being out amongst her dear trees again, after such a long absence. Then a thought came into her mind.  More of a memory, really, of their childhood.

“Maybe it was because we didn’t need to make up a witch.  We had a real, live terrifying creature right at home.”

Peter turned and saw that she was looking at him.  She held his gaze and then slipped her arm through his.

“You mean Marcus?” Peter asked her finally.

“Mmhmm.”  She looked away. “God, I’m sorry to say that.”

“But it was true, Lina. And you’re right. We didn’t need to invent a witch.  We needed to escape one.”

They both sat silent for several minutes, each taking in the freshness of the morning air, listening to the insects that flew around them, and delighting in the smell of the earth beneath them. 
            “You’re right,” Lina told him at last.  “This – not just the treehouse, but the whole forest, our fairy runes, all of it – it was our sanctuary, wasn’t it?”

Peter nodded.  “It really was.” He swung the rope ladder again.  “I don’t think I ever told you the feeling that came over me every time we climbed up the ladder and then pulled it up behind us.”

“No, I don’t recall you ever telling me that. What was it?”

“It felt like such a relief. I knew we were safe up there. Safe from him.  That he wouldn’t be able to get us if we just scrambled up there and hauled up the ladder.”

“I did notice that you always seemed to run the last little bit to the treehouse, that you always hurried me to climb up. I just thought it was part of a game. Sometimes we pretended wolves were chasing us. Remember?”

“I do.”

“But it wasn’t a game you were playing, was it? You really were scared.”

Peter nodded.  “I was. For myself. But more for you. You were so defenseless.”

“But you were the one he took everything out on. I don’t think I was ever really in danger. I was so scared of him, but I don’t think he would ever have hurt me, not really.”

Peter’s face grew stern now. “I would have killed him if he had.”  He looked at Lina, extracted his arm from hers and wrapped it around her shoulder. “I mean, really. I told him so. That if he ever laid a hand on you, I would kill him in his sleep.”

Lina stared at him, her eyes wide and her mouth open in shock. “You did?”

“Yeah.  I don’t know why he believed me, but he did.  Maybe because he sensed I really would do it. And I would have.”  He tightened his arm around her shoulders and pulled her toward him.

“My God, Peter,” Lina said quietly. “I never knew that. Never had any idea.”

“You couldn’t see how truly monstrous he was, Lina.  I saw it, even before you were born. The things he said and did. The anger in him.”

“I saw that, the anger. And felt it.  He didn’t have to actually do anything to me.  I felt that he wanted to. But he took it out on you, instead.  But why didn’t you fight back when he attacked you?”

“I didn’t believe I had any choice.  Doesn’t make much sense, does it? It was like an unspoken bargain I made with him. As if we both understood that his hatred had to expressed somehow – that he just couldn’t hold it inside him – and that someone had to bear the brunt of it.  And that if it wasn’t going to be you – which I told him I would not allow to happen – then it would be me.”  Peter said this in such a matter-of-fact tone that Lina didn’t know quite how to respond. 

“You make it sound like just divvying up the chores or something,” she said softly. “It’s horrific, Peter.”

“I guess it was,” he replied.  “But it was worth it.  Every second of it.”

“But why didn’t you tell Papa?” Lina cried. “Surely he wouldn’t have let it go on?”

“Marcus also made it clear to me that if he got punished, then you would be the one who’d suffer.  So, as much as I could, I kept quiet. Sometimes I just couldn’t. If the bruises were too big, and so on.”

“But Peter,” Lina said, crying now, “I wasn’t worth you going through that!  There’s no way I could be worth that!”

“Lina, you were always worth it.  You’re my sister.  We’ve always been a team, haven’t we? From the time you were little.”

“It’s true,” Lina replied. “Especially when we came out here. It was as if no one else existed, and especially not Marcus. We really were safe here. With each other, and with the forest.” She paused and reached up to touch his hand.  “I’ve loved you more than anyone in the family, Peter.  Something about you – I have always felt so close to you.”

She felt him nod.

“I’ve always felt that, too,” he said.  “Like there was – is – some invisible connection between us.”

“Yes,” Lina told him. “It’s as if I can sense you, somehow.  I can’t explain it. As a spirit, maybe?  It doesn’t make any sense, but that’s the only way I can put it.”

“I understand.  I have always felt that way, too. From the time you were born.”

“Really?”

“Yes. I’d stand by your cradle, and I’d look at you, and when our eyes met, it was like somehow we’d known each other already for a lifetime. And now we were together in one family again.  I couldn’t get enough of looking into your eyes when you were a baby.  To see in you someone I recognized, and who recognized me, too.”

“I don’t remember that, of course – that recognition, I mean – but I do recall you standing by my cradle a lot, and just being with me.”

Peter laughed.  “It was funny.  Mama would chide me for it. She thought I was trying to avoid doing my chores, so she’d chase me out of the room.  She didn’t realize that I just loved you!”

Lina smiled at this story.  “I knew that you loved me!  I felt that so strongly, Peter.  I never thought of it as some kind of connection from another lifetime.  But the ties were there, even so. When you went off to the war, I thought I’d die.  You felt so far away, and I couldn’t feel your presence in the same way as when you were home.”

Peter just nodded in affirmation that he had experienced the same thing.

“And then you came home, wounded,” Lina went on, “and I was beside myself with worry.  I kept thinking that if I had been there, it never would have happened.”

“Me getting wounded?” Peter asked in surprise.

“Yes.  That sounds silly, doesn’t it?  How could I think I could have prevented it? What could I possibly have done to keep you safe? Nothing!”

“Maybe not in the way you’re talking about. But knowing that you were at home and still loving me – you and the rest of the family, too – that helped so much. It gave me the will to survive, and to not be captured, that day when I was shot. It was thinking of you all here – and especially of you – that got me back to my unit. I’ll still never understand how I managed to run on that injured leg.”

“God must have protected you. Don’t you think?” Lina asked him.

“I do.”

They were both looking off into the trees again.  Lina noticed that the pain in her legs had quieted down.  In fact, she couldn’t detect any discomfort at all in them at the moment. 

“Are you in pain now?” Peter asked, as if reading her thoughts.

She shook her head. “Not really. Just a few aches. I don’t know why that should be.”  Then she laughed. “Why am I looking for a reason? I should just be happy about it!”

“Are you?” Peter asked, his tone serious. “Happy, I mean?”

“Yes, I am,” she told him.  “I am.  But what makes me happier is that your leg is healed.”

“Why’s that?”

“I don’t know, to be honest,” Lina told him. Once more, she took hold of his hand that was lying on her shoulder. It was a minute before she spoke again.  “As strange as that sounds, I think I feel relieved.”

“Relieved? Because if Bruno Groening healed me, then he can heal you, too?”

“No, that’s not it.”

“What, then?”

She paused again, as she tried to work it out in her mind. “I just now realized that I have felt responsible for you getting wounded in the war.”

Peter leaned forward now and turned to face her. “But Lina, that’s insane!  You weren’t even there!”

“Exactly,” she told him. “I’m not saying it makes sense.  I’m just telling you what I have felt, deep inside me, ever since you came back from the war, with your leg mangled.”

“You’re right! It makes no sense!” He hugged her. “As you are always telling me, it was not your fault!” He smiled, trying to shift her out of this odd frame of mind.

“Yes, and that’s the other thing. Me getting hurt was not your fault. It was mine!  I can see it now.”

Now Peter removed his arm from around her shoulders and took both her hands in his.  “That is simply impossible, Lina,” he told her sternly. “I won’t listen to you talk like that.”

“No, but do listen!” she said to him, equally sternly. “Remember how no one could understand how the accident happened?”

I understood it,” Peter said petulantly. “I gave the horses the signal to move, and they did, and the wood rolled out onto you.”

“Do you actually remember giving them the signal?” Lina questioned him.

“No. But I must have done it.  There’s no other explanation,” he insisted.

“Yes there is,” Lina told him.

“Well, I’d like to hear it, if there is one, after all this time!”

  “I gave them the signal,” Lina told him softly.

He just stared at her.  Before he could object, she continued.

“Those horses know me as well as they know you,” she said. “And I banged on the side rail of the wagon, just the way I always did when I was letting them know we were done putting in a load and they could start off.”

“But I don’t remember hearing it,” Peter said.
            “And I don’t remember giving it,” Lina replied.

Peter gave her a confused look.

“Or, rather, I should say, I didn’t recall giving them the signal, not until last night.”

“At the Birkners’?” Peter asked her.

“Yes.  We were sitting there, and Mr. Groening was talking. And all of a sudden, a picture flashed into my mind. It was like a newsreel, except that it was in color.  I saw myself, from a distance, well, not from a big distance. But I was standing there behind the wagon, and the back railings weren’t up. And then, very methodically, I reached out and rapped my palm against the side of the wagon. Twice.  Very firmly.  And they started off.  And the wood fell.”

“Is that all you saw?” Peter asked, clearly shaken.

“Yes.  It didn’t make sense to me at the time. It was only last night, when I was lying there awake and in pain in the darkness, when the vision came back to me again, that I understood. It was all my fault. I made the mistake that day, not you.”

Peter leaned over and put his head in his hands.  Lina watched as he began to shake his head back and forth.  “No, no, Lina!” he cried. “That can’t be what happened.”

“But I’m telling you, it is,” she insisted, calmly, her voice full of love.  “That’s why I’ve always been able to tell you you weren’t to blame – because you weren’t! Even if I didn’t remember what I’d done until last night.”

“It doesn’t make sense, though,” Peter told her, looking at her now with eyes full of tears. “You loaded the wagon and worked with those horses for years, just like you said. And you never did that before – giving the signal before everything was ready.”

“And yet, I did it that day.  And what’s more,” Lina said, “it looks like I did it deliberately.”

“What does that mean?” Peter asked, his brows knitted. “I can’t make sense of any of this.”

“I mean, when I saw the newsreel, or whatever you want to call it, in my head, I could see it all very clearly. I looked at the wood, oh, and I didn’t tell you this part: I noticed that the back rails were not up – I know that, because I saw myself look over to the other side of the wagon, where they were lying on the ground. And then I paused and then, I consciously raised my hand and gave the signal.  It was quite deliberate, Peter, not an offhand, absentminded action.”

“But why would you do that deliberately?” Peter nearly shouted, slapping his knees with his open hands.  “Why??”

“I don’t know,” Lina told him simply. “And I never remembered it after the accident.  Why didn’t I remember doing it? And why did I do it? God, I wish I had remembered. It would have saved you feeling like you were to blame these past four years. Peter, I’m so sorry!”

“No, Lina, no!” he cried, rising to his feet. “I can’t accept this.  I’m the one who made the mistake, not you.  And what does this have to do with you feeling guilty about my wounded leg? Is everything suddenly your fault now?”

“I have no idea, Peter,” she told him, suddenly sounding tired. “I’m just telling you the way it feels to me, and what I experienced last night.”

As Peter was standing before her, Lina caught sight of someone coming toward them through the forest.  Seeing Lina looking at something behind him, Peter turned and saw their father gradually making his way through the dry leaves and small branches that lay in his path.

It was odd for them to see Viktor from such a distance.  Usually they saw him from across the table or across the yard, but not from fifty yards away. There seemed to Lina to be something lighter about his gait than before, and at the same time, stronger. Her father had always seemed strong to her, but in a deeply-rooted way.  Now he was moving through the trees in a confident, but also fluid, way, and he swayed a bit as he walked, the way the trees around him swayed when the wind came through the forest.  If Lina squinted a bit, he resembled the pines he was walking amongst, his arms out a bit from his sides, angled down toward the forest floor. Then, realizing that Peter and Lina had seen them, he raised both arms in greeting, and suddenly, he was an aspen, his hands waving at them the way the aspen leaves always waved at him.

“Mama and Grandma were starting to worry about you two,” he said cheerfully when he’d gotten close enough for them to be able to hear him.  “But I saw you set off along the path, and I figured this was where you were headed. I told them I’d come look for you.”

“I’m sorry they were worried,” Lina told him.  “It was just a whim.”

“I wanted to bring her here,” Peter explained.  He leaned over and patted the trunk of the beech tree. “She’s missed this old friend so much.”

Viktor nodded and took a seat in front of Lina, then motioned for Peter to sit back down, too. Now that Peter could see their father clearly, he, too, noticed that something was different about him.  The cheerfulness was new.  His smile looked relaxed.

Viktor leaned over and touched Lina’s foot affectionately. “How are you feeling?”

“It’s strange, Papa, but since I’ve been out here, my legs have almost entirely stopped hurting. Just some little aches now.”

A broad smile came to Viktor’s face. “Really? Lina, that’s wonderful! There’s something about this forest, isn’t there?” he asked, looking up to take in the treehouse and the spreading branches of the beech tree.  “You two, you’ve known it all your lives. You know that you feel something special here – heaven, that’s what your grandfather calls it. I didn’t believe it at first.  Didn’t know what he meant. I was never any place like this until I came here, back in ’21.”

“Aren’t there forests in Schweiburg?” Lina asked. “I don’t recall seeing so many trees when we were living there, but then again, I was little.”

“And we weren’t there for so long,” Peter added.  “But mostly, there was the water, what with the coast being so close.”

Viktor nodded.  “That’s right. I grew up with the coast, but the water never really called to me.  Nature in general didn’t.  Not until I came here and started working with your grandpa.”

“Why do you think that was, Papa?” Lina asked.

Viktor reached down and picked up a handful of leaves in varying stages of dryness and decomposition.  Then he closed his eyes and took in a deep breath.  Watching him, Peter and Lina naturally did the same. 

“This smells as good to me as Mama’s rabbit stew,” Viktor said after he’d let his breath out, and they all laughed. “But it really is like your grandpa says.  You feel God out here.  I know you feel it, don’t you?”

Peter and Lina both nodded.

“That’s why I brought her here,” Peter said. “I could tell she needed to feel that.”

“We all do, Son,” Viktor replied, his tone softer than they’d ever heard it, tender even. “This forest – it saved me, back then.  Being out with these trees and taking in God’s divine energy.  I felt like I could stand among them and take in their strength.”

“But then why did we move to Schweiburg?” Lina asked.

Peter looked at his father intently. Lina saw the look and realized that Peter, since he was four years older, must remember that time more than she did.

But Viktor deflected the question.  “That is another story, for another day.  Not a happy story. And so, not for today. Because today is a happy day. Right?”

“Yes!” Lina chimed in. “Peter was able to carry me all the way out here, Papa.  It really is a miracle.”

Viktor nodded.  Then he took hold of the toe of Lina’s shoe and gave it a playful shake. “And soon, no one will need to carry you to the treehouse.”

“Peter was all set to try to haul me up there when we got there, but I wouldn’t let him,” Lina said.

“Probably just as well,” Peter said with a chuckle. “That would have been quite a sight for you, Papa, if we tried it and the ladder gave out, and you came upon us both lying on the ground in a heap!”

Viktor smiled, and then recalled his first visit to the treehouse with Ethel.

“The first time Mama brought me here,” he began, leaning back on his elbows and crossing his legs out in front of him, “I was worried about that ladder, too.”  He glanced up at it. “It’d been lying up in the treehouse for who knows how many years.  Could have been rotted through.”

“But it wasn’t, right?” Lina said.  She hadn’t heard this story since she was little.

“Nope.  I climbed up on that branch there,” Viktor told them, pointing to the branch in question. “Then I managed to lean over and grab hold of the rope, up there, right where it’s tied to the floor.  Of course, I was doing my best to impress Mama with my strength and daring.” He winked at Peter, as if sharing a secret, man to man.

“And did you?” Lina asked.

“Of course!” Viktor told her with a laugh. “Or, in any case, at least I didn’t fall down, and the ladder didn’t collapse.  I considered that a success.”

“But how did you manage to make her the ring in secret?” Peter asked.

Viktor winked at him again. “That information’s classified.” He tipped his head in Lina’s direction. “But don’t worry, I’ll share it with you when you need it, Son.”

“And when you find out,” Lina said, “you’ll tell me, right?”

“I don’t think you have clearance,” Peter told her sternly, and they all laughed. 

“Feels good to laugh, here in the heart of the forest,” Viktor said.  “Especially right here. At this treehouse, where Mama and Uncle Hans played, and Mama and I fell in love, where the two of you played.  Where your children will play, too, God willing.”

This heartfelt sharing of feelings and wishes left all three of them feeling tears rush to their eyes, but Lina was the only one who let them flow. Peter hastily got to his feet and tugged on the ladder.

“But I say we replace the ladder before then. If I’m going to ask a girl to marry me up there, I don’t want to risk making a fool of myself by falling through a rotten rope.”

“Agreed,” Viktor said, leaning forward and brushing the dead leaf fragments off his shirtsleeves. “But now, I think we’d best get on back to the house.  Otherwise, Mama and Grandma are likely to mount a search party themselves. And you know what that means, don’t you?”

Peter and Lina shook their heads.

“Dinner will be late!” Viktor said with a laugh. “And we don’t want that.”

Lina and Peter laughed at this, and in Lina’s voice he heard her mother, twenty-eight years earlier, standing at the foot of this very tree, back in the days before things needed to be made right.

They decided that Viktor would carry Lina out through the forest. It was a good thing he had come out to find them, because Peter now realized he would have had a hard time getting Lina situated on his back again, since she was sitting on the ground.  But father and son managed to first lift Lina up beneath her shoulders until she was leaning more or less upright against the beech trunk. Then Viktor was able to crouch down before her, and, with Peter’s help, Lina leaned onto her father’s strong back and wrapped her arms around his neck. 

Viktor straightened up and gave a little hop to settle Lina into a more comfortable position, and then began walking.  He felt that she was holding something in her hand that was pressing against his neck, but it wasn’t bothersome. In fact, he began to feel more energetic. He was sensing not just the divine energy of the forest now. There was also a tingling that reminded him of what he’d felt at the Birkners’ the evening before. But he didn’t give it any real thought. Instead, he focused his attention on how good it was to be helping Lina.  He was glad for the conversation they’d had, too. It reminded him of the early years, when he and the kids would play together.  Too bad Marcus wasn’t here with us today.  Although he knew, deep inside, that if his oldest son had been there, things would have played out differently.

Little by little, Viktor told himself as he walked toward the end of the path and the bright sunshine that awaited them there. Step by step.  Soon it’ll all be good again.

*          *          *

After the foray to the treehouse, Lina noticed that although the pain in her legs eased when she was among the trees, it gradually increased again once Viktor had carried her back to the yard and then into the house.  At first, Lina grew frightened when her legs began to ache once more.  That evening, on her walk with Kristina, she expressed her worry.

“Kristina,” she told her friend, even before they rolled out onto the main road, “why do they hurt again?  I felt so light and happy by the treehouse.  And now… What did I do wrong?” Her long braid was wrapped around her wrist, the end tucked into her left hand, while her right held her tin foil ball.

Kristina heard the fear creeping into Lina’s voice, and although she had no real answer to Lina’s question, she knew that she couldn’t give into the doubt that was knocking at the door of her own mind. Trust and believe, she told herself. And then some words came.

“Maybe you should ask what you did right.

“What do you mean?” Lina asked her.

“Well,” Kristina continued, allowing the sense inside her to form into words, “you felt better in the woods. That’s true, isn’t it?”

Lina nodded.

“Maybe that was the right thing.  You did a right thing.”

“Going into the woods? That was the right thing, you’re saying?”

“I don’t know. I just have a feeling that this is the way to look at it.”

Lina fell silent, and they walked, by which we should understand that Kristina pushed her in the wheelchair, as she’d done nearly every day for the past four years. Kristina rolled the chair along, and Lina held the tin foil ball in her hand, alternately squeezing it lightly and bringing it up to her face so that she could inspect the so-called writing she and Peter had detected on it.

“To our usual spot?” Kristina asked as they neared the spot where they could see the fallen log where they would often sit and discuss the day’s events.

“No,” Lina said, in a tone whose lightness surprised Kristina, given the fear she’d detected just minutes earlier. 

“Where, then?”

“I mean, go to the log, but then on along the path there. Even just a little ways.”

They had never done this before, since the path was overgrown with grass and small bushes and blocked by fallen branches.  The family didn’t use it now, and Lina had never wanted to ask Kristina to go to the effort of clearing a space or maneuvering the heavy wheelchair along. But now, she thought it might be worth a try.  An experiment.

Kristina understood what Lina had in mind, and she eagerly set about removing the smaller debris from the path.  Lina watched as twigs, larger branches, and pine cones flew into the underbrush where Kristina tossed them along the sides of the path, along with clumps of the taller grasses.  After about ten minutes of this, Kristina straightened up, turned to Lina, then rubbed her hands together vigorously to shake off the dirt. Then she pushed aside tendrils of the wavy, brown hair that had come free of her braid and fallen into her eyes.

“Ready?” she asked, wiping her hands on her apron.  When Lina nodded, Kristina got behind the wheelchair and rolled it over to where they could now see a space that looked slightly navigable. 

The sky was still light out by the road, but even just a small distance inside the forest, the shadows were already deepening, and the sounds of the evening bugs louder.  They managed to move to the end point of where Kristina had removed the obstacles, about twenty feet in, without much trouble, although Kristina did find it harder to push the chair here than out along the grass or the road. The two young women didn’t converse.  Kristina was silently leaning against the chair, to move it forward, and Lina was softly repeating, Trust and believe. The divine power helps and heals.  From her position behind the wheelchair, Kristina couldn’t see the path, but she kept pushing anyway.

At some point, she noticed that the grass was taller beneath the wheels and her shoes.  Then she bumped over a small branch in the path. In the next moment, she felt the left wheel dip sharply and then come to an abrupt halt.  Kristina’s legs somehow kept moving, though, and she found herself leaning forward over the back of the wheelchair, which had stopped short.  And as she herself was resting with her stomach against the back of Lina’s seat, she saw that Lina, too,  had continued moving: She was toppling out of the chair, a surprised, “Oh!” escaping from her lips.  Kristina managed to catch hold of Lina’s shoulder as she tipped, but with the chair between them, she couldn’t break Lina’s fall.  She watched in surprise and horror as her friend half slid, half pitched, forward and onto the ground. She came to rest on her stomach. 

“My God, Lina!” Kristina cried, rushing to Lina. “Are you hurt?”

Lina remembered the day not many weeks earlier, when she had tried to stand up and had similarly found herself sprawled in front of her wheelchair.  This time at least I made it further into the forest!  she thought to herself.  “Yes,” I think I’m all right,” she said aloud.

  “The wheel must have gone into a rut, “Kristina told her, inspecting the wheel. “Lina, I’m so sorry!”

“It’s all right,” Lina told her.  “I really thing I’m okay. But there’s no way you’ll be able to get me back into this chair on your own.  Go back to the house for help.”

Kristina turned this way and that, biting her lip. Her eyes grew wide, and suddenly she sounded very agitated.  “But I can’t!” she cried. “I can’t leave you here!  There’s no telling who could come by.  It’s not safe!” She was beginning to cry.  Lina reached out and tugged on Kristina’s skirt.

“Kristina,” she said calmly, “Look at me. We need help. I’ll be all right here while you go get someone.”

Kristina grabbed her long braid in both hands and began picking at the end of it, still biting her lip. “I don’t know, Lina…  I don’t think it’s safe for you here alone.”

“I’m telling you. I know this forest. This is our forest.  No one will hurt me here.  Just go. Now. Run!”

Somehow this got through to Kristina, and she did run.  She raced back to the where the path opened out onto the grass, and then she sped off down the road, calling out for help.  As she came to the drive that led to the homestead, she saw Marcus walking across the yard. She shouted to him to follow her.

“Lina… she fell… in the forest,” she explained breathlessly as they both ran.

When they reached the path once again, Kristina led Marcus along the trail the wheelchair had made. Lina was lying only about twenty feet into the woods, but Kristina fell to her side as if she’d been miles away, deep in the wilderness.

“Lina, dear one, are you all right?” she asked in a frenzied voice, her cheeks streaked with tears.

“Yes, yes, I’m fine,” Lina told her, and then grimaced in embarrassment when she saw Marcus. But for once, he didn’t seem annoyed.  He sat down beside her and helped her sit up, taking care to ask her whether anything hurt. Once he determined that she really did seem not to have hurt herself, aside from a deep scrape on her left hand, which she’d used to break her fall, he inspected the wheelchair. 

“It just went into a hole,” he announced. Then, giving the handles a quick jerk, he pulled it backwards and freed the stuck wheel.  “Seems all right,” he added, after rolling the chair back and forth a bit. “I don’t think the rim got bent. Let’s get you up and back into it, Lina.” 

While Kristina steadied the wheelchair, Marcus somehow – Kristina was amazed at how strong he evidently was – slipped his arms under Lina’s, tipped her up and onto his chest, and then gently lowered her down to her seat. 

On the short walk back to the homestead, Marcus pushed the chair, while Kristina walked alongside them in a daze, one hand picking at the end of her braid, the other gripping Marcus’ elbow tightly.

“I really am fine,” Lina told them all when Marcus rolled her into the kitchen and explained what had happened. Indeed, she looked calm.

“How about your legs?” Ethel asked, a concerned look on her face.

“Well,” Lina told her, even smiling now, “I still can’t walk, but they’re hardly hurting again at all, just like when Peter and I were at the treehouse this morning. And you may not believe it, but when I was lying there on the ground just now, before Kristina came back with Marcus, I felt so peaceful. As if God was right there with me, taking care of me.  As if He had wrapped a blanket of love around me to keep me safe.”

This seemed to allay everyone’s concern, except for Kristina’s.  She looked so dazed that Renate insisted on making her a cup of tea.  Ingrid, who had been in their room in the workshop, reading before bed, came in now, since she’d heard the commotion in the yard. 

“Is there a party?” she asked brightly, holding her book in one hand and scanning their faces. It never happened that the whole family gathered like this in the evening, but their expressions didn’t look like party faces. Before anyone could explain, Kristina caught sight of her daughter and, leaping up from her chair, rushed to the door and took Ingrid in her arms.

“You’re all right, too, aren’t you?” she cried, leaning back to look her over, before hugging her once more.

“I’m fine, Mama, just fine,” Ingrid told her, a bit of annoyance in her tone.

“Kristina,” Renate said to her gently, “why don’t you take Ingrid out and get her settled in for bed, and I’ll bring your tea out to you?”

Kristina nodded tensely, muttered her thanks, and left the kitchen, clutching Ingrid as if for dear life.

In the kitchen, no one knew what to say.  This was exactly the kind of display of emotion that made this family feel awkward.  It was as if they had accidentally witnessed some intimate moment that none of them was ever meant to see.  Ethel made a point of examining Lina’s arms and face for scratches and bruises.  Renate was getting tea ready to put into a small pot for Kristina. She paused, as if considering whether to speak, and then turned to face everyone.

“There was one night, during those first few months after Kristina and Ingrid came to us.  I had a feeling in the middle of the night. I don’t know why, but I got up and came out into the kitchen here. I looked out toward the workshop and saw a light burning in their room. I just had the sense that something was wrong.  So I went out there.  The door to their room was wide open, and when I walked in, there was Kristina, with her suitcase open on the bed. She was in a frenzy, grabbing any of their things she could lay her hands on, and stuffing them in the suitcase, willy nilly.”  She paused to check the tea kettle, which had not yet boiled.

“I asked her what she was doing, and she looked at me with these wild, terrified eyes.  Kind of like tonight, but worse.  And she said, ‘We have to leave. It’s not safe here in the woods for Ingrid.  The men took that other girl.  They’re coming back for her. I have to get her somewhere safe.’”

A small cry of sorrow escaped Lina’s mouth, and she brought a hand to her face and covered her mouth.  

“My God, Mama,” Ethel said to Renate, “and you never told me. Or any of us.” She looked to each of the others in the room, and they all shook their heads. They hadn’t known, either.

The teakettle had come to a boil now, and Renate slowly poured a stream of the hot water into the waiting pot. “It wasn’t mine to tell,” she said with a sigh.

“There are so many stories of the war,” Ulrich said softly.  “And just because Kristina wasn’t on the battlefield doesn’t mean she didn’t suffer.”

“Her husband was killed on the Eastern Front,” Lina said.  Apparently they all knew this much, at least.

“How she and that little girl ever made it to Danzig from where they were, I don’t think I even want to know,” Ulrich told them, shaking his head.

“And then those months in Bergen-Belsen,” Renate added. “It’s horrible.”

“Bergen-Belsen?” Viktor asked sharply. “They were there?”

Ethel looked at him in surprise. Surely he knew that… But then she remembered that Kristina and Ingrid had already been here for a little while when Viktor was decommissioned and came home.  Maybe she hadn’t told him the details of how they’d come to be there, or maybe she had, and he just didn’t remember. That wouldn’t be surprising.

“Yes,” Ethel told him, “but not for long. Somehow they were sent there, to the Polish camp – as displaced persons, you know – even though they weren’t Polish. Maybe because they’d come through Poland. I don’t know.  But it was a hideous place – that’s what she said.”

Viktor just nodded.

“Thank God they made it here,” Peter said quietly.

“Marcus,” Renate said at that point, indicating a small wooden tray that now held the teapot and a cup, “you take the tea out to her, will you? She’ll like that.  Ethel and I will get Lina cleaned up for the night.”

            Marcus was, for once, happy to do as his grandmother asked.  He’d never seen Kristina so upset. It had shocked him a little, since she generally acted so meekly, keeping her emotions inside even more than the rest of them – or at least more than he did.  Her unassuming way of moving through the world and the way she deferred to him in their conversations made it difficult for him to determine with any certainty where he stood with her.  That had changed with their recent declaration of love for each other, of course.  Aside from that one time, though, she seemed never to tell him what was on her mind. This frustrated him, because he saw the way she and Lina laughed with each other. That must mean they were telling each other their secrets.  Had she told Lina about her flight through Danzig? About her fears for Ingrid’s safety?  Or other thoughts and feelings she had kept from him? Tonight, though – tonight she had shown him more of herself. The way she called out to me for help, and the way she clung to my elbow as we walked back to the house – she’s opening up to m, Marcus concluded.  She does need me, he thought to himself as he approached the side door with the tray that held the teapot and cup. Balancing the tray on one hand, he opened the door with the other.

Inside, the workshop was dark, and Marcus saw that the door to Kristina and Ingrid’s room was shut. But a dim thread of light spread out beneath the door. Flipping on a light in the workshop, Marcus set the tray down on one of the workbenches across the room and gave a light knock on Kristina’s door. It was the first time he’d ever done this – come to her room after Ingrid’s bedtime – and he felt a mixture of apprehension and excitement.

“Kristina,” he said softly, but loudly enough that she’d surely hear him, “Renate sent me out with the tea for you.”

For a long half a minute he heard nothing, but then the door opened slowly, and Kristina slipped out.

“Ingrid’s just getting to sleep,” she told him softly, and then turned to close the door quietly behind her. 

They were standing close together there, with Kristina’s back nearly touching the door, and Marcus just a few inches in front of her. Standing like this, the difference in their heights was striking. Marcus, tall and lanky like Viktor, towered over Kristina, so that she had to tip her head back to look up at his face.  He thought about kissing her right there, but then held back. It didn’t seem right, somehow, with Ingrid just on the other side of the door.

“I put the tea over here,” he said instead, gesturing to the workbench against the wall. “Come on, I’ll pour it for you.” He held out his hand to her.

She grasped his hand and followed him across the room. Walking with him, she squeezed his hand, seeking some explanation of where the physical strength he’d displayed earlier came from. He looked at her and smiled, then brought her hand up and kissed it. They took seats on two of the tall stools next to the workbench.

As he poured the tea for her and stirred some sugar into it, she was studying him, as if for the first time.  He really did resemble his father – especially in his build and in those cornflower blue eyes – but his hair was dark, like hers, not sandy like Peter’s.  Viktor didn’t look strong, either, she mused, but she’d seen him move logs like they were nothing. Marcus must have that same kind of strength.  She found that comforting.

“Thank you for saving Lina tonight,” she told him as she accepted the cup of tea he held out to her. He could see that tears were welling up in her eyes as she spoke.

He laughed lightly. “I didn’t save her.  I just picked her up off the ground.” But inwardly, he was pleased she had put it that way.

“Well, I do say you saved her,” Kristina insisted, smiling now, too, although the tears still seemed prepared to fall at a moment’s notice.  “Who knows what might have happened there in the woods, with her being helpless, and it getting so dark.”

Marcus leaned forward. “The wolves don’t come out until much later,” he said, in a mock serious tone.

“Don’t tease,” Kristina told him, only half-kidding. 

He could see that she genuinely was a bit hurt by his joke, and as he watched her take a sip of the tea, for the first time in his entire life, he felt a twinge of regret at causing someone else distress.  As she moved the teacup away from her lips, he took it from her, set it down, and wrapped his hands around hers. He was sitting facing her now, his legs bent to the side, so that her knees touched the outside of his thigh.

“Forgive me, my dear Kristina,” he said earnestly. “I was just trying to cheer you up.”

She sighed deeply and nodded, and now two preliminary tears did escape onto her cheeks.  She looked down. “Ingrid and I had some terrible nights in the woods. During our flight.” Marcus squeezed her hands, but didn’t say anything. He hoped she’d tell him more, and after a minute of silence, she did.

“I don’t know where it was… Somewhere before we got to Danzig, at least.  We would camp anywhere we could.  Sometimes there was a farmhouse with a barn.  And once or twice, a family even took us into their house, but that was only once or twice.” She looked up to see whether he was listening, and when he nodded to show her he was, she looked down again.

“So, groups of us often slept out in the woods.  I tended to think we were safer, Ingrid and I, if there were more of us.  There was something quite frightening about sleeping just the two of us in the woods, not knowing what each sound meant, whether it was a person or an animal…”

“If you’re not used to being in the woods at night,” Marcus said, “it really is frightening.” Not that he remembered ever being scared out in the woods, but he thought this might encourage her.

“It is!” she said, sighing again. “One night, there were, I don’t know, perhaps twenty of us, all camped out in one area. Five or six small groups of us.  No camp fires or anything. We just all huddled in our own little spots, but not right next to each other.” She paused, trying to find the best words to express what she’d experienced. “You see, some of those people I’d seen now and again in the weeks before that.  We were all heading in the same direction, and so you recognize faces. But at the same time, we all kept to ourselves.”

“But why not get to know people?” Marcus asked, his question quite sincere. He knew nothing about what these refugees had gone through, but he found that he very much wanted to understand what Kristina and Ingrid had experienced.

“Because you never knew what they might do,” Kristina said quietly.  “None of us had enough food or clothing, and it was cold by then.  So some people would steal what little the others had.  Kill them for it sometimes, even.”

Marcus squeezed her hands to show encouragement, and he felt a tenderness welling up inside him as she told her story. “Kristina, did anyone ever attack you?”

She didn’t answer him directly. “That one night, I heard a woman a ways off from me scream, not very loudly, and then her screams were muffled. And then they stopped. And in the morning, at dawn, when we all left, I saw that a woman was still lying over by a pine tree.  I wondered why she hadn’t gotten up to leave – because everyone would get on the road as early as possible. I did ask one of the other travelers, a woman about my age, one I’d seen before, whether she’d heard the screams during the night, and whether that woman under the pine tree was all right.”

“And what did she say?”

“She just asked me under her breath whether I had a knife with me.  I told her I did, and she said, ‘Be prepared to use it. And don’t sleep a wink at night when it’s like this.’ She told me then that a week earlier, when she and her husband and their two girls were spending the night in the woods, two men who were drunk – Lord knows where they got the liquor –dragged away a young girl – someone else’s daughter –  during the night.” She looked up at Marcus. “I don’t want to tell you what they did to her. But she was barely alive when they found her the next morning. And crying that she wished they had just killed her.”

Now Marcus released Kristina’s hands and wrapped his arms around her. “If that had been Ingrid,” he found himself saying, his voice full of quiet anger, “I would have killed those men with my bare hands.”

Kristina’s head was leaning against his chest now.  She kept on talking, but very softly, and he couldn’t hear her so very clearly. But he didn’t want to ask her to repeat herself, so he just leaned his head against hers and strained to catch what she was saying.

“I did have a knife,” she was telling him.  “I was so terrified after that night, Marcus. I spent each night with that knife in one hand, and my other hand on Ingrid next to me.  When I just couldn’t stay awake, I’d lean on top of her and doze that way, so that I’d wake up if anyone tried to take her from me. But how can you really sleep that way? I don’t think I slept more than a few minutes each night the whole rest of our flight, until we got onto the boat. Even there, though, it wasn’t so safe.”

“And in the refugee camp?” Marcus prompted softly, gently rubbing her back as she spoke.

“I slept there,” she said. “There we women did come to know each other a bit, and we took shifts, sleeping and watching each other’s children. We did feel safer there, because the men were separate from the women, of course, but even so, you never know… We still didn’t have enough food, or blankets. And my God, it had been a concentration camp before we got there. How can you rest knowing that?”

Marcus listened silently. He noticed that, as Kristina spoke, his anger faded, and he felt love welling up inside him, for her, and for Ingrid, too.  And sadness that they had gone through all they had.  This feeling of sadness at others’ suffering was new to him, but as Kristina leaned against his chest, he felt more connected to her in his heart than he had ever felt to another human being. He was struck by this feeling of connection to her, by the sense that their hearts were beating as one. His whole life, he had rejected this kind of phrase as ridiculous romanticism, but now that they were leaning together like this, and love was flowing so strongly in him, he marveled at what he was feeling, amazed that it was even possible to feel this way.

Kristina had stopped talking by now, and the two of them sat perched on the stools like that, as if holding each other up, in silence, for several minutes.  Marcus was the first to speak. 

“You don’t ever have to worry again, Kristina,” he whispered into her ear. “Do you hear me?” he asked, stroking her hair.

He felt her nod. “I will take care of you. You and Ingrid.  Make sure you’re safe.  Do you hear?”  Again, she nodded.

Then he felt the love well up in his chest even more strongly, and a thought came to him.  He leaned back and moved her gently backwards, too, so that she was sitting far enough away that he could see her eyes. 

“Will you let me take care of the two of you?” he asked, in a voice so tender that he didn’t even recognize it as his own. “So that you’ll never feel abandoned or in danger?”

Kristina nodded once more.  She wiped her eyes with her arm, and looked at him with her chestnut brown eyes.

“What I mean,” he said then, “is this… Will you marry me, Kristina?”

She stared at him so long with her lips parted, but without speaking, that Marcus began to fear that he had badly misjudged the situation.  He was about to try to recover from his mistake, when she nodded once more, first just slightly, and then more forcefully, until, finally, she threw her arms around his neck and looked him directly in the eye.

“Yes, Marcus,” she said, the smile he had been waiting for spreading across her face now. “Yes! I will!”

They kissed then, their first kisses as an engaged couple, and Kristina had to tell Marcus over and over again that her tears were different now.  These were tears of happiness, tears of joy. Of relief. She didn’t voice these last two words, though.  Perhaps she didn’t fully hear them herself, in either her head or her heart, but they were certainly there in her soul. As Marcus held his fiancée, and her head rested once more against his chest, they both felt her body relax, as the strain of so many years began to loosen its grip on her being.

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 28

[Author’s note: The words of Bruno Groening’s in this chapter that are in boldface are his actual words. I have excerpted them from lectures and talks that were recorded during his lifetime and later transcribed and translated into English by the Bruno Groening Circle of Friends, which has very kindly given me permission to use them.]

Chapter 28

July, 1949

Gassmann-Bunke homestead and Bremen, Germany

            The days following Lorena’s announcement that Bruno Groening had left Herford and gone who knows where, were among the hardest for the Gassmanns and Bunkes since the period following Lina’s accident.  Now, as then, the family members did their best to project an air of hope and confidence that they would find Groening. 

            But beneath the outward profession of positivity lay the persistent fear that they had missed their chance. And their chance was precisely the way they all thought of it. After all, it wasn’t just Lina who had something to gain if the visit to Groening took place and Lina was healed.  Each of them was invested in the success of this venture for his or her own reasons, even if these reasons were never voiced out loud. They all spoke only of how Lina’s life would change – and for the better! Lina, of course, sensed her relatives’ unspoken thoughts, but she didn’t judge them harshly for wishing for their own lives to be easier, too.  In fact, she appreciated it that they did keep their own desires to themselves. It made her feel that they really did care about what happened to her: After four years of what seemed to her like no one doing anything to change the situation, at least they were all working toward a common goal. 

            Even so, Lina was realistic enough to understand that if there wasn’t some progress soon, enthusiasm for the project would wane. They might all slip back into a state of stagnation, like the swallow she’d seen on the riverbank, one wounded wing in the mud. But that was just the way it was at the beginning, Lina reminded herself, before the bird summoned the strength and took flight once more.  As the days passed, Lina kept calling to mind that swallow, panting in the mud. That’s where I am now, she told herself over and over. Just waiting for that power to flow into me.  And then I’ll fly!

*          *          *

            The first encouraging moment came two weeks after the evening they had all gathered around Marcus’ boss’ car, so looking forward to heading to Herford the next morning, the evening when Lorena had rushed over to tell them the bad news.  Now, it was Marcus who rushed into the yard after work, beaming with excitement.

            “Bremen!” he cried out, bursting through the door, expecting the whole family to be gathered for his announcement. But it wasn’t quite suppertime yet, and only Renate and Ethel were in the kitchen.

            “Where is everyone?” Marcus said, annoyed.  “I have news!”

            Renate, who had been pulling plates off the shelves to set the table, turned to face him, her arms cradling the stack of dishes.  Ethel wiped her hands on a dishtowel and walked toward Marcus.

            “What news?” she asked softly, studying her son’s face for clues.

            But he shook his head, refusing to tell them.  “Where’s Lina?” But before they could answer, he was already out the door and searching for his sister.  He found her on the other side of the sheets that were drying on the clothesline. She and Kristina were just taking down some laundry that was dry. 

            “There you are!” Marcus called, running over to her.

            Startled, Lina dropped the clothespin she was holding. When Kristina bent down to pick it up off the ground, Marcus took it from her and threw it aside.

            “Forget the laundry, Kristina!” Then he got crouched down in front of Lina and took hold of her hands.  “Bremen!” he nearly shouted. “He’s in Bremen!”

            Lina grew pale and looked back and forth between Marcus and Kristina.  “Bruno Groening?” she whispered.

            Marcus nodded.  “Yes, Groening!  Who else would I be talking about?”

            Now Lina allowed herself a smile.  Seeing that, Marcus smiled, too.

“That’s my girl!” He jumped up, stepped behind Lina, took hold of the wheelchair’s handles and began pushing his sister around the yard, in and out beneath and between the hanging sheets. Kristina and Lina shrieked with laughter and begged him to stop before all the laundry lay in the dirt. 

All this commotion drew everyone out into the yard: Renate and Ethel from the kitchen, Peter from the workshop, and Ulrich and Viktor, who were just coming out of the forest, carrying a two-man saw.

“What’s the excitement about?” Viktor asked, and looked to Ethel, who came over to stand next to him and slipped her arm through his. He realized from her expression that she, like he, was trying to remember a time when Marcus had ever treated Lina this way – as a loving older brother.  He couldn’t. Neither could Ethel. 

“Papa,” Lina called out breathlessly, although it was Marcus who’d been moving the wheelchair.  “Marcus said Mr. Groening is in Bremen!”

“Ahhhh!” Viktor exclaimed. “Now that’s some news!”

“And only a couple of hours away,” Ulrich noted with an approving nod of his head.

“Marcus,” Renate asked, “how did you find that out?”

“From my boss, Mr. Weiss,” Marcus told them, leaning over to brace his hands on his thighs.  He was feeling a bit winded from the exertion.

“But how did he know?” Renate continued.  “Lorena’s been listening to the radio non-stop for the past week, and she hasn’t heard anything.” She was frowning, as if somehow insulted that she hadn’t been the one to learn the news and present it to the family.  Ulrich put his arm around her shoulders and laughed.

“Hush, Renate, and let the young man tell us!”

It was a funny scene, with all of them standing around the yard, instead of taking seats indoors. No one wanted to wait to hear Marcus’ explanation. Even Stick, the dog, was racing around them in excitement, his tail catching on the sheets and causing them to dip and billow.

“It happened like this,” Marcus began, gazing around at his audience and pleased that everyone was now present.  “Mr. Weiss came in this morning… Oh, well, of course, I told him what happened, when I took the car back to him last Friday. I had to explain why we didn’t go to Herford after all.”

“Yes, yes,” Renate said impatiently, waving her hand to hurry him along. “Mr. Weiss knew about why we were going to Herford. But how did he find out where Mr. Groening is now?”

“Mama!” Ethel told her with a laugh, “Marcus is telling us.  Just let him tell us!”

Renate nodded, and Marcus continued.

“So, evidently, Mr. Weiss told his wife the story – about Lina and how Groening was in Herford and then had to leave.  Turns out she – Mrs. Weiss – has been following the whole thing in the papers, too. And apparently, Mrs. Weiss has a cousin who lives in Bremen, and this cousin said that her next door neighbor, a woman named –“

“For heaven’s sake, Marcus, we don’t care what her name is!” Renate burst in, but she quieted down when Ulrich squeezed her shoulder.

“Right, Grandma,” Marcus said. “To make a long story short, Groening was at the cousin’s neighbor’s house two nights ago, and a group of people came.  The neighbor even invited the cousin, but she didn’t go. But she did tell Mrs. Weiss about it, because it seemed like such an unusual occurrence.  She –“

“She? Who?” Lina asked, and no one shushed her, figuring that if anyone had a right to ask for clarification, she did.

“The cousin,” Marcus said.  “A Mrs. Schneider.  Mrs. Schneider said she saw a man go into the house – and this is a side-by-side house, connected, so she got a good look at him – and she said he was on the short side, with long, dark, wavy hair –“

“That’s him!” Lina cried, her eyes shining brightly.

Marcus nodded.  “Yes, it was Groening. And Mrs. Schneider said that as she was looking out the window, trying to get a look at him, he stopped on the walkway and turned. And he looked right at her!  As if he knew she was there watching him, even though she was kind of hiding behind the curtain so he wouldn’t see her. And he just looked at her for a few second, in a serious way, and then he continued walking and went into the house.  And Mrs. Schneider said that she felt something when he looked at her.”

“What?” they all asked, hanging on Marcus’ every word. “What did she feel?”

But Marcus wanted to drag out his moment in the limelight.  So he paused, looking at them each and taking Lina’s hand.  Finally, he said, “Love. That’s what she said, Mrs. Weiss told her husband. And peace.”

Lina squeezed her brother’s hand, and they could all see that she had begun to cry quietly.  Kristina, who was standing on the other side of the wheelchair, leaned over and hugged Lina. Then she asked Marcus:

“Did Mrs. Schneider go over to the neighbor’s then, too?”

Marcus shook his head.  “Seems she was too embarrassed. But after everyone had left, she did go next door…” Here he paused again, for effect, before continuing. “And the neighbor told her that Groening is coming back again… tomorrow night!”

Now everyone in the yard began talking and gesturing, nodding and clapping their hands and hugging. Stick began racing around once more.

“Well, then,” Viktor said, smiling broadly, “we have some plans to make, don’t we?”

  “We might as well all go in now,” Renate announced. “Supper’ll be ready in a few minutes. Everybody get washed up, and we can discuss it all when we sit down.”

Ethel looked at Viktor and raised her eyebrows.  He could see a smile in her eyes, as if she was asking him, “When has Mama ever said we’d discuss something over supper?” Viktor hugged her and whispered in her ear, “Maybe a new day is dawning for this family.”

*          *          *

So it was that, the next evening, the Gassmanns and Bunkes and Kristina (Ingrid had reluctantly gone to the Walters’ farm) found themselves at the curb outside the home of the Schneiders’ neighbors, Mr. and Mrs. Birkner.  Kathrin Schneider hurried to the front door of her house as soon as she saw them pull up.  She watched, mouth agape, as Marcus, Kristina, Renate and Ulrich climbed out of the Opel Kapitän, which Mr. Weiss had generously offered Marcus for the trip.  Lina was still seated in the front passenger seat, waiting for Viktor, who had driven to Bremen in the pickup truck with Ethel and Peter, to park and unload Ethel’s wheelchair from pickup’s bed. Mrs. Schneider, a short woman in her fifties, with small eyes and tightly curled, dark hair that hugged her head just so, was amazed not only by this large number of people who had come together, but also by the juxtaposition of her brother-in-law’s Opel and the family’s dusty farm truck.  They seemed a motley crew, indeed. Not raggedy, no.  They were all dressed in their Sunday best, that was clear.  But it was also clear that these were country folk.

Mrs. Schneider stepped outside onto her own front stoop, now, and watched them all make their way up toward the Birkners’ side of the house. Still, she pointedly didn’t look at Lina, who was now being moved into the wheelchair by two men Kathrin assumed must be her father and brother. Even so, her gaze settled on this scene. Kathrin immediately averted her eyes, not wanting to be caught staring, especially since the girl herself was casting glances around, as if she didn’t want to be seen.  But then Kathrin caught sight of a young man who was limping, too.  There’s nowhere to look! she thought.  So, she walked right over to them and introduced herself.  Then she turned and led the way up to the Birkners’ door, taking on the role of guide. She, after all, was the one who had learned about Groening’s visit in the first place! 

Inside – once Viktor and Marcus lifted Lina’s wheelchair up the one step and over the threshold into the house – Mrs. Birkner greeted them warmly. A tall, lithe woman, with her wavy, straw blond hair pulled back loosely, she seemed both relaxed and energized. She leaned down to take Lina’s hand in her own and give it a firm shake as a heartfelt smile came to her face. 

“Miss Bunke? I’m Silvia Birkner. I’m glad you’ve come.” She looked to the entire assembled family as she spoke the last sentence.

“Come along in here,” she continued, walking ahead of them. She indicated with her hand that they should make their way through a large, arched opening, and into a parlor of sorts.  At least that’s what Renate thought she’d call this room, since it was neither kitchen nor dining room, and seemed to function solely as a place where people would sit and chat.         

The room measured about fifteen feet across and twelve feet deep, and there was a small fireplace with a dark surround and mantel fashioned out of wood that matched the rest of the trim in the room.   An assortment of upholstered and wooden chairs, settees and benches faced the fireplace and had been arranged in rows, along with two small couches along the two outside walls. Just to the right of the fireplace, where, it seemed to Renate, one of the armchairs must usually go, there stood a little table. It held a small lamp, already lit, and a glass of water that had been covered with a small lace doily.

Ethel was taking a good look around, too. She’d been wondering what kind of house they’d be in, and she was relieved to see that the Birkners were not some fancy, rich people who might object to them being foresters and cabinet makers.  The furniture was not new, but not overly worn, either, a hodgepodge of designs and ages.  The room’s wallpaper was a big dingy, but not torn, and the curtains looked like Mrs. Birkner gave them regular airings and washings.  On the wall hung several photographs – family portraits, Ethel assumed. There were also several paintings of landscapes, originals, probably by someone in the family. A few more, smaller, photos in simple frames occupied the fireplace mantel, along with a vase of flowers, probably from the Birkners’ flower garden, and a clock. A floor lamp stood in one back corner, and a table lamp was perched atop a bookcase on the other wall, near the arch. Ethel caught her mother’s eye, and the two women nodded subtly to each other, acknowledging that both had surveyed the room and felt that everything was going to be all right.

While her mother and grandmother took in their surroundings, Lina looked nervously at the how the furniture was laid out. She wondered where her wheelchair could possibly fit in this tightly-packed arrangement.  But Mrs. Birkner already had a plan.  She moved aside the last chair in the front row, closest to the large arch that met the hallway.

“Here you go,” she said to Lina.  “Mr. Bunke, you can park your daughter’s chair right here, if that’s all right.”

Viktor thanked her and rolled Lina first forward and then back into the spot Mrs. Birkner had indicated.

Lina felt her cheeks burning, and she could barely breathe, although the windows in the room were open and a pleasant breeze was pushing the curtains aside and flowing into the room. Why isn’t anyone else here? she wondered.  And where is Mr. Groening?

            The rest of the family, and Mrs. Schneider, too, were obviously all asking themselves these very same questions. Mrs. Birkner hastened to put them all at ease.

“Don’t you worry, now,” she said as she showed each of them in turn to a seat with a gentle wave of her hand.  “Others are coming,” she went on, “and Mr. Groening will be here soon, too.  He called a bit ago and said he wouldn’t be long.  So, you just make yourselves at home.”

“She’s nice enough,” Renate whispered to Ulrich after Mrs. Birkner left the room, “but how are we to make ourselves at home? I wish we’d just get started. It’s hard to wait, isn’t it?” she asked, turning now to Lina.

But the only response Lina could manage was to nod.  Her throat felt so tense that she doubted she could get any words out, even if her life depended on it.  As she tipped her head in acknowledgement to her grandmother, she felt Kristina’s hand come to rest on her right shoulder and give it a squeeze.  Grateful, Lina brought her left hand (because her right was inside her pocket, grasping the newspaper article about Bruno Groening) up and laid it atop Kristina’s.

            Kristina ended up sitting directly behind Lina, with Marcus to her left and Viktor and Ethel and Peter in the seats heading the rest of the way down that row.  In the front row, Renate sat next to Lina, and Ulrich was on her left.  Mrs. Schneider was directed to the chair next to Peter. The two seats to the left of Ulrich were, evidently, saved for other guests.  On the closest one lay a folded newspaper, and a small scarf was bunched up on the next spot. As Ulrich took this in, he glanced at the man, who looked to be in his fifties, sitting in the third seat to his left. He turned when he noticed Ulrich’s surveying glance, and extended his hand.

            “Helmut Birkner,” he said simply. When Ulrich made a motion, as if to indicate Mrs. Birkner, he nodded and smiled.  “Yes, that’s my wife, Silvia. She’s the organizer. I’m the waiter,” he told Ulrich with a laugh.

            Ulrich introduced himself, and then he, too, went back to waiting, wondering whether Mr. Birkner was waiting for something in particular. The man had no obvious disabilities or injuries, but Ulrich knew full well that not all infirmities were outwardly visible.

In the fifteen or twenty minutes that followed, other people did, indeed, arrive, mostly in twos, and mostly women, but a few individual men and women also came into the room.  One man, in his mid-thirties, Peter guessed, walked in slowly and deliberately, leaning heavily on a cane and dragging his right leg behind him. Another man, who caught Viktor’s eye, held his left arm to his chest, bent at a right angle, but there was no sling holding it, and no cast, as there would be if the arm were broken. Finally, an older, gray-haired woman, in her sixties, perhaps, doubled over in pain and supported by a much younger man – her grandson? – made her way toward the seat directly behind Kristina.  As the young man helped her align herself to sit down, she was bent so far forward that Kristina could feel the woman’s ragged breath on her neck, and her hand actually clutched Kristina’s shoulder as she settled back onto the chair.

“Oh, please excuse me!” the woman half-whispered, half-cried out.

Kristina sensed that this effort to observe the social niceties had cost the woman dearly: As Kristina turned around in her seat to reassure her, she glimpsed a drawn face and eyes glassed over in agony.  “Don’t give it a second thought, Mother,” Kristina said kindly, patting the woman’s clenched hand with her own, before turning back around.

Some of the people who came into the parlor greeted those who already sat in the rows, or made eye contact with them, but the majority stared down at the floor and simply made their way silently to the seats that were still unoccupied. Each person in the room seemed focused on his or her own distress, or that of the person he or she had brought here.  It seemed to Ethel, who slowly turned this way and that to take in the room, that it wasn’t so much that these people were self-absorbed, able to think of nothing but their own suffering.  There was that, of course, but something else was at play here. In all the guests with visible burdens or pain, Ethel recognized the attitude she had seen in Lina these past four years: A keen awareness of how obviously they did not fit in to the society around them, and a strong desire to remain unnoticed. 

Back in the early days following her accident, Lina never shared with Ethel the fear that haunted her for months, that some town official would suddenly come by and cart her off to be euthanized or, at the very least, locked away in an institution for citizens who were no longer of use to their great country.  But Ethel had seen this fear in her daughter’s eyes, especially during her immediate recuperation period in the hospital.  She’d seen the way Lina looked at her whenever she came back into the room after stepping out into the hall to speak with the doctor. 

Ethel never revealed to Lina – and she had no intention of ever telling her this – that the doctor had, in fact, raised the possibility of sending Lina to the very kind of institution (“home”, he called it unctuously) that terrified Lina so much that she often lost entire nights of sleep over it. But Ethel told him in no uncertain terms that they would care for Lina at home, and that if he ever mentioned this option to anyone in their family again, she would report him to the head of the hospital for promoting eugenics. 

In fact, Ethel was not fully informed about the details of this policy that the Nazis had enacted, but she knew enough – they’d all heard reports and propaganda during the war – to know that Lina might well have been taken from them if she’d been paralyzed earlier in the war. She also knew that, these days, the government had an official policy of cracking down when anything resembling these views popped up now. At least, Ethel thought at the time, that’s what she thought she’d read.  Whether this was or was not the case, Ethel’s threat was effective.  Lina’s doctor never mentioned the “homes” again.

But here, in the Birkners’ parlor, Ethel could see that new government policies didn’t necessarily mean that crippled or otherwise disabled German citizens felt comfortable being out in public, where their infirmities were on display for all to observe.  In Bockhorn and Varel, you almost never saw anyone out on the street who was not in good health, at least physically. Even Lina preferred to stick to the homestead and the area of road between their house and the Walters’.  Never mind that it was a production to take her anywhere – just getting her here had taken so much time and effort.  That was the least of it. Ethel knew that.  Steeling herself for passersby to gawk at her, pity her, disdain her… That was what took a bigger toll on Lina.

Ethel knew this, and she sensed that Lina was feeling this discomfort right now, amidst strangers.  And Lina wasn’t the only one who felt that way, Ethel concluded as she glanced around the room.  The shame of being different, of not being seen as whole and healthy, the fear of denunciation by others… Ethel glimpsed all of that and more in the eyes and posture of the people who filled this room. She knew she couldn’t entirely grasp what they were feeling. But she did understand that it had taken unimaginable strength and courage for them all to come here tonight and to face being ridiculed, shunned, or perhaps even verbally assaulted.  And yet, they had come.  Certainly, Ethel concluded, each one of these people, like Lina, had been given up on by the doctors, told there was no hope for them, told,  “You just have to learn to live with it,” just as the doctor had said to Lina.  Yet, something had given them the power to hope. And so, here they were, grasping at this very last straw: Bruno Groening.

Viktor was already feeling overheated in his buttoned-up shirt, and judging by the fidgeting of those around him and the way some women were fanning themselves with their hats, he was not alone.  Ethel, moved by the scene around her, and by the fact that her husband had come home from the war in one piece, took his hand and gave it a squeeze. They exchanged tense smiles as they waited.  Marcus and Kristina were enjoying the sensation of being seated so close to each other that their shoulders touched if they both leaned the tiniest bit toward each other.  Peter, meanwhile, felt that Kathrin Schneider was staring at his wounded leg, at the same time as she was making a point of not wondering about how the young man next to her had acquired his limp, or how the others around her had come to be so physically wrecked.

It wasn’t just the temperature in the room that was causing the guests to shift in their seats.  Nearly everyone noticed that the atmosphere had grown tense, in the sense that it felt filled with anticipation, as if a guitar string was being slowly tightened more and more.  And just when it seemed to them that this string would break and they would all explode, Mrs. Birkner reappeared in the room, her step lighter than before, her face joyful.   Behind her came a tall, slim man with dark blond hair slicked back from his forehead.  The two of them came to stand at the front of the room, facing the guests, which now numbered about twenty-five.

Mrs. Birkner indicated the man at her left. “Those of you who were here the other night know Mr. Schmidt,” she began. “Egon Arthur Schmidt. He is one of Mr. Groening’s helpers, and he’s brought Mr. Groening here tonight.”

At this, everyone in the room began leaning this way and that, trying to get a view of the hallway outside the arch.  But there was no Groening there to be seen. And at the same time, they all noticed, the uncomfortable tension in the room hadn’t lessened with Mrs. Birkner’s reappearance. In fact, it seemed to have intensified.  Lina felt she might very well faint, or cry out.  It wasn’t anything painful, just the difficulty of waiting. For heaven’s sake, where is he?? She heard someone behind her, a woman, moaning.  Another further back and off to the side, was crying quietly, while someone shushed her, but not unkindly.

Now Mrs. Birkner sat down next to her husband, having picked up her scarf from the seat. Mr. Schmidt smiled and continued to stand before them, his hands at his sides. “Yes, dear ladies and gentlemen,” he began, “Good evening.” He paused and glanced out across the room. “You have all come here seeking healing. I know you’re anxious to see Mr. Groening, and I assure you that you will, in just a few moments. But first, he has asked me to give you these instructions, instructions that will help you take in everything you can receive here tonight.  So, I ask you first of all, to sit so that you are not touching anyone else, whether next to you, or in front of or behind you.”

At this, the sound of chair legs scraping on the wood floor and rug could be heard, as people shifted this way and that.  Marcus and Kristina reluctantly moved their chairs just far enough to comply with Mr. Schmidt’s instructions. 

“Thank you. Next, Mr. Groening asks that you sit without crossing your arms or legs.  Just let your hands rest in your lap without clasping them.  This will allow the current to flow freely through your body without short-circuiting.”

“Current?” Marcus whispered to Kristina.  “What current?” And he was not the only one in the room who glanced at the floor around the chairs, to see whether there were electrical cords running throughout the room. But there were none.

It is at this moment, as the guests are occupied with arranging their arms and legs in the correct position, that those of them on the hallway end of the rows notice a small man move quietly into the room.  Lina feels rather than see him at first.  She senses a strong heat along the right side of her body, as if she were out in bright sunlight on a sweltering day. She feels drawn to turn her head to that side, to determine the source of this great warmth. And there he is: Bruno Groening.  He walks silently to the front of the room, passing a mere six inches from her as he des so.

All movement and noise in the room ceases as the guests realize that Bruno Groening is finally before them.  No one wants to miss a single word from this man. Groening now stands next to the small table, with his back to the front wall of the room.  Mr. Schmidt has taken a seat in the front row, next to Mrs. Birkner. The first thing Groening does is to take his keys and lean over slightly to lay them on the table next to the water glass. Then he straightens back up and, still silent, slowly directs his gaze to each person in the room, his eyes moving down one row and then back up the next, pausing for a moment as he encounters the face of each sufferer or the person who has brought him or her here tonight.  Mesmerized, no one speaks, but their faces show a whole range of emotions: here, someone smiles tentatively at Groening; here, another person looks down; tears well up in many eyes, while others stare back at the small man with skepticism; other faces show just pain; and often, there is desperation and a silent plea for help.

When Groening’s gaze reaches Lina, she feels as though his shining blue eyes are looking into the depths of her soul, seeing everything about her. And although he is not smiling, and his expression looks serious – stern, even – what Lina feels coming from him is not criticism or condemnation, but love.  That is how she described it later, anyway, even though it was not like any love she had ever felt from another human, not even her mother and grandmother.  This was both an emotion and a connection of some sort. Maybe this was what Mr. Schmidt meant when he spoke of a “current”. 

What Lina senses now reminds her of the tingling and lightness she felt when she read the newspaper articles about Groening, only so much stronger. And back then, there hadn’t been this feeling of love, of a clear connection.  Connection to what? Lina asks herself, watching Groening survey the men and women before him. Is it to him that this love and this current are connecting me? She attempts to think about this, but then the tingling in her body grows more intense, until finally she notices that her whole body is vibrating, and she’s simply no longer able to engage in thought. If she were able to think at this moment, she would notice that her feet and legs were tingling and vibrating just as much as the rest of her.  But she is too caught up in experiencing the love that is flowing into her, and the peace that now reigns inside her, to pay attention to anything else.  All she can do is to allow what is flowing to flow, and to take in Groening’s appearance as he stands just a few feet in front of her.

Lina’s attention is drawn first to his eyes, to his gaze, and then to his expression.  Considering his entire face now, she can’t decide whether or not she finds him handsome. This question seems somehow irrelevant, given all that she feels radiating from him.  But, she decides, if she were to judge him objectively, by his physical features alone, she would have to say that in appearance, he was unassuming. Small in stature and build, he is also dressed in a way that would attract no one’s attention: a dark blue polo shirt with a zippered opening, beneath a neat but worn dark gray suit jacket.  His slacks are also dark gray, and the toes of his plain black shoes are scuffed. He holds his arms crossed in front of his chest, and his hands look like they have seen quite a bit of manual labor. 

As he turns his head to take in the other side of the room, Lina has to admit that his hair is quite unusual. Although she’d seen the newspaper photo of him, she hadn’t gotten a look at his hair. Dark, and slicked back from his face to reveal a receding hair-line, it is thick and falls in waves, all the way to the base of his neck.  And his neck! Lina thinks as he turns to face the room straight on once more. What is that? Groening’s polo shirt is unzipped to just below where his collar bones meet his chest, and his throat is bulging out in two big puffy sections, one on each side of his neck.  How did I not notice that before? Lina wonders. Was it like that when he came in? As she stares at his neck, it seems to her that it swelled out even more. A goiter, perhaps?  But again, her thoughts are quieted by the tingling and growing feeling of peace she is sensing in her body.  And then Groening speaks.

            “My dear seekers of healing,” he begins, in a voice that is quiet, but strong. “Your pleas to the Lord God were not in vain. Dear friends, I want to briefly introduce myself to you here.  I say it to you very clearly.  I don’t know much – I only know that which man today no longer knows, is no longer able to know. He has fallen prey to the human way, and he regards everything from the human, rather than the divine, viewpoint.  Therefore, dear friends, it looks sad for every individual person.  He can no longer find the path.  He no longer knows what is true.  He – the human being –has, practically speaking, fallen prey to every great sin without knowing it, without even perceiving it, without a guilty conscience, i.e..

            “What he does feel, is that a dissonance has not only arisen around him, but it has seeped into him, and everyone – you as well – will ask himself the question, ‘How is all that possible?’ How did it come to the point where evil what you call ‘illness’, but I tell you that it is the evil – seized your body? So that you really no longer feel comfortable in it, so that you yourself have perceived that your body no longer obeys you, that you can no longer give it orders, that it has, so to speak, gone on strike?”

            Tears rush to Lina’s eyes now, as she feels deep within her, that what Bruno Groening is saying about their bodies – her body! – is true. Part of her wants to think about this, but only this thought comes to her: The evil? How did it do this to me? She reaches up to wipe her eyes, then focuses on simply listening.

            “Evil is around us,” Groening continues,“and man can easily – very easily! – take it into himself if he forgets himself only once. It’s like the radio.” Here he stops and gestures to the radio set on top of a side table at the back of the room. “We can also receive everything. We only need to tune into the divine transmission,the healing stream: the Heilstrom. However, if someone comes and misleads you, leads you to what is satanic, to what is evil, then you are tuning in to the evil transmission. ‘I am curious,’ you say. ‘I just want to try to hear the evil transmission.’  You see, you can also receive the evil transmission in your body, and up until now, that has been the casewith you. This is what you have done.  I believe you understand me now. It depends totally on your attitude, on how you tune in here. Yes, friends, you have such a wonderful body. If today I were to tell you about everything you are capable of when you take possession of the divine power, meaning, that first you are worthy of taking it in… oh, then you could do so much good!”

            Here Groening smiles, and it seems to Lina that his eyes are shining more now.

            I make you aware,” he says, now beginning to walk slowly back and forth across the room, his arms still crossed in front of his chest, “that healing only benefits those who carry in themselves faith in our Lord God, or who are prepared to take faith in.”  Here he pauses, as if giving the assembled guests the chance to consider where they stand on this question. There is some shifting in the seats. ”Or who are prepared to take faith in,” he repeats.

            Here Groening gazes at Marcus, who shifts in discomfort. Does he know I have no faith? But Groening’s expression doesn’t strike him as condemning. As well, Marcus senses what he can describe only as love, flowing toward him from Groening. If he does know, then how does he still have that love for me? Or maybe it’s not for me. Marcus glances at Lina. Maybe it’s for her. She believes. He looks at his parents and grandparents, at Kristina, at Peter, too, at their rapt gazes. They all believe.”

            “Man should now,” Groening continues, “once and for all, come to self-reflection. He should know that he is a divine creature, a divine being, and that it is God Himself who has granted him this body of his for an earthly life!”

            Is this true? Marcus wonders. Would I really not be here, if not for God? Don’t I exist without God?

            “But we are earthbound after all,” Groening asserts, “earthbound through this body of ours. And thus, it is our first duty, the first task of every single individual, to pay attention to this unique body of his and to grant his body what God has intended for it.”

            ‘What God has intended for it’? Marcus muses. So, we’re back to this question of God and His plans for us. He frowns.

            Suddenly, Groening looks in his direction, and now his face is stern, although Marcus still feels the love flowing, and recognizes that this love is, indeed, directed towards him, too.

            “Don’t think,” Groening says, focusing his eyes first on Marcus, and then shifting his glance to encompass everyone in the room. “Don’t think. Feel! Your thinking is blocking the flow of the Heilstrom.”

            The Heilstrom? Marcus thinks, in spite of himself, despite his willingness to follow Groening’s instructions. Is this Heilstrom the love I’m feeling? But then he consciously turns his attention to Groening and his words, instead of the words in his own head that seek to distract him.

             “Pay attention to this unique body of yours,” Groening repeats, by way of a reminder.  “Grant your body what God has intended for it.”

            Yes! Lina thinks to herself, and she is not the only one. But what has God intended for my body? And how to give it that?

            “But this will only be possible,” Groening tells them, answering her unspoken questions, “if you pay attention to yourself,or, to put it more clearly, to your body, and if you tell yourself –  where you, that is, your body, has been seized by evil –   ‘That is not in order.’  You would use the words, ‘It is sick’” or ‘The sickness is here and there’  You even maintain that it is your sickness”!

As he speaks, he looks at various people in the audience, as if he knows that this woman has suffered for three months, and that man for seven years.  

“My dear seekers of healing,” Groening says, “Do not think of your illness now. Put it behind you and concentrate just on what you are feeling in your body! What must happen for each individual, what they deserve, and what they wish for themselves: It is already happening. Your heart, your body, your soul must be pure. Then God can enter, where Satan has been until now. Then I can help you all! In the end, you are all God’s children. But the greatest physician is and remains our Lord God!’”

Here he pauses, as all the people before him turn their attention to their own bodies, some with eyes closed, others staring blankly at a spot on the wall.  Groening has stopped pacing and is now standing in front of the fireplace again, studying the people in the chairs and taking note of each of them.  Finally, he begins speaking once more.             

So, my dear friends, pay attention to your body now. Do not take in any thought from the outside, but pursue the feeling, how it –this Heilstrom, the divine current from God – is working in your body.  Do not think of home now. Do not think of your business. Do not think of your job, or of your neighbor. No. Think only of yourself.  And now, as you pay attention to your body, you will receive so many realizations, that you will have to say to yourself, ‘Yes, what he has just told us is correct. I do notice it. That is new to me!’ In ultimate peace and calm, only observe the body, what is going on in it!”

Here Groening again starts to walk back and forth before the people who are listening to him in rapt attention. Now and then, he stretches out a hand to indicate one of them with his hand.

  “What do you feel?” he asks, and at one point, it is Lina whom he addresses.

Embarrassed at being singled out, she shrugs at first, and then, when Groening continues to look at her, waiting, she realizes she must give some answer. She does what he has told them to do: She observes what she is feeling inside, and is surprised at what she finds there. “Peaceful,” she tells him. “I feel peace. And happiness.”

Groening nods. Then he turned to the man with the bent arm. “And you, Sir? What are you feeling?”

“Nothing, I’m afraid,” the man replies, in an apologetic tone.

Groening waved his hand. “That is of no consequence. The current is already flowing through you.” He turns back to Lina then. “What do you feel now?”

She directs her awareness inward. “Tingling, Mr. Groening.”

“Where do you feel it? Pay attention to your body and tell me.”

Lina closes her eyes and concentrates. Then, she slowly opens her eyes, her lips parted in amazement. “I feel it through my whole body.”

“Even in your legs?” Groening asks sharply.

“Yes,” Lina tells him, sitting up straighter in her chair now.  Renate turns to her granddaughter, but before she can say anything, Groening raises a finger to his own lips to silence her.

“You have the connection to Him now,” he says, indicating not just Lina, but everyone in the room now. “But I warn you, you won’t be filled with the good until you have really disassociated yourself from evil, until there is no more evil left in you, and you say, ’I no longer want anything to do with evil!’ Only then will you be worthy to receive the divine transmission, to get all the good back in your body that belongs to you, that God has determined for you, that God has determined for your body.”

Silently, he once again fixes his intent gaze on each of them in turn.  Only after he has met the eyes of every person in the room does he speak again.

            “I ask each of you now: Give me your illness. Throw away all the dirt, and then promise yourself, ‘Now I’m going to stop, I’m not going to take in anymore evil.’ This is what I urge you to do, to first give away all the evil. Give it to me, and I offer you health.  I bring you the healing for which you have been longing for so long!”

Now everyone in attendance is staring fixedly at Groening. Does he mean it? they wonder. Can he really do it? Marcus, back to reflecting now, thinks, So, he, Groening, he’s the one who brings us the healing… Others, in a near frenzy, ask themselves, But how? How do I give him the illness, what he calls the evil??

Lina is among this latter group. And as she tries in her mind to understand how she is supposed to do what he has asked, all of her family members (except for Marcus) are either looking right at her, or – in the case of Renate and Ulrich, who are seated in her same row – holding her image in their minds. And each one of them, except for Marcus, who is musing on his own thoughts, is urging her, with all of his or her heart, Do it, Lina! Give away the evil! Give it away now!

  Groening waits for what seems to everyone an agonizingly long time, standing silently before them. Then he speaks, his voice ringing.

“In the name of God, I declare you all healthy!”

Those in attendance are quiet, as if each is now searching his or her body for a change, some shift. Groening stretches his hand out in the direction of the woman sitting behind Kristina.  “Madame, what do you feel?”

She doesn’t reply at first, evidently still in the process of completing the inventory of her body. Then she raises her eyes to meet Groening’s and says, in a soft, nearly inaudible voice, “I feel nothing, Mr. Groening.”

“What do you mean, precisely?” Groening presses her. “Nothing at all?”

She shakes her head.  “No. I mean that I feel no pain.” 

At this, Kristina turns in her chair and sees that the face of this woman, who had come in wracked by pain, is now as if full of light. She is smiling from ear to ear. 

“Did you have pain when you came in?” Groening asks her.

“Why, Mr. Groening, I have been full of nothing but pain for two years now.  The doctor, he told me he couldn’t help me. Told me it was stomach cancer…”

But Groening interrupts her. “Madame, we don’t speak of the evil here. And no need to speak of that burden, because now you are free of it. Tomorrow, go to your doctor and ask him to do his tests. He will confirm your healing.”

At this pronouncement, a buzz spreads through the room, as people turn in astonishment to their neighbors. Marcus turns and gazes at the woman. So, Groening healed her! he thinks, without noticing the joy that has crept into him.

Groening says no more to the healed woman. Instead, he crosses the room and casually picks up his keys from the small table where he’d placed them at the beginning of the evening. Standing by the table now, he motions to the man who had come in with the cane, dragging his right leg. He is sitting at the end of the first row, ahead of Peter.

“Sir,” he says, “may I ask you something?”

The man nods, and Groening, who looks like he is about to pose his question, and even opens his mouth to speak, instead suddenly drops his keys onto the floor, as if they have slipped through his fingers.  Seeing this, the man who was waiting to be questioned springs from his chair, takes two quick steps, and leans down to pick up Groening’s keys. As he straightens up, he looks in surprise at the keys and then at Groening, and, finally, at his cane, which is lying on the floor by his seat.

“Thank you,” Groening says simply. “Now,” he continues, laying a hand on the man’s shoulder, “Would please do me the favor of walking over to the archway there, and then back to me again?”

This the man does, tentatively at first, and slowly. But once he reaches the arch and turns around, he strides confidently back to where Groening is standing.  He, like the woman behind Kristina, is beaming. Tears are streaming down his face. 

“Now,” Groening asks him, his hand on the man’s shoulder again, “which leg is it that was crippled during the war?”

The man, who towers over Groening, now that he is no longer hunched over a cane, ponders this, and then replies, his brows knitted, “I…I don’t remember!”  Laughter breaks out in the crowd. Someone calls out, “It was your right leg!  I saw you pulling it along when you came in.”  And the man himself chuckles, realizing the absurdity of his response. “Really, I don’t recall!” he cries.

“And indeed,” Groening tells him, “Mr. Handler, why should you remember? That leg which you broke when an ammunition box fell on it –  it’s now right as rain!”

The man looks at Groening and wonders how this man could know how his leg had been broken, or his name, for that matter. But before he can pose this question, Groening makes another request.

“Kind Sir, will you please hand me your cane?”

Handler walks easily to his seat, bends down and picks up his stick, and strides back over to Groening.  Groening takes the cane in his right hand and studies it for a moment.  Then he stretches his left arm out straight before him, raises the cane with his right hand and brings it down onto his left arm with a sharp whack. The cane breaks in two. The shocked audience members respond, some shouting, others clapping, still others simply nodding and smiling. Groening leans down to pick up the pieces of the cane that now lie on the floor, and then holds them loosely in his hands.

“You won’t be needing this anymore, will you?” When Handler shakes his head, Groening adds, “Please accept this broken cane as a reminder of your healing.”

In the first moment after Groening breaks Handler’s cane over his arm, Lina suddenly feels a strong and sharp pain in her legs. It starts in her ankles and then runs quickly up through her calves and thighs, and then into her hips.  The pain catches her so off guard that she cries out, but no one seems to hear her, since so many of the people in the room are responding to what Groening has done.  Only Renate turns to look at her granddaughter, who has now gone very pale and is staring straight ahead of her, at the fireplace.  Renate lays her hand on Lina’s, but she seems not even to notice. 

What’s going on? Lina asks herself, although her whole lower body hurts so much that she can’t formulate any explanation for what is going on.  The pain is intense, and searing, as if she is being simultaneously torn apart and compressed beneath an anvil.  She can’t understand this with her brain, but as time passes – really, only a few minutes go by, but Lina has a sense of being outside of time, in a space of eternity – she gradually comes to recognize what she’s feeling. Not a memory, but a recognition.  This is what I felt that day. When the wood fell on me.  

In the nearly four years since her accident, Lina had never remembered what her body experienced following the accident.  In the early weeks, she sometimes wondered why it was that she had no memory of the pain that she must have felt when the crushing load of wood tumbled on top of her.   Then how can I recognize it now? That thought does penetrate her mind now, but again, what she is feeling at this moment is a knowing, not a remembering.  She is sure of it, even if she can’t explain it.

And once she knows what it is that she’s feeling, Lina is suddenly overcome by fear.  Now she turns to her grandmother, and Renate sees the terror in her eyes. Lina grasps Renate’s hand in a vice-like grip, but can’t get any words out.  “Lina, Dear,” Renate whispers, leaning over, “What is it? What’s happening?” But Lina just shakes her head.

Then, in an instant, Groening is standing before them.  “What do you feel, Miss Bunke?” he asks Lina.

“Mr. Groening,” she cries, “I feel terrible, terrible pain.”

“Where do you feel it?” 

“All up and down my legs.” She begins to cry now, for it hurts so much.

“Do you recognize these pains?” he asks.

Lina nods.  Her family members are exchanging glances. What can he mean by asking her this?

“Where do you know them from?” Groening asks her.

“From the accident,” she says, sobbing. Now she is leaning forward, rubbing her thighs with her hands. Renate reaches over to put an arm around her shoulders, and Kristina leans forward to embrace her, but Groening waves them off.

“Do not touch her. It will interfere with the current.” After making sure that they will heed his words, Groening looks intently at Lina.

“Please check your body.  Are these the same pains as before? The same as when the wood fell on you from the wagon? And in the period before your casts were removed and the pain went away?”

All the Gassmanns and Bunkes look at Groening in amazement.  How does he know this about her? Kristina turns to Marcus with a question in her eyes, but he shakes his head. “I didn’t tell anyone what happened to her,” he whispers to her. “Only that she was paralyzed.” How does he know these things?

Lina sits, directing her powers of observation to her legs.  It’s so odd to feel anything at all there, after all these years, all this time when I seemed not to have any living legs at all. But are these pains the same as before?  Lina looks up at Groening like a schoolchild who’s been asked a math question far more complex than she’s able to comprehend.  But he just waits for her to come up with answer.  She closes her eyes, concentrates.

“They are in the same spots,” she finally says, slowly.  “But…”

“But what?” Groening prompts her, his voice gentle now.  Now the room is so silent you can hear the gentle ticking of the clock on the mantelpiece.

She looks up at him, and Renate can see that the fear is gone from her eyes. “They are not accompanied by the same thoughts as before.”

“What thoughts did you have, then, with the old pain?” Groening persists.

Lina inhales deeply, as if deciding whether or not to share what she has never revealed to anyone. Finally, she begins.

“’A home.’ ‘Get rid of me.’”

Groening interrupts her. “Speak up, Miss Bunke, please.”

‘Useless,’” she goes on, after clearing her throat. “‘Euthanasia.’”  As Lina speaks, she hears her mother inhale sharply.

Groening nods. “And now?”

“There aren’t any of those thoughts now. And I feel peaceful. Even though it hurts so much.”

Groening nods again, and he smiles at her, in such a kind way that she feels even more peaceful inside, even a bit happy.

Then a question bursts from Renate’s mouth. “But Mr. Groening, why does it hurt so much? That can’t be right! Can’t you help her?”

“It is right,” Groening says, answering Renate’s plea, but still focusing his gaze on Lina. “And it has to be that you feel pain. Those are the Regelungen – the regulation pains.The body is being brought into order.  After being paralyzed for four years, you can’t expect the change to occur without any pain. Pains occurring after the healing imply Regelungen.They will stop.  Observe your body. Observe it attentively.  In three or four days, you will notice more changes. I ask you to come back with your family in a week’s time and report these changes to me.

“Mr. Groening,” Ethel queries from the row behind Lina, “does that mean, then, that Lina is healed?” She and all other members of the family barely dare to breathe at this point.

“The pain will come and go until the healing has been completed,” he replies, speaking to the group as a whole now.

Ethel turns to Viktor and frowns, and then asks, “But this pain… Why does she have to feel it? It went away. Why did it come back?”

Groening is now standing once more in front of the fireplace.

“Healing is a Regelung. Every illness that finds its Regelung will be accompanied by Regelung pain.” He points now to the woman sitting behind Kristina. This is true for you, also. An organic disease needs Regelungen.  The illness disappears, but on the other hand, the Regelung does cause pain.”

“But I feel no pain,” the woman sitting behind Kristina reminds him.

“There is still evil within you that must leave. And when you experience that, do not fear that the healing has not been successful for you.The Regelungen – these are the evil leaving the body.”

Certainly, there are many confused looks on the faces of the people in attendance. Mr. Handler is sitting with his eyes closed, as if trying to determine whether he is feeling any of these regulation pains. He notices nothing that he thinks might qualify, and looking at Lina, who is smiling despite the fact that her body is now wracked by pain, he counts himself lucky.

Everyone seems in a daze.  Lina barely notices when Mrs. Birkner stands up and thanks Mr. Groening for coming.  Their hostess tells them that they are invited to come back the following week, and that they may bring others with them, too.  Groening speaks some words of encouragement to the guests – although neither Lina nor her family members are taking them in at all. Then Groening starts walking toward the door, and Lina feels a new burst of fear.  She reaches her hand out, but she needn’t have worried.

He stops in front of her and places one hand on her shoulder.  Then he reaches into his pocket and pulls something small out of it. It’s a small, round, shiny ball, she realizes when she sees it. It looks like it’s made out of tinfoil. Groening places it into her hand, which begins vibrating once her fingers close around the ball. The sensation is similar to what she is already feeling throughout her body, only stronger.  Is that ‘current’ in it??

“Keep this with you at all times until you come back next week.”

“Mr. Groening,” Renate breaks in, “will she be able to walk?”

Groening does look at her this time, but his words seem meant for all of them.

“Do not demand that order manifest immediately,” he says.“The more extensive the disorder, the more work is required in the body, and so it will be, for as long as it takes, until complete order manifests.” Then he leans over and says, to Lina alone, “Trust and believe. The divine power helps and heals.”

At this point, Egon Arthur Schmidt comes up behind Groening and touches his elbow lightly. Groening nods, and the two men stride out of the Birkners’ parlor, leaving the people in the chairs wondering what they have just been a part of.

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 26

Chapter 26

July, 1949

Gassmann-Bunke homestead

The day after Viktor worked the equivalent of a magic trick that secured Marcus’ support for taking Lina to Herford to meet Bruno Groening, an atmosphere of excitement and almost frenzied activity dominated throughout the homestead. This was so unlike these people who, despite the fact that they all had the ability to see clearly the path before them, generally moved along that path with deliberateness, rather than wild abandon. Ethel was the only one in the family who tended to float ahead with a lightness that seemed based on whims, but which was, in reality, based wholly in her strong intuitive connection to the world around her. 

But this ethereal nature of hers had, as we’ve seen, been a bit dampened by the struggles of the previous two decades.  Even so, when the decision was made to take Lina to Herford, Ethel’s lightness somehow worked its way back up through the layers of sadness and worry that had settled upon her over the preceding twenty years.  Viktor was the first to glimpse its reappearance, when she broached the topic of the trip with him that one night before bed.  He saw that, as his wife told him about Groening and about how Lina wanted to go to Herford to see him, she seemed to come alive.  It was as if little points of her long-buried light began to penetrate her skin, more and more, until, finally, he saw before him the Ethel of 1921, fully illuminated, the way she had appeared to him in the early days of their acquaintance, and then, courtship. It was this sight, combined with his own, heart-opening experience in the forest that one day, that made it possible for something of the Viktor of those early days to resurface, too. And although neither he nor Ethel spoke about these changes that were taking place in each other, something shifted between them, as we have seen, and it was this shift that convinced Viktor that they must get Lina to see Groening.  He couldn’t explain why he was so certain of this, but he felt very keenly that therein lay the key to making things right in his family. If just the thought of taking Lina to Herford brought the brightness back into Ethel’s whole being, then what might happen when they actually got there?

   Perhaps surprisingly – because in other ways he was so very calculating – Marcus was the other member of the family who tended toward impulsiveness.  He seemed to have inherited his father’s ability to see every situation for what it was and judge where the personal benefit lay.  Still, the two of them differed: Viktor, by the time he reached the age Marcus was now, had realized his tendency to manipulate others, and had sworn to follow a different road for the rest of his life. But Marcus had not yet gained this insight. He was still firmly on the path of self-interest. 

Like the younger iteration of Viktor, Marcus had no use for, or belief in, God. His suppertime refutations of God’s existence were quite sincere, rather than constituting the idle philosophizing he tried to pass them off as. Early in his life – even on up into early adolescence – he made a great effort to believe in God. There was a great deal of mention of God and His supposed powers in the household, even though the Gassmann-Bunkes were strictly Sunday worshippers. So, when Viktor beat him for an infraction, Marcus cried out to God in his heart, begging for an end to his father’s brutality. The beatings persisted. When he prayed to be allowed to use the rifle, this prayer was, indeed, granted, but the terms of the agreement turned out to be so harsh that it felt to Marcus as if God was just laughing at him. It was this incident with the rifle that destroyed any scrap of belief in God that he might have still had. After that, Marcus swore he would never pray for anything again. And on the recent evening, when he fled to the forest after Viktor’s announcement that Marcus would have to come back and work at home, all of Marcus’ resentment toward both his father and toward God erupted in an explosion of anger: As he swung the dead birch branch against the ground, over and over again, it was the rifle he was imagining smashing, smashing, smashing.

Thus, early in his life, Marcus was left without God to turn to. Finding himself in this predicament, he didn’t seek guidance from the trees, or from some thin stream of the divine deep within himself. Rather, much in the way his grandmother, Renate, had done before the suppertime discussions about God led her to see things differently, Marcus felt – no, knew – that he could rely only on himself. He would determine and forge his own way, based solely on his own judgment.

Let’s be clear: In this approach, he did differ from his grandmother in one important way. Renate had always firmly believed in God. It was just that she never – until now – included Him in her decision-making process. Marcus, however, felt that he was fully on his own. He saw no one around him whom he could trust to help him make his way through life. As he saw it, his father actively strived to thwart him. (When following this train of thought, Marcus conveniently disregarded how Viktor had gotten him placed in the Censorship Office during the war, and in that plum Civil Service position afterwards.)

The Civil Service position in Varel was absolutely key to Marcus’ long-range plans, and he was committed to fighting to keep it. He may not have heard God whisper to him in the darkest part of the night that this job was part of His plan for Marcus. And he may not have felt this idea flow into him from the sturdy, reliable trunk of a spruce tree at his back. But he did feel every bit as convinced of the plan’s rightness as if he had come by this guidance in one of those ways. That was because Marcus did feel something deep inside him, a power that he tapped into when he was faced with making a decision. He found it more difficult to calm himself down than Viktor did with his spruce tree, more difficult to get into a state that would allow him to sense this “something”, but he had developed a way to do this. 

Not every night – because sometimes he was just too agitated, as he’d been when he pounded the birch branch against the ground – but every couple of days, late at night, he took a seat on the edge of his bed. The first time he did this was the night before he started working in Varel. Full of anxiety at beginning this new post, overcome by fear of not meeting his new boss’s– or his father’s – expectations of him, he found himself sitting on his bed, bent elbows resting on his knees, his head in his hands. He was so anxious, so beside himself, that he even stopped breathing without noticing it.  But he still felt his heart pounding.  Then, reflexively, he gasped. The sudden intake of air calmed him, and the loud exhale through his mouth helped slow his heart rate, too.

In the years following that first experience, this process grew into a habit of sorts. Marcus rested his hands on his knees and breathed deeply – in through his nose, out through his mouth, until he felt his breathing slow – until it felt like the very core of him shifted out of his muddled head or his tight throat or chest, and settled firmly into his abdomen. When that happened, Marcus felt both calm and strong. First his belly grew warm, and he felt a mild pulsing there which grew in intensity as the minutes passed. Then this pulsing spread outward, in all directions, throughout his body.

Marcus never would have described the pulsing he felt as the divine power that Lina and their grandfather mentioned feeling when they were in the forest, or as something that came from God. As we’ve seen, God was just not in the picture for Marcus. What he sensed within him as he sat on the edge of the bed of an evening – he thought of it as just a power. It was a neutral strength that existed in him without any of the divinity or sweetness or loving overlay that Lina and Ulrich seemed to associate with what they felt flowing inside them.  If someone were to push Marcus to define this power, he would say, with a shrug, that it was simply his core, his essence. It didn’t come from anywhere or anyone else. It was just… him.

Marcus had developed the habit of embracing the ideas and insights that came to him when he felt this power pulsing steadily within him. He somehow recognized that the ideas that came through to him when his essential power was flowing were to be trusted – he just knew what to do – but that the ones that flew into his head when he was agitated did not serve him well. This he learned through trial and error. And although it was often very difficult for him to keep from acting on the spur of the moment, under the influence of the agitated thoughts, he tried his best to hold back at these times. He strived to wait until he could have a quiet moment alone, before making any decision. It seemed to him that following this procedure represented the key to expressing his own free will – which he prized so highly – and to avoiding falling under others’ control.

So, what about the moment at the supper table, then, when Viktor extended his hand to Marcus, with the promise that Marcus could stay in his job in Varel, if Lina went to see Groening, and was healed? Wasn’t it an impulsive decision that led him to reach out and take his father’s hand? In fact, it was not. As Marcus listened to what Viktor said, he sensed his power, his essence, settling firmly into his core. He felt strong and calm, and deep within him, he felt clearly that agreeing to this bargain was the right step to take, even though he couldn’t have said, at that moment, why it was right. He just knew that it was.

For this reason, once Marcus accepted his father’s offer – and hand – over supper the day before, he felt an inner urge to move, move, move, to make everything happen before it could fade away like a mirage.

Certainly, everyone else in the family felt an urgency about the situation, too, even if each individual had his or her reasons for supporting the plan.  They were all grateful that the initial discussion did not devolve into a tense argument over the real heart of the matter: Could this Groening really heal Lina? No one could explain what had kept them from talking about this over supper the day before – and since then, too. It was as if everyone knew that they were on the cusp of an event that could truly transform all their lives, and understood intuitively that asking the obvious question might destroy the fragile fabric of this opportunity that had somehow come their way.  For this reason, they focused on the practical details: Since the unanimous thought was that time was of the essence, they decided to head off for Herford on Friday.  Today was Wednesday. That gave them only two days to make all the decisions prepare for their journey.

Looking at the maps, they calculated that it would take them half a day to drive to Herford, and half a day to drive back. But there was no telling how long they would have to wait to see Mr. Groening, assuming they were able to see him at all.  This thought – that something might prevent the meeting – came to everyone in the family, but, being Gassmanns and Bunkes, they didn’t voice it, as if they feared that expressing it aloud might draw that result toward them.  Instead, they threw themselves into preparations for a trip that might stretch to two or three days, if they ended up having to wait for an audience.

  So, in addition to carrying out their usual daily chores and work, each family member took on additional tasks that would contribute to putting the plan into action – except for Lina. She had no extra assignments.  She was in such a state of anticipation and distraction, that it was all she could do to take care of darning the socks without stitching the mending to her apron through inattention. Finally, seeing how worked up her daughter was, Ethel rolled her out into the yard. “Take a good, long stroll, dear one,” she told Lina.  “Enjoy that wheelchair while you still can. Once we’re back from Herford, we’re going to really put you to work!”  Lina laughed and began rolling herself toward the gate. A minute later, she was moving faster and faster down the lane, for once full of joyful expectation, instead of frustration and hopelessness.

Given the high level of excitement around the homestead, everyone was actually grateful to have extra chores: It wasn’t just Lina who had excess energy to work off! It was Wednesday morning, and Renate was baking extra bread to take with them. Meanwhile, Ethel checked the cheese supply in the cellar and set about making some fresh goat cheese for the trip.  There was plenty of bacon they could take, and some smoked sausage, too.  Kristina offered to take on the task of readying pillows and blankets: If they did end up having to stay in Herford for several days, who knew what conditions there might be like?

Peter and Viktor loaded a china cabinet they’d just completed into their pickup truck (acquired two years earlier, thanks to the extra income Marcus’ job brought in) and set off for Varel to deliver it to clients there. On the way, they dropped Ulrich off at the Walters’ farm, where he planned to talk with Lorena and Stefan about possibly borrowing their truck. Of course, they’d need it only if Marcus failed to complete his assignment: He was to ask at his office to see whether any of his coworkers would lend him a car for a few days.  If not, the whole extended Gassmann-Bunke family would head south to Herford in the two pickup trucks.  That wouldn’t be ideal, and even if Marcus arranged a car, they’d still have to take one of the trucks, because they certainly could not all fit in one car…

It was quite the discussion at the table the evening before all this activity, when they got down to deciding who would go to Herford, and who would not.  At first, Viktor said that he and Ethel would take Lina on their own. But then, Renate asserted her right to come along. “It was my idea in the first place!” she cried, although by then, nearly everyone knew this was not the case.  Next, Lina declared that she didn’t want to go without Kristina (who was grateful for her friend’s devotion). Marcus insisted on being part of the travelling party, if only so he could make sure the plan proceeded in a timely fashion. As he saw it, the sooner they got Lina to Herford, the sooner he could rescind his letter of resignation. Ulrich had been hanging back in the conversation, but when Renate looked pointedly at him, he coughed and said that, as head of the family, he’d better come along, too. Besides, he was the one who knew how to get the pickup started up again if it stalled. At this point, Peter, who’d noticed his own secret hopes in his heart, announced firmly that he wasn’t about to be left behind, if the whole rest of the family was going.  That left only little 9-year-old Ingrid.

“What about me?” she asked, brightly, already looking forward to the prospect of what she interpreted as an adventure, rather than a last-ditch effort to help Auntie Lina.

Almost in unison, and with only slight differences in phrasing, Kristina, Renate, and Ethel immediately told her, “You’ll stay with Aunt Lorena and Uncle Stefan while we’re gone.” Crestfallen, Ingrid was about to object, but Kristina silently gave her a stern look, and she closed her mouth and slumped in her chair, dejected.

By late afternoon on Wednesday, all was in readiness, or on track to be ready by Thursday evening, when they intended to pack everything, in preparation for an early morning departure on Friday. Loaves of bread were cooling on the counter, and fresh cheese was draining and would be ready to be packed in crocks the next day.  These would be placed into baskets alongside cured sausage wrapped in cloth. Renate made sure there was also plenty of fruit – fresh berries and dried apples.

But all of these preparations seemed minor achievements compared to the news that Marcus shared when he arrived home from work.

“I’ve gotten us a car!” he announced proudly as he sat down with them around the table for their evening bread and salami. “I’ll pick it up after work tomorrow.”

Lina, who’d been sitting with her long braid wrapped around her wrist, raised her arms in such jubilation that the freed braid flew into the air above her before falling back to her chest. “Marcus, you did it!” she cried gleefully. She clapped her hands together with a joy that reminded her parents and grandparents of the light-hearted young woman Lina had been before her accident. It did their hearts good to see it.

Spirits were understandably high that evening. They all felt restless, and since the sun was still setting late in the evening at this point in the summer, they didn’t seem to know what to do with themselves.  If Marcus had brought the car home this evening, they would certainly not have been able to restrain themselves from heading out that very minute.  As it was, though, they had to wait another day. And after all, as Ulrich reminded Renate, there were still things to take care of on the homestead tomorrow, so that they could be sure that everything would run smoothly while they were away.

Renate and Ulrich were the only ones who remained at the house that early evening, having decided to “take in the air” by sitting outside the back door in two rocking chairs Viktor carried outside for them.  Peter headed to the workshop to start organizing the wood for a set of dining room chairs he and Viktor would work on once they got back from Herford. Marcus, feeling in an expansive mood, uncharacteristically offered to help his brother. Like the others, he didn’t quite know what to do with himself, and he had to keep himself busy until it was time for his usual evening chat with Kristina.  As for Viktor and Ethel, without even talking it over, they immediately set out for the treehouse, where they had both found so much peace in the past.  With a bit of luck, perhaps they could resurrect this way of connecting to the divine and to each other.

Lina and Kristina had hoped to have a bit of time to discuss the events that were about to unfold, but Ingrid, knowing that she would soon be separated from her mother for at least a day or two, pleaded to be able to join them on their evening stroll. Kristina didn’t have the heart to deny her this, and Lina acquiesced, too.

“Come on, little one,” Lina told Ingrid. “I’ll race you to that fallen log by the path into the woods. See it?”  She leaned forward in her chair, hands poised on the wheel rims, and made the noises of a car engine being revved.

Ingrid laughed and set off at full speed before Lina could even call out, “Ready… Set… Go!”

Lina smiled, too, and turned around. “Come on,” she told Kristina, “You’re going to have to push me if we’re going to have any chance of catching her!”

And thus it ended up that the three of them reached Lina and Kristina’s favorite talking spot almost at the same time. But Ingrid was the first to touch the log. In fact, she sprawled across it, holding her side, although none of them could say whether the ache was from exertion or laughter.  Just a moment later, Lina’s toes touched the log, too, as Kristina pushed her right up to it.

“You cheated!” Ingrid chided them. “Mama, she was supposed to do the race on her own!”

Kristina froze for a moment, wondering how Lina would respond.  But she needn’t have worried.

“I will race you on my own next time,” Lina told Ingrid cheerily, reaching out to touch the girl’s flushed cheeks with her two hands.  “I promise!”

By the time the sun set and darkness was beginning to fall, Ingrid was in bed. Lina and her parents and grandparents were all inside the house, busying themselves with whatever they found to occupy their hands or their minds.  Peter was still in the workshop, sitting at the workbench, shoulders hunched, staring down at the plans for the chairs, but without really taking them in.  Having Marcus out there with him had done the opposite of quell his anxiety, and he was grateful when his brother finally went outside to talk to Kristina.  The door to the yard was shut, and Peter was happy about that.  He had no desire at all to hear their personal discussions.

Peter knew the two of them were courting, of course. No one in the family had any doubts about that. What Peter couldn’t understand was why Kristina had fallen for his brother.  Doesn’t she see through him?? Without even realizing he was doing so, Peter viewed Marcus and everything he did through the lens of their childhood. When he looked at Marcus, he only ever saw a bully.  It was beyond his capabilities to imagine that his brother could actually feel tenderness for someone.  As Peter saw it, his brother was tainted by meanness and aggression. It never would have occurred to Peter that his own experiences shaped how he saw his brother.  Once a bully, always a bully. That was Peter’s view regarding Marcus. And so, over the previous two years since Marcus began courting Kristina, a combination of anger and worry and indignation and envy took root in Peter. Since he was convinced of the durability of Marcus’ negative character traits, he worried that Kristina might suffer at Marcus’ hands, and when this thought came to him, his own persistent anger at his own and Lina’s mistreatment rose up.  But he immediately stuffed it down again. (After all, Marcus was the angry one, not him!)

Then there was his disbelief that Kristina had chosen Marcus over him. Not that Peter saw himself as any prince charming, but for God’s sake! He, Peter, was the nicer one, the better carver, the handsomer one.  He knew all of this to be true.  Of course, there was his gimpy leg, and Peter had spent the previous two years telling himself that if only he was as physically whole as Marcus was, then Kristina would see clearly which of the two brothers was the better bet for her. Hence the envy.  Hence the high hopes that he, too, placed on the visit to Bruno Groening.  If Lina managed to see Groening – even if they all just had to stand out in that yard, in front of the house – then they’d all be there with her. That meant there was hope. For now, though, it was Marcus and Kristina sitting together outside the workshop.

Like everyone else on the Gassmann-Bunke homestead, Kristina was full of excitement about the coming journey to Herford, and when Marcus joined her, her face – her whole being, really – shone with joyful anticipation.  She even patted the spot next to her on the bench, something she had never done before.  Every other night, she waited meekly, her hands folded demurely in her lap, as if she were holding her breath and waiting to see whether Marcus would really come out to talk with her.  Now, though, she seemed to have come alive in a way he hadn’t seen before. 

Seeing this change in her, another person might have drawn the conclusion that she was just excited for Lina, but Marcus – being Marcus – interpreted her new openness as an adoring response to the tremendous feat he’d accomplished that day: securing his boss’ car for the trip.  She’s proud of me!  This emboldened him, so that he gave her a big smile and a strong hug as soon as he sat down. He leaned back against the wall behind them, still smiling, stretched his arms out above his head, and then slowly lowered them, so that one fell to his side, while the other came to rest around Kristina’s shoulders.

“I can hardly believe it,” Kristina said, turning to him. “Lina’s actually going to get to see Bruno Groening!” She raised her hands in front of her and brought them together, as if she was getting ready to clap them together.

Marcus nodded and ran his right hand over his hair, smoothing it, but said nothing.

“I can’t wait to see what it’s like there – in Herford,” Kristina went on, animatedly. “How does he actually heal the people who come?  It’s so mysterious!”

“Hard to know what to think of all that,” Marcus replied, in a noncommittal tone, “but if she gets back on her feet again, that’s what counts.”

When she gets back on her feet,” Kristina said, as if reminding herself. Then she turned herself on the bench so that she was facing him with her whole body. “We all have to believe he can do it, believe for her!”

  “I’ll leave that to you all,” Marcus told her.  “I’m just the driver.” He smiled, to underscore the joke, but Kristina looked at him closely.

“Do you not believe that Mr. Groening can heal her?” she asked quietly.

“Kristina,” he said, gently pulling her closer to him, “What do I know about these things? I don’t believe or not believe.  Seeing is believing. Isn’t that what they say?”

She nodded, and he went on.

“Right. So, if Lina gets healed, then I’ll believe it. Like I said, for now I’m just the driver.”

“Don’t you think, though, that it will help her if we all believe it’s possible?”

Marcus paused, trying to find a softer way to express what he was thinking. Finally, he said, “Don’t you think that if he can really do what all those people say he can do, then it doesn’t matter what we think?”

Kristina pondered that. “I never thought of it that way,” she replied thoughtfully. “You mean, if he really is that powerful, then one of us not believing won’t keep Lina from being healed?”

“Something like that,” Marcus said. He wanted to distract her from this potentially dangerous topic, and he was happy that his words had come across as more positive than his actual thoughts on the subject. “The main thing is, day after tomorrow, we’ll head down there and find out exactly what this Groening can do.” 

Kristina, shifting her focus to the actual trip, began talking about what was really most important to Marcus. “It’s so wonderful that you were able to convince your boss to lend you the car!”

“Didn’t take much convincing,” he told her, sitting up a little straighter.  “He was happy to help.”

Kristina leaned her head on his shoulder. “He must think a lot of you, Marcus.”

She couldn’t have said anything more pleasing to him, or in a more adoring tone.

“Oh, I don’t know about that,” he laughed, but he squeezed her shoulder and briefly leaned his head down to touch hers.  His tone sounded light, but his stomach was in knots, as he tried to judge when the best time would be to say what he wanted to say.

Kristina allowed her head to remain on Marcus’ shoulder. She was enjoying this closeness with him and the new lightness between them.  He seemed so at ease…

“He’s not the only one, you know,” she said after a minute.

“Not the only one what?” Marcus asked, turning his head toward hers.

Here Kristina grew shy and, sitting up again, looked down at her lap.  “The only one who thinks a lot of you.”  She waited a moment and then glanced over and met his gaze.  He was smiling, and in just a very genuine and happy way, so she went on. “What I mean is that I think a lot of you, too, Marcus. More than a lot.  Much more than a lot.”

He removed his arm from around her shoulder and took both of her hands in his.  “I’m so happy to hear that,” he told her, his voice low, but strong. “Because I think a lot of you, too.” He paused.  Now! “In fact, Kristina, I’ve been wanting to tell you that I love you.”

Although she had thought he might have been about to say this, Kristina still blushed and took in her breath sharply. Then she smiled with her whole heart, looked down at her hands inside Marcus’, and said, so softly that he asked her to repeat herself, “I love you, too.”  She wanted to ask him why he had waited until now to tell her this, but her heart was so full of joy that she pushed the thought aside and concentrated on wiping away the tears that suddenly began to flow from her eyes.

Marcus reached up to dry the tears, telling her tenderly not to cry.  Then they leaned their heads together and kissed.  First it was just tentative, soft pecks, but these soon gave way to deep, heartfelt kisses that left them oblivious to everything and everyone but each other. They were so locked in each other’s embrace and joy, that they didn’t even notice Peter when he emerged from the workshop to head back to the house.  He caught sight of them, sitting there in the near darkness, and in his shock and disgust, he nearly said something he would certainly have regretted later. But he caught himself in time and moved soundlessly along his way, toward the dim light that still emanated from the windows of the log home.

*          *          *

It was past the time when Marcus usually got home from Varel the next night, and although no one said anything about it as they sat at the table, eating a light supper, they were all worried that something might have gone wrong. Then, just past 5:30, they heard a motor outside.  They all craned their necks to look out the windows, and Ulrich, who sat closest to the door got up from his seat with surprising speed. He leaned out the open door and then turned around to address them, his eyes shining.

“He’s here!” he shouted, although there was really no need to shout. “With the car!”

They all immediately rose from their seats and headed out to the yard – with Kristina pushing Lina’s wheelchair ahead of her.

What they saw, amidst the dirt and sparse grass and clumps of flowers in front of the workshop was a gleaming, black Opel Kapitän. Marcus climbed out of the driver’s seat, beaming as if he himself owned the car.

“So this is your boss’ car?” Ethel asked, clearly impressed. She ran her hand over the hood, while Ulrich bent down to examine the headlights. 

“Must be one of the new ones,” Ulrich announced. “The old ones had those hexagonal headlights.” He shook his head. “Must have cost a pretty penny.”

“How’d you arrange it, Son?” Viktor asked, and Marcus felt himself swell with pride, hearing the approval in his father’s voice.

“I just talked to him, to Mr. Weiss,” he explained. “Told him we had a family emergency with Lina, here, that we had to go to Herford, and said I was looking for a car to borrow for a few days.”

Renate had come over now and was peering through the windows at the leather seats. “And he just offered you his, just like that?”

“More or less,” Marcus replied.  “He wants me to keep working there as much as I want stay, so he told me he’d help.  And that’s why I’m so late. I drove him home and then took the car.”

Kristina had come up beside him now and was smiling and shaking her head in amazement. “Marcus, you did it! You really did it!” she said, excitedly, and slipped her hand into his without thinking how this would look to the rest of the family.  It did not escape anyone’s notice.

Turning to Kristina, Marcus asked, “Did you doubt me, Tina?”  He had a smile in his voice, but even after the previous night’s avowals of love between them, his heart still seemed to stop as he awaited her response.  But he needn’t have worried. She shook her head fiercely.

“Never, Marcus. Never!”

Just then, their old hunting dog, Stick, came bounding out from behind the workshop and ran full tilt toward Marcus who had, for some reason, always been his favorite. Full of joy, Stick propelled himself headlong at Marcus, leaping up and knocking him back against the car. Marcus laughed and wrestled playfully with the dog, but when he let go, Stick, still playing, leapt up and, missing Marcus, came down against the car door. Marcus’ face went white. Pushing Stick aside roughly, he immediately crouched down to examine the finish.

“Get him out of here! Marcus shouted, to no one in particular. “He scratches this car, and I’m done for!” He tried to make a joke out of it, but they could all see the genuine anxiety on his face. Peter took Stick by the collar and led him to the workshop, where, after moving the water bowl inside for him, he shut the dog up for the night. 

He was just coming out of the workshop when Stefan pulled into the yard, his wife, Lorena, sitting next to him in the cab of their pickup truck. 

As Lorena lowered herself slowly out and down to the ground, Renate, confused, asked:

“Did Ulrich not tell you we won’t need your truck tomorrow? Marcus’ boss lent him this Opel. Look!”

Lorena shook her head, gave the car a glance without really taking it in, then gestured to Renate that she wanted to speak with her in private.  By now, Stefan had gotten out of the truck, too, and joined the crowd. But all eyes were on the two sisters.

Renate bent her head close to her sister’s mouth, because Lorena was speaking in such a low voice it was barely audible.  But when Renate heard what Lorena had to say, she straightened up and looked her sister in the eye, and the rest of them could see her shaking her head, while Lorena slowly nodded, confirming that her words were true.

Visibly saddened, Renate walked over to the assembled family, with Lorena following behind her, and took a position next to Lina.

“Grandma?” Lina asked, her voice tight.  “What is it? Is something wrong?”

“We won’t be going to Herford tomorrow after all,” Renate intoned flatly.

Various cries of disbelief could be heard, and everyone began questioning her at once, demanding an explanation.

“Well,” Renate began, and then, as if she couldn’t bear to go on, said, “Lorena, you might as well tell it, since you’re the one who heard it.”

Lorena, who was shorter and slighter and less imposing than her sister, nonetheless managed to imbue her words with authority.

“I was listening to the radio just a bit ago,” she told them, standing up as tall as she could, hoping her stance could lend them all the strength they’d need.  “And there was a story about Mr. Groening.” She paused, glancing at the confused faces of those before her.  A story about Mr. Groening, Lina thought.  That must be good. More healings, perhaps. But if that’s the case, why does Aunt Lorena look so serious?

“Go on,” Renate whispered, laying a hand on her sister’s shoulder.

“Yes.  Well, they said that as of yesterday, the city of Herford has issued a healing ban against him.”

Lina’s face went pale. She couldn’t speak. 

But Ethel found her voice. “A healing ban? What does that mean, exactly?” she asked, looking intently at her aunt.

“According to what they said on the radio, it means that the city has forbidden him to do any healing work at all there.  And all the people who’ve come to see him – everyone waiting out on the square in front of the house – they’ve been ordered to leave.”

“But what about people who just come to see him at that house?” Lina asked in an agitated voice.  “Maybe he’s still allowed to help them?”

“I’m afraid not,” Lorena replied.  “He can’t do anything that the city officials might consider healing work.”

“But they can’t just drive people away!” Kristina cried, releasing Marcus’ hand and making her way over to Lina, who was sitting stock still, staring at Lorena.

“That’s exactly what they’re doing,” Lorena told them all. “Not like they’re criminals or anything, mind you. But they’ve ordered everyone to leave.”

“It’s a disgrace,” Peter said bitterly. “No one wants anything to do with the sick and the hurt. Just imagine what a scene that must be, thousands of people in front of that house.  People that that city – and our whole country, too – don’t want to admit exist.  Not in our perfect Germany –“

“Stop, Son,” Viktor said firmly, but with kindness. He laid his hand gently on Peter’s back, a gesture that did not escape Marcus’ notice.  “The city probably just doesn’t want giant crowds, unpredictable crowds, gathering to see a man who –“

“Who what, Papa?” Lina asked softly. “Who can do something that no doctors in our country seem to be able to do? Where’s the harm in that?”

“There’s no harm, Lina, of course,” Ethel said.  She’d crouched down beside Lina now and was holding her hand.

Viktor looked down at his hands and paused before he spoke. “It’s just that people, and by that I mean the government, are understandably skittish. I mean, a man comes out of nowhere. A charismatic man…” He didn’t need to go on.

“But Papa!” Lina cried, speaking through tears now, “that’s not what’s going on with Mr. Groening. He’s helping people! Don’t you believe that?”

They were all staring at Viktor now.

“I do believe it, Lina,” he told her, and he was speaking the truth.  “I’m just trying to imagine what the city officials’ reasoning was.”

“From what I could tell from the radio story,” Lorena said, “it was partly that they said the big crowds were a public health concern.”

“Meaning what?” Ulrich asked. Until now, he’d remained silent, standing next to the car and listening to everything that was being said.

“Apparently, they were worried that disease might spread, what with folks all crowded together there.”

Peter snorted.  “What a lie.  What they were really worried about was that good health would spread, and then there’d be no more work for the city’s doctors.” He punctuated his words by jabbing his right index finger into the air before him.

“There was that, too,” Stefan confirmed.  “I heard that part. Seems it was the city’s doctors who went to the city government with complaints.  Something about Groening violating some healing practitioners law.”

“Of course he did,” Peter said, his voice dripping with sarcasm.

By now, all the women had crowded around Lina and were hugging and comforting her in any way they could think of.

“But what about Groening?” Ulrich asked.  “What’s he going to do?”

“They didn’t say,” Stefan replied.  “Just that he had to leave town. Not that they were driving him out. But he knew that if he stayed there, then people would just keep coming, hoping to see him, even if he told them he couldn’t see them.”

Marcus, who had been leaning against the car with his arms crossed this whole time, finally spoke.

“Lina, don’t worry,” he said, his voice calm and confident.

But his sister looked at him in disbelief.  “Not worry?” she shouted.  “Not worry, when now I have no hope of seeing Mr. Groening?  Now that I’m condemned to this chair for the rest of my life?”

Even Ethel was looking daggers at her son, wondering what had led him to say something that came out sounding so cruel.

Marcus stood up and put his hands out in front of him, palms open. “Sis, who says there’s no hope of you seeing him?”

“Didn’t you hear Aunt Lorena?” Ethel asked him tartly. “He can’t do his healing work any more.”

“Not in Herford, he can’t,” Marcus responded calmly. “As I understand it, it was just Herford that banned him.  Is that right, Aunt Lorena?”  He turned to his great-aunt, who nodded.

“I mean, they didn’t say that exactly,” she replied, “but they didn’t mention that any other city had banned him.  That’s true.”

Now Marcus allowed a bit of a smile to come to his lips.  “Well, then.  So this Groening has left Herford.  All that means is he’s gone somewhere else, and wherever that is, no one’s keeping him from healing people.  At least not yet.”

“But what good does that do us?” Lina replied, dejected.

“Yes,” Kristina asked Marcus, “After all, he could have gone anywhere. Even out of the country, for all we know.”

“Did the radio say where he was going to go?” Renate asked Lorena, but keeping one hand firmly on Lina’s shoulder.

Lorena shook her head. “I’m afraid not.”

“Don’t worry,” Marcus said again, and this time, Peter took a step toward him.  But Marcus waved him off in a genial way. Then he walked up to Lina, squatted down in front of her, and placed his hands on the wheelchair’s arm rests.

“Sis, we’ll find him.”

Lina shook her head. “But how, Marcus? It’s not possible.”

Marcus leaned in until his face was right in front of hers. “It is possible, Lina, and we’ll do it.  We’ll find this Groening. And we’ll take you to see him.”

This was the first time Lina could ever remember Marcus offering to do anything for her, anything kind.  But she could feel that he really meant it, and she wasn’t ready to let go of the straw she’d grasped onto. She looked into his eyes and, seeing there, too, that he was sincere, she spoke.

“Promise?” she asked quietly.

“Promise,” he said with a smile.  And he held out his hand to her.  “Let’s shake on it.”

Lina didn’t hesitate. Wiping her tears away with one hand, she stretched out the other, which was still shaking from all the shock and emotion of the past few minutes, and felt Marcus’ close around it.  She felt the strength in his grip. That didn’t surprise her.  But what did was something else she sensed there. It seemed to her that it was love.

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 24

Chapter 24

June to July, 1949

Gassmann-Bunke homestead

            Here it was, the second half of June, 1949. Hans, who’d been gone from his ancestral family home for twenty-nine years, was more of a topic of conversation now than he had been at almost any point in the past nearly three decades.

            Did Hans anticipate, when he made the phone call and invited the Gassmann-Bunke family to his daughter’s wedding, that this would lead to yet another of those situations with which he had been so intimately familiar during the years he lived here? Did he know full well that it would be his mother and father – Renate and Ulrich – who would decide which two lucky family members would be the first to bridge the long, intercontinental gap between the two Gassmann households?

            Or did he imagine that protocols had changed in the years since his departure? Did he picture the whole, extended family discussing the options around the supper table, and coming to a joint decision? If he was, indeed, imagining the latter scenario, perhaps it was because the memory of his intense feelings of being excluded from all decision making had faded over time. Or perhaps he felt content to allow the process to play out however it would, now that he no longer felt that the course of his own life depended on what was decided, no longer felt at his parents’ mercy.

            Whatever musings Hans did entertain about how the question would be decided, it seems unlikely that he would have been surprised to learn that no revolution took place in the old log house: as always, the final word rested with, and was revealed by Renate:

            “Ulrich and I have talked about the wedding,” she announced at supper the day after Hans called.

            Everyone at the table, including even Kristina and Ingrid, who weren’t even related to Hans, paused in mid-bite, or mid-sentence. It was as if they feared that continuing to eat or move at all might cause them to miss this important news. Renate waited to continue until she was certain that all eyes were upon her, all ears fully tuned toward her. This was her habitual way of enhancing the drama of any positive moment. Everyone could see the sparkle that arose in her eyes as she paused.

            “We feel it’s best for Ethel and Lina to go,” she said, finally.

            Ethel, who had been holding her breath in anticipation of hearing the decision, let out an excited sigh, but managed to suppress the exclamation of delight that wanted to burst from her lungs. Looking quickly around to the others, she was relieved to see the others nodding.  Both of her parents were smiling. Ulrich patted her hand affectionately, as if to say, “Did you doubt we’d send you?” Even so, Ethel felt it best to protest at least a bit.

            “But, Mama,” she began, “shouldn’t you go?”

            Renate smiled. “On these creaky knees?” She shook her head. “And entrust the running of the household to you, only to come back to who knows what state of things? I think not!”

            Ethel was crying now. She understood the great generosity of her mother’s decision: She was willing to forego what might be her last opportunity to see her son again in her lifetime.

            “Papa?” Ethel managed to say, looking questioningly into her father’s eyes, her gaze asking whether he, too, was really prepared to make this same sacrifice.

            Ulrich didn’t joke the way his wife had. It wouldn’t have been appropriate to do so. He genuinely was concerned about what might happen if the left the family business to Viktor and Peter and Marcus for even a week, never mind two months.  Things already felt on the verge of collapsing here, what with the tensions between the three men. As much as his heart ached to see his son once more, as much as he wished to have the same chance to smooth things over with him, once and for all, he couldn’t risk it. Nor could he give voice to those thoughts at the table. So, he made do with nodding to Ethel and patting her hand again.

            “Besides,” he did joke, though, almost as an afterthought, “what do I need to go to Illinois for? We already know there are no decent forests there. Isn’t that right?”

            Of all of them at the table, only Renate and Ethel and Viktor understood Ulrich’s reference. And each of them was immediately transported in their minds back to 1921. They each recalled clearly how Renate’s brother, Ewald, visiting for the first time after emigrating to Illinois himself, admitted that forests were few and far between around the small town of Durand where he now lived.

            Although Ulrich intended for his remark to bring some levity to the situation, he saw tears begin to fall from Renate’s eyes after he spoke. He realized that he’d miscalculated. Twenty-eight years had passed since that suppertime conversation took place, but its reverberations were still strong enough to tear Renate’s heart open.

            Ethel saw this, but so did Lina. And just as Ethel opened her mouth to say that Renate absolutely had to go, in her place, Lina spoke up.

            “Grandma, you and Grandpa can’t be serious about sending me to the wedding.” She paused and looked back and forth between Ulrich and Renate. “I mean…” Here she silently patted the arms of her wheelchair. In doing so, she expressed what others at the table had also thought, but not voiced. Even Marcus remained uncharacteristically silent.

            No one had gone back to eating yet. They were all awaiting Renate’s reply. She, for her part, had anticipated that Lina would object. In fact, Ulrich had questioned her reasoning the night before, as they talked the question over before bed. But Renate had convinced him that this was exactly what their granddaughter needed, as difficult as she knew the trip would be: by train to the coast, and then by steamer to New York; then another long train ride to Illinois.

            On the surface of it, if you looked at it from the standpoint of logic, the idea did seem, frankly, insane. Yet, Renate had a strong feeling that this was just the right way to proceed, even if she couldn’t put her finger on all the reasons why. She couldn’t say whether this idea and her belief in it came from God, or from deep inside herself, or whether it represented the kind of collaboration between God and human that the family had been talking about recently, around the supper table. But, although she couldn’t determine this, Renate nonetheless took the great leap and chose to trust her feelings.

            “Lina, dear”, she said, facing her granddaughter, but speaking to everyone present, “I don’t want to hear that kind of talk. Aren’t you the one who sat here, just the other evening, and told us that beautiful story about that bird? What was it, a swallow?” Of course, Renate knew full well what kind of bird it was that Lina had mentioned. In this moment, she simply intuited that it was essential to shift Lina out of seeing herself as doomed to be always a prisoner in her wheelchair.

            “Yes, Grandma,” Lina replied, nodding a bit wearily. “It was a swallow.”

            “Well, then,” Renate said, also bobbing her head, “you see?” She forged ahead, ignoring the fact that no one else seemed to be following the logic that seemed to her so iron-clad. “It’s settled, then! Ethel and Lina will go to Katharina’s wedding.” Then, as everyone began to heed Renate’s urgings to eat while the food was still hot, the Gassmann matriarch added, cryptically, “Besides, Lina. Something tells me that you and your Uncle Hans will have much to talk about.”

            This remark registered only in the most superficial way in Lina’s mind. She was too overwhelmed by the prospect of the trip to take in one additional bit of information. What can they be thinking? she wondered as the meal progressed. How can I possibly make it to the coast on the train, much less manage the crossing… It’ll be too much for Mama.” She was nearly in tears by the time supper ended.

            A bit later, during her evening stroll with Lina, Kristina did not even broach the topic of the trip. She could see that Lina was overcome by fear and confusion, and not up to talking. So, feeling no resentment whatsoever this time at her friend’s reticence, Kristina pushed the wheelchair in silence, pausing occasionally to lay her hand on Lina’s shoulder and give it a comforting squeeze. I’m here for you, whenever you’re ready to talk.

*          *          *

            In the days following her grandmother’s announcement, Lina often fell under the sway of fear and dread that settled onto her shoulders like a great weight. She couldn’t imagine how going to Illinois would be possible if she was still wheelchair bound.  At the same time, though, she found herself daydreaming about attending her cousin Katharina’s wedding with her mother – in America, no less! When she came out of such reveries, she always noticed that she was smiling.  But how to reconcile these two opposing thoughts? Having concluded – despite what her grandparents had concluded – that being paralyzed and traveling to America were mutually exclusive, Lina’s rational mind told her that there was only one possible course of action: If she wanted to go to America – and she did! – then she simply had to get out of the wheelchair.

            Even before Renate’s announcement about the travel plans, Lina had already felt cautiously hopeful about investigating this Bruno Groening she’d read about. There did seem to be promise in what the man was doing. More than that, even. Right now, given that the doctors had not been able to help her at all the past five years, Groening seemed like her only hope. And now, with the trip looming (that was how she thought of it, now, as something “looming”), she began to feel more and pressure each to get healed.  How long have I got? Lina wondered. Six weeks until we leave? Two months?  

            For this reason, Lina now approached the reading of each day’s newspaper with increased intensity. She spent each morning wondering whether there would be another article about him, and then she feverishly scanned the paper each afternoon. For a few days, she found nothing.  Then came June 23rd.

            Lina was seated in her usual spot at the edge of the forest.  The afternoon was cloudy, but warm, and despite the slight breeze, she didn’t need a shawl.  With a hope that she consciously tempered, in case today’s paper once again brought no more news of Groening, and anxiety that she consciously chased away, she turned to page three.  There, in the bottom right hand corner, was a short article, unaccompanied by a photo: “No More Canes for Herford Visitor to Bruno Groening”.  The subtitle read, “First-hand account by a Groening assistant”. The part that caught Lina’s attention read as follows:

“I noticed an old man one day who was literally hanging on his two sticks. He suffered from Bechterew’s syndrome – a progressive ossification and stiffening of the spinal column. As sorry as I felt for him, I couldn’t allow him in, because all the rooms in the house were already filled with help-seekers, about sixty people.  Even the corridor was full.  He had already waited for nine hours. It was well past midnight when I met him again in the corridor, not knowing who had let him in.  I was able to show him a spot where he sat down with extreme difficulty. I pointed him out to Bruno Groening who came in soon and addressed him.  Within a fraction of a second, the old man’s tired and drawn countenance was transformed.  He had told me shortly before that he had already suffered from that disease for ten years and had been given up as a hopeless case by the doctors. He got up from his seat – in this case the healing effect was particularly abrupt – and walked immediately without canes!  The wish to live had been so strongly awakened in him, that he immediately expressed the wish, followed by the action, not only once, but several times, to go up and down stairs without using the walls or banister for help.  After ten years of extreme restriction of movement, here was a newborn man!  He had come to Bruno Groening with a careworn and bitter face and radiantly happy and glad he left him now, filled with renewed courage for living.” [Author’s note: quoted from The Miracle Healings of Bruno Groening, p. 34]

            By the time Lina came to the end of the article, her hands – and, consequently, the newspaper – were shaking so much that she had to lay the paper on her lap, or else it would have fluttered off like a butterfly on the afternoon breeze. She noticed the same tingling in her hands that she’d felt when reading the first article three days earlier, and then she became aware of something else: a subtle sensation in both her feet.  Not a tingling, as in her hands, but a light fizziness. A barely-perceptible effervescence. Then she noticed a slight feeling of being weak in the knees. If this had happened under other circumstances, such as before she’d had her accident, she might have been frightened by it.  But not now.  It was a feeling, after all!  In her feet and in her knees!  Feeling! At the same time, a deep joy rushed into her heart, and she sensed the same underlying deep calm she’d experienced after reading the first article a few days earlier.

            Lina glanced down at her hands and turned them this way and that, as if she might be able to discover some visual clue for the source of the tingling sensation. But her hands looked the same as they always did.  So did her feet, when she pulled up her skirt to examine them, too. Of course, she had her shoes on, so she couldn’t tell for sure. She’d have to check them at bedtime to see whether anything was different about them…

            Then Lina picked up the newspaper once more and reread the story.  She noted with particular excitement that fact that Groening didn’t just talk to people from the balcony of that house he was staying at in Herford. He also met with people inside, individuals, evidently. People like her, who were sick, who couldn’t walk…

            Lina felt her chest constrict, as if a tiny cry was about to try to burst out of it.  How did they get to do that? she thought. That man, he waited nine hours to get into the house. Lina bit her lower lip and let her gaze wander to the path that led into the forest, while her thoughts traveled to that house in Herford. She imagined the corridor, and the old man sitting there, and Groening speaking to him.  The moment of healing in the corridor.  The stairs he had then climbed up and down, up and down.  I’d wait nine hours.  I’d wait more than that.  But how to get there? Then she remembered what she’d told Kristina a few nights earlier, when she’d shown her the first newspaper clipping, when they’d talked about God and how He could help them.  She’d said to Kristina, “I think it starts with our own wish. Like the swallow’s wish to fly free.”  And here was the old man whose “wish to live had been so strongly awakened in him.”  At that moment, Lina felt that the wish to live had also been strongly awakened in her, along with another wish:  I will go to Herford and see Bruno Groening!

            Lina took out her sewing scissors and resolutely cut the article from the newspaper. She folded it and placed it inside her apron pocket, next to the original piece about the “miracle doctor”.  Over supper later that afternoon, she animatedly related the tale – also gleaned from that day’s page three – of the dispute between their client Mr. Kropp and a belligerent town resident who’d refused to pay an extra postal charge.  Everyone found the story amusing, but not as amusing as Lina’s bright face and cheery voice had led them to expect it would be.  And Lina didn’t bother to explain a thing when Ulrich, seeing the neatly-trimmed edges of the newspaper where she had evidently cut something out, asked what she’d found there of interest. “Oh, just this and that,” she replied casually as she rolled herself over to the sink, her lap full of dishes from the supper table.

*          *          *

            “’Just this and that?’” Kristina asked Lina with a laugh, as they were taking their evening stroll down the road that ran along the forest.  The evening had cooled off, and Kristina adjusted the shawl around Lina’s shoulders. “Is there something new?” Lina’s mood seemed so much lighter than it had been a few evenings back, that Kristina knew it was all right to ask.

            “Oh, yes!” Lina replied animatedly, and waved her hand energetically in the direction of the forest entrance a ways down the road. Kristina correctly gathered from this gesture that Lina wanted Kristina to push her to what they now both thought of as their spot. She’d the wait until they were seated there before sharing her news.

            Once Kristina positioned Lina’s wheelchair at the edge of the path opening and took her seat on the fallen log opposite her friend, Lina pulled the fresh newspaper clipping from her pocket and read it to Kristina.

            “You have to go there!” The words burst from Kristina’s mouth as soon as Lina finished reading.  But then, realizing that it wasn’t her place to tell Lina what to do, she placed her hands demurely in her lap, but she clasped them together so tightly that the knuckles grew white.  In her excitement for her friend, though, she couldn’t keep quiet for long.

            “You want to go, don’t you?” she asked gently, looking at Lina intently.

            Lina immediately nodded and met Kristina’s eyes. “More than anything, Kristina.”

            “Because you have your wish,” Kristina replied.

            “That’s right. I do!” Lina smiled.  “I just don’t know how to go about it.” She paused and looked into the forest, as if following that path with her eyes could show her how to make her way to Herford.

            Kristina studied her friend’s face and saw the hope there, and the doubt that accompanied it, the fear of moving ahead. “I don’t know, either.  But Lina, think of it this way. If God hears our wishes, our deepest wishes, and He wants them to come true – which I believe He does – then don’t you think He will help?”

            “I haven’t thought things through that far,” Lina told her with a smile.  “What do you do with a wish once you have it?” She paused. “And what if it fails? I’ve already failed at being able-bodied. I might fail at being healed, too.”

            “You can’t start thinking like that!” Now Kristina looked into the forest, too. “Maybe it’s the way you said the other night. It starts with the wish.  And then God helps.”

            “But don’t we need human help, too, Kristina?  After all, we can’t walk all the way to Herford, with you pushing me along the road.” She looked at her friend and laughed, but then fell silent. Maybe I’ve made assumptions I shouldn’t…

            But Kristina seemed to have read her mind, and she was secretly relieved to realize that Lina wanted to include her in whatever plan was beginning to take shape. “Oh, don’t worry, dear one. If it comes to that, we’ll do it! But don’t you think we could start by mentioning it to your parents?  Or your grandmother, at least? Don’t you think she would want that for you?”  Kristina was about to add that, surely, Renate wanted Lina to be able to board the ship to America on her own, two legs.  But she thought better of mentioning this.

            Lina shrugged and looked down at her hands, which had once again begun tingling as she read the article to Kristina.  The thought of sharing all of this with her mother, or even her grandmother, terrified her.  She knew that Kristina was probably right, but this new wish felt so fragile to her, as if it could be ground to dust by the slightest opposition from those around her.  She wasn’t sure she was up to having her hopes dashed.  It was hard enough the day when she fell out of her wheelchair in the yard. She didn’t want to go through that kind of humiliation again.  She raised her eyes to meet her friend’s.  “But what if they laugh at me, Kristina? Poo-poo the idea?  I don’t think I could bear that.”

            Kristina reached out and took Lina’s hand.  “Do you think you could bear the rest of your life in this chair? Could you bear that any better?”

            Lina’s eyes filled with tears, and she shook her head.

            Kristina squeezed Lina’s hand in both of hers. “Then it’s settled.  Tomorrow we’ll find a time to talk with your mother and grandmother.  I’ll be right there with you.  Assuming you want me to be…”

            Lina nodded.  “Yes, I do.”  She freed one hand so that she could wipe away the tears that were flowing freely down her cheeks now.  “But Kristina, what if they do laugh at the idea? What do we do then?”

            “Then I get myself a pair of good, sturdy walking shoes,” Kristina replied with a smile.  “You seem to have forgotten that I walked halfway across Germany to get here. Herford would be a mere stroll for me!” Then, seeing Lina smile in response, she stood up and took her position behind the wheelchair to begin their walk back to the house.

*          *          *

            Lina found her moment – and her voice – the next morning.  Ethel was just finishing submerging the laundry in the two large kettles on the stove, while Renate cut up meat from two rabbits, in preparation for making a stew for supper.  Lina sat at the big kitchen table, shaping pieces of dough into the rolls that would accompany the rabbit stew. And Kristina? She had just come back into the house after collecting eggs from the hens.  She’d just set the wicker basket down on the table, when Lina began speaking.

            “Mama? Grandma?” She waited until both Ethel and Renate turned in her direction before continuing.  “I’d like to talk with you about something.”

            Ethel waved her arms in that wing-like way of moving she had as she wiped her hands dry on the towel tucked into her apron pocket.  Renate laid down the carving knife and smoothed her skirt.  They could tell that Lina wanted their full attention. But they weren’t so sure how she felt about Kristina being there. Mother and daughter looked discretely toward Kristina and then back to Lina.

            “It’s all right,” Lina reassured them. “I asked Kristina to be here for this, too.”

            Renate and Ethel sat down at the table. “What is it?” they asked, nearly in unison.

            Lina pulled the two newspaper clippings from her apron, then passed one to Renate, and the other to Ethel.  Then she patted the seat of the chair next to her and nodded to Kristina, who sat down and rested her hands in her lap, not sure where to look while the women opposite her were reading.  She didn’t want to seem adversarial, just supportive of Lina…

            Ethel finished first – she’d received the shorter, more recent of the two articles.  But she didn’t say anything right away, preferring to wait for her mother to read all the way through the other piece.

            Of course, from the first moment they glanced at the newspaper clippings Lina handed them, both Renate and Ethel surmised what Lina wanted to talk with them about.

            “We’ve been wondering when you would mention this to us,” Ethel said, but her face betrayed no hint of how she felt about the topic at hand.

            Lina’s mouth gaped. “You have?” she asked, looking back and forth between the two of them.  “But… You mean you already know about Bruno Groening?”  It took only a few seconds for the initial surprise she’d felt upon hearing her mother’s words to shift first into relief, and then hope.

            “Lorena saw this first one, too,” Renate said, laying the clipping onto the table in front of her.  She held its edges with one hand and smoothed it out with the other, looking at the photo of Bruno Groening as she spoke.  Then she raised her gaze to meet Lina’s. “She read it and told me about it.”

            “And?” Lina asked expectantly. She was still feeling stunned by this revelation. But now, an element of anger was beginning to creep in, too.

            “Well,” Renate said, glancing over at Ethel, who nodded, “I told your mother about it…”

            “And we talked…” Ethel continued.

            “And?” Lina asked once more, and a frown came to her face. She looked over at Kristina, who was doing her best to keep her face neutral. She didn’t really want to be drawn into the conversation, but she did want to show Lina that she was on her side.  She reached over and placed her hand on Lina’s.

            Renate let out a deep sigh. “Now, Lina, dear…”

            Lina knew from experience that when her grandmother began a sentence this way, it didn’t bode well. Not for Lina, at least.

            “’Now, Lina dear’ what?” Lina asked, sitting up stiffly in her chair.

            “Lina,” Renate repeated, summoning her inner strength as the Gassmann family matriarch, and reminding herself that she really did know best, “We decided not to mention it to you.”

            “And why was that?” Lina’s voice was dry and her gaze sharp as she stared at her grandmother.

            Smoothing the newspaper clipping once more, Renate began to explain. “We…” – and here she motioned to Ethel with her free hand –  “We felt it would only give you false hope. And Lord  knows you don’t need that!”

            Lina’s mouth dropped open again. She felt like she’d been punched in the stomach.  “False hope? Grandma, I’ve had no hope for the past four years.  Here is a man –“

            “Perhaps a charlatan!” Ethel put in, leaning toward her daughter. “You can’t be too careful.  Someone comes along and sways a crowd, and…”

            “Perhaps a charlatan?” Lina responded, her voice rising now along with her anger. “On the strength of that perhaps – when you have no evidence of that, by the way – you decided not to mention it to me?”

            “We felt that was best,” Renate repeated flatly.

            “I can’t believe what I’m hearing!” Lina said. Without even realizing it, she began rocking her wheelchair back and forth, and each time she rolled it forward, the front edge of the armrests tapped against the table’s edge. “Why do you get to decide what’s best for me? Was all that talk about free will just for show? Was it, Mama?”

            Ethel was swaying forward and backwards in her chair now, as if in subtle tune with her daughter’s movements. “We just want to protect you, Lina. Surely you can understand that?”

            “But what makes you so sure I need protecting from Mr. Groening?” Lina responded in a challenging tone.  Then she gestured at the clippings.  “Do you not believe that these people were really healed? Do you not believe it’s possible?”

            Here Ethel stopped swaying. She suddenly felt transported back to that awful suppertime conversation in 1921, when Uncle Ewald told them the tale of how a young boy named Bruno supposedly healed the young German soldier.  She recalled the heated conversation with Hans about faith and healing and belief in God and His ability to heal.  The look of recollection and shock on Ethel’s face stopped Lina just as she was about to launch her next salvo.

            “Mama, what is it?” She took her hands off the wheelchair wheels and leaned over, resting her elbows on the table and stared at her mother across the table. “What is it?”

            Ethel glanced at Renate, but the matriarch’s face gave no sign that she knew what had just occurred to Ethel. 

In fact, Renate knew full well what was going through Ethel’s mind. Really, she was surprised that Ethel hadn’t made the connection a week earlier, when Renate showed her the clipping Lorena brought over. Renate had been hoping that Ethel wouldn’t recall that the boy in the 1921 story was also named Bruno.  The last thing Renate wanted was to dredge all that up again. They all knew what that conversation about faith and healing and God had led to. Don’t say it, she silently willed Ethel. Leave it be. But then Ethel spoke.

“Lina,” she began, reaching across the table to take her daughter’s hand, “this Bruno Groening… This isn’t the first time I – we – have heard of him.”

“What?”

Even Kristina leaned forward now, in spite of herself. “You knew about him?”

Ethel nodded. Renate, realizing that a floodgate was about to be flung open, took a deep breath and nodded. Then, still looking at the clipping on the table before her, she absently waved a hand at Ethel. Go on, then. You’ve started it. Might as well get it all out.

“You know about how your Uncle Hans left in 1921, emigrated to Illinois in America to work with our Uncle Ewald?” Then she added, for Kristina’s benefit, “Ewald is my uncle, my mother’s brother. Hans is my brother, the one whose daughter is getting married.”

Both Kristina and Lina nodded, but said nothing. Lina was barely even breathing at this point. She was so full of surprise in anticipation of finally learning what her mother and grandmother had steadfastly refused to tell her all these years: the real reason Hans left for America.

“All right, now, how to tell this in as few words as possible?” Ethel mused. She paused briefly, to collect her thoughts, then continued.

“Well, Uncle Ewald came back from America to visit.  It’d been, what, fifteen years since he’d left?”

“Seventeen,” Renate corrected.

“Seventeen, then.” Ethel was looking past Lina to the opposite wall, aware of the fact that she was sitting in the very same chair she’d occupied during that fateful supper. “So, I don’t recall how we got onto the topic, but that doesn’t really matter. What’s important is that Uncle Ewald said that one of their neighbors had a nephew, back here in Germany –“

“In Danzig,” Renate put in.

“Yes, that’s right, Danzig.”

Now Kristina’s ears perked up. Danzig? Where she and Ingrid had sailed from? Something occurred to her, but she pushed the thought aside. She didn’t want to miss any of Ethel’s story.

“So, there was the nephew, a soldier, in a military hospital. Something with his leg, wasn’t it, Mama?”

Renate smiled and waved her hand. “I don’t recall what the problem actually was now. I recall that Ewald went back and forth about it.  Wasn’t sure himself, at first, and now I don’t remember what the true diagnosis was.”

Ethel laughed then, too. “Yes, that’s right! But in any case, it was serious, as I recall. Right, Mama?”

“Yes, that wasn’t in dispute,” Renate said, smoothing the part of the clipping that showed Bruno’s face.  “The doctors’ treatment hadn’t been working, and this nephew –“

“Leo!” Ethel exclaimed. “Yes, his name was Leo!”

“Yes, Leo,” Renate confirmed. “The doctors said that they’d have to amputate Leo’s leg the next day.

Lina couldn’t help herself. “And what happened?” She was leaning forward now, her long braid in her right hand. She’d wrapped it around her wrist and was twisting it back and forth.

“Well, as Ewald’s neighbor told it, there was this woman who came to visit the soldiers now and then.  And she usually brought her little boy with her.  His name was Bruno.”  She paused, looking from Lina’s face to Kristina’s, but neither said anything.  Too early in the story for them to react, Ethel decided. And she went on. “So this little boy, Bruno, goes over to talk to Leo, and he says to Leo, ‘I wish for you…’ Mama, do you remember what he said?”

Renate nodded. Every detail of that suppertime conversation had been etched into her memory, and she spoke out the young Bruno’s words to the women at the table, so softly that they had to strain to hear. “‘May you be totally healthy soon, by God’s grace’. That’s what he said to him.”

“And what happened?” Lina asked in a whisper.  Ethel could tell from her face, and from the look that she and Kristina exchanged, that now they’d gotten it.

“The next day, Leo’s leg was perfectly healthy. The doctors didn’t have to amputate it after all.” Ethel stopped there.  She knew that she needn’t say any more. There was plenty in what she’d already said for Lina to ponder. 

Indeed, Lina was sitting stock still in her chair, except for the absentminded twirling of her braid, as she sought to put all the pieces together in her mind. Finally, she asked, “Just how old was this Bruno then? What year was that?”

“It was just after the war ended,” Ethel told her, “the Great War. The boy was ten or eleven, Uncle Ewald thought.”

Lina reached over and took hold of the clipping in front of Renate, the one with the photo of Bruno Groening.  “Thirty-one years ago, the story with Leo.  If he was ten or eleven then, he’d be, what, early forties?” She brought the paper up to her face and studied the man in the photo.  Again, she felt the familiar tingling –in her fingers at first, and then streaming through her whole body.  “Could it be him?” she asked, showing the photo to Kristina, as if her friend could tell her the answer.  Then she turned her gaze to her mother and grandmother. “Could this be the same Bruno?”

“I thought so,” Renate answered slowly, “as soon as Lorena showed me this article.  I remember Ewald’s story so clearly, and I just knew this was the same person.”

Lina turned her eyes to her mother. “And you? Did you realize it, too?”

Ethel shook her head. “Not until just now, when we started talking. Maybe that seems strange, but it’s true.” She gently took the clipping from Lina’s hands and took a good look at Bruno Groening.  “To think he’s who we were all arguing about that day.”

“What day?” Lina asked, still not understanding what Bruno Groening had to do with her Uncle Hans’ emigration.

“The day we had the big argument about God and faith and healing and whether God can heal us if we want it enough,” Renate told her in a resigned voice.

“Or if someone else believes strongly enough that He can do that,” Ethel added.

“So, if I understand what you’re saying,” Kristina asked gently, “Mrs. Gassmann’s brother Ewald told about the boy Bruno, and the idea is that Leo and his family believed that it was Bruno who healed Leo.  Is that it?”

Renate and Ethel both nodded.

Now Kristina noticed a tingling in her hands, slight at first, but growing in intensity.  She stopped talking and gazed at her fingers in surprise, wondering what this sensation was. She had no idea that Lina, sitting next to her, was experiencing the same thing, only more strongly.

“But Grandma,” Lina persisted, “I still don’t understand how the story about Bruno and Leo is related to Uncle Hans leaving.”  Lina herself was surprised to hear this remark pop out of her mouth. After all, what she wanted most was to keep talking about Bruno, to convince her mother and grandmother that she just had to go see him. At the same time, though, she also sensed that if she didn’t get to the bottom of the Hans question now, when the topic was on the table – for the first time in her life! – then she might never get the chance again.

Renate didn’t answer at first. She let her gaze drift to where Kristina was sitting – Hans’ old seat. She let her eyes rest in that direction for a brief period. The other women at the table supposed that she was reaching far back into the recesses of her memory, to the same spot whence she had retrieved Bruno’s words to Leo, to find the answer to Lina’s question.  But the truth was, Renate had no answer.

“I can’t really say,” she told them finally.

Even Ethel looked shocked by this answer. “Mama, really?” she asked.  “How can that be?  How can you not know?”  Mama has always known everything…

“We never talked about it, Hans and I,” Renate explained.  “Or your father and I,” she said, looking at Ethel.  “Honestly, I don’t believe Hans ever told your father his reasons.  He certainly didn’t tell me.” She went back to looking in the direction of where Kristina was seated, but didn’t say any more.

Lina was entirely dissatisfied with this answer. I’ve waited my whole life to find out about this, and Grandma says she doesn’t know?? “Didn’t he tell someone? Maybe Uncle Ewald?” She looked back and forth between Ethel and Renate.

“Maybe he did,” Renate said slowly, finally shifting her gaze to her granddaughter.  “But if he did, Ewald never shared that with me.  Or with Ulrich. At least as far as I know.” Now the other women noticed that a thin layer of bitterness had crept into Renate’s voice. None of them wanted to poke at that layer, lift it up to discover what lay underneath.

“Mama,” Lina tried, “What do you think? What about the story about Bruno and Leo could have upset him so much that he up and decided to leave the country? That seems…”

“Crazy?” Ethel asked.  “It does.  I think we’ve all asked ourselves that question since 1921. Me, all I can say is that I hinted – we were talking about whether God will grant a healing if the person who’s praying believes – and I hinted, or, rather, just posed the possibility, that Hans didn’t believe God could heal someone if a person has strong faith.”

“No, Ethel,” Renate said, coming back into herself. “‘Maybe you don’t really believe He exists’. That’s what you said to him.”

Ethel sighed. “Yes, that was it, Mama.  He took it very personally, as if I was attacking him.”

“He took your remark to mean that if he’d had stronger faith, his leg would have been fully healed.” Renate glanced at Kristina and then added, for her benefit (although Lina didn’t know this fact, either), “He was injured in basic training.”

“Which is not what I meant at all!” Ethel protested, her cheeks reddening as if she were living through the whole conversation again.

“What did you mean?” Lina asked. She was starting to get confused.

“You see,” Ethel said, her hands raised in the air before her, “once Ewald told Leo’s story, we were all talking about whether what had happened was possible –“

“What exactly do you mean?” Lina broke in, her brows knitted.

“Oh, that the boy Bruno had asked God to heal Leo –“

“When he said, ‘May you be totally healthy soon, by God’s grace’,” Renate interjected.

“And that that’s what happened,” Ethel went on. ” That Leo was healed overnight because Bruno prayed for his healing with such faith and belief.”

“But…” Lina began again, “then what was the disagreement you all had about that?”

Ethel closed her eyes and spoke, as if she needed every ounce of concentration in order to present the situation clearly. “Hans doubted that someone’s faith could be so strong that God would grant a healing. And then I had to respond, and that’s when I said, Maybe you don’t really believe He exists.”

“And that was all there was to it?” Lina asked, thinking she must have missed something.

“Well, basically, yes,” Renate said.

“But not entirely,” Ethel said with a sigh.  “Hans asked me whether I believed such a thing was possible, and I said –“

“’I sure want to be able to believe,’” Renate put in. “That’s what you said.”

Ethel nodded, and then fell silent.

Kristina and Lina exchanged glances again. Then Kristina, surprised at her own boldness, asked a question.

“Do you think that’s why he left? Because his faith was called into question?”

Renate spread her hands out before her.  “As I said, I can’t say. I don’t know why he left.  All I know is that everything was going just fine until that whole topic came up, and once it did, things fell apart.”  She pointed a finger at the newspaper clipping. “Which is why we have stayed away from such discussions since 1921.”

Lina opened her mouth to say that this made no sense, since they had, in fact, not stayed away from them. What is it we’ve been talking about these past couple of weeks, if not that? But then Ethel caught her eye, and Lina realized from this non-verbal signal that the window of opportunity to discuss both Hans and Bruno Groening had slammed shut, at least as far as her grandmother was concerned. So she said nothing.  But as Renate stood up and turned her back on the table to return to carving up the rabbits for the stew, Ethel leaned across the table, gave Lina’s hand a quick squeeze, and whispered to her, “We’ll talk tonight, at bed time.”

The rest of this day passed more slowly than any day Lina could remember, except perhaps for the earliest period following her accident, when the passage of the hours had been marked only by pain and immobility.  Her evening walk with Kristina couldn’t come to an end too soon for her taste, since it meant that her daily routine was nearly over.  She didn’t even ask to go sit by the forest’s edge, as Kristina had expected she might. So, they talked only briefly as they walked, with both of them speaking in an unnaturally loud voice, so as to be heard by the other.  This arrangement didn’t lend itself to a thoughtful, subtle discussion.

“What do you think your mother will say?” Kristina asked her, the volume of her voice at odds with the gentleness with which she wanted to pose the question.

Lina shrugged. “It could go either way.”

“I know what you mean.  I couldn’t tell whether she’s sympathetic or not.  Certainly, she knows why you showed them the clippings.”

“Yes, without a doubt.  Especially since they’ve already seen the first one, thanks to Aunt Lorena.”  Kristina couldn’t see Lina’s face, but she didn’t have to in order to know that her friend was frowning.

“What do you think about them knowing already?” she asked softly, as if not wanting to intrude on Lina’s thoughts.  “And not telling you?”

“What did you say?” Lina replied, turning her head. “You’ll have to speak louder, Kristina!”

“I’m sorry.  I wasn’t sure you wanted to talk about it…”

“If I didn’t want to, I just wouldn’t have answered you,” Lina told her, and Kristina could see the corner of her mouth rise into a smile.

“All right, then, I’ll keep shouting!” Kristina joked.  “I said, what did you think about them already knowing. And not telling you?”

“At first I thought, oh, that’s wonderful! Now I won’t have to explain anything, won’t have to convince them. We can move right to talking about how to get me to Herford.” She paused.  “But then, I saw how my grandmother dropped her eyes to the table.  That is not like her at all.”

“I thought not,” Kristina said.

“Yes, you know her well enough to know that she’s one to look you straight in the eye and tell you exactly what she thinks. Exactly how things are going to be.”

“That’s Mrs. Gassmann, all right!” Kristina laughed. “But couldn’t that be a good sign? That maybe she’s not sure of herself?”

Lina shook her head. Kristina could see that with her right hand, Lina was twirling the end of her braid thoughtfully.  “No. I think that meant that she’d already made up her mind, and she knew her decision would upset me.”

“But even that is a departure from her usual behavior. You said it yourself!” Kristina said, leaning forward with her hands still on the handles of the wheelchair.

“That’s true.” Lina paused. “To tell you the truth, Kristina, my mind is in such a whirl, I’m not sure what to think.” Here she took hold of the wheel rims and turned the chair around so that she was facing Kristina. “I was so upset that they knew about Mr. Groening but didn’t tell me. That they thought they could make that decision for me!” She let go of her braid and slapped the arm rests of the chair with her hands.  “What gives them the right?”

Seeing that Lina was tearing up, Kristina leaned down and hugged her friend as best she could.  “I know. It doesn’t seem fair, does it?”  She could feel Lina shaking her head in response.  “Why don’t you just wait and see what your mama has to say tonight?” she suggested.  “Then we can figure out what to do next, once you know what she’s thinking.”

Kristina pulled back a bit, and Lina began drying her eyes with her handkerchief. “Yes. I guess that’s all we can do.”  Lina patted the armrests with her hands and then laid them on the wheel rims.  “Come on,” she said to Kristina. “I’ve got to move, get some of this feeling inside me out of me, or I’ll never be able to sleep. Race you!”

            With these words, and a mischievous smile, Lina braced herself against the back of her seat and began propelling her chair forward.  Kristina was caught by surprise, but she knew this was a good sign: Perhaps Lina was guarding a bit of hope inside her that her mother and grandmother might yet agree to take her to see Bruno Groening.  Kristina watched as Lina began picking up speed and rolled down the road in the direction of the house. Then she saw that, after about fifty yards, Lina abruptly spun herself around and raced back to Kristina, who was moving along at just a walking pace.

            “Come on!” Lina laughed, her face flushed.  “You’re not even trying!”

            This was not the first time they had played this game, and each time, Kristina would shuffle along at first, waiting for Lina to double back for her.  Then the race was really on, with Kristina running full tilt and Lina’s arms a blur at her sides, as she spun the chair’s wheels as fast as she could. On the occasions when Lina reached the lane to the house first, it was never for lack of Kristina trying.  Tonight was one of those times.

*          *          *

            “Mama,” Lina asked as Ethel was brushing out her daughter’s braid.  “Why didn’t you and Grandma want to tell me you already read that article?”

            Ethel had kept quiet about this subject while helping Lina get ready for bed, in the hope that her daughter might have decided not to revisit the conversation from that morning.  It was not a talk Ethel was relishing. But once Lina brought it up, she couldn’t very well stay silent. After all, she’d been the one to say they could talk at bedtime.

            Ethel paused in her brushing, choosing her words. “We didn’t want to call your attention to this Groening if he’s some kind of fake. Just think, Lina, how awful it would be for you to go to him, only to find out he’s like some swindler, or carnival snake oil salesman.”

            “But think how awful it would be, Mama,” Lina replied softly, “if he can genuinely heal people, and I never get the chance to see him. And maybe be healed, too.” 

            Ethel nodded, and Lina could see the nod in the mirror atop the dresser at the other side of the room.  But Ethel said nothing.

            “And just think, Mama, how awful it would be for me to sit in this chair for the rest of my life. Isn’t it worth taking a chance?”

            “We just don’t want you to get hurt,” Ethel said, her voice full of emotion. 

            “I already have been hurt,” Lina reminded her, her tone chilly.

            Ethel rested her hands on her daughter’s shoulders. “All the more reason to be protective of you! Grandma and I would never forgive ourselves if we took you to see him and nothing came of it. Can you see that?”

            “I don’t know,” Lina replied truthfully. “When I heard that you already knew about him and decided not to say anything to me, it felt like a real betrayal. I’m so sorry to say that, Mama.”  In fact, her heart was in her throat.  She had never dared to say anything remotely unkind to her parents or grandparents, and now she was accusing her mother of betraying her.

            “It’s all right, Sweetheart,” Ethel said quietly.  “It’s so hard to know what’s right to do.  Unless you’re Grandma, of course,” she added with a smile. “Grandma always seems to know exactly what to do.”

            Lina smiled at that, too.  “But you, Mama. Do you agree with her about this? Especially since this Bruno was able to help that boy Leo?”

            “Assuming it’s even the same Bruno,” Ethel replied, cautiously. 

            “But don’t you think it is?” Lina asked, turning her head as far as she could so that she could see her mother’s face.

            “I do, actually,” Ethel told her.  “I didn’t remember about Bruno and Leo – I mean, about the boy’s name being Bruno – until we were talking about it this morning.” She paused, not sure whether she should add what she was thinking. But then she did continue.  “And you should know, Lina, that it wasn’t just Leo that the boy Bruno helped.  There were lots of injured soldiers in that hospital. He helped a lot of them.”

            “You see?” Lina cried.  “It must be the same Bruno!  Oh, Mama, I want so much to go see him!”

Ethel had known in her heart that it would come to this tonight, and she had been wrestling with herself all day.  It was as if she was squarely back in 1921 again, at the supper table.  Now, as she stood behind Ethel, she could clearly see Hans right across the table from her – in her mind’s eye – and she clearly heard him ask his question: “Do you believe Leo could actually have been healed because that boy Bruno prayed so hard and believed so hard that God could heal him?” She also clearly remembered her reply, all of it: “I don’t know, Hans. I just don’t know.  But I can tell you this: I sure want to be able to believe.  Because, think of it: Wouldn’t that be a grand thing?  To be able to believe that if you have enough faith, then God will heal someone no doctor’s been able to help?  I want to be able to believe that.”

“Mama?” Lina asked, jostling her hand.  “Mama? Did you hear me?”

Ethel nodded. Of course she had heard her.  But she had to finish wrestling with herself before she could answer.  It’s not enough to want to believe any more. I have to either believe or not believe. And in that moment, Ethel made the decision to believe. For Lina’s sake. And possibly for her own, too.

“I want you to see him, too, Dear.”

*          *          *

            Renate dreaded the next day’s suppertime more than any other, even the one back in 1921. She couldn’t have dreaded that one, after all, since she’d had no idea what would ensue. But today… She knew the same questions would come up on this day as had done back then, and she blamed herself. If only I hadn’t allowed things to go so far the past couple of weeks.  If only I hadn’t let Lina go on about God’s will and God’s plan. That’s what Renate was thinking to herself this morning as she sliced the potatoes and put them into a pan to bake with some bacon and onion. 

            But in her heart, Renate knew that she couldn’t have stopped all of this from happening. She recognized that this condemnation was a thought from her old self.  Not that she knew what her new self was.  But she had managed to hold onto the deep, newfound sense that she really was working with God now, instead of trying to handle and figure out everything on her own. Somehow, now, she was able to remind herself of this, which meant that she could summon a bit of courage in regard to supper. 

            She couldn’t imagine – with her mind – how it could be a good thing for Lina to go see this Bruno Groening, for the reasons Ethel had laid out to Lina. What if he’s a swindler?  Then there was also her general aversion to situations that had a lot of emotion connected to them, and uncertainty. She so much preferred everything to be quiet, and in order, and stable. But at the same time, there it was, inside her: a quiet voice. This voice – was it the voice of God? – urged her to overcome her fear that another 1921-like situation would develop, and to embrace the plan that Ethel had broached with her the night before:  They would find a way to get Lina to Herford to see Bruno Groening.

            But before they could formulate a way to make this happen, the idea had to be presented to the whole family. Not for discussion. Renate had not changed that much! No.  As with all other decisions involving the family (the domestic side of their life, remember, since Ulrich handled the business end of things), Renate would simply announce what she had decided. And everyone would fall into line.  That was her fervent hope.  By “everyone”, Renate really meant Viktor and Marcus and Peter.  She had already spoken to Ulrich, who, though surprised, knew better than to throw up roadblocks where Renate had a clear direction laid out in her mind.  Ethel had spoken to Viktor, too, Renate knew. But how had he reacted? Ethel didn’t elaborate on their conversation when Renate asked her about it after breakfast. All she said was, “He won’t stop us.” That was not as enthusiastic a response as Renate was hoping for, but beggars couldn’t be choosers. As suppertime grew closer and closer, Renate unexpectedly found herself whispering, “Dear God, please give me the right words.”

            Renate waited to share the plan until everyone at the table had eaten their first helping of sausage and potatoes.  Let everyone at least have something in their stomachs first.  She began by saying that Lorena had given her a newspaper clipping about this man named Bruno Groening.  She even produced the clipping – the original article Lorena had given her, since Lina wouldn’t let her own copy leave her side – and laid it out on the table for anyone who wanted to peruse it themselves. 

            “Ethel and I discussed it,” Renate told them all.  “We thought this Groening might be able to help Lina. We talked with her about it yesterday, and she felt that way, too.  So, we decided to take her to Herford and try to see him.”

            Kristina glanced at Lina, concerned at first that her friend might object to how Renate was presenting the story of the way Bruno Groening had come into their lives.  But she could tell by the slight smile on Lina’s face that she appreciated her grandmother’s artistry.  Indeed, for perhaps the first time in her life, Lina truly understood how gifted Renate was. She could discern a larger picture and then paint it for her family so that her words would highlight what she wanted them to notice, while laying a gentle shadow over what she wished for them not to see.  All of this she did with the aim of presenting a situation in the way which would be most aesthetically pleasing – and convincing – for her family.

            Thus, here, when explaining the situation to the family, she summarized the success Bruno Groening had had in his healing work, pointedly retelling the story of the man who came to see Mr. Groening with canes and left without them.  If you didn’t know she’d initially been against taking Lina to Herford, you never would have guessed it, to hear her now.  As we have seen already, once Renate came round to an idea, she held on to it as tenaciously as a dog who comes across a bone in a neighbor’s yard and then proceeds to defend it as if she was the original owner.

            Those who already knew about the plan – Viktor, Ethel, Ulrich, Lina, and Kristina – listened quietly to what Renate had to say, each with his or her own thoughts regarding it.  Peter felt both shocked by his grandmother’s words, and intrigued.  This didn’t sound at all like the kind of plan she would come up with: Renate, who, like a sheep dog, preferred her flock to be either in the meadow or the paddock, all together, and not wandering off somewhere unfamiliar. But when he cast a glance across the table at Lina and saw her face beginning to glow, he knew that something almost magical must have taken place to shift their grandmother into a frame of mind – or heart – in which she was willing to take a risk of this type. To be clear: He had no doubt that there was a risk.  But that look of hope and joy on Lina’s face was enough for him.  If there was something to be hoped for, let her hope.

            It was – not surprisingly, somehow – Marcus who responded first to Renate’s announcement that Lina would go to see Bruno Groening.  To his credit, he let Renate say her piece before going on the attack.  Most likely, he felt the pressure of the stern gaze his father was directing at him from across the table.  He understood that look.  It was not unlike the feeling that the vice grip of Viktor’s arm around his shoulder in the barn a couple of weeks earlier had produced.  And Viktor’s words echoed in his mind: “It’s not worth it, Marcus.”  “But,” Marcus thought stubbornly, as the anger rose in his chest, “It is worth it. I have to speak up.  I have to.” And he did.

            “Why is it,” he started in, as soon as Renate stopped speaking, “that when Lina wants something, everyone bows and scrapes to make it happen, but when Marcus wants something, we do ‘what’s best for the family’, and not for Marcus?  Can someone explain that to me?” He furrowed his brow and narrowed his eyes and looked in turn from one family member to the next.

            “That’s not what’s going on here, Marcus,” Ethel replied calmly. “It’s just that –“

            “Oh, that is what’s going on, Mama!” Marcus retorted, not even bothering to turn and look around Lina to try to find her gaze. Instead, he directed his eyes to Kristina, hoping to find support.  But Kristina’s eyes were on her plate, as she strategically pursued a potato in the hope of staying out of this family discussion.

            Renate straightened herself up in her chair, smoothed her apron skirt, and then tapped her right forefinger on the table near Marcus’ elbow.  “It’s been decided, Marcus,” she said in a voice that was both stern and kind. “And I don’t see that this is anything but good for all of us.”

            Marcus looked stunned. “You don’t? You think dragging my crippled sister to a charlatan will be nothing but ‘good for all of us’? Are you all blind?”  He looked at Viktor.  “And you agreed to this?” he nearly shouted.

            Viktor looked hard at Marcus, trying to discern whether the young man across from him was actually feeling some concern for Lina’s welfare, or whether this was a calculated ploy.  The latter seemed unlikely to him, but perhaps he underestimated Marcus’ ability to think on his feet when presented with a threatening situation.

            “So, you’re worried only about that?” he asked calmly.  “About Lina being disappointed? Or misled?”

            “And about this family pouring money we don’t have to take her to see this swindler who will undoubtedly bleed us dry with pleas for more and bigger payments.”

            “He doesn’t accept any money for his work,” Ethel told them. “Says what he has is a gift from God, and that he’ll lose it if people pay him.”

            Marcus snorted. “My God, you people are even more gullible than I thought.  It’s bad enough to believe he can heal people – we haven’t even talked about that!  But to believe he doesn’t want to get anything out of it for himself? Come on.  You –”and here he gestured to everyone at the table “- may like to think the best of everyone around you, but the whole world is not like Bockhorn. What makes you think you can trust this… what’s his name?”

            “Bruno Groening,” Lina said quietly.  She wanted to tell him and all the rest of them about what she’d experienced when reading the articles, about the tingling, the joy, the sense of connection with God.  But she couldn’t bring herself to utter one word about it.  She knew Marcus would scoff, and she didn’t think she could bear to be attacked that way right now.  The hope she was feeling was still a very young and tender shoot, so vulnerable to being cut down.  So, instead of speaking, she laid her hand against the newspaper clipping in her apron pocket and focused on gathering strength from it.  Then she looked across the table at her father, hoping he would say something to salvage the situation.

            “If Lina can be healed by going to see this Groening,” Viktor began, glancing at Lina before settling his gaze on Marcus, “then it will be good for everyone in the family.”

Lina felt a twinge in her heart as she had the thought that her father was supporting the plan not out of love for her, but because of a rational assessment of odds and benefits.  But then he gave her another quick look, and, just for a second, she glimpsed love in his eyes.

Upon hearing Viktor’s remark, Ethel, too, at first found his tone business-like and cold. But a second later, she realized that he had carefully calculated how best to achieve Marcus’ acquiescence, and she had to admit that he was insightful. Marcus was likely to sign on to any project if he stood to gain by it.

“With Lina back on her feet, and in the forest,” Viktor went on, “things will change around here.”

Ethel was impressed by Viktor’s dexterity in handling Marcus, but the question remained in her mind (and in everyone else’s, too): Did he really believe Groening might be able to heal Lina, or was he just hedging his bets and supporting the plan most likely to keep things calm in the family? Not that she would condemn him if it was only the latter.  Not necessarily. He’d shown over the years that he was quite capable of acting in ways others would find objectionable, if those actions meant his family would be safe.  Ethel really wanted to know what was motivating him now, but he wasn’t showing his hand, and she hadn’t asked him last night how he really felt.  At that moment, she’d been content that he agreed to do whatever it took to get Lina to Groening.  Now, though, she was back in 1921 again. During that conversation, Viktor hadn’t said whether he believed that little Bruno had healed Leo or not. The most he said was that he’d come to believe in God again once he was on the Gassmann homestead.  Looking at Viktor now, at his cornflower blue eyes that now had much more of an edge to them than they had back in 1921, Ethel wished she could read her husband’s mind.

Viktor, for his part, was thinking of 1921, too, about how he’d thought, during that suppertime conversation, that if anyone was capable of mustering enough faith to believe in Bruno’s healing abilities, it would be Ethel.  The night before, when she told him what Lina wanted to do, he looked at her and saw that the bright light of that faith – which had shone so intensely in her hazel eyes when they first met – had faded some over the past twenty-eight years.  That was partly his fault.  He knew that. But he hoped, deep in his heart, that Ethel still had the ability he’d sensed in her then, that she’d be able to call up her reserves of faith now, at this time when maybe they – including him – needed help more than ever before.  So, he agreed to help, to find a way.  Then they’d all find out how much faith there was in each of them.

First things first, though: Marcus had to be pacified.

“Things will change?” Marcus asked, tilting his head to the side suspiciously. “Just what do you mean?”

Viktor leaned back in his chair and draped one arm over the chairback. “If Lina gets back to being able to work in the forest again, we won’t need you to work here in the business anymore.” That said, he picked up his fork and began to eat the sausage that had been patiently awaiting his attention.

Marcus’ mouth dropped open.  He looked at everyone at the table in turn before replying.  “Are you serious?” he asked quietly, as if afraid to scare the possibility away by asking too loudly, or too enthusiastically.

Viktor just nodded, without even looking up from his plate.  Everyone else was silent, too. Ethel felt a rush of affection for her husband, and pride, even, at how he was handling the situation.  Renate was pushing potatoes onto her fork with her finger, too excited to look at anyone else, for fear of jinxing what seemed on the verge of transpiring. Ulrich was sitting back in his chair, a slight smile on his face, his eyes shining.  The whole situation seemed magical.  Everything hung in the balance here. It floated before all of them in the air, like a circus trapeze artist who’s let go of the swing he’d been holding onto and, after executing a somersault, is hurtling toward the partner who awaits him on the opposite side of the arena, arms outstretched. Will he grasp onto those strong arms, or fall to the hard, unforgiving earth? Lina held her breath and pressed her hand hard against the newspaper clipping in her pocket. Peter was dumbstruck, barely even understanding what was going on, it was all moving so fast.  Kristina and Ingrid, who, despite their four years here, still knew little of the ins and outs of the family dynamic, were as if spellbound, sensing that this moment was of monumental significance for all of them.

Marcus paused, floating in mid-air in the circus tent of the Gassmann-Bunke kitchen, taking in everyone around him once more.  Then he slowly extended his right hand out across the table.  Viktor looked up from his sausage and potatoes. As everyone watched, he calmly wiped his hands on his napkin, then leaned forward, took Marcus’ hand, and shook it. As Viktor wordlessly returned his attention to his meal, Marcus spoke.

“I’m in, then.”

It seemed as if all of them exhaled at once. This sigh of relief filled the room, despite the fact that not a single person in the room knew what now awaited them.

Lina flashed a smile at Viktor and noticed that her hands were trembling. She felt her mother’s arm wrap around her shoulders, and realized that tears were streaming down her face.  Looking across the table to where Kristina sat next to Viktor, she smiled again and mouthed the words, “To Herford. We’re going to Herford.”

*          *          *

            That night, as they got undressed for bed, Ethel walked up behind Viktor and, wrapping her arms around his waist, leaned her head against his back.

            “Thank you,” she said quietly.  “Did you see how happy Lina was?”

            She felt him nod.  He glanced down, and his gaze alighted on the wooden ring on her right hand. He traced the flower on its top – a bit rubbed down by now, after all these years – with his finger.  He recalled how he had worked so carefully and lovingly to carve it, nervous about how Ethel would receive it, and whether she’d accept his proposal. Twenty-eight years ago.  Only twenty-eight years.  It felt like much more than that to him – so much had transpired since the evening he slipped the ring on her finger. So much he wished he could take back. So much he didn’t understand. How did everything come to what it came to? He could see now that he’d made terrible mistakes, committed terrible lapses in judgment, terrible deeds, even. Four years now, since the end of the war, and yet he still carried those burdens – and the lapses that led him to where he ended up during the war. How to make it all right again?

Viktor had been asking himself this question quite often during the past four years. And clearly, he hadn’t yet come up with a compelling answer. Otherwise, he felt, everything in the household, in the family, and in the business would be back in order again. Whatever that means. That’s how untethered he felt now – and had felt for the past four years.  Certainly, he still exuded his old confidence, and was still able to exert a large measure of control here on the homestead. But when Viktor had the time and inclination to reflect on where things were headed for the Gassmanns and Bunkes, he felt very much at a loss regarding what course was best.

Once he came back from the war, Viktor hoped that returning to the physical work in the forest and in workshop would set him back on the right path in short order.  Not that he was quite sure what “the right path” was. That’s how bad things were with Viktor.  All he knew when he separated from the unit he served with during the war, and set foot back on the Gassmann-Bunke homestead, was that he couldn’t muster any sort of tender feeling for anyone: not for Ethel, not for Peter or Marcus, and not even for Lina, with her devastated body.  When he first saw her, he just took in her condition without any emotion whatsoever.  He’d seen worse during his time away.

But don’t think that Viktor was unaware that he felt nothing for any of his loved ones.  He noticed his numbness, and he concluded that it had taken possession of him unnoticed, at some point during the war.  He couldn’t say precisely when. Thinking about it now, which he did do occasionally, he assumed it came on little by little: Most likely, he concluded, the little voice inside him – the one that nudged him to open his heart to those around him who were suffering terribly – just gradually found it more and more difficult to make itself heard amidst the sights and sounds of the suffering he witnessed or inflicted.  For this reason or that, he began shushing that little voice, more and more forcefully, until, finally, he didn’t have to endure hearing it any more.  Or maybe it had even stopped calling out to him.  This last explanation was more frightening to him than the other, somehow, because he knew all along that the small voice was God speaking to him.  What did it really mean, then, that he stopped hearing the voice? Did God give up on me?

That’s what Viktor began asking himself when, after a year, then after two, and three and four years, the voice did not return.  He told himself he’d given it every opportunity to come back.  He was working and living on the homestead again, with his wife and his children and his in-laws.  He recognized now, that he never should have spent that time away in Schweiburg, back in the early thirties.  But you know what they say about hindsight…he told himself. He knew there were still things that needed to be made up for, set right again. At least he’d reached the stage where he wanted to set things right. For all his sincere belief that a man needs to take action and be firm and uncompromising in order to succeed, in order to bring his family life into order, Viktor also felt that this was not entirely the way to go about things now, after the war.  Was it that he saw the limitations of relying on force? That’s unclear.  But what Viktor did see was that the family was not happy, and he understood that the reason for this went far deeper than Lina being crippled. 

He realized this right away, in the summer of 1945, but this understanding wasn’t based in some intuitive, affectionate connection with his family members. Because, to his surprise, Viktor did not experience the burst of love and affection for them that he’d assumed he’d feel when he finally got back home. In fact, he realized that he felt far more distant from his so-called “loved ones” now that they were reunited, than he had at any time during the war.

It wasn’t that he felt particularly connected to his family as he served in a location not so terribly far from home – not so far, in terms, at least, of kilometers. Quite the opposite, actually. The nature of Viktor’s assignment during those years created an unbridgeable emotional and spiritual gulf between him and his family. No loving letters came to him from home: He made it clear to Ethel that it was best not to write, and, instead, to pass verbal messages to him through the underlings who made those deliveries of food and goods the family could sell on the black market.

It wasn’t just concerns about security that led Viktor to make this request of his family. It was also his awareness that he would not be able to bear to read expressions of others’ love for him while he was doing what he was doing. As he saw things – not that he consciously considered this point – such letters would have drawn him into the realm of kindness and affection, and there was no room for that in his wartime heart.  How could love exist alongside killing?

Thus, it wasn’t that Viktor felt a stronger bond of love with his family during the war than he felt now. Back then, he just locked his relatives away in a part of his mind and heart that rested far from his conscious awareness. Only once he got back home did he realize that opening that part of himself back up was not as simple as retracing his steps along the physical road he travelled to get back to the homestead.

  Give it time, Viktor told himself at the beginning – by which he was instructing himself to give time to both his family and himself.  But the situation – the family’s emotional situation – did not improve over time. Certainly, they settled into a routine of caring for Lina. He and Ulrich got the forestry side of the business back on its feet, and Peter did the same for the woodworking.  Marcus, for all his bluster and arrogance, really did provide the essential financial contribution to carry them over from month to month.  Even so, Viktor noticed that as time went on, other families – take Lorena and Stefan and their children – appeared to achieve a stable and even enviable way of life, in the sense that they seemed to have come closer together after the hardships they endured as a family.  But for the Gassmann-Bunkes, the thin, oppressive layer of sadness that Kristina noticed upon arriving in the summer of 1945, just never seemed to fully lift.

Viktor did a very good job of giving the appearance that he had a clear idea of what the family needed to make its way forward. And since his own ideas generally coincided with Renate’s on the home front, and Ulrich’s, as regarded the business, there was no discord when it came to making decisions.  (Not until it came to Marcus, in 1949, that is.)  But Viktor had to strive hard to maintain this veneer of power and competence, because beneath it lay a persistent emptiness, both emotional and spiritual.

Over these past four years, Viktor reflected more than once on how his life had changed after he first arrived on the homestead in the spring of 1921.  He’d felt numb in those days, too, but to only a very slight degree, compared to what he was experiencing now. Back then, what turned his life around was spending time in the forest. That was where, under Ulrich’s tutelage, he discovered God, where he sensed the divine power of God flowing in all the trees and plants and forest creatures he encountered.  And then there was Ethel. She was so full of that divine energy that it seemed to have replaced every drop of anything earthly within her.  Coming to work and live with the Gassmanns, Viktor found both God and the love of God, in the form of his love of Ethel.

After returning from the war, Viktor wanted to regain all of this, and he knew instinctively that the forest was the place to start looking for it.  That was one of the reasons he threw himself into the forestry work with all his might (not with all his heart, mind you, since his heart was not yet up to such a task). He knew God was in there somewhere, or had been before the war, anyway, and he meant to find Him.

That is something that’s easy to say, and easy to want, but not so easily accomplished.  It was during the moments and hours that he spent in the forest, back in the 1920s, alone or with Ulrich, surrounded not by human voices, but by the sounds of the trees and the wind and the birds and the animals, that Viktor came to know God.  He gradually became aware of the ways God spoke to him, through the forest, and through his own body and mind.  He learned how to take in that divine energy that Ethel radiated with her whole being. And although he never attained that level of fullness that he sensed in her, Viktor knew what it felt like when it coursed through his body. He knew the lightness of spirit that came along with it, the joy, the peace. He became well acquainted, too, with the quiet voice that eventually began riding into his heart atop that wave of divine power.  He could sense what it wanted to tell him, translate its message into words when he shared it with others, and be content with just knowing the message when he was keeping it for himself.  It was this voice which he gradually ceased hearing during the war.  Or, rather, if he was going to be honest with himself, Viktor had to admit that he began hearing it less and less way back in the early thirties.

This was what Viktor was seeking in the forest, beginning in the summer of 1945: to feel the divine power streaming through him again, to feel the joy and peace it brought along. And the voice.  The voice that used to guide him, but had stopped. Which he had stopped. But, despite spending hours and hours in the forest, days and days, over the past four years, Viktor still did not feel reconnected to God, to the divine that he had once accessed with such ease.  True, on some days, after a good morning or afternoon of work amongst the trees, a subtle lightness might appear, unexpectedly. He would notice it and seek hungrily to hold onto it, only to feel it drain away once he came out of the forest and glimpsed his crippled Lina and limping Peter.

During these nearly four years, he did not confide anything about his state of mind and spirit to Ethel, or to anyone else, for that matter. He preferred to muddle along on his own, despite the fact that he did not truly want to be alone in solving this problem. He felt the need to preserve his image as the strong, male protector of the family. Ulrich’s near 70 now, for God’s sake!  Someone has to take care for everyone… And so, he trudged along, doing the forestry and woodworking, and toiling on his own in the spiritual sense, too.  At least, he believed himself to be toiling alone.  Why was that? It was because, although he had gone down on his knees in the forest many times and asked God for help, he felt he had not received the wished-for assistance: His heart still felt empty. He still heard no inner voice giving him the guidance he at least knew enough to know he needed. 

Then, finally, one day in late June of 1949, after nearly four years of asking for help, Viktor felt something.

He happened to be out deep in the forest at the time, coincidentally – or perhaps not – near the old treehouse where love had first sprouted between him and Ethel, and where he had given her the carved wooden engagement ring.  The sight of the treehouse caught him by surprise, and he immediately walked over to the old beech tree and laid his hand against its thick bark.  Without even thinking, he laid his axe against the tree trunk. Then he hauled himself up onto the lowest branch (although not as nimbly as he’d done in 1921), and stretched out a hand toward the opening in the side of the treehouse. Is the ladder still there? Could it be?

Improbably, Viktor detected the knot of rope that still tied the ladder to the treehouse floor. He reached his hand as far over the edge and toward the interior of the structure as he could, and pulled on the bit of rope he felt there.  He pulled and pulled, and the ladder, along with the accumulated detritus of years of fallen leaves and beechnuts, tumbled over the side and downward, until the ladder hung, just as it had done so many years earlier.  The difference was, Viktor noted soberly, that he was alone now.  No Ethel below him to impress by clambering up into the treehouse.

Still, clamber he did, but without carefully testing the ladder the way he’d done when Ethel first took him there. And as a result, he slipped and fell a short distance when his left foot tore through a rung that had been weakened and nearly torn through by the ravages of time and weather, or perhaps by the persistent teeth of a mouse looking to soften its nest with the fibers.  But he recovered and was soon resting on his belly on the floor of the treehouse, amongst the leaves and small branches that blanketed it.  He lay that way in silence for a bit, comforted by the firm support of the branches that formed the floor beneath him.  Then, finally, he sat up and scooted backwards until his spine and shoulders came to rest against the trunk of that old, old beech.

He closed his eyes and allowed his palms to rest atop the layer of leaves, decaying ones on the bottom and last fall’s drier ones on the top. Memories of the time he’d spent here with Ethel flooded his mind.  It was like watching a newsreel: the first time she brought him here; the early evening talks they had here as the sun got lower and lower and the light more and more golden; the day in the woods when he understood that he really did love her – that day when he saw how he’d lived his life until then and vowed, No more ploys!; Ethel’s surprise when he gave her the little leather pouch with the wooden ring, and the joy on her face when she realized what it meant, and when she said yes.

As Viktor relived these experiences in his memory, he began to feel a sensation in his heart.  It started as a quiet, dull ache and then grew stronger and stronger, until it felt like someone had taken hold of his sternum and, after digging deep into the bone with both hands, was wrenching it apart.  The pain was more intense than any he had ever felt, the way he imagined a lightning bolt might feel.  He cried out, but that lasted but a moment, because the pain grew more intense and prevented him from making another sound.  He found himself plunging his hands down into the bed of leaves beneath him, as if seeking something to grab onto. But there was nothing he could grasp.  I must be dying. That thought briefly flitted into his brain. Then it, too, was eclipsed by the pain. 

Perhaps strangely, Viktor felt no fear at this thought, only a distant, analytical awareness. Then other words came. I can’t die like this.  Without making everything right. Then, still other words came to him, words that he actually spoke out loud.

“Please, God. I just want to do what’s right. Help me make it right, Lord. Please.”

It was as if a dam opened within his heart when he pronounced this plea.  He felt sadness welling up inside him, decades’ worth of sadness that had lain there deep within him, pushed down, unacknowledged. Now it all flowed out of him, in a minutes-long flood of tears and vomit and wrenching sobs and screams. When it finally came to a halt, Viktor gazed around him in a daze. He felt surprised to still be in the treehouse, although who knows where he imagined he should be at that moment.

Still disoriented, he managed to get himself down the ladder, and find his way back to the homestead.  When Ulrich asked Viktor where his axe was – because his son-in-law never, ever, left his tools in the forest – Viktor made no reply. He just went to the faucet on the side of the workshop and doused his head with water.  The Gassmann-Bunkes being the Gassmann-Bunkes, there was no discussion of this incident. Ulrich didn’t ask Viktor about it further, and he never mentioned it to Renate, either.  He just concluded that Viktor had been working something out, deep in the forest. He concluded that it must be between Viktor and God.  And he was right.

It was two days after this occurrence that Ethel broached the topic with Viktor of taking Lina to see Bruno Groening. She would have been a bit worried to bring it up, if not for what she experienced two days earlier, on the afternoon we’ve just described. What she experienced was that Viktor came in from his afternoon work in a state none of them had ever seen him in before.  He was pale and looked distracted at best, confused at worst.  He smelled a bit like vomit to Ethel, and when she reached her hand out to touch his shoulder, he barely reacted.  He just walked slowly up the stairs to their bedroom. When he came back down, he was wearing different clothes. That was something he never did, unless he was very dirty from working.  He didn’t explain anything to any of them, and no one asked, although Ethel noticed that she and Renate and Ulrich were keeping a close eye on him, in case it should seem that he’d suddenly been taken ill.  But although he was mostly quiet at their light evening meal, he ate normally and even discussed a bit of business with Ulrich later on. 

That night, when she and Viktor got into bed, Ethel sensed that something was different with her husband.  All these four long years, she had felt like she was sleeping next to a board.  Or no, rather, a stone, since even boards carry the divine energy of the forest in them.  He had never been a big talker, but after the war, he was even more silent with her.  When they were first married, they had to remind each other lightheartedly to stop talking and go to sleep. That’s how much they used to enjoy sharing everything from their day with each other.  Ethel recalled how it often happened that they agreed to finally go to sleep, and then one of them launched into one last thing.  At that point, the other one silently reached over and laid a hand on the offending spouse’s lips. They both laughed, and then they really did close their eyes to sleep, most often lying in each other’s arms.

This is not at all how they went to sleep now.  To be honest, that way of welcoming the night faded in the early thirties, and it never fully returned. Ethel so missed that closeness they had in the early years.  There was a rekindling of sorts after Viktor came back home from his time alone in Schweiburg, but it faded again in the run-up to the war.  And since the war ended… Well, there was no rekindling in 1945, and none since then, for that matter. It was something Ethel missed terribly.  She prayed about it.  Please give me my Viktor back, she often asked God.

In actuality, Ethel began offering this wish to God during the war, and back then, the plea was mostly about having him come home alive.  He did come home alive, but once he was back, Ethel no longer felt the love that had always radiated from him toward her. Even during the difficult years, she could always sense it coming from him.   And, back then, he never stopped being affectionate toward her, even when things were hardest between them, when the challenges they were facing made them angry with each other. But now, since he came back from the war, he seemed dead inside to her.  They rarely even kissed any more.  They occasionally made love, but you couldn’t call it that any more. Viktor’s embraces were devoid of the vibrancy and loving energy that used to combine with Ethel’s to bring them so close together that it seemed impossible that they could ever be torn apart. But that’s exactly what happened. And so, Ethel prayed for things to turn back around.

Then, on the night of the day that Viktor went through what he went through in the treehouse, he came up behind Ethel as they were getting ready for bed. Ethel was already in her nightgown. Lightly, hesitantly, even, Viktor leaned over and slipped his arms beneath his wife’s and wrapped them loosely around her waist. He bent his head down and rested his cheek on her shoulder.  This was something he used to do, years ago, just to feel the way her body felt against his, and to silently take in her energy. 

Surprised, Ethel glanced in the mirror and saw that he had his eyes closed. After resting like that for a half a minute or so, Viktor tightened his arms gently around his wife and, almost shyly, kissed the bare part of her skin that peeked out between her shoulder and her neck.  And she felt it then, something she hoped she wasn’t imagining: a thin little stream of love coming from him.  Not as strong as back in the early days, but it was definitely there.  She reached down and took his hands in hers.  His hands began to shake, and a moment later, she felt his face contort. He was crying, softly, and silently.  And she could hear him saying to her in a low, hoarse voice, “Forgive me, Ethel.  I just want to make it all right again.”

There wasn’t any sharing of thoughts that night, or any jolly shushing of one by the other.  No lovemaking, and not even any kissing.  But they got into bed and lay in each other’s arms, and something that reminded them of their love in the old days flowed gently through them as they fell asleep, feeling each other’s breathing in their own chests.

It was this experience that emboldened Ethel to raise Lina’s wish with Viktor two nights later.  Certainly, things between them had not suddenly – miraculously – shifted back to how they’d been twenty years earlier. But even so, they both understood that something had cracked open in Viktor that was allowing them to feel connected in what was both a new and also familiar way. 

It was thanks to the reappearance of this connection that Ethel ended up slipping her arms around Viktor’s waist that evening, an action that mimicked the way he’d come up behind her the other night.  She felt him take her hand and run his finger over the carved ring. Then he turned around and embraced her, gently, and with a tenderness that surprised her. Even though a bit of love had been peeking out from inside him for the past two days, Ethel didn’t wanted to hope for more.  Be patient, she told herself.  Don’t try to rush him. But now here he was, with his arms around her and his head buried in the curls of her hair at her neck. And now he was kissing her there, too, the way he always used to do. On this night, when they got into bed and leaned into each other’s arms, there was lovemaking, and it was worthy of the name.

After Ethel fell asleep, lying with her head on Viktor’s chest, he stayed awake a while longer. Partly, this was because he simply wanted to savor the joy he was experiencing now, the peace of having his Ethel asleep in the crook of his arm. Partly, it was because he was full of wonder at what had taken place within him over the past forty-eight hours.  He couldn’t explain it, at least not in words.  He knew that it was, as Ulrich had put it, between him and God. He also knew, deep inside him, that God had not ever given up on him, not once during all the years of trouble, not during the war years, either.  He understood that he, himself, had allowed the connection to God – and, in turn, to his family – to be squashed down within him, and God’s voice to be silenced.  He listened to Ethel’s steady breathing, synchronized with his own, and was overcome with a feeling of gratitude.  If what he experienced out in the forest two days earlier wasn’t grace, then he didn’t know what else would qualify.

This realization, in turn, was the other reason Viktor had not yet closed his eyes to sleep. It led his thoughts back to the fateful 1921 suppertime conversation.  The memory of that day had sprung vividly into Viktor’s mind when Ethel told him about the newspaper articles about Bruno Groening, about Lina’s wish to go see him, and about how Renate was in favor of the plan.

Viktor assumed that not only he and Ethel, but his in-laws, too, were revisiting that day now, too, especially given the topics that Lina had recently raised at their 1949 table.  In fact, it surprised him that Ethel didn’t immediately put the Bruno of Ewald’s story together with the newspaper article Lorena passed on to Renate.  Gazing down at her now, he almost touched her shoulder to ask her about it.  Then he smiled wistfully and put a hand to his own lips to seal them. It didn’t really matter that Ethel didn’t think of young Bruno as soon as she read the newspaper article. Even without that, neither of them had to remind the other of the questions that formed the crux of that long-ago argument: What do we believe is possible, and how strongly do we believe it? But Viktor knew that pondering those questions really would keep him up all night if he pursued them. So he chose instead, to pursue the sweet embrace of sleep while embracing his sweet Ethel.

*          *          *

            Lina, on the other hand, was coming to believe she might never sleep again.  She barely slept the night before, after her mother  promised to talk things over with Lina’s father and grandparents.  And after Viktor and Marcus shook hands across the table this afternoon, she felt like she might fly right out of her chair from excitement!  Her evening walk with Kristina didn’t calm her down a bit, either.  Quite the opposite. Kristina was almost in shock that everyone had actually agreed.

            “How did it happen,” Kristina asked Lina thoughtfully, as they made their way out to the main road, “that Marcus didn’t put up a fuss? I mean, given the way he was talking those other days about God’s will and all that… I’ll just say I was flabbergasted.”

            Lina nodded. “I was, too.  But at the same time, I wasn’t.  You don’t know Papa, or at least not very well.  What he did today… that was pure Papa. Papa at his best, in regard to Marcus.”

            “What do you mean?”

            “It goes back a long time,” Lina told her, looking off into the distance, as she went back in time to dig up a memory that would explain the dynamic between her father and Marcus.

            Kristina waited in silence for Lina to continue. She had the sense that whatever Lina told her would give her deeper insight into the man she had come to love.

            “All right,” Lina said finally, as if spying a lost button in the grass.  “Here you go. This was when we were all little.  I was probably seven or eight, so Marcus was twelve or thirteen.  There was some conflict over Papa being away from home so much.  Papa happened to be home at that point, and I remember the whole thing clearly, because – well, you know it yourself – no one ever makes a fuss openly in this family.”

            “Except for Marcus, it seems,” Kristina put in.

            “Yes, that’s true!” Lina laughed. “I don’t know why I always say no one ever makes a fuss, when he’s done it all his life!” She shook her head and then went on. “So, Papa had been away from home a lot. I don’t know what it was all about –“

            “Because no one talks about things like that!” Kristina said, laughing.

            Lina nodded her head and smiled. “Absolutely right! So, this was one of those times when it was only Marcus who spoke up.  He was saying all sorts of things about how Papa was ruining the family, not taking responsibility for taking care of us all…”

            “Really?”

            “Do you mean, did Marcus really say that, or was Papa not taking responsibility?”

            “Both,” Kristina replied in a quiet voice.

            “Well, yes, he really said it, and he really meant it. I don’t know to what extent it was true. I was too little. All I can say is that Papa was gone for what seemed a long time, and there was a lot of tension at home, probably about that.”

            “So what did your father do?”

            “Well, so there was this hunting rifle of Papa’s that Marcus really coveted.  But Papa wouldn’t let him use it. You see, it was Papa’s favorite rifle, and Marcus was often not very careful with tools and things, so Papa didn’t want to risk Marcus ruining it.”

            “I can see that,” Kristina said.

            “But that day – I recall it. It was after the evening meal, and we were all out in the yard, for some reason. Maybe it was too hot in the house? I don’t know.  But we were all out there.  And Marcus – Papa sent him outside during dinner because he wouldn’t stop yelling about Papa being away.  So, Marcus was out there, sulking, and then all the rest of us came out and sat down.  Without saying a word, without even looking at Marcus, Papa went into the workshop. And he came out holding the rifle, which he proceeded to hand to Marcus. ‘You can use this while I’m gone,’ he said to him. ‘But if you damage it in any way, you’ll regret you ever held it in your hands.’”

            Lina couldn’t see Kristina’s eyes grow wide, but she could sense the chill that passed through her friend’s body.  After mulling this all over a bit, Kristina asked, “And what happened? With the rifle?”

            “Oh,” Lina replied with a laugh, “I think that rifle was in better condition when Papa came back a year later than it was when he left.”

            “But how can you laugh about it?” Kristina asked her in a whisper.  “It’s horrifying, in a way, isn’t it?”

            “It is, yes,” Lina said, serious again now.  “But you have to understand, Kristina, Marcus was so awful to Peter and me growing up.  He was mean to anyone he could get away with being mean to, and Papa is the only one who could ever really get him in line. And it was, as far as I recall, mostly Papa using violence or threatening to use it that did the trick.” She let out a long sigh.  “At least there wasn’t that today.”

            “No,” Kristina agreed. “Today was all carrot and no stick, as far as I can tell.”

            Lina nodded. “And that’s a good sign, I think.”  

            “Especially since it means that you’ll be going to Herford!” Kristina told her, pushing aside the discomfort she felt at Lina’s story. 

            For the rest of the walk, the two of them chattered excitedly, wondering how soon the trip could be arranged.  But neither voiced the question that concerned them both most: Could Bruno Groening really heal Lina?

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 21

Chapter 21

Fall, 1921

Gassmann homestead

            Sometime during the second week of Ewald’s visit, the dinnertime conversation turned once more to the topic of the Germans living in America, and their ties to loved ones still in Germany. 

            “It was so hard during the war,” Ewald told them. There was no longer awkwardness about the discussion taking this turn. By now everyone was once again feeling that Ewald was one of them. So, it was acceptable to talk about these deeply personal experiences that transcended the restraints that the political and geographical distances had placed upon them during the war years.

            “Tough not being able to send letters back and forth,” Ewald continued. “That was such a torture for all of us German families there who have family here still.”

            “It was awful for us, too,” Renate told her brother. “It was hard enough to get accurate news about what was going on near us –“

            “Or in Germany as a whole!” Ulrich put in.

            “Yes,” Renate continued. “We just had no idea which way was up, what was happening in Varel or Oldenburg, never mind the other side of Germany.  To try to imagine what was going on over there in America, in Illinois, in Durand… No, that was just impossible!”

            “For us, too!” Ewald told her, nodding. “What with all the patriotic news … I almost said ‘propaganda’, but I guess I wouldn’t go that far…”

            “Oh, I would,” Ulrich said.  “I mean, about what we were reading here.  We basically gave up trying to figure anything out. We couldn’t tell at all what was really true and what was meant to give us hope, or to turn us against… you, against America… So we just gave up.  We concentrated on getting through each day here. And on praying that each person we knew – whether here or over there with you – would be safe and sound.”

            Everyone around the table nodded.  Even Viktor nodded this time, since he really had done something akin to praying while his father was off fighting, and when he, himself, had gone into the army, too.  It had been too late to pray for his mother, but he’d hoped for his step-mother and Hannelore and Walter to all come through the war alive, too…

            “We only got news now and then,” Ewald told them.  “But mostly not.  It was only after the armistice that the mail began getting to us again. That’s when we all really started to get a picture of what our relatives went during the war, and what it was like afterwards.  We all felt so helpless then, over there, stuck without a way to help you all here, afterwards, even, with so many injured and trying to get back into some kind of normal life.”

            “How could life ever be normal after that?” Hans asked.  “I mean, I never got into the fighting.” He looked around the table, gauging how the other men in the room felt about this. 

            “Thank the Lord for that,” Ewald said, and Ulrich nodded.  Viktor gave a quick bob of his head.  “Me, neither,” he said, adding, for Ewald’s benefit, “I never saw the other side of basic training.  War ended in the middle of that for me.”

            Ewald gestured at Hans. “Even so, you were still injured, without even being in battle.”

            “My injury was nothing,” Hans said. “Not compared with what others went through.  I thank God to be home alive and safe, even with one slightly bum leg.”

            There was a pause while everyone turned their attention to their plates.  Then Ewald spoke again, gesticulating with his fork.

            “You know, what you say about your leg, Hans – it reminds me.  Elise’s parents’ neighbors heard something really kind of crazy just after the war ended.  Turns out their nephew – the son of one of the brothers or sisters who stayed behind in Germany when the others, Elise’s parents’ neighbors, left for America – they live in Danzig.  And, well, this nephew – Leo was his name – Leo was badly injured in battle and sent home. He was in some army hospital there in Danzig, for a long time. I don’t know the details, what exactly had happened to him, but he had to have some surgery, something with his legs, I think. Lots of broken bones, maybe?  Or maybe partial paralysis?  I don’t know, I don’t remember. Elise might. But he was in a bad way. He just didn’t seem to be getting better.  I think there were open sores on his legs. Maybe they were going to amputate a leg? Or both of them.  Gangrene, maybe?”

            Ulrich interrupted him, laughing. “For heaven’s sake, Ewald, what do you know about what happened?”

            Everyone laughed, and Ewald opened his hands and nodded. “Yeah, I know it. Sorry. But the point is this: There was this woman who came by regularly to visit the soldiers in the hospital. And she had a son. He was maybe ten or eleven. And sometimes she brought him with her.  And all the men in the hospital, well, they noticed that when she brought her son with her, for some reason, and nobody knew why it was, they all felt better by the time he left.”

            “Do you mean they felt better as in they weren’t sick any more, or they were in a better mood?” Ethel asked, intrigued.

            “Well, now,” Ewald said, turning to her and tipping his fork in her direction, “Now, that’s the odd thing about it. Yeah, they felt happier, and, this Leopold told his family, they weren’t in such pain.”

            “Really?” Renate asked.  “What did he do?  He wasn’t a doctor, was he?”

            “Mama,” Hans said, “the kid was ten!  What kind of doctor could he have been?”

            “True,” Ewald went on. “But all the same, all the same, the sick soldiers felt different somehow. Better.  And if this woman came one time without her son – Bruno, that was his name, yes, Bruno! Yeah, if the woman came without him on a given day, the boys in the beds, the soldiers, they’d say, ‘Ma’am, please bring your Bruno with you when you come.  We feel better when he’s here!’ And so she did do that.”

            “And?” Ethel asked. “Is that it? The soldiers were happier?”  She paused and looked down at her lap, and then added, “I mean, I’m sorry. It isn’t that I mean that that’s not enough, because, of course, that’s enough. Who wouldn’t want the wounded to feel better, even just a little bit?”

            “But that’s just it, Ethel,” Ewald said.  He sat up straighter and turned to her.  “That wasn’t all! Some of those young men in the beds actually got better. Totally healthy, I mean.  Including Leo.  He had all this pain in his legs, even after the surgery that was supposed to cure him.  So much pain, and his wounds weren’t healing after the surgery. Now I remember. He seemed to have some infection where he’d had the surgery on his legs.  The doctors were really worried about it, because they weren’t having any luck clearing it up. And the day before they were actually planning to cut off his leg – I remember now, that’s what his aunt said – this boy Bruno came by.”

            “And so what happened? With the boy Bruno, I mean?” Renate asked.

            “Well, it’s hard to say. That is, it’s clear what happened: The boy was there one day – the day before they were going to amputate – and he sat down on Leo’s bed and talked to him for a little bit. Then he shook Leo’s hand and said, ‘May you be totally healthy soon, by God’s grace’.  Then he left.  As Leo’s aunt told it, it was a very funny scene.  I mean, think of it: a little boy shaking a soldier’s hand in a very solemn way.”  He mimicked the gesture.  “And by the next morning, when Leo woke up, the infection was gone, and the wound was nearly healed up.  And his pain was gone.”

            Ulrich frowned.  “I don’t understand,” he said. “What did the boy do?  He must have done something. It’s impossible otherwise.  And he wasn’t a doctor…”

            “That’s just the thing,” Ewald said emphatically, tapping his fork on the table for emphasis. “Nothing but talking and taking Leo’s hand and wishing him well.  Nothing more.  And then he was nearly all healed up the next day. Within another day, it was complete.  No one could explain it.”

            “And you heard this from who?” Viktor asked with a frown, speaking for the first time in the conversation. He was trying to keep the skepticism out of his voice, but inside he was thinking that this is the sort of story that gets passed around and garbled the further it goes.  No way that could happen.

            “Leo’s aunt,” Ewald told him.  “In a letter she wrote to Elise’s parents’ neighbor, her sister.

            “How could that be?” Viktor asked.  “That kind of thing just doesn’t happen.”

            “Exactly!” Ewald said. “But it did!  And that wasn’t the only time. Some of the others were cured, too.  One of pneumonia, another of appendicitis – he didn’t need the surgery after all.”

            There was a pause as everyone chewed – both on their food and on what Ewald had told them.  Then Ethel spoke again, as if thinking out loud.

            “Do you think it could be some kind of faith healing?” she asked, addressing no one in particular. 

            “Sis,” Hans told her, “did you hear?  This kid was only ten. Where’d you ever hear of a ten-year-old faith healer?”  He shook his head and returned to his dinner, but, almost unconsciously, he laid his left hand on his own leg, the one that had been injured during the war.  And he wondered…

            “So he’s young,” Ethel retorted.  “Does that mean he can’t be close to God?”

            “Close to God is one thing,” Ulrich said. “But to have some kind of healing powers?  Again, how would something like that work, even?”  How?

            “Through faith?” Renate suggested, thoughtfully pushing her potatoes around her plate. “Faith that God could heal those boys, those soldiers?”

            “Who has that kind of faith?” Ulrich asked, his tone thoughtful, rather than critical. “Especially now?” His mind was wandering to thoughts of war injuries and atrocities, and to just the war itself. “How do you keep your faith in God after all we’ve been through?”  Looking at Ewald, he added, “All of us.  Not just us Germans. The whole world.”

            Viktor nodded. “That’s right.  How do you believe in a God who would allow this to happen?”  The words jumped out, and now, surprised at his own openness and honesty, Viktor looked down and cursed himself for getting into a discussion of religion.

            “But God gave man free will,” Ethel said, directing her gaze at him.  “And man has chosen to make war.”

            “Then what does God do all day?” Hans asked, an edge coming suddenly into his voice.  “Can’t He do something to stop all of this? Why not stop the war?”

            “Because then He’d be violating man’s free will,” Ethel told him, her voice firm.

            “Then what good is this God?” Hans threw back at her, “If He just sits and watches everyone in the world try to wipe each other out without doing something to stop it?”

            “But He does do something,” Ethel retorted, sitting up straighter. She was surprised at the annoyance she felt rising inside her.  “He is here with us always, letting us know He is here, that the divine is here. All around us.”

            “In the forest, say,” Viktor added quietly.

            “That’s right!” Ethel pointed across the table at him.  “You can feel Him there. Papa, you’ve felt God’s presence there.” Ulrich nodded.  “You know He exists,” Ethel went on.

            “But what good does that do us, God being around us?” Hans persisted.  “I don’t understand how that helps us. Especially when He sits by and lets wars and everything else bad go on.”

            Ethel frowned.  It took a moment for her to reply, but everyone at the table waited patiently until she did.  “Hans, I guess what I’d say is that when I feel God is near me… or when I feel connected to God, to the divine … Well, then it’s easier for me to feel what it’s right to do. I’m calmer. Not upset. And I don’t get so worked up about things.”

            “So,” Hans said to her, “you don’t feel like making war when you feel God. Is that it?”

            “Is there something wrong with that, Hans?” Ethel asked him, a slight edge to her voice. “With feeling connected to God? Maybe if more people were really connected – then maybe there’d be less war.”

Renate felt the conversation heading in a direction she didn’t like, and jumped in.

            “I’m no theologian,” she began, “but I think that having God, knowing He’s there – even if you don’t feel it yourself – I personally think it helps a person feel safer.”

            “How in the world does that make you feel safer?” Hans exclaimed, exasperated.  “I certainly didn’t feel safer during the war because of believing in God.”

            “Maybe you don’t really believe He exists,” Ethel suggested. Although there was no edge to her voice this time – she was simply thinking aloud again, not casting aspersions on her brother’s faith – Hans heard an edge. He sat up straighter.

            “What, so now I’m a bad believer? And that’s why I got hurt in the war?”

            Ulrich laid his hand on his son’s arm. “That’s not what Ethel meant.”

            “But that’s what she said. ‘Maybe you don’t really believe He exists’.  Well, maybe you’re right, Ethel. Maybe I don’t.  Maybe I don’t.”  He took a breath in and exhaled loudly.

            “No, Hans,” Ethel told him, “I wasn’t accusing you of that. I was just reflecting, thinking about that boy Bruno and about the idea of faith healing and about what it means to have faith. About what might be possible if we really do have faith and are very strongly connected to God.”  She looked at everyone else around the table.  “I don’t know whether I really have faith myself. I mean, the kind of faith that believes those soldiers could be healed by the grace of God.”

            “Do you think that’s what happened with them?” Renate asked her. “That that boy Bruno asked God for them to be healed? And then it happened because he believed it would?”

            Ethel turned to Ewald. “What was it he – that boy – said to Leo?  About wishing him….”

            “Yes, wishing for him to be completely healthy soon, by the grace of God.  That’s what his aunt told us, anyway.”

            “So, this boy wished, really, really wished, for Leo to get healthy,” Ethel said. 

            “It sounds like he asked God for that, a kind of prayer,” Renate added.

            Ethel nodded.  “And then it happened.  Leo did get healthy.”

            Hans shook his head and leaned back in his chair.  “No way that could happen.”

            “Why not?” Viktor and Ethel inquired at the same moment, and then both laughed.

            Hans scowled at them.  “You know how many men on the battlefield, or in hospitals all over Germany, and not just Germany, all over France and England… How many of them begged God for healing, at the top of their lungs?” He paused. “And how many of them got it?”

            No one replied.  “And now, this little slip of a boy comes into a ward, and suddenly the wounded start jumping out of bed and throwing away their crutches?”

            “No need to make fun of it,” Renate told him.

            “But Mama,” Hans went on. “Really!  How many?  Ethel, tell me, if you believe this story – and don’t take it personally, Ewald. I’m not saying you’re lying, but –“

            “Hans, do you believe Leo actually got better?” Ethel asked.

            “I’ll grant you that.” Hans absently picked up his napkin and began twisting it in his hands.

“Then how did it happen, if it wasn’t from God?” Ulrich broke in.

“How should I know?” Hans snapped.  “Maybe he was actually on the mend anyway, and the doctors just didn’t realize it. I don’t know. Why does it have to be God? And besides, can God really even heal like that?” He looked around the table at his family’s motionless faces.  “Why’s everyone ganging up on me?  I asked a simple question: How many wounded men in that war prayed to God to get healed, and how many did get healed?  How many didn’t?  And if they didn’t, then why not?  Maybe they didn’t really believe, either? Maybe there’s only this one little boy in Danzig who really believes enough, that God answers?”

Now Viktor, uncomfortable at the rising tension, and also feeling protective of Ethel, who was bearing the brunt of Hans’ rant, reentered the conversation.

“I don’t know what it takes for God to answer a prayer,” he said.  “For myself, I can say that I gave up asking God for anything after he let my mother die when I was little…”

“You did?” Ethel asked, incredulous.

“I gave up then, and never started up again until I came here.”  Don’t mention the forest. Don’t mention feeling God there. He managed to keep his mouth shut, and prayed a small, but fervent prayer that no one at the table would ask him to explain himself. 

“Exactly!” Hans cried, and Viktor silently thanked the Lord for this small miracle.

“’Exactly!’ what?” Ethel asked, her attention shifting from Viktor to her brother.

“What I mean is, why pray when our prayers aren’t answered?” Hans continued. “When we don’t even know whether God can answer them.”

“There may be all sorts of reasons a prayer isn’t answered,” Renate offered. “Because I believe God can do anything.”

“But doesn’t this God want everyone to be happy?” Hans persisted.

Renate nodded. “I believe He does. I absolutely believe that.”

“Then why allow the suffering?” Hans asked, opening his arms, palms open upward. “What kind of God allows that, assuming He has the power to turn things around?”

“It’s what Ethel was saying about free will,” Ulrich suggested. “Each man has to make his own choices about how to live and act.”

Hans gave a dry, sarcastic laugh.  “Is this how you people explain it to yourselves – explain that God has abandoned you?  Or that he hasn’t been able to help you? By resorting to this idea of free will? By blaming all of our misfortunes on us? We do every possible harmful thing to ourselves, but God just stands by and lets us do it?”  He looked from one to the other of them, then went on.  “Even just a human parent pulls a child back if he’s about to walk off a cliff. Why not God? If we’re about to walk off the cliff toward war, say.”

“Because we have to learn on our own,” Ethel said. “That’s what I think. We have to learn on our own what’s bad and what will hurt us. If God just keeps saving us, we’ll never learn for ourselves what’s right and wrong.”

Renate nodded. “I see it that way, too.  We choose. And God helps us choose the right path.”

“How does God help you choose, Mama?” Hans asked. “Because I never have the feeling God is helping me choose.”

“He shows us the way,” Ethel continued.  “Sends us messages. I’ve heard them in the forest.  And I know you have, Papa.”

Ulrich nodded.

Hans sighed loudly, but said nothing for a moment. Maybe he didn’t know how to respond to this. Maybe he was sick of fighting about it.  Maybe he just didn’t have any hope that they’d come to any agreement on the topic.  Or any hope that he’d come to understand whether or not he did have any real faith in God. Finally, he turned to Ethel.

“So, do you believe Leo could actually have been healed because that boy Bruno prayed so hard and believed so hard that God could heal him?”

Ethel inhaled slowly and deeply and then let out a big sigh. “I don’t know, Hans. I just don’t know.  But I can tell you this: I sure want to be able to believe.  Because, think of it: Wouldn’t that be a grand thing?  To be able to believe that if you have enough faith, then God will heal someone no doctor’s been able to help?  I want to be able to believe that.”

Viktor gazed at her. And in that moment, he was at least able to believe that if anyone could muster enough faith to be able to achieve something like that, the only one around this table who had a shot at being able to do it was Ethel.  She has as much faith, as much connection to God, as all the rest of us put together.

“What about you, Hans?” his mother asked him softly.  “Do you believe it’s possible?”

Without answering, Hans folded his napkin and laid it on the table.  “Thank you for the meal, Mama,”’ he said, rising from his chair.  “I need to get some air.”

He didn’t look angry, and didn’t sound it, either, and yet, everyone at the table was stunned.  His sudden departure might have been more comprehensible, had it been accompanied by yelling, or by sharp, abrupt motions.  But there was none of that.  That wasn’t his way.  He just calmly left the table and the house.

Ethel followed him with her gaze. Then she looked at her mother, who, reading the question in Ethel’s eyes, said, to her as much as to everyone else, “Leave him be.  He just has something he needs to think out.”

In fact, this was true for all of them.  Only Hans had taken the step of removing himself from the group in order to do his thinking somewhere else.  The rest of them stayed at the table and conversed only about topics they were certain would be free of controversy.  The stormy discussion they’d just endured was so unlike what they usually experienced during meal time, that they were all at a loss.  Behind the bland words that continued to come out of their mouths, questions floated through the background of each mind, each question unique to its thinker, but each prompted by the uncomfortable scene that had just played out.  Before long, this evening meal ground to a halt. The thoughts of those sitting at the table seemed finally to have overwhelmed the thinkers’ ability to think about one topic – the topic they really wanted to be attending to – while speaking about another, uninteresting, and unsatisfying topic.  Renate rose from her seat and began collecting the dishes from the table.

“I’ll head back to the farm, then,” Ewald said. He stood up and stretched.  His words and tone sounded formal and awkward, as if he were some stranger they’d invited to dinner. Have I been away so long that they don’t feel I’m family anymore?

“It’s a nice evening,” Ulrich said. “I’ll walk with you.” And Ewald felt a bit relieved. 

The two men remained silent until they came to the main road and turned left to head toward the Walter farm. Each was beginning to allow some room in his head for the thoughts that had been pushed to the background by Hans’ hasty departure from the table.

“Sure wish I hadn’t told that story,” Ewald said finally. What he was feeling most at this point was anxiety that, in his new role as outsider – for this really was how he’d come to see himself since his arrival, despite the warmth of everyone’s welcome – he had unwittingly, out of ignorance of everyone else’s state of mind, caused a great upheaval.

“No need,” Ulrich replied, reaching over to lay his right arm across Ewald’s shoulder.  He allowed it to rest there for a few paces, even though it wasn’t comfortable for either of them to walk that way.  “How could you know it’d be such a touchy subject for Hans?”

Ewald turned to him. “Did you know it would?”

Ulrich shook his head and allowed his arm to return to its natural position, but not before giving Ewald’s shoulder a firm pat.  “Came as a complete surprise to me.”

“Me, too. But I thought it was maybe because I just wasn’t here while he was growing up.  If I knew him better, I might have known better than to bring it up.”

“I’ve lived with him his whole life,” Ulrich said, smiling, “and I never had any idea.”

“I guess most folks don’t sit around the table talking much about God and faith. We never did, growing up, and we sure don’t now, either, at home.  In Illinois, I mean.” Damn it.  “At home.”  You’re just making it worse.

But Ulrich smiled again, clearly not taking any offense.  “You mean to say,” he said, “that you Illinois Germans are just as tight-lipped as us German Germans?”

“Mmmhmm.”  Now Ewald smiled, too. “There’s so much that those Midwesterners just don’t say. Sometimes it seems like they’re just the same as us Germans, as if I didn’t really leave home – home here – at all.  Of course, there really are a lot of German families there, even if they left a generation or two ago. But still…  The pure Americans in Illinois are mighty quiet, too.  No one wants to say the wrong thing.  Nothing controversial.  ‘Do the right thing.’  ‘Be considerate.’  ‘Don’t upset Mr. Smith.’ That kind of thing.  And what that translates to is everyone keeping their thoughts and feelings to themselves.”

“Sounds pretty German to me!” Ulrich said, his smile broadening.  “And here, I thought you’d become more American, somehow.”

“What do you mean?”

“Hard to put my finger on it.”

They were walking past the forest on their left now, the Gassmanns’ forest, and farm fields on their right, and both men studied the landscape as they walked along it. Ulrich made a brief attempt to imagine how it would look to him if he’d been away for seventeen years and was seeing it anew after that long absence. Ewald, meanwhile, was delighting in the way the early evening’s sunrays played amongst the tree leaves and rendered the forest more achingly beautiful with each moment.  The silence reigned until they reached the end of the Gassmanns’ land. Then Ulrich spoke again.

“Seems to me you’re freer.  You seem more open to me, happier than you were way back then, more willing to speak your mind.”

“Not that you liked it back then, on the occasions I did speak my mind,” Ewald half-joked.

“True, true,” Ulrich agreed.  “There was that one particular, last, time you spoke your mind that I’ve wrestled with all these years.  But the others – those times I always agreed with you, as I recall, so there was no bite to them.  But still, they were few and far between, don’t you think?”

He turned to look at his old friend. Although Ewald was nearly two decades older than when they’d parted, he still looked fresh and full of life. Ulrich, though, felt as if he, himself, had been hauling heavy weights around all this time. And that, despite all his physical labor and his strong and basically healthy body, this inner weight had caused his very being to sag and droop in a way that Ewald’s didn’t.

“Oh, I do. I agree with you!  Before I went to America, I think I kept most everything inside, or at least the things I figured would cause a commotion if I brought them up. But the things that would cause a commotion – they didn’t go away just because I didn’t talk about them.  They just kept building up in me until I couldn’t not let them out.  I can see that now. That’s why my decision to go to Illinois came as such a shock to everyone.  It was totally new to all of you, totally out of the blue, like a lightning bolt.”

“Yes, that’s true,” Ulrich told him.  “We none of us could understand it at all.  Where did that come from? That’s what we were all asking ourselves and each other. It seemed so sudden to us that we couldn’t believe you were serious.”

“What you didn’t know was that I’d been thinking about it from the time Ralf went over. And the idea just got stronger and stronger until finally I made up my mind.”

“But why didn’t you ever talk to us – or at least to me – about it before you announced it?” Ulrich asked. Ewald could hear the combination of a sigh and his friend’s persistent sadness about this topic.

“Ulrich, I can’t explain it.  Well, I can a little bit now.  I couldn’t have, back then.”  Ewald paused and turned to look at his old friend.  “The way I’d describe it now is that I was afraid that if I brought it up early on, when it was still just a thought I was considering, then I’d never have the chance to decide about it on my own.”

“What do you mean?”

“Well, I knew for sure that the family wouldn’t be happy.  You remember how rough it was for Ralf when he made his decision?  It was months of arguing and hard feelings in that period before he set foot on the boat.  And I knew I’d get resistance from my folk, too.  I mean, my parents would have been tough enough, but Renate?” He shook his head in a combination of awe and the respect.  “I preferred to give her the healthy distance you’d give a cyclone you know has the power to crush you.   She may talk about free will,” he went on, with a smile, “but that’s for her, not for anybody else. So, I announced my decision and high-tailed it out before the cyclone could get up to full power.”

Ulrich knew exactly what Ewald meant.  “Yeah, she packs a punch,” he said simply, smiling.

“A big one.  I think she’s mellowed out a bit these past years,” Ewald said. He raised his hand when Ulrich began to object.  “Really, I do.  And I think it’s because she’s happy, Ulrich.  Happiness does that to a person.  That’s what I feel, about myself.  You call it more open, being more willing to speak my mind.  Maybe that’s true, but if it is, it’s not so much because I’m in America, but because I’m happy. Despite everything I told you the other day. I love my family and they love me.  It’s the love that does it. I believe that.  And Renate has that, from you and Ethel and Hans.”

“Yes, that’s true,” Ulrich granted.  “Maybe she is a little less fiery than when she was younger.”

“Less combative,” Ewald suggested.  “Oh, I don’t know how to put it.  I guess what I mean is that when I announced I was going, it was as if she felt it was a threat to the whole family order, that everything would unravel if I left, that her own personal vision of how the family should be would crumble.”

Ulrich listened, evaluating Ewald’s explanation.  Then he said, “She hasn’t changed a bit in that regard.”

“Oh, no?”

“Nope.  It’s just more under cover.  I never analyzed it, but what you say – it makes sense.  She really is like that, still.  She has her idea of the way things need to be so that everyone will be happy, and she’ll do what she needs to do to get them there and keep them that way.”

Ewald stopped and pointed emphatically at Ulrich. “Exactly!  That’s exactly it!  And that is why I waited until everything was set for me to go before I breathed a word of it.  I knew I couldn’t hold up under months of her pressure. Or at least not until I was a hundred percent sure myself it was what I wanted and that I could do it. Otherwise she would have worn me down.”

Ulrich nodded. “I can see what you mean.  That’s where you and I are different, my friend.  Your sister and I have never had that kind of disagreement.”

“Why’s that?  Haven’t you ever wanted to do something she didn’t want you to do?” Ewald was looking at him in amazement.

“Oh, I wouldn’t quite put it that way.” Ulrich turned and gazed into the woods, recalling the times when he’d wanted to do things one way and Renate another. 

“How would you put it, then?”

“Like this: In the end, the things we disagreed about… they didn’t matter enough for me to fight against that force of nature that is your sister.”  He smiled, but Ewald was still looking at him in surprise.

“But if it was something you really felt strong enough about?  What then?”

Ulrich shrugged. “It never was, Ewald. It just never was.  I take my cue from her, as far as family matters go.  Always have done, probably always will. She knows how to adjust things, keep them in order in the family. Her way of doing things keeps everything calm and good.  Happy.  For all of us.  I’d rather have her as an ally than an opposing force.”

Here Ewald understood that all the apparent peace and joy in his sister’s household came at a price, at least for Ulrich.  And what about Hans? And Ethel?  What weren’t they speaking about out loud as they went along with Renate’s way of doing things?

“Well,” he said to Ulrich, “I’d say your Hans isn’t afraid of speaking his mind.”

“Are you saying I am?” Ulrich objected, and Ewald could tell from his tone that he was hurt.

“I’m sorry, Ulrich.  I didn’t mean it that way. All I meant was that Hans is willing to go head to head with his mama, if need be.”

They were just coming to the lane that led onto the Walter farm, and Ulrich turned to face Ewald. “Do you think there’ll be a need?”

“Wouldn’t be surprised at all, judging by the dinner discussion tonight,” Ewald told him.

“That did come out of the blue, him getting riled up like that.”

“Exactly my point.  And I’m sorry if I caused some harm there.” It was Ewald’s turn now to put his arm around Ulrich’s shoulder.

“Not at all,” Ulrich said, embracing his brother-in-law.  “People need to be free to think their thoughts and speak their mind. Thoughts are free, aren’t they?” He spoke, apparently without realizing that his own life was not necessarily lived in accord with this ideal.  “I understand now why you kept quiet about your plans for so long.”

“Even to you,” Ewald told him.  “Especially to you, maybe.  I knew you’d tell her if I told you, and then…”

“Cyclone winds?”

“Mmmhmm.”

The two men laughed then walked into the farmyard. Lorena – also a force of nature, but a refreshing summer breeze to her sister Renate’s cyclone – caught sight of them and herded them along into the kitchen for cake and coffee.

*          *          *

            Ethel also felt the need for fresh air as an antidote to the stultifying effects of the dinnertime conversation. So, once she and her mother finished cleaning up after the meal, she walked out into the yard.  She felt the desire – and need, even – for Viktor’s company, and was delighted to see him sitting on a bench outside the workshop. He was bent over a thin board with a piece of paper on it, pencil in hand.

            “What are you working on?” she asked, coming over and leaning down to look at the paper.  He motioned for her to take a seat next to him, which she did.

            “Just a sketch for a design on that chest of drawers Hans and I are going to do. For a family in Varel.”

            Ethel nodded and leaned over again, studying the graceful lines of the ivy design.  “I like your carving so much, Viktor.  This will be beautiful.”

            He thanked her and then placed the board on the bench next to him, positioning the pencil so it would stay put.  “Feel like a walk?  I need to move.”

            Ethel jumped up.  “I was just about to ask you the same thing.  I love a walk at this time of day, with the sun just starting to get low.”

            Out of force of habit, they headed for the main path into the forest.  Walking slowly, they both remained silent for a bit, allowing their breathing and thoughts to be calmed by the energy of the trees and the beauty of the golden light filtering through the branches and leaves.  Viktor spoke first.

            “Will you show me the treehouse? The one you and Hans built?  If it’s still there, that is.”

            Ethel smiled.  “Oh, it’s still there.  Probably will be as long as the tree stands, and it’s a beech, so I imagine it’ll be there for decades!”

            “For your children and even grandchildren to scamper up into it,” Viktor suggested, imagining such a scene, even though he couldn’t fully picture the house, not having yet laid eyes on it.

            Ethel turned and smiled at him, but said only, “Over here, then.  Follow me.”

            She led him off the main path, into a stand of pines, and then through a section with more oaks, and then back to pines and spruces.

            “How do you remember where it is?” Viktor asked.  He could see no discernible path, unless it was beneath the fallen leaves that muffled the sound of their footsteps.

            “Have you forgotten I grew up in these woods?  I could probably find it blindfolded.” She blushed.

            “No need to test that,” he told her.  “I believe you.”

            “All right, then, come on. And stop doubting me.”

            After a few more minutes, Ethel raised her hand and pointed to something in the near distance.  “There it is.  See it?”

            “Nope,” Viktor replied, after following the direction of Ethel’s pointing finger.  There were still some leaves on the trees, mostly the oaks’, so he figured the structure must be hidden behind them.  He saw some beeches, but no treehouses.

            “Oh, my goodness, and you call yourself a forester!” she teased.

            “Never!” he objected.  “Cabinet maker, yes, forester – not yet!  So, please take pity on me!”

            Ethel shook her head in mock disgust.  “All right, then, keep going.”

            After tramping about a hundred more yards through the leaves, underbrush and small fallen twigs, Viktor finally saw it.  A tall, spreading beech tree, its silvery bark both in shadow and yet also shimmering in the early evening light. He was surprised to see that the treehouse was only about ten feet off the ground.  He wasn’t sure what he’d been expecting, especially given that it was built in a beech tree.  

            Viktor said nothing at first, just walked with Ethel up to the tree.  He laid a hand on its cool, smooth bark and looked upward, studying the floor of the treehouse: Perched on the low-slung branches of the beech, it had a roughly hexagonal deck, which consisted of small logs – birch, it looked like to Viktor – that had been laid like a floor. The treehouse rested on and was supported by five large branches spreading out beneath it from the central trunk, which ran, unhindered, up through the house’s center. A series of rough planks had been nailed from below to the birch log “floorboards”.  At the house’s outer edge, one end of each of the supporting planks rested on two of the tree’s main branches, one at each of the plank’s ends. At the center, a series of short logs slightly thicker than the floorboards supported the floor.  Viktor was impressed by the design: the thicker supports were needed at the center, because the beech’s branches were not level.  If the floor had been allowed simply to rest on the branches, the floor of the treehouse would have tilted down in the middle, like a funnel. 

Stepping back so he could see how the house itself had been constructed, Viktor discovered a simple, but effective design that was also economical in terms of the amount of materials it had used: Five or six upright birch logs had been nailed to the floor logs as posts, and long twigs had been woven between these posts and tied around them to form what served as the house’s walls.  The roof, such as it was, started as a round length of thick rope affixed to the beech trunk about six feet up from the floor.  Long, thin willow branches had been looped or hooked or tied over this rope – all of these methods had been used in various spots –  and then anchored between the woven branches of the walls.         

            “Doesn’t look like you nailed any of the planks or posts to the tree itself?” Viktor asked Ethel, still studying the construction.

            “That’s right!” Ethel told him, patting the tree. “That was the whole thing. Papa said we could build the treehouse, but we had to plan it so it wouldn’t hurt the tree in any way.”

            “So that’s why there had to be the rope ladder, instead of nailing boards onto the trunk.”

            “Exactly.” Then Ethel laughed.  “Although I think Hans suggested it more to keep me from climbing up there on my own than to protect this dear tree.”

            Viktor smiled, too.  “You all did such a beautiful job.”

            “I can’t take credit.  Except for clamoring for it to be done.  I was only three.”

            “Still,” Viktor told her, struck by how beautiful she looked in the soft light.  “Can we go up?  Is it still solid?” he asked, peering here and there.

            “I imagine so. It’ll have to be, if it’s going to last for kids and grandkids!” She smiled at him.  “I’m not sure whether the ladder will still hold us, though.”

            “I don’t see any ladder,” Viktor replied.  “Where is it?”

            Ethel pointed up to the square opening in one wall of the treehouse, about three feet wide.  It took Viktor a few seconds, but then he saw two thick, curving sections of rope wrapped around one of the floor branches.  “Ah,” he said, “the end of the ladder’s attached to those?”

            Ethel nodded. “When Hans and I got older and stopped using the treehouse, we just folded it up up there and left it.  Papa wanted to cut it, but we protested so much he relented.”

            “Why did you stop using it, if you couldn’t bear to have him cut the ladder down?”

“It wasn’t that we lost interest in it, not at all.  It was our favorite place.”

            “What happened, then?” Viktor asked. 

            “The war,” Ethel answered. “It was during the war. Papa was worried that hobos or other people travelling across the land, people who didn’t want to be found, might see the treehouse and decide it was a good place to hide.”

            Viktor looked around, at the deep forest surrounding them. He thought that if he had been travelling the land without a job back then, the treehouse would have been very appealing, indeed.

            “And so Papa ordered us to stay away from it.  Didn’t want us to stumble on anyone, or startle someone who might hurt us.”

            “Seems sensible,” Viktor replied.

            “Sensible, yes,” Ethel said, patting the tree trunk once more. “But it was very sad for Hans and me.  This was our safest place, where we could come and sit and read. Or I would work on my ‘pictures’ up there.”  She looked up wistfully. “Every time we came out here – and for the first couple of years, I was only allowed to come here with Hans – I had such a strong feeling of anticipation and joy.  The closer I got, the happier I felt.  I’d fly up that ladder and find my spot, back against the beech trunk, looking out through the gaps in the sides. It was heaven.”

            Viktor was studying her face. It was glowing now. Some color had come into her cheeks as she told him of those treehouse times.

“That last time we were here,” Ethel went on, “I climbed down the ladder, then Hans pulled it up and half-climbed, half-jumped down.  He was lanky by then. It wasn’t such a big drop!”  She laughed, remembering that afternoon. “But to me, it looked like a mile from the house down to the forest floor!  I was in awe of him, that he could do that.  He’s never tired of reminding me of that ever since – of how in awe of him I was!”

            “So, how’re we going to get up there, to get the ladder?” Viktor mused aloud.  Perhaps he could perform some feat of strength and dexterity that would impress Ethel as much as Hans’ had…  He studied the tree and the arrangement of the lower branches.

            “I bet I can hop up on this branch,” he said, “then stand up and lean over and grab the ladder, pull it down.” It wasn’t a super-human feat by any means, but it might do.

            “Yes, if you think you can, go ahead!” Ethel said.  “I’m so eager to see it again myself!”

            Striving to appear both as graceful and strong as possible, Viktor hoisted himself up onto the lowest branch – about four feet above the ground – and was pleased that he managed to do so in one, smooth movement.  All that chopping and moving of wood had made his arms strong.  Then, steadying himself against the trunk, he straightened up.  At this point, his head was just below the treehouse floor, and so it was easy for him to stretch out a hand to the left and catch hold of the side of the rope ladder nearest to him, just above the spot where it had been secured to the branch at the edge of the opening.  Gripping one of the supporting planks with his right hand, he began tugging on the rope.  It felt heavy, but it was moving more or less freely. Soon the first rung came into sight, the rope pushing a layer of old dead leaves and small twigs and beech nuts ahead of it and out over the edge, down to the ground.

            “Step back, Ethel,” he called down. “Who knows what might be resting up here on the rope.” 

            Ethel, who was standing right at the bottom of the tree, where the ladder would eventually come to rest, moved back about five feet, and was shortly glad that she had: Viktor began pulling harder on the rope, and soon, years of detritus was cascading from the floor of the treehouse as the ladder snaked out and over the edge. Swinging his left foot over and resting it on one rung of the ladder, Viktor slowly shifted his weight to that side and examined the loop of rope that evidently was still holding the ladder tightly to the floorboard.  He ran his left hand over each of the two rope loops, testing with his fingers for any frayed parts or other damage that might compromise the ladder.  The rungs themselves appeared undamaged, too, which amazed Viktor, since the ladder had lain on the treehouse floor for a number of years now. But, finding no damage, he brought his right leg onto the ladder, too. Then he slowly lowered himself down, step by step, testing each rung by bouncing slightly as he moved gradually downward.  If one of the steps did give way, at least he wasn’t so far above the ground. It was his pride more than his body that would be most hurt if he did fall at this point!  But the rope rungs held, and before he knew it, he was standing next to Ethel once more.

            “Heavens!” she exclaimed, a broad smile on her face. “I’m so excited!  It’s been six or seven years, Viktor!”  She grasped the ladder and put a foot on it.

            “Maybe I should go first?” Viktor said suddenly, taking hold of the side of the ladder.  “I mean, who knows what might be up there.  Maybe I should take a look?”  Besides, he felt that it was not quite proper for him to come up the ladder behind – and beneath Ethel – with her skirt billowing.  And what if she needed a boost to get up onto the floor?  If he went up first, he could take her hand and pull her up, but this way… he certainly couldn’t support or push her from beneath.

            But before Viktor had time to decide how to approach the situation, Ethel began making her way up the ladder, alternately lifting her skirt’s front hem and holding it in her right hand, which also gripped the side of the ladder, and then stepping up to the next rung, pulling herself upward with her left hand.  Watching her, Viktor knew he needn’t have worried that she’d need help.  She scampered up the rope. As she reached the very top rung, she deftly leaned over slightly and half gripped, half rested her hands on the second log in from the edge and lifted herself up and onto the floor.  A moment later, she was leaning over the edge, summoning Viktor.

            “It’s still perfect up here!  Lots of leaves, and probably some squirrel or mouse nests, but it’s perfect!  Come up and see!”

            He did.  Unused to climbing this sort of ladder, he felt clumsy.  Going down was easier than coming up! But Ethel didn’t seem to notice, and when he reached the top, it was she who tugged on his sleeve to pull him up onto the floor.  Not because he needed the assistance, but because she was so eager for him to see her favorite childhood spot.

*          *          *

            Hans, too, went out for a walk when he left the house abruptly, but he didn’t head for the forest.  Rather, as his father and uncle would do a bit later, he headed in the direction of the Walter farm, although he had no intention of stopping by to visit with his relatives. Enough family for one day, he thought to himself glumly. He wanted to be alone.

            Hans couldn’t pinpoint what it was, exactly, that had upset him in that evening’s conversation.  He had suddenly just grown so agitated that he couldn’t sit still.  It was all that about that stupid boy, Bruno.  Who was he, after all?  Why did people believe he’d gotten those soldiers healed?  They were all so gullible!  As if something could happen just because you want it enough.  That’s the way it seemed to him.  Why was that boy’s wanting more powerful than mine?  Almost unconsciously, he stopped for a moment and stretched out his left leg, his weak leg, as the doctor referred to it. That was the way he thought of it, too. Damn it! he thought. Damned weakness!

            He started walking again, glancing at the woods he was passing on his left, the Gassmann forest that was such an important part of his family’s history and identity.  But he didn’t feel the least bit drawn to go into their forest, which didn’t feel like it belonged to him at all in this moment. He didn’t understand it when his father or Ethel went on and on about sensing the divine when they were amongst the trees.  To him, trees were just trees, sources of future furniture.  He respected them as the means of his livelihood, but some kind of spiritual relationship to the trees?  Come on. So, he always felt left out, when the two of them got going on about God in the forest.  Isn’t it enough for God to be in the church?  Not that he ever felt God there, either. 

            Hans kept walking, looking almost resentfully at the trees – another place where he felt all on his own, excluded, even. Their trunks looked more solid and sturdy than his own, “weak” leg, which was beginning to object a bit to the fast pace of Hans’ walking.  Those trees are standing there mocking me.  “Don’t you hear us? Feel us?” they seemed to be asking him.  Or maybe they aren’t even bothering to ask meNot even bothering with me, Hans concluded now.  Just standing there, stock still, looking at me blankly, as if I’m not worth the effort.  They’ve given up on me, clearly. Turned their backs on me, in fact.  They prefer Father, or Ethel. Or Viktor: Now he claims to have found God in the forest, too. 

Hans shook his head in disgust and began walking faster, ignoring the signals from his leg to slow down. He passed the Walter farm without even noticing it, so full of thoughts was his mind.  More thoughts of being left out: out of the connection with the forest. Out of the family, out of being connected to God.  Do I even really want to be connected to God? He asked himself.  He wasn’t sure he did want that, but being without it left him feeling he’d somehow been passed over.  Why is that?  Why am I not good enough to feel God, too?  Not good enough to have my leg healed by God

Not that Hans had really ever prayed to God for his leg to be healed, or for anything else – at least not with all his heart. Before he left for basic training, he prayed with his family, first in church and then at home, on the morning of his departure, that he’d return safe from the war.  Which he had done, except for a broken tibia and fibula that left him with a persistent weakness in his leg. Plus a constant, if subtle, fear of taking a wrong step that would land him on the ground once again, with more broken bones and more pain. 

He was also left with everyone in the family looking at him as if he were now not fully himself any more. They saw him as broken and weak. Not that they said it, but he saw it in their eyes sometimes, when he stumbled – I just tripped, and not because of any problem with my leg, damn it! – or when he absently reached down to rub his lower leg after a tiring day of work.  It was as if they were looking out for him, expecting him to fall or stumble.  Because they see me as weak.  So do others in town. He was sure of it!  “Oh, that Hans,” he was sure they thought, and even said to each other behind his back. “Hans who couldn’t even make it through basic training without getting himself hurt and discharged.  Lucky thing he didn’t make it into war.  He’d never have made it back out.”  That’s what he imagined others were saying. And worse, even: Hans imagined that some even harbored suspicions that he’d contrived to break his leg on purpose, hoping to be sent home.  But I didn’t do that! he objected in his mind.  I fell when I was running over the iron barriers on the obstacle course. That soldier behind me fell on top of me, and my leg got wedged between the iron bars, and Bam! – both those bones snapped.  Sure, I took a wrong step, but I didn’t mean to.

All these thoughts and memories flooded Hans’ brain as he walked – sprinted, nearly – down the road, far past the Walter farm. His face grew flushed with a combination of anger and shame.  Damn that Bruno! Damn those healed soldiers! He stopped short of damning God, too, because he was beginning to fear, although he didn’t want to accept such a thought, that he himself was to blame for the fact that his leg still gave him pain.  I’m not worthy of being healed, a small and quiet voice inside him whispered, so softly that he couldn’t quite make out the words.  But he felt the emotion that accompanied these undecipherable words.  It was a painful and sad emotion, despair, even.  But the words that he could hear were quite clear: Ethel was right. I don’t believe God exists. Or at least I don’t believe enough. I really don’t. If He exists, why didn’t He save me from the pain of this broken leg, from this weakness?

It was almost fully dark by the time Hans turned around and began making his way back home.  Only a faint pink still hung above the edges of the horizon. As he moved steadily closer to it, it grew more and more subtle and diffuse, like a beautiful flower fading in a vase, until its bright petals turned dark with decay. All Hans could see before him, at the horizon, where his family home lay, were his own weakness and his own lack of belief in God. 

If only Hans had been able to jump forward to 1949 and sit with his as-yet-unborn niece Lina that day in June!  She might have shared with him her idea that was just beginning to blossom, the one about how maybe there really was a purpose to our pain and suffering.  About how God has a plan for each of us, and about how maybe He intends each of us to work with him to discover that plan and our purpose in life.  And to carry it out, by striving together with Him.  But Hans was still in 1921, certain that a God he didn’t even really believe in had cursed and abandoned him in his pain and weakness.  Did God have a plan for Hans?  Of course He did, Lina would say later.  But Hans was not thinking along these lines and could not yet have the benefit of discussing this with his niece.  There would be time for that.  But not yet.  In the meantime, here’s a question that was floating beneath Hans’ consciousness now: Can God help us even if we don’t believe in Him?  Does He?

Hans was now coming up on the Walter Farm.  He saw the windows lit by lamp light, and made the sudden decision to stop in and ask Ewald the question that had been taking shape in his mind as he walked.

*          *          *

As Hans was walking briskly further and further from the Gassmann homestead, Viktor and Ethel were settling themselves in the treehouse, their backs against the beech tree’s trunk.

            “Wasn’t I right?” Ethel asked, smoothing her skirt absently.  “Isn’t it just the most perfect place?”  She gave Viktor a quick glance, then focused her gaze on the wall of the treehouse and the twigs that served as its roof. She examined each part of the structure, trying to determine what had changed since she had last sat in this spot. On the one hand, she wanted to sit still, peacefully. On the other, she felt too much happiness to do that.  It was as if every cell in her body were dancing. 

            “It’s like being with an old friend!” she continued, without giving Viktor time to answer. In fact, he opened his mouth to reply, but then Ethel piped up again, turning her gaze back to the floor and walls and roof. So, he just sat there silently, smiling a bit in amusement as he took in her excitement.

            “Has it changed much?” he managed to ask finally.

            Ethel turned to him, her face bright and a little flushed. Then she took in a big breath, tipped her head back to rest against the tree’s trunk, and, eyes closed, let the breath back out in a contented sigh.  “Well, yes – I mean, there are all the leaves…”

            “And definitely a mouse nest, over there,” Viktor put in, pointing to the far corner (although “far” was relative: The whole treehouse measured not more than ten feet across).

            Ethel nodded and laughed. “Oh, yes, that’s different.  It was always very clean, back when Hans and I were up here all the time.  I had a little broom I brought out here to sweep the floor with!”

            Viktor smiled, too, and waited for Ethel to continue.

            “And there are some gaps in the thatch, of course. That’s to be expected.”

            “But aside from that?  Is it different?”

            Ethel closed her eyes again for a few seconds. Then she shook her head. “No.  It has the same feeling.” She paused. “No, that’s not quite true.  I guess what I mean, is that I feel the same kind of peace here as I used to. It makes me so happy to be here!”

            “But what, then? What’s changed?”

            Ethel laid her palm atop one of the logs that formed the floor and then turned to Viktor.  “The tree has missed us,” she said, holding her hand still, as if to sense something in the wood. Then she turned to face the tree trunk and, kneeling, laid one cheek against its smooth bark. She wrapped her arms as far around the trunk as they would go.  “I’m sorry,” she whispered to the beech.  “Sorry I’ve been gone so long.”

            Viktor turned, too, sideways, so that his shoulder leaned against the tree and he was looking at Ethel.  She was facing away from him, so that he saw only the back of her head and the mass of light curls that were beginning to gleam in the early evening light.  He welcomed this chance to study her. His eyes took in her shoulders and back, the way her apron the ties hugged her waist, and her gathered skirt flowed out beneath the apron.  He was gazing at her arms, their graceful curve visible beneath the white sleeves of her dress, when she turned her head back toward him and sat down, cross-legged and facing him.

            “Maybe you think I’m silly?” she asked him.  “Hugging the tree?”  Her look told him that although she was hoping he did not find her silly, she was also prepared to stand her ground, and defend her love of this particular tree.

            “Not at all,” he told her, quite honestly.  True, he hadn’t really given any thought to this question of whether or not she was silly for hugging a tree.

            “Really?” she asked.

            “Now, well, no, I don’t think you silly.  To tell the whole truth, I was distracted.”

            “By what?” she asked, her brows knitting in curiosity.

            “By how beautiful you are,” he told her.

            Ethel looked down and straightened the folds in her apron between her fingers.  “Well, then, maybe I shouldn’t have mentioned hugging the tree at all, if you didn’t notice!”  She looked up at him, and he saw that she was smiling.

            “I noticed, but I didn’t take note.  Of that in particular.  Just of you.”

            Now she was smiling even more. “All right.  We can leave it at that.”

            “Or maybe not?” Viktor asked her, turning so that he was once again leaning back against the tree trunk and looking out through the gaps in the wall.

            Ethel wasn’t sure quite what he was getting at, but she felt her cheeks flush fully.  Her heart had picked up its pace, too, but she was at a loss. She had no idea what to say.  Maybe we shouldn’t be up here together?  She sat up a little more stiffly now.

            Sensing Ethel’s confusion, Viktor sought to reassure her.  He adopted a cross-legged pose across from her, and although he wanted to take her hand, he crossed his hands in his lap instead.  Then, meeting her gaze, he said, “Don’t be worried.  I’m sorry. All I meant is that I want to tell you that you’re so beautiful.  And that I feel honored that you’ve shown me this favorite spot of yours.  That you’re sitting here with me.”

            Unable to keep looking him in the eye, Ethel shrugged. “You asked me to see it,” she said quietly.

            “True.” He paused, fighting the urge to take her hand in his. “Would you have brought anyone here? Just anyone, I mean?”

            She shook her head and looked back up.  “Oh, no. Not at all.  Only you!” Then she cast her gaze back down at her lap again, her fingers worrying her apron.

            Now Viktor did take hold of her hand, very gently. He cradled it in both of his, striving to take in all of its qualities as it lay there.  “That makes me very happy,” he told her, quietly, just loudly enough for her to hear.  Releasing first her palm and then her fingers, he allowed her hand to come to rest once more on her apron. Then he stretched out his legs and leaned back against the tree again, his hands clasped in his lap.  Now it was his turn to take in a deep breath and let it out.

            Ethel shifted her position, too. The two sat that way, their shoulders nearly touching, and the old, old beech supporting them both. She eventually spoke.

            “It makes me happy, too, Viktor.  I wouldn’t bring anyone else here. I only want to share it with you.”

            In this way, the treehouse gained a new significance for Ethel: The revisited joy of a personal and sacred space now expanded to embrace the new joy of a young woman sharing this space with a man she was coming to love, and whose love for her was solid enough to embrace even the image of his beloved hugging of a tree.

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

         

     

Above the River, Chapter 19

Chapter 19

September, 1921

Gassmann homestead

            It was mid-September now, and Ethel was working on the quilt for the Kropps’ daughter Hannah.  She made use of several bursts of creative energy to design the top of the quilt using the fabrics she’d purchased in Bockhorn. She’d picked out the fabric with one arrangement in mind, but when she actually got down to sketching out the design on paper, she noticed that her original ideas didn’t feel right any more. 

This didn’t bother Ethel at all: From the earliest days of creating her “pictures”, she had always allowed herself to be guided by her heart in arranging the fabrics.  Naturally, as a two-year-old, she never sat down beforehand to plan how she would put the fabric scraps together.  Nor did she ever start with a completed vision of how any one “picture” would turn out.  When she began making quilts on commission for people outside the family, she went through the process of trying to pin down how it was that she did what she did. 

The first time she took an order, for a friend of Renate’s mother, she sat down at the kitchen table with a pencil and a piece of brown paper left over from something her mother had bought in town, to work out a design.  She knew what colors the woman who was buying the quilt wanted, but the actual design was up to Ethel.  That time with the paper and pencil was perhaps the most frustrating afternoon Ethel had ever experienced.  When she finally got up from the table and walked agitatedly out into the yard, leaving behind the pencil and the paper on which she’d drawn nothing at all, Renate followed her outside.  She’d never seen Ethel like this.

“What’s wrong?” Renate asked her.

“Oh, Mama,” Ethel replied, in tears now, “I took on this order, but now I don’t know what to do.  I just can’t figure it out.”

Renate put her arms around her daughter and rubbed her tense shoulders.  “Figure what out, Sweetheart?”

“What the design should be,” Ethel told her, lifting her head off her mother’s shoulder. She began chewing a fingernail absently, as she stared off across the yard.

Renate looked off toward the end of the yard, too, and the two of them stood silently that way for a minute or two. Then Renate turned back to her daughter.

“You know, Ethel,” she said, “in all the years you’ve been doing your ‘pictures’, I never once saw you sit down with a pencil and paper to plan a single one of them.”

Ethel turned her gaze to her mother, and her lips parted slightly in surprise as she considered Renate’s words.  She nodded thoughtfully. “That’s true, Mama.  Very true.”

“You know something else, Ethel?”

Ethel shook her head. “What?”

“Well,” Renate went on, “I’ve always wondered how you decide what to do with the fabric pieces.  The way it always happened was, you came and asked me for the scraps, I gave them to you, and then you sat with them in a pile on the floor.  You piled them up, moved some here, some there. Sometimes – pretty often, in fact – you got up and went and did something else for a while. Then came back and sat back down on the floor. And all of a sudden, you put the pieces in some kind of order. Then you sat up and looked at them, tipping your head this way and that. Sometimes you stood up and went and looked at them from another angle. And that was that.  It was all clear to you.  Then the sewing could begin.”

“You mean, then Hans could start sewing them!” Ethel laughed, and Renate joined in, remembering little Hans sewing, and littler Ethel supervising.

“That’s right! That’s the way you’ve always done it. Always.  Never any paper and pencil drawings.  It’s always been like some whirlwind of a wonderful idea would strike you, and then you put everything together.”

“You’re right, Mama,” Ether agreed, her head tipped to the side, as if she was running through in her mind all the countless times when she created her “pictures”.

“So why did you start with a pencil and paper this time?” Renate asked her.

Ethel gazed back across the yard, into the forest as she thought about that.

“Well,” she answered finally, looking at her mother once more, “maybe I want to make sure I do it right.”

“What does right mean?” Renate asked her.  But, before Ethel could reply, she added, “And when did you ever care so much about doing things right?” She posed the question with a smile, so that Ethel knew it was not a reproach. Both of them immediately burst into laughter.

“You have a point,” Ethel said.  Then she paused.  “But I want them to like it when I’m done.  That’s what it is, Mama.”

“And you think that they can only like it if you set to making this quilt in an entirely different way than the way you’ve done it your whole life?” Again, Renate’s tone was light, although the question was quite serious.

Ethel sighed. “Well, that’s the way it seemed to me this morning.”

“And how does it seem to you now?”

Ethel looked again into the forest, and it seemed as if she found an answer there in the way the light danced and played on the leaves and the trunks and fell in ever-shifting streams onto the forest floor.

“Now it seems to me that I need to make the quilt the way I’ve always made the things here at home.”

“Which is how?” Renate asked, encouraging her.

“That’s something I never understood until we started talking about it.  Now I can see that I’ve only ever done a ‘picture’ when I felt something inside me urging me to do it. I always feel that it’s the right time. I feel light and happy and full of energy, almost a kind of vibration.  And then I do it. And then it works.”

Renate nodded. “I understand that.”

“You do?” Ethel looked at her in surprise.  It made Renate feel sad. Evidently she had so suppressed her own creative impulses that her very own daughter didn’t know they ever flowed through her in the very same way Ethel was now describing.

“Yes. Do you recall me telling you how I made fairy houses, back when I was your age?”

Ethel nodded.

“And what you just told me, about how you go about your ‘pictures’ – that’s exactly how I always did things.  Only in a moment of inspiration.”

“Yes!” Ethel told her. “That’s exactly it. Inspiration.”

Renate expressed her next thought a little hesitantly.  “Maybe even divine inspiration…”

“I think so, too,” Ethel responded quietly.  They both smiled, and they hugged each other. They were suddenly aware of a connection between them that had always been there, but which had gone unacknowledged and unspoken until this moment.

“Just make this quilt the way you always do, Ethel,” Renate told her. “Forget who it’s for. Folks don’t love your quilts because you listen to some instructions from them. Just allow the inspiration to come, and then start.  That’s what touches everyone in your ‘pictures’. There’s life in them.  Energy.  You can feel it.  And I think it comes from the way you make them.  Trust that, Sweetheart.”

Ethel nodded.  Then the two women went back into the house.  Ethel returned the paper to the shelf atop the other pieces of wrapping paper, laid the pencil alongside the stack, and then went out for a walk in the forest. Over the next few days, she waited until she got the strong feeling to come back to the fabric pieces she was working with.  When she was ready, then she started.  She worked as long as she felt the joy for her task flowing through her. And when it began to feel heavy, instead of light, she set the quilt aside and came back to it the next day, when she once again felt drawn to pick up the fabric. The quilt that resulted was striking. Beautiful, yes, but with a beauty infused with joy and lightness of touch.

This is why, when Viktor asked her out in the yard that day about the quilt’s design, Ethel replied that she might tell him once she’d figured it out.  She was just being completely honest – although it also felt nice to tease him a bit. Her answer simply reflected the way she’d grown accustomed to working on her commissions, since that day several years earlier.

The quilt for nine-year-old Hannah ended up being a collection of appliquéd butterflies and flowers of various sizes that were fashioned from the array of fabrics Ethel had bought in Bockhorn.  She stitched each flower and butterfly onto a background square of plain muslin. Then she embroidered curling antennae rising from the butterflies’ heads, and delicate leaves and stems to support the flowers. Next she arranged the squares into a diamond pattern. But what was unusual here was the mix of sizes of the squares themselves, and the fact that in some places, Ethel even overlapped a smaller square slightly onto a larger one.  The flowers and butterflies themselves were pointing every which way on the squares. The result was that when you looked at the quilt, it was as if you were gazing at a garden of flowers, with a profusion of butterflies flitting about it. 

Ethel was very pleased with the way the quilt turned out, and she was eager to deliver it and see Hannah’s response.  So, she arranged with the Kropps to deliver it to them on the upcoming Sunday, in the early afternoon. It was a fine day, and, as it turned out, Viktor offered to walk with her to Bockhorn:  Mr. Kropp wanted to confer about having a wardrobe made for Hannah’s room, and Sunday was convenient for this discussion, too.  (By this time, Hans and Ulrich felt comfortable having Viktor go on his own, for the preliminary talk about the project. After that, the three of them would sit down together to decide what price to charge and how long it would take them to construct the new piece of furniture.)

Thus it happened that Ethel found herself walking along the road to Bockhorn with Viktor.  They had never spent more than a few minutes alone, although they, naturally, saw each other every day at meals, and exchanged greetings, and had small snippets of conversation throughout the day.  So, each of them was a bit nervous:  Both wanted to talk, but neither knew quite how to get started.  It struck Ethel that this was somewhat like the way she worked on quilts.  She was just going to have to honor her impulse to start talking and see where the conversation went. 

“Are you curious about the quilt?” she asked him, not turning to look at him at first, but he could see the slight smile on her lips as he looked at her profile.

He nodded, then realized that she probably couldn’t see that, so he said, “Yes, I am!  Especially since you’ve been keeping me in suspense about it since you came home with the cloth that day.”

Now she turned to look at him.  “I thought it would be nicer if it was a surprise. Instead of me trying to describe it to you.”

“I don’t always like surprises. Not all surprises are pleasant,” he replied.  Then, seeing her smile fade, he quickly added, “But I know this one will be!”

Ethel raised her eyebrows and tipped her head to one side. “Now, Mr. Bunke, how can you possibly know that?”

“Well, Miss Gassmann,” he replied, bowing to her slightly as they walked along, “because I have had the pleasure of looking at your quilting every day since I’ve been here. Drawing a logical conclusion from that, I believe your quilts must always be a pleasant surprise.”

Ethel’s cheeks colored, and she looked back down at the road as she walked.

“Well, I hope you’re right!” she told him.

“Are you going to give me a hint?” Viktor inquired.

“About what?” In Ethel’s voice, he heard the ringing quality he was so fond of, and he could hear her smile, too.

“The pattern, of course!”

“Oh.  No.  Not at all!” Now she laughed in a light and mischievous way.

Viktor frowned in feigned disappointment. “I don’t think that’s at all fair.”

“Whysoever not?” Ethel demanded, frowning too, now, but smiling still.

“Because I’ve already been waiting for weeks!” he announced in a jokingly petulant tone.

“And what about poor little Hannah Kropp?” Ethel exclaimed. “She’s been waiting even longer than you!  It’s only fair for her to see it before you.”

Then Viktor suddenly reached out a hand and touched the corner of the paper, where Ethel had folded it around the quilt.  “Not even a peek?” he asked playfully.

“No!  No peeks!” she cried, laughing again.  And she stepped nimbly away from him, moving the package out of reach. But as she did so, his hand brushed her elbow, and she was reminded of how he’d touched her arm in the yard that day, when they first discussed the quilt. 

Viktor sighed and acquiesced. “Fair enough.”

Ethel laughed.  She remembered how he’d said that to her that day, too.  Not that she’d ever really forgotten it.  His words and his tone had stayed with her, and she recalled them often. 

The rest of the walk passed in talk of life on the Gassmann homestead – the forest, the carpentry projects currently under way, other details of little importance.  They were both content with this, overjoyed to simply be in each other’s presence.

Now, Viktor had spent nearly his whole life not allowing himself to imagine what was possible, or what he might really want, if anything were possible. He never took the step of actually believing he could attain what he wanted, deep in his heart. Ethel, on the other hand, lived so much in a realm connected to her deepest heart’s desires, that it never occurred to her to think – to think – that she might be unable to achieve them.  Perhaps she had more of her mother in her than was visible on the surface: Both women believed firmly that God meant for all of His children to be happy. 

The difference between them was that Renate’s belief resided mostly in her head: Once she truly felt this belief in her heart, and came to trust it, many years earlier, she for some reason handed over to her mind the task of making everyone’s happiness a reality.  As we’ve seen, her granddaughter, Lina, was convinced that, once we believed in and accepted God’s plan for us, He would guide us in our thoughts and actions, and our happiness would manifest. Renate, on the other hand, was convinced that we ourselves had to figure out how to make God’s will come to pass.  Or rather, that she had to figure it out. Thus, Renate grew from a girl who followed inspiration’s fluid path into a woman who became a slave to pencil and diagrams, even if the sketching took place in her mind and not on actual paper.

Ethel, though, rarely seemed take direction from a rational thought process. The way she approached her first quilt commission shows that she was not a “sketch it out and then make it” kind of person. From the time she pestered her mother for her first scrap of cloth for a “picture”, and probably even before that, Ethel allowed her intuitive vision to guide her – with the exception of that very first quilt commission.  She moved effortlessly from creative spark to creation, without stopping to plan first.

What was it that Ethel tapped into when she was working on her ‘pictures’?  Renate often wondered about that.  She knew that when she herself made the fairy houses, she felt that some unseen force and voice were guiding her.  Not that she always heeded what she heard or felt: Even as a youngster, Renate never gave herself over fully to these promptings.  The final decision was hers, after all! Even as a young mother, though, she could still remember days when other helpful voices – from where? The spirit world? Or from her own imagination? – suggested this or that idea to her.

Thinking back to Ethel’s childhood now, Renate remembered that Ethel, too, had always had some connection to spirit presences. There were times when Renate noticed the infant Ethel staring at a corner of the kitchen, or, if they were in the yard, into the depths of the woods, transfixed by something entirely invisible to her mother.  What are you looking at?  Renate wondered, in the long months before her daughter could express herself in words.  Sometimes she asked the question out loud, and Ethel occasionally pointed to where she was directing her gaze. Then she looked to Renate, as if it was obvious what was there to be regarded. But once Ethel began to talk, Renate would ask her in these moments, “What are you looking at, Ethel?” And the little girl would reply, “That,” or, “Her,” or, eventually, “That man”.  One day, three-year-old Ethel, sitting on the floor next to her mother’s rocking chair, even said, “Mama, she can play, too?”  When Renate, puzzled, asked, “Who?” Ethel pointed to the corner and replied, “Her.”  Questioning Ethel, Renate learned that this girl was blond and had a pretty blue dress on.  “Of course,” Renate said, and this seemed to satisfy Ethel, who spent the rest of the afternoon laying out scraps of fabric in two piles: one for herself and one, presumably, for the girl in the blue dress.

This was only the first of many such instances.  There were “angels” in the kitchen and bedroom, “fairies” in the forest, “a grampa” out in the workshop.  Renate never contradicted Ethel. Rather, she thought back to her own childhood interactions with fairies in the forest.  Of course, she had more sensed these spirits than seen them clearly.  She didn’t necessarily want to encourage Ethel in these kinds of imaginative flights: What if she told Renate’s parents and they chastised her the way they had Renate? So, she never asked Ethel to describe these spirits or the way they appeared to her.  But neither did she deign to tell Ethel that it was impossible for her to be seeing what she said she was.  Because Renate herself knew it was possible.  On some level, it even pleased her that Ethel, too, was in contact with the spirit world. Thus, Ethel grew up seeing these spirits from the other world, from beyond the door that, for most humans, remained closed and opaque. Although she had not the slightest doubt that these spirits truly existed, she also came to feel a bit isolated in her knowledge, precisely because her mother never expressed interest in this dimension that was so vivid and powerful to Ethel.  And Ethel felt a very strong connection to these visitors who seemed to appear only to her.

If Renate had asked her to describe what she saw, she would have explained that she saw them as full of light, but with clearly-defined features.  They looked like flesh-and-blood humans (except the fairies, which looked like, well, fairies!), just slightly cloud-like.  Ethel felt their energy clearly, too.  They were, almost without exception, light in mood, happy, jolly, playful. Only on a handful of occasions did she felt any unease in with one of them.  When this happened, she would simply wave her hand and say, firmly, “Have that one go away!”  And it would vanish.  Thus, this realm of spirit beings was a friendly and comforting space where Ethel could pass the time and move back to the fully human sphere refreshed and happy and full of light herself.  Renate noticed that Ethel always emerged from the woods in such a state, and so, she decided that there was no need to inquire further, to mention it to Ulrich, or to worry. 

Since Ethel moved so freely into and out of communication with these spirit beings, it didn’t surprise her the first time Hans expressed his belief that if he wasn’t around to keep Ethel tethered to the ground, she would surely just float up into the sky. That’s how ethereal she was.  Everyone in the family saw Ethel this way, but only Renate understood that this quality likely resulted from Ethel’s connection to the other world. 

But what about Hans?  Did he really not know that his sister was in communication with these beings?  After all, they spent all those hours together in the forest, where the fairies and forest spirits abounded.  But Ethel never mentioned them to Hans in a direst fashion.  She’d say something like, “Let’s make this corner of the treehouse nice for the fairies to rest in,” or, “The forest sprites must string their hammocks from these twigs”.  He always took her remarks as pure fancy, probably because he, for all that he loved the forest, was a very pencil and diagram kind of boy.  It never occurred to him to ask Ethel whether she believed in the fairies she chattered about, because it never occurred to him that they could actually exist.  He was occupied with how many logs they’d need to form the floor of their treehouse. And Ethel, sensing this difference between herself and her brother, just felt – she didn’t decide it consciously, but rather just felt – that there was no need to share this with him.

As Ethel got older, she retained her ability to see and communicate with spirit beings. At the same time, her intuition grew and sharpened, so that she could effortlessly “pick up” what those around her were feeling.  Most times, she just knew what they felt, but on occasion, she also felt what they, themselves, felt in their bodies.  This was strange for her at first. Take the time her head began aching a minute before Hans announced to their mother that his head was hurting.  But very soon, Ethel got to the point where she was able to realize that she was feeling, say, Hans’ headache, instead of having one herself. On these occasions, she simply shook her head and waved her hand, and the sensation vanished, just as unwanted spirits fled when she asked for them to be gone.  So, she had the benefit of being able to understand those around her deeply, but without becoming mired in their physical pain, or overwhelmed by any upsetting emotions or energy. 

Now, if both Ethel and Viktor – and even Renate, it seems, who asserted as much to Viktor in his early days on the Gassmann homestead – “picked up” things from others, they nonetheless all made different use of this knowledge.  We know that Renate utilized everything she noticed in her “herding” efforts: She’d get a thought about what would make someone happy, and then go through intense mental planning and diagramming, so that she could put her thought into action.   This process kept her trapped in her head, where entire futures of her own construction would play out for her. 

Viktor, as we’ve seen, tended to use his insights to positively influence his interactions with potential clients, and with employers, too. In his calculation about how best to guide things, he resembled Renate. The distinction between them was, that his focus had always been on herding situations in directions that would be to his own advantage. His approach differed somewhat when it came to the cabinet making.  In this case, naturally, far more pencil and paper sketching was involved. The germs of his creative designs seemed to arise from deep within him, spontaneously, in a way very similar to what happened when Ethel conceives a design in a flurry of inspiration. But Viktor always immediately committed his creative visions to paper, thereby shifting them concretely into the realm of precise measurements and woodworking.  He always had a pencil in his shirt pocket, and a notebook in his back pants pocket.  It was as if he would be in contact with some sort of other-worldly inspiration, but also felt the need to bring it firmly down to earth as soon as possible.

Ethel, on the other hand, very rarely made any conscious use of the information she gained from others intuitively. She had no interest in utilizing what she gleaned to influence those around her. Rather, what she “picked up” was simply part of the landscape of her world, like the flowers, and trees, and butterflies.  All of it was something to notice, something which might make its way into a quilt project or an embroidery pattern.  But, as we’ve seen, this always happened quite naturally, without conscious planning or decision-making.  So, while Viktor translated his intuitive design ideas first into lines on paper and then into the physical form of wood, Ethel also translated intuitive visions – into fabric – but without committing the design to paper and thereby solidifying it.  To do that would have felt to her too constraining, too much like a contractual agreement she wasn’t prepared to enter into.  She – although she’d never expressed this to herself in words – knew that she had to be free to create as she was moved to do in each moment. 

It was this way of creating that kept Ethel from being tied down to either her body or the physical material she worked with.  This approach resulted from that strong and fluid connection to the spiritual world – and its energy and spirits – that she’d possessed from her earliest childhood. It was not her physical body that formed the core of her existence, and certainly not her thinking mind.  Rather, her essence was this spiritual energy that flowed through her body, energy that also prevented her from becoming weighed down by the physical.  This was what produced the impression that she was so light and untethered to the ground that she might very well float away.

            At the Kropps’ house, Hannah ran out into the yard as soon as she glimpsed Ethel approaching. 

            “May I take it into the house?” she asked, excited, reaching her hands out for the paper-wrapped quilt Ethel was carrying beneath her arm. 

            “Of course!” Ethel replied and held the package out for Hannah to take.  She smiled at the little girl’s ebullience, and noticed how light her own heart had grown in the course of the walk. Recognizing Viktor as the source of the joy she was feeling, she turned to look at him, and their eyes met.  He held her gaze for a few seconds, during which time a smile came to his face, too.  Then he glanced toward the door, which Mrs. Kropp was already holding open for them. After nodding to Ethel to indicate this to her, Viktor also placed his hand lightly on her back, to signal that she should go ahead of him.

            Hannah ran and placed the bundle on the dining room table, but she patiently waited until everyone else filed in before hurriedly untying the string which held the folded paper in place.  Having removed the string, she turned the paper back to reveal the part of the quilt that was visible without unfolding the whole thing. She clapped her hands in delight, bobbing up and down on her tiptoes. Then, silently, she touched the quilt, running her fingertips over the appliqued butterflies and flowers and bending down to get a closer look at the stitching of the quilting that secured the front to the back, with the batting in between the two layers.  Finally, she impetuously ran over to Ethel and threw her arms around her.

            “It’s so lovely, Miss Gassmann,” she cried.  “I just love it!”

            “But you haven’t even seen all of it!” Ethel joked, giving the girl a hug.  “Shall we take it into your room and see how it looks on your bed?”

            Without answering, Hannah snatched the quilt off the table and walked quickly into her room, unfolding the quilt as she went, but being careful not to allow any part of it to drag on the floor.  Half a minute passed, and Hannah’s bed was transformed into a veritable garden, rendered in fabric and stitching. Hannah immediately flopped down on top of the quilt, leaning this way and that to study its various elements.  Her mother, too, sat down to admire and study Ethel’s work.

            “What a beautiful, beautiful quilt,” Mrs. Kropp said finally, looking up at Ethel. She continued to rest her hand on one of the butterflies as she spoke, even stroking it lightly, as if she were touching actual butterfly wings and delighting in their fuzzy softness.  “I don’t know how you came up with this!  It’s like it’s from another world, somehow.  I can’t put it into words.  But it is simply amazing.  Thank you.”

            Even Mr. Kropp, who entered the room at this point, intending to corral Viktor so they could discuss the wardrobe, was struck by the quilt.  “I say!” he told Ethel. “Missus is right.  I know nothing about sewing and quilts, but even I enjoy something beautiful, and this is that!”

            Ethel felt particularly pleased with Mr. Kropp’s praise, given that he was clearly a man who most appreciated order, while her quilt was not at all traditionally arranged.  And then there was Viktor.  Does he like it? she wondered.  She turned to face Mr. Kropp and found Viktor staring at the quilt, his eyes moving from this to that part of it.  His lips were slightly parted, as if he was surprised at something that he was now trying to figure out.  When he shifted his gaze to her, she saw in his eyes a tenderness that surprised her.  He smiled, then looked to Mr. Kropp, as if embarrassed that she saw what he was feeling.

            Indeed, Viktor was a bit embarrassed, since Ethel’s glance had caught him off guard. But, even more than Ethel’s glance, her quilt had caught him off guard.  He had, of course, expected that it would be lovely, given the examples he’d seen of Ethel’s handiwork in his own room and elsewhere in the Gassmann house. But there really was, as Mrs. Kropp had put it, some quality of the other world to it.  It possessed an ethereal beauty, as if it somehow glowed with the sunshine of a garden late in the day, when the light was growing golden and long.  How? he wondered.  How in the world did she do that?  

In that moment, as he studied the quilt – longing to touch it, too, like Hannah and Mrs. Kropp, to run his fingers over the stitching that Ethel’s hands had made – something rose up in his chest, swelling and moving then into his throat.  He knew, understood – sensed – how she had done it:  It was her connection to the divine, the heavenly, to whatever it was he had learned to feel in the forest.  This realization surprised him, but he felt in his heart that his thought was correct.  There was a bit of the other world in the quilt because there was a lot of that other, divine, heavenly world in Ethel herself, and she had somehow allowed it to flow through her into the quilt as she was creating it.  When you looked at the quilt, you could feel the divine radiating from the fabric. It occurred to Viktor now that this was why he so loved going to sleep and waking up beneath the quilt she had made for his bed: She had put the heavenly into it, too, and he could feel it.  But, he recognized now, the heavenliness they were all sensing in this new quilt wasn’t the simple divine heavenliness (as if the divine could ever be simple!) Rather, it was the heavenly combined with Ethel’s contribution.  It was as if she had somehow collaborated with God to manifest God’s love in the physical, material form of the quilt.  He had worked through her, and together they had made the quilt.

Viktor was standing there, coming to a hazy understanding of this, so when he saw that Ethel was looking at him, he was caught unawares.  He wondered whether she could tell how he felt about the quilt – and about her.  In the moments when he was standing there, studying the quilt and coming to his realization, feeling all the joy and love she had put into the quilt, he understood that he had fallen in love with her, that he wanted to spend the rest of his life with her. 

This wasn’t a completely new feeling for him.  It had been coming into his awareness more and more strongly in recent weeks. It wasn’t the feeling or the awareness of it that surprised him. What caught him unawares was the thought – no, the conviction, really – that came up, quite firmly, as he looked at the quilt.  This is possible. Not Why would you think this could happen for you? But Yes.  You can be each other’s future. This is what he wondered whether she had seen in his eyes.

But Viktor was saved from further reflections on this topic, and from Ethel’s gaze, by Mr. Kropp, who suggested that the two men discuss details of the wardrobe he wanted to have built.  They returned to the dining room – whence Mrs.  Kropp somehow magically appeared, although a minute earlier she’d been in Hannah’s bedroom – to offer everyone coffee and cake.  Setting down a cup and saucer for Ethel, she also handed the young woman an envelope that contained payment for the quilt.  “Although I don’t know how we can ever give you enough for such a work of art. A real work of art!” she exclaimed, nearly as overcome with joy at the quilt as Hannah.

Ethel answered Hannah’s questions about how she’d designed the quilt, and made small talk with Mrs. Kropp. But she was also listening to the men’s conversation with one ear.

“I had the idea,” Viktor was telling Mr. Kropp, “when I saw the quilt Miss Gassmann made for your daughter, that some carving on the wardrobe might be nice.” He gestured at the sideboard that stood on the back wall, behind where the Kropps were sitting.  “Maybe some flowers and butterflies.”

“So my whole room will be like a garden!” Hannah piped up, nodding. “Papa, I’d like that.”

“Not to copy the quilt design exactly,” Viktor added quickly, with a glance at Ethel. “That would be impossible.” Please don’t let her think I want to copy her ‘pictures’! “But Something with the same theme. Do you see?”

Ethel nodded, even though he wasn’t asking her, at least not directly.  “I see,” she told them.  “A garden in fabric, and a garden in wood.”

“Inspired by the garden in fabric,” Viktor added, trying to sound as measured as possible, and not allowing himself to look over at Ethel, although he did smile.

Mrs. Kropp and Hannah voiced their approval for this plan, and Mr. Kropp agreed.  He’d already seen what Viktor could do with carving, and he felt that having another piece in the household would show his good taste, even if their guests didn’t ever see the future wardrobe, hidden away as it would be in his daughter’s bedroom. But still…  And so, the deal was made.

*          *          *

            “How nice that the Kropps liked your idea for the carving on the wardrobe,” Ethel said to Viktor on the walk home.  She spoke without looking at him. Instead, she directed her eyes to the dirt road before her and watched the toe of each of her shoes in turn poke out from beneath her skirt as she took each step forward.  “I’m sure it will be beautiful.”

            “I hope so,” Viktor began, and then paused.  He was gathering the nerve to speak about what was on his mind, and in his heart.  They walked in silence for a bit, and then he continued.  “Your quilt inspired that idea.  You inspired me.”

            Ethel smiled and gave him a quick glance, but said nothing.

            Viktor went on.  “I couldn’t believe how beautiful your quilt was,” he said. Then, fearing she might misunderstand him, he quickly added, “No, what I mean is… I could believe it. I expected it would be. You made the quilt on my bed, after all.” He paused again, stealing a look at her, but she was looking at the road ahead of her. Was that a little smile?

            “But what I mean is… it’s even more beautiful than I could have imagined.”  Now, when he looked over at her again, he saw a smile come to her lips, and a bit of color to her cheeks, too. She turned to face him.

            “Really?” she asked softly, knitting her brows, as if she actually did doubt what he said.

            “Really.” He nodded emphatically, his eyes studying her face. “It’s as if…” and here he looked at the sky, searching for a way to put what he was feeling into words.  “As if you somehow took heaven into you and turned it into a quilt.”  Now he was the one with some color in his cheeks.  Heaven’s sake, how could I have said that??

            “Oh, my,” Ethel responded.  “No one has ever said anything like that about my quilts. Or about anything I’ve made.”

            “Maybe they don’t know what something heavenly feels like.  Or looks like.  I can’t explain it.”

            But Ethel wasn’t going to let him off that easy. Besides, she really did want to hear what he meant.  And it wasn’t just that she wanted to hear his words of praise, although that was certainly pleasant, too. 

            “Would you please try?” she asked him gently. He could tell she was genuinely wanting to know what he meant.

            “All right.”  But he looked off into the distance again, thinking, for so long, that Ethel finally gave him a nudge with her elbow.

            “Maybe sometime this century?” she teased, smiling again.

Viktor laughed.  “All right,” he repeated. “I can only say that what I felt when I looked at your quilt back there… that I felt almost the same way inside as I feel when I’m out in the forest with your father, and we’re both very still, amongst the trees.  The’ heavenly’, the way your father put it. I feel that in the forest, as if the divine is right there, radiating out from the trees.”  He paused and looked at her, to see whether she might be giving him a skeptical look.  She wasn’t, so he went on. “I felt something very much the same coming from your quilt.”  Now he didn’t even dare to turn to look at her. 

For Ethel’s part, she was dumbstruck by what he said.  Shocked, first of all, that he felt that coming from something she had made.  Could that be true?  It never seemed that way to her. 

“I don’t know…” she said, speaking slowly, thoughtfully.  “I just make what I make.  I get a feeling about making it, and I follow the feeling, and…”

“You see?” he asked, animated, turning fully to face her now.  “That’s what I mean.  There’s some sort of feeling there, that you put into it, or that somehow moves from you to it.”

Ethel looked back at the ground. “Maybe that’s possible.  But it’s nothing I mean to do.”

“But where do you think that ‘something’ – the ‘something’ that went into the quilt – what do you think it is?  Where does it come from?”  He stopped, fearing once again that he’d put his foot in his mouth and insulted her.  “I mean… I’m not trying to say that you don’t have the heavenly in you yourself. You do!”

Here Ethel burst out laughing, that tinkling, ringing laugh that Viktor loved so much.

“I’m not sure about that… But it’s all right. I think I know what you mean.  I can say that when I work, whether it’s on a quilt, or some embroidery, or even the cheese or bread… I feel that I am being helped somehow.  I call to mind what it is I want to do, and then I begin to feel some tingling in my body, or just my hands, some kind of energy pulsing through me.  Not that it’s strong.  It’s not. It’s very, very quiet.  And it helps me do what I’m doing.”  She turned to face him.  “Make any sense?”

He nodded thoughtfully. “Yes. Yes, that’s what I was wondering.”  They walked along a few more steps in silence, and then Viktor asked, “What you feel… Do you think it’s… God?”

Now it was Ethel’s turn to walk in silence, reflecting, until Viktor nudged her ever so gently with his elbow.

“Yes, I know,” she said, laughing, “Maybe sometime this century?” And he laughed, a full, joyous laugh.

“I have never thought about it like that,” Ethel told him finally.  “I’ve just noticed the process, noticed that it happens.  But now that you mention it, the feeling I get when I’m doing the sewing especially, is akin to the way it feels for me, too, in the woods.  Maybe that’s why I always enjoyed taking my sewing into the woods, into the little lean-tos Hans and I built, or up into the tree house, later on.  I always loved sitting there to create and sew my ‘pictures’.  But I felt that way from the time I was tiny, so I never tried to explain it to myself.”

“Sure,” Viktor said. “You were little. You were just there and just felt it.  No need to analyze it.”

Ethel agreed. “I think that’s right.  I just always knew it was a very special place – divine, holy even – and I wanted to be there as much as I could. I love the peace there. And the love. There’s so much love in the forest, from the trees and everything that lives there.”  She turned to face him now. “Don’t you think so?”

“I do.  Before I came here, before I started going into the woods with your father, I never would have said that. Never.  But now I can say that, because I’ve felt it, too.  I never really believed in God when I was growing up.  But I think… I think it’s God I feel in the forest.  And I want to be there, too.”

“I think it’s God there, too,” Ethel said, nodding.  “So, maybe I have been able to take something of what is God’s from the forest and use it to inspire me, to help me make what I make.”

“I think you’re right,” Viktor told her. “And that’s one reason the quilt is so pretty, and the cheese is so tasty.”

“One reason?” Ethel asked.

“Yes. I don’t believe it’s the only reason.  There’s something special about you, in you…  I think you were born full of the heavenly. That makes it easy for you to carry more of it around with you and put it into everything you do.”

Ethel didn’t even know how to begin to reply to this.  She was happy and surprised and confused, all at once. Viktor was now back to looking at the forest that ran alongside the road.  Ethel finally found some words.

“I think,” she began. “I hope… that when you build that wardrobe for Hannah, that you’ll be able to get some heavenly help, too.  From God.  To take what’s divine, from God, into you in the forest, and to use it when you carve what you’re going to carve out of the wood that God created.”

“That is a wonderful wish,” he told her.  “I wish for that, too.”

“I’m sure the two of you will be able to do that together.  Because there’s some of the divine in you, too, I believe.”

Upon hearing this, Viktor turned sharply to look at her, to study her expression, to see whether it matched the kindness of her words.  Is she just saying it to be nice? And he saw a tenderness there, perhaps the same type of tenderness she’d seen in his eyes at the Kropps’ house.

“I thank you for that, Miss Gassmann,” he told her.  “Between God’s divine help and the inspiration of your creation, maybe I’ll be able to come up with something good.”

Ethel smiled, then looked back at the road ahead.  “You can call me Ethel,” she said. “Seems silly to be so formal.” 

“All right, Ethel,” he said, and he enjoyed saying her name.  Then he added, “I’ve been wanting to ask you something.”

“Oh?” she replied. “What’s that?”  Keep looking ahead.

“Well,” he began, and then stopped. Then he stopped walking.  When Ethel realized he’d come to a halt, she did, too, and turned to look at him.  He took the few steps necessary to catch up with her.

“Ethel,” he said, “I was wondering.  Could I court you?”  He took in a long, deep breath and let it out, waiting for her to answer. All the while, he studied her face, in the hopes of guessing her answer from her features before she voiced it in words.

She was studying him, too, taking in all she could about him: his sandy hair that reminded her of her father’s, his strength of spirit, his sun-browned face with its lines, despite his young age, and that fleeting, tender look she had seen earlier in the afternoon.

“Yes, please do,” she said. Then a smile lit up her face, and she turned and began running lightly down the road toward the homestead. Strands of her blonde hair streamed back behind her, along with the one word she called out to him as she ran, and which reached him and fell right into his heart. “Viktor.”

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapter 18

Chapter 18

Summer, 1921

Gassmann homestead

            Renate lay in bed that night beside her sleeping husband – on that night when she and Ulrich discussed Hans’ seeming jealously toward Viktor. Not yet able to sleep, she was recalling the upheaval that the arrival and subsequent permanent presence of Ulrich’s step-mother, Claudia, had caused in the Gassmann household. She reflected on how delicate is the harmony in any household, and how vulnerable to destruction by the introduction of a new inhabitant, even one whose intentions seem nothing but positive.  You can never predict, she thought, what cascade of events will be set in motion with just one shift in the cast of characters: one coming, another leaving.  For this reason, the prospect of upheaval here on the Gassmann homestead due to another new arrival – Viktor – weighed heavily on Renate, whose main focus in the household was maintaining peace and harmony amongst the members of her family.  Her protective instincts were no less keen than Hans’. It was just that she expressed them differently.

Hans’ concerns were, in Renate’s view, most centered on protecting his own position – although, Renate herself realized, maybe she wasn’t being fair to him in thinking this. Renate, on the other hand, had always been one to take in the whole, big, family-wide picture. She held this large-scale view in her mind every moment of each day. It was this orientation that led her to always act in what she felt in her heart was the best way to subtly guide the people around her so that peace and love would be maintained.  But for all her ability to sense the motives and inner desires of those around her, Renate was greatly mistaken about something equally important. She believed – in error – that she possessed within her the power to shift how people felt, to pull them out of despair, or to gently nudge them away from action that could have a destabilizing effect.  Again, it came down to this: Renate was sure she knew best, simply by virtue of her love and affection for those around her. 

Renate believed in God, but she’d have been hard pressed to explain how God actually affected the way everything in their lives played out.  If you pushed her on this, she would claim that when she tried to bring about all of these adjustments, she was in some way enacting God’s will. Not that she felt she was God’s conduit.  No. It was more like this: God’s will, as she interpreted it, was for all people to be happy and to live in peace. It wasn’t clear to her where she had gotten this idea. From Mama and Papa? No. From church? Perhaps… but I don’t recall the priest ever saying that straight out … But no matter. The point is, that she’d carried this assumption around in her head and her heart for so long, that she’d never questioned it in her four decades of life.

Maybe her conviction came about this way: First, as a little girl, she asked herself, “Doesn’t everyone want to be happy and live in peace?” Adopting this as a starting point was easy: the thought was quite natural. How could you deny such a thing? Then, since this seemed an obvious conclusion to draw about human beings, somewhere along the line, Renate asked herself another question: Wouldn’t God want this for all of us? And she concluded, He would!  From here, she proceeded to the logical next step and told herself, It’s God’s will for all human beings to be happy. This conclusion comforted and pleased Renate, and at some point in her adolescence – especially when she and Ulrich began courting – she began to feel that it was fully within her rights to help God out.  She wanted the same thing God wanted. So why not do whatever I can to guide people toward happiness?

The hitch here was, that Renate didn’t really act as God’s helper. Being his helper might imply that God would give her some direction which she would then carry out.  But Renate didn’t seek out any divine guidance. Rather, in her late teens, she began to notice that ideas would come to her about how to help a state of happiness manifest for those around her.  Where did those ideas come from? Were they from God? Or from Renate’s own mind or heart? Was there a difference? Renate didn’t give this question more than cursory consideration.  She just assumed that she had come up with these thoughts she heard.  If you’d asked her, she would have replied, “Of course they were inspired by God’s own wish for people to be happy, but they formed in my own head, didn’t they?” Perhaps Renate started out framing this process in a modest, unassuming way: The ideas just came to her, good ideas about how to keep the atmosphere in the Gassmann household calm and positive, which would, of course, lead to happiness for everyone concerned. She would certainly never have told anyone that the thoughts came from God.  She might have had an easier time of it if she had viewed things that way, because as it was, Renate ended up taking upon herself the entire burden of deciding what was needed in any given situation. And a burden it was! What it all came down to was that it was all on her to make everyone around her happy.

We can see how Renate could have drawn the conclusion she drew about God’s will: Being at her core a loving and kind person, she naturally had a deep belief in God’s goodness, too. She firmly believed that He, in his infinite and unconditional love for all of His children, would place them only in situations that would bring them joy and love and peace.  But if she truly believed this, deep down in her heart, then why did she feel the need to direct the people around her?  Why not simply trust that all would be well, and allow life to play out?

The reason she was unable to do this lay most clearly in what Renate saw going on at Ulrich’s house.  Although the Walters had their own share of ups and downs in their family interactions, Renate and her relatives were all pretty much content.  Conflicts arose, but were easily worked out.  There was an air of mutual love and respect – it was this mutual affection that had so affected and attracted Ulrich.  Of course, various relatives and members of other families had passed away, and Renate had heard tell of family conflicts, but without experiencing them in any intense way herself. And the Great War was still years away.  So, it was when she encountered Ulrich’s aunt-mother Claudia that Renate truly understood, for the first time, some of the various forms human unhappiness could take. 

It was at this point – when Renate was on the cusp of adulthood, and already nearly in love – that she moved, unconsciously, into the mode of actively helping God bring about happiness. As she learned from her time spent in Ulrich’s house, some people were, in fact, desperately unhappy.  Thus, God must need her presence and help in this household, to turn things around.  Motivated by her pure and deep love for Ulrich and a pure and deep desire for him and his family to be as happy as hers, Renate set out to help the Gassmanns.  The basic ideas would come swiftly, and then Renate would apply the power of her logical mind to fine-tune them.  It was up to her. She could do it!

It never occurred to Renate that there might be some fault in her logic. Without a doubt, she did everything she did with a heart full of love for her future husband. But she also very quickly gained the conviction that she, Renate, knew just what needed to be done so that people could be happy.  This might have been fine, had she seen this whole process as a collaboration with God.  But she didn’t – beyond the idea that she and God shared the same ultimate goal. She lacked the crucial understanding that if she was to be God’s instrument, then she’d need a way to communicate with God: That way she’d know what would actually help the people around her gain happiness, and be able to avoid taking action that would not help.

This is the approach you’d take if you firmly believed that God knows something you don’t, i.e., that God knows what’s best for you and everyone else, because He can see the genuinely larger picture, the entirety of everyone’s lives. If you genuinely believed this, and if you also genuinely believed that God does want us all to be happy, then it seems natural that you’d seek a way to communicate with Him, so you could learn his views on everyone’s needs.

But Renate was working freelance, just as she’d been doing since her adolescence. Did she operate this way because she felt that she herself knew everything she needed to know, all on her own? Is that why she never consciously sought to connect with God for guidance? Or was it because, deep down, Renate didn’t trust God to achieve the all-important goal of family happiness? Did seeing others’ great unhappiness plant a tiny seed of doubt in her soul, a doubt which prompted her to act on her own hook, without consulting this God who failed to step in when people were hurt and hurting? Or, perhaps she assumed, without investigating the question at all, that the feelings themselves in her heart constituted God’s instruction to her. The thoughts and feelings that arose in her might be the score that God was providing for her to play on her own, personal instrument.

We don’t know which of these scenarios is most accurate, because Renate herself never engaged in thoughts about this question.  She just observed, and felt, and acted. So, it’s best not to be hard on her in regard to this.  After all, one could say that our intent is the major determinant of what result our actions will bring. And Renate’s intention was very good.  Even so, the fact that she didn’t seek direct communication with God came together with her firm trust in the correctness of what she felt inside her, and this led to Renate being a bit arrogant about her own abilities.

Another result was that she spent her whole life in a kind of herding action: deftly and gently guiding others in the directions she felt were best for them.  She never noticed that she gradually shifted from a professed faith in God’s ability and wish to provide everyone with a happy life, to a deep fear that chaos and despair would descend and envelop her loved ones, unless she took matters into her own hands.  Which she did.  And how much happiness did this approach bring, whether to her or to those she loved?

At the present moment, in 1921, Renate had not yet received – and might never receive, in fact – the insight that would come to her granddaughter Lina on that day in 1949, when she slammed her hand down onto the big kitchen table and announced, “Enough!  I’ve had enough!” This revelation consisted of Lina’s sudden openness to the possibility that God placed His children in situations where they would suffer, and be unhappy, so that they could grow, and learn, and find a way out of the suffering. And that this they would do together with God, and not on their own, not by trying to manipulate every person and every situation around them. This thought had never occurred to Renate the way it would occur to Lina: Lina, whose unhappiness and physical suffering would be nearly more than Renate could bear, and whose paralysis drove her grandmother to ask every day Why did it happen? 

Even so, Renate’s particular Why? never led her as far as Lina’s Why? led her: To the realization that she phrased as a question, on that day back in 1949:  “What if the swallow on the riverbank and God were working together to put God’s plan into action?”  From that moment on, Lina began seeking to learn just how she could work together with God to grasp and fulfill His plan for her.  She, unlike her grandmother, realized right away that if God was striving to talk to her – and Lina was certain He was – then it was crucial to find a way to perceive what He was striving to tell her.

Perhaps Lina began actually seeking communication with God because she was able to trust that He not only had something to say to her, but also did want them all to be happy. That He did know, and that it could only benefit them to do their best to hear His advice. Lina understood this.  How could He not be trying to guide me?

But right now, late in the summer of 1921, Lina was not even on the horizon of the Gassmann homestead’s near future – she would be born only in 1928.  At this point, her future grandmother, Renate, firmly believed that some adjustments were in order in young Viktor Bunke’s interactions with her daughter (Lina’s future mother) Ethel.  Ever true to her understanding view of God’s plan for her, Renate set about herding, focused and diligent as any sheepdog.  Although Renate had spoken to Ulrich only about the effect that the young man’s presence was having on Hans, without mentioning Ethel, she was no less concerned by Ethel’s response to the subtle, yet powerful, change that was taking place in Viktor. 

*          *          *

            Ethel wasn’t thinking at all about what God’s plan might be for her.  The war was over, and there were hints that life might be regaining some normalcy. For Ethel, this meant that she was beginning to have access to fabrics – and not mere scraps – to use to make her quilts.  At seventeen, she was delighted to once more have the luxury of creating in a less constrained manner than during the years of uncertainty and deprivation of all types.  To her, being able to walk to Bockhorn and actually choose from a variety of fabrics, felt like both a miracle and a gift.  Suddenly, even more than before the war, Ethel felt great gratitude when she beheld the bolts of fabrics stacked up on the shelves of the general store.  She noticed herself growing giddy as she ran her fingers along the edges of the bolts, as if touching them could help her decide which fabrics to have cut and folded to take home with her.  This sense of lightness she was experiencing… It occurred to her that this must be why Hans said he often felt he had to hold her very tightly by the hand when she was little, so that she wouldn’t just float off, up into the sky, to hover amongst the clouds. 

            The Kropps (clearly engaged in beautifying their home on a number of fronts) commissioned Ethel to make a quilt for their daughter’s bed, and she was excited at the prospect of picking out just the right fabrics that would suit nine-year-old Hannah. The girl’s tastes ran to flowers and butterflies – or at least that’s what she told Ethel the previous week. Who knew whether Hannah would have moved on from flowers to birds by the time Ethel produced the quilt, but for now, this was what she had to go on.  And so, she headed to Bockhorn to start the process.

            Later that afternoon, when Ethel walked back into the yard, buoyed by creative thoughts, and flushed by her walk in the summer heat, she encountered Viktor. He had just come out of the woods.  He was wiping his forehead with his bandanna and, it seemed, heading to toward the pump for a drink of water.

            “What have you got there?” he asked Ethel, nodding at the package wrapped in brown paper that she held tucked under her left arm.

            “Oh, I’m going to make a quilt for the postmaster’s little girl Hannah,” she replied with a smile.

            “One of your pictures?” Viktor inquired, with a smile and a tone that was joking, but kind.

            “I guess so!”

            He walked closer to her and touched the brown paper. “What’ll this one be?”

            Ethel playfully covered the package with her other hand, lightly brushing Viktor’s away as she did so. “Never you mind,” she laughed, her ebullient laughter filling the air around her.  “Maybe I’ll tell you later on.  Once I’ve decided for sure.”

            “Fair enough,” he said, tipping his head respectfully toward her, and smiling again.

            He watched as Ethel turned and headed into the house.  He heard the swish of her skirt and the slight rustle of the paper wrapping as she shifted the package in her hands.  But most of all, what he heard – and certainly what he remembered all the rest of the day – was the sound of her laughter. It seemed to him even lighter and clearer than the laughs he had heard from her before.

            For her part, Ethel would remember the intensity of Viktor’s gaze, which was both fully focused on her, but not intrusive, despite the motion of his hand toward her package.  There was a certain calm about him, a freedom of movement that she glimpsed as he walked from the woods and into the yard.  It seemed like… happiness.  Joy. Wonder, even.  Ethel had certainly guessed that Viktor had taken an interest in her. Even so, she didn’t automatically assume that she could necessarily assume that what she was noticing in him right then, as he emerged from amongst the trees, was necessarily related to any attraction he might have toward her.  Well, she wanted to assume that it was.  Over the past few weeks, she had begun paying attention to how he looked at her.  Actually, she’d been paying attention to that from the very beginning, since that day in the workshop when they spoke about his carving and her embroidery.  She was quite sure then that he was taking an interest in her.  She didn’t think she had imagined it… She had felt it, after all, too. 

But since then, he had seemed reserved in her presence, although he did send a smile her way now and then.  More than now and then, in fact.  And he directed questions to her at meals, and acted so very considerate of her.  But maybe he’s just that way? She asked herself this from time to time.  She’d been doing so more frequently in the past few weeks, now that she found her gaze drawn to him at each meal and noticed her eyes searching for him when she was out in the yard, or walking through the woods.  Is he there somewhere? 

She wondered how she could tell whether he liked her.  Liked her, in the way that young men liked girls they might someday fall in love with.  If they hadn’t already.  And so, on this afternoon, once she was inside the house, in her bedroom on the second floor, as she laid the package on her bed and opened it up, she paused. Gently, thoughtfully even, her heart seeming to beat a little more strongly than usual, and a little higher in her chest, she touched her finger to the spot on the paper that she imagined was the very spot Viktor had touched with his fingers.  She let it rest there, her eyes closed, imagining her hand brushing his once again.  Now what? she whispered softly to herself.

Renate witnessed the whole scene from the kitchen window.  Although she did not clearly hear the words the two young people exchanged, she did clearly understand what passed between them, perhaps even more fully than they themselves did.  She had gone through this once herself, after all, on the very same spot in the Gassmanns’ yard. So, although Ethel didn’t approach her mother to ask her any questions, or to confide in her about Viktor – what was there to confide about at this point, anyway? – Renate took it upon herself to go to Ethel in her room and discuss the topic.

She began by inquiring about how the trip to Bockhorn had gone, and by asking Ethel to show her the fabrics she’d picked out for Hannah’s quilt.  Renate was genuinely interested in Ethel’s design, and so the conversation about it flowed quite naturally, although Ethel’s creative strivings, as Renate referred to them, tended in different directions. She was happy to see Ethel excited to once again be making a quilt, but perhaps even more, she was glad that this quilt would bring some extra money into the household.

“Now,” she said, watching her daughter’s face as she refolded the quilt fabric into the paper, “what was Viktor talking with you about out there?”

Ethel looked up at her with bright eyes – showing excitement– and replied, “He was passing the time of day, Mama.  And he asked what I picked up in town.” She smiled, a smile that Renate recognized through her memory of her own face at roughly the same age.

“And what else?” Renate asked her, a slight edge to her voice.

Ethel shrugged. “Just about what I was going to do for the quilt design.”

“And did you tell him?”

Ethel smiled now and shook her head. Then she leaned toward her mother and half-whispered, in a conspiratorial one, “I told him that maybe I’d tell him later on, once I decide.”  She looked both pleased and a bit surprised at herself, for teasing him this way.

“I see,” Renate replied, nodding her head and reaching out absently (or so it seemed) to touch the paper.  “Well, my dear,” she said, “I wouldn’t spend too much time talking with our Mr. Bunke.”

Ethel blushed.  “But why not, Mama? He seems like a very nice young man.”

Seems, yes, Ethel, dear,” Renate agreed. “Seems.  But how do we know?  What do we know about him, really?”

Ethel proceeded to rattle off the information she had gleaned – and committed to memory – from amongst the details Ulrich had shared before Viktor’s arrival, and what he himself had mentioned in the course of their mealtime conversations since then.

“I see you’ve been paying close attention,” Renate said, her stern tone softened by a smile.  “Even so, dear one, these are times when not everyone may be what they seem.”

“What do you mean, Mama?” Ethel asked, smoothing her dress with her hands.

“I mean,” Renate told her, “that it’s not good to trust strangers. Especially when you’re a beautiful young woman, and any young man worth his salt would want to court you.”

Ethel suddenly took her mother’s hand. “Then why not let him, if he wants to?” she asked, the softness of her voice failing to mask her emotion.

“I just don’t know about him,” Renate told her, quite sincerely.  She’d come up intending to forbid Ethel to even talk to Viktor again.  But, surprisingly, she found herself speaking her truest thoughts.  “He could be lying to us about anything, about everything. He could be married to someone already back in Schweiburg.  He could be a criminal looking for a family and an employer to take advantage of.”

“But do you really believe that, Mama?” Ethel asked her.

“I don’t know what to think.  But I want to be cautious.  You’re my only daughter, and when you do marry, I want it to be to just the right man.”

“You and Hans!” Ethel said, laughing again now.  “If the two of you have your way, I’ll never marry and sit in the kitchen under guard until you find someone you decide is right.”

Renate put her arms round her daughter.  “Yes, I think that would be the best way to go about everything.”  Ethel could feel her smiling, and when they were done hugging, Ethel could see that her mother had softened.

“Do you want him to?” Renate asked her.  “Court you?”

Ethel paused and looked down at the paper-wrapped package.  “I think I do, Mama. I do.

Renate hugged her once more. “When he was first here,” she said, “and I overheard you talking in the workshop, I told him to concentrate on his work.  I didn’t want him thinking about you.  But now I can see he does anyway.  Guess it won’t do to try to put a wall between you, seeing as how there’s nothing bad that’s come to light about him so far.”

Ethel smiled and took her mother’s hands in hers.

“But,” Renate told her, wagging one finger before Ethel’s face, “don’t go telling him I’ve given him my blessing to court you.  I haven’t.  All I’m saying here is that, at least for now, I’m not going to run him out of the yard for talking to you.”

“Fair enough, Mama,” Ethel said.  “Fair enough.”

Now what? Ethel wondered, as her mother turned and walked slowly back down the stairs to the kitchen.

*          *          *

What have I done? Renate wondered. When she saw Viktor and Ethel in the yard, she realized, to her surprise, that she felt not only unease about his motives and his past, but also the hint of something positive toward him.  Thinking about it now, as she chopped some onions to be fried up with the potatoes at dinner, she was finding it difficult to sort out these feelings and determine which of them were “true”.  This lack of certainty was unusual for her. Typically, she would have a strong and clear sense inside her of what was right, and what it was right to do in a given situation.  That was what had happened the day she warned Viktor to stay away from Ethel: she just knew that was what she should do.

So, she asked herself now, what accounted for her words to Ethel upstairs. Good God!  I as much as told her to marry him! Renate thought back to their conversation and to the hug she and Ethel shared.  That was the moment when something shifted in her, Renate concluded.  She had felt Ethel’s heart, felt what was in her dear daughter’s heart.  Love.  Or at least a feeling that might become love, for Viktor.  As well as Ethel’s genuine love for her mother.  And in her own heart, Renate had felt her own love. For Ethel.  For Ulrich. For Hans.  And that moment of shared love, Renate concluded now, washed away her fear and skepticism about Viktor. 

Not that this made any sense to her, because when she started thinking about it again now, logically, the same concerns she’d mentioned to Ethel popped into her head again.  This was the first time Renate experienced having her inner conviction about a person or situation shift from negative to positive under the influence of love.  Now, she’d had enough experience with knowing what to do, based solely on the feeling inside her, to recognize that this was a new way of feeling for her.  She thought back over her life: Was there ever a time when she first had a bad feeling about something, and then it eventually turned around?  No, she decided after a while. 

The case she was using to answer this question was her brother Ewald’s decision to move to America.  She had that negative intuition about it from the start, and that never changed for her, despite Ewald’s excitement, despite her love for him.  Nor did her conviction that it was wrong to come live in the Gassmann household while Claudia was still in residence ever shift under the influence of some more positive feeling.  She simply never had a more positive feeling associated with Claudia.  No.  It seemed that what had happened just now with Ethel was a unique instance.  And it got Renate thinking and wondering: What was this new feeling that came in and filled me with such lightness? With such love that I suddenly felt that maybe it would be a positive thing for Ethel to come together with Viktor?

As Renate tried, with her mind, to answer this question, to explain and even justify this sprout of a positive feeling for the young man, she was able to point to certain changes she had taken note of in his behavior, and in the air he had about him.  Whereas he had at first seemed to her calculating – using his ability to “pick up on things” to curry favor with the clients, and with Ulrich, too – now, since he had been spending time with Ulrich in the forest and learning about the trees, he had begun to seem, to Renate, much more sincere and open.  His new-found and growing love of the forest was clearly genuine, and although he never spoke to her about what he felt when he was among the trees, she could see in his eyes that the time he spent there was having a profoundly positive effect on him. And, indeed, Ulrich had shared bits and pieces with her of what Viktor was experiencing as a budding forester.  Perhaps Renate was seeing Ulrich in Viktor. She recognized that to do so was, perhaps, dangerous, and so, in her conscious mind, she guarded against it.  On the other hand, she reasoned, if Viktor could gain the connection to God through the trees the way Ulrich had, then how could that be harmful?

Renate also noticed that, now that Viktor was spending more time in the forest, he seemed less on edge, less eager to prove himself by asserting his abilities as a cabinet maker. Certainly, he still suggested creative touches for the furniture orders their clients placed, but he was somehow gentler about it.  Even so, Renate could see that Hans still resented what he saw as Viktor’s interference in “their” way of doing things, even though Ulrich encouraged it.  Indeed, Renate realized, this was the heart of the matter: Hans was jealous of Ulrich’s approval of Viktor.  Naturally, then, Viktor’s growing connection to the forest and to Ulrich, didn’t sit well with Hans. His skepticism had not faded, and had, perhaps, even intensified, as Viktor grew more comfortable in the family and work setting of the Gassmann household.

Viktor himself would have agreed with Renate’s assessment.  At least, he was experiencing what she noticed, even if he might not have been able to put it all into words. But it was true that he felt different than he had when he’d arrived a few months earlier.  There might be several explanations for that: having found steady work; a master carpenter who was actually interested in helping him improve his skills, instead of just benefiting from what he did know; living amongst people who were kind and who valued the work he did; Ethel; the way he felt when he was working in the forest.  Maybe all of these contributed to the fact that he now felt happy, happier than he had ever felt in his whole life.  Not that that’s so surprising. He’d tell himself this as he lay in his bed at night, as he recalled his day before drifting off to sleep in a kind of daze induced by a combination of physical fatigue and joy.  I mean, given what I grew up with – Mama’s death, and then Papa’s, and Hannelore’s getting crippled… No wonder I feel good here. In other words, Viktor didn’t spend his time reflecting seriously on his current state.  He noted that he was happy, and he preferred to enjoy that state, rather than analyze it. 

But when Viktor was unhappy or discontent, then he did spend time reflecting. He’d done so all his life. Scheming may be a better word for it. He learned to do this at his father’s side at such an early age, that it became second nature to him. He no longer did it consciously. He just naturally shifted into this mode when he began to feel discontent or unhappy about some situation in his life. Here was his basic process: Figure out what you want.  Use your intuition to “pick up” what other people – the other people who can give you what you want – want.  Figure out a way to give them what they want.  Then they’ll be very likely to also give you what you want. 

Viktor became very, very good at all parts of this process. That’s the way he liked to see it, anyway.  There was only one problem: This approach to life had never secured him real happiness. Sure, in the course of his life, he had had food, a place to live, grown-ups to take care of him – until they weren’t around anymore – and then work that kept him fed and alive, once he survived the war. But that was it.  No big moments of joy.  Up until now, it seemed that the most happiness Viktor had felt had been the fragile satisfaction of simply surviving.  He himself recognized that this was not equal to true happiness.

The question then arises: Was Viktor actually not skilled at manipulating those around him to get the true happiness he wanted? Or maybe he just set too low a bar for the level of happiness he felt able to achieve in his own life, i.e., a life without extreme hardship or emotional pain? This was a step forward for him, of course. But did he really feel he had to just settle for this most bare-bones version of happiness, and learn to live with this feeling that something was missing in his life?   He saw other people who looked happier… But maybe he lacked the belief that more was possible for him

Viktor certainly recognized that he was not happy, but he never consciously entertained the thought that he was not worthy of being truly happy. He sought other explanations for the way things were. Sometimes he wondered whether he hadn’t worked hard enough so far, hadn’t “picked up” enough about those around him.  This despite the fact that he did consider himself good at doing so.  Here’s another thought – one related to both his unhappiness and the use he made of his intuition – that Viktor did not consider: Maybe there was a cause-and-effect relationship between his approach to living and the state of his life.  In other words, maybe he was unhappy because his way of interacting with people wasn’t quite honest.  If he had reflected on this possibility, he might have come to this conclusion:  If he hoped to have a more than subsistence-level life, he might have to change the way he treated people.  But he didn’t reflect on any of this. When he set out from Varel for the Gassmann homestead in May of 1921, then, he did so with a feeling of dissatisfaction with his life, but also without any particular hope in his heart that a big happiness might actually come his way.

Thus, Viktor walked into the Gassmanns’ yard armed with the same approach to life that he’d developed in the first eighteen years of his life. However, once he started to settle in there, he did begin allowing himself to imagine something different for himself, a new way of being.  Those imaginings, unconscious at first, began the moment he stepped into the Gassmanns’ yard and felt that joyful energy.  Something inside him opened up when he felt it, and at that moment, the quiet wishes of his heart and soul immediately perceived that opening and began making their way through it and into Viktor’s mind. They moved more firmly into his consciousness when he met Ethel and recognized her as the source of the joy he’d noticed.  But at first, all that was present inside him was an awareness: He noticed the joy and was pleasantly struck by it; he connected it to Ethel and was drawn to talk with her. In these early days, though, he didn’t make the leap from, “how wonderful it feels here, with her”, to “I can imagine a future for myself with her as my wife”. Although that tiny wish slipped out of his heart and moved toward his brain, it remained, for now, unexpressed in conscious thoughts. He wouldn’t allow himself that as of yet. He wasn’t, you see, in the habit of imagining that he could live permanently in proximity to such happiness, or alongside a person who embodied it. 

It wasn’t until that first day in the forest, when Ulrich spoke of Renate and his love for her, of their happiness together, that Viktor’s heart’s wishes took the form of thoughts.  That day, Viktor allowed himself to recognize this desire in himself: the desire for a happiness like Ulrich’s and Renate’s.  Until this day, he had never allowed himself to think such thoughts.  That is how inured he had become, at an early age, to a life of unsatisfactoriness and dissatisfaction, to subconscious beliefs in his unworthiness. 

Now, here he was, in the forest, on this day when he felt, for the first time, the divine energy Ulrich spoke of.  At that point, he didn’t connect these two moments in his mind, didn’t see how being surrounded by the divine might have helped him feel free to inwardly express his deepest heart’s wish.  But it happened all the same: allowing the divine to touch him somehow gave him the strength to wish for true happiness, and to begin to imagine a life for himself that would be infused with joy every day.  In other words: a life with Ethel, whom he correctly perceived as a strong source of pure joy. 

As Viktor began spending more and more time in the forest, and taking in more and more of the divine energy he felt there, he also made the decision to put his thought of a life of joy into action.  I’ll get it! he told himself. The problem was, he wasn’t quite sure how to go about getting it, and his indecision about this slowed him down a bit.  He was aware enough to sense that he lacked the tools this particular “project” required.  This in itself was a big step forward.  Did he somehow grasp that he had spent his whole life manipulating others (“herding”, as Renate called her own approach), but that this new situation was not a simple game of emotional chess?  Because, in fact, it wasn’t a game to him at all. 

He could tell that by the tenderness he felt in his heart: in the forest, when he was around Ethel, and even when he and Ulrich were working with the trees in the woods.  This was a new sensation for him.  Although, in fact, it wasn’t precisely that it was new. It had always been there, but at some point amidst the difficulties of his young life, Viktor stopped allowing himself to feel it, out of sheer terror that he would lose whoever inspired that tenderness in him. (Once again, he didn’t understand this with his mind.)  But now, this sensation resurfaced, and the depth of this tenderness that he could now feel in his heart sometimes brought him to tears.  Not just at night, as he sat on the edge of his bed, thinking of Ethel and this new life he was living, but even out amongst the trees, as their strengthening leaves and branches waved to him of a morning or afternoon.  He felt that a powerful opening had come about in him, and he wanted to be very careful with his new tender feelings, and with the people and other living things that inspired them. One could say that by taking in the diving energy of the forest, Viktor had naturally begun acting in a different way. 

His new desire to be careful with others was the exact opposite of the need, based in fear – which had driven him for most of his life – to be careful of others.  Viktor’s new approach began to show itself in the way he talked, not just with the Gassmanns, but also in conversations with clients. Here’s what was going on in those encounters: He still “picked up” what others felt and wanted, but something in the way he then responded to his insights changed.  Again, he would have found it hard to put into words, but instead of simply understanding how he could get something for himself from others by giving them what they wanted, he began to experience a small amount of pleasure at offering to people what he knew they would like. 

He first noticed this unfamiliar feeling when he and Hans delivered the sideboard to the Kropps.  The two of them pulled up in front of the postmaster’s house and unloaded the sideboard – wrapped in a protective layer of blankets, which rendered it mysterious and created the sense that a marvelous surprise was soon to be revealed – from the wagon. They carried it through the entranceway with its well-organized clothing hanging neatly on the pegs, and into the dining room. The whole family was there, eager for the unveiling.  Mr. Kropp indicated the spot where the sideboard was to stand, and Hans and Viktor carefully stood it there and began removing the blankets.  As the sideboard came more and more fully into view, Mr. and Mrs. Kropp and their daughter all crowded around.  Both Hans and Viktor later told each other and the rest of the Gassmanns that they were surprised by the excitement the Kropps showed: They seemed like such reserved people, but here they were, hovering around, as if the two cabinet makers were Saint Nicholas unwrapping a giant Christmas gift.

  First Mrs. Kropp, and then her husband, and then their daughter, ooh-ed and aah-ed when they saw the sideboard in all its glory. They ran their hands over the smooth finish, praising what, they remarked, must have been endless hours of sanding and finishing.  The color of the oak was just what they had had in mind, they told Hans.  They opened and closed the various doors, examined the small drawers.  They were delighted with all aspects of the piece. But they reserved their most effusive praised for the carving Viktor had done for the top edge of the back.  They ran their fingers over this, too, and Mrs. Kropp noted that Viktor really had managed to create a design in the wood which called to mind the floral pattern in the lace valance above the window.  She shook her head in amazement. Her husband, too, admitted that it was “quite striking”. He thanked Viktor for having suggested this embellishment.

Hans and Viktor left with full payment for the sideboard in hand, and their mood was light as they drove the wagon back home, allowing the horse to take a leisurely pace.  Viktor felt happy, but he also noticed a new facet to this happiness.  There was an unfamiliar warmth in his heart, and he was deeply at peace. 

His mind kept drifting back to the smiles on the Kropps’ faces, to the way Mr. Kropp shook his and Hans’ hands with such great enthusiasm as they parted.  Recalling this, a small, but contented smile came to Viktor’s face. He realized that he was happy not just because he’d finished a job and the client had paid them well for it.  He was happy that they were happy.  Simply that.  He wasn’t trying to gauge how successfully he had manipulated the Kropps.  He was simply riding along in peace, glad that something he had done had brought joy to these people.  Does my heart good! he thought to himself, for perhaps the first time in his life. 

He glanced over at Hans, who, buoyed by the Kropps’ appreciation for the sideboard, was going on about plans for future furniture designs and sales.  Viktor smiled again and let Hans’ words pass through his ears, without responding, except to nod now and then.  He was content to ride in peace and feel the words in his heart.

At home, when Hans and Viktor strode into the kitchen together, having heard Ethel’s voice ring out the call to dinner, Renate and Ethel both noticed the men’s ebullient mood. 

“The Kropps were satisfied, then?” Ulrich inquired as they all ate their midday meal.

“A triumph!” Hans declared with a broad smile.  He even reached over to Viktor, whose spot at the table was next to his own, and clapped the younger man noisily on the back.  Viktor, whose mouth was full of potato salad at the moment, signaled his agreement by nodding and lifting his knife and waving it the way a vanquishing general might wave his sword. 

“This guy,” Hans continued, looking at Ulrich while indicating Viktor with a tip of his head.  “Turns out he has a good head for business after all. For what the clients want.”

“Seems you two make a good team,” Ulrich remarked, smiling. And, wanting to show his approval to his son, he put his hand on Hans’ shoulder and squeezed it lightly.

“Seems that way,” Viktor replied.  He and Hans both smiled and exchanged warm, comradely glances.

Renate, seated at the end of the table nearest Viktor, felt her own heart grow warm as she saw the two men, who could have been brothers, given their ages, acting like brothers: relaxed, joshing each other, enjoying the good fruits of a joint venture.  Yes, this is the way it can be between brothers.  She thought back to Ulrich and Erich, to their relationship which foundered and never recovered from early wounds in the family. 

Then she recalled the suspicious way Hans had treated Viktor since his arrival in May, and she wondered whether her prayers and the guidance she’d given Ulrich about helping Hans to feel loved as a son were finally beginning to make a difference. It certainly seemed that Hans was finally coming to accept Viktor.   She gazed at Viktor, taking in his gestures. She saw that an almost carefree smile came to his lips as he swallowed a mouthful of food and reached for his glass of water.  Following Viktor’s eyes, Renate saw – not at all to her surprise – that he was looking at Ethel, and she back at him. Renate knew that Viktor’s carefree smile was meant for her daughter, and that Ethel had warmly received it. 

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.

Above the River, Chapters 15-17

Chapter 15

August, 1904

Walter farm, Near Varel, Germany

            None of what Ewald was saying to them was making any sense to Ulrich.  This was how the conversation over dinner went on that one summer evening at the Walter farm:

            “Ralf’s gotten set up in a town in Illinois, doing carpentry for a business there,” Ewald was explaining.

            “Where’s Illinois, again?” Lorena asked.  She asked this same question every time Ewald mentioned his friend. Lorena had heard this detail numerous times before, but she never really took it in. Probably because the information just seemed irrelevant to her. Like Ulrich, her interests were strictly local and focused mainly on her fiancé, Stefan, whom she would be marrying the following year.

            “On the bank of one of the big lakes they have there, Lake Michigan.”  Ewald paused.  “And…” he then continued, scanning his parents’ faces, and Renate’s and Ulrich’s, too, hoping to discover beforehand their response to the news he hadn’t even shared yet. 

            “And what?” his father, Ingo, asked, setting down his utensils on his plate.  He knew something was coming.

            Renate stopped chewing. Oh, no! she thought.  Her intuition had been accurate, as usual. No!

            Ewald took in a deep breath and let it out.  “He said there’s lots of good work. His boss said he’ll take me on, too. If I go over there.”

            “To Illinois?” Ewald’s mother Veronika asked, just as Renate said, “To America?”

            “Yes.”

            Stunned silence. 

“Is Illinois a city?” Lorena suddenly asked, in what seemed like a total non sequitur.

            Ewald, who was eager to proceed with discussing his plans, felt annoyed at his sister’s question. On the surface, this seemed like just one more of the absent-minded queries she often posed. But the whole family knew that although this question seemed, like her first, to be concerned with geography, the underlying emotion was different. They knew that this was the way Lorena always responded when she was worried or upset: She focused on establishing minute details, so as to stay tethered to the ground, instead of floating off on a wave of anxiety.

            “No, it’s an American state,” Ewald explained patiently. “Think of it like Bavaria. But a lot bigger.”

            Lorena nodded and turned her attention back to her schnitzel.  Although she said nothing more, they all realized that she was feeling every bit as shocked as the rest of them were.  Except for Renate, who was feeling a deep sadness rise up in her, sadness for every member of the family, and especially for Ulrich.

*          *          *

By the end of the fall, Ewald had sailed for America, his final destination Durand, Illinois, a small town in the state’s northwest corner. Ulrich had, as he saw it, lost a brother and a friend.

Chapter 16

Summer, 1921

Gassman homestead

            Just as Ulrich had found the peace and love and familial warmth his heart desired on the Walters’ farm, the more time Viktor spent living and working amongst the Gassmanns, the more his soul blossomed and his heart opened.  Not that he would have put it that way, because he was only barely aware of this growth that was going on inside him.

            Certainly, we could attribute this largely to his growing love for Ethel, and to hers for him.  But it would be a mistake to say that Ethel catalyzed this transformation all on her own.  Not that her love was not a powerful elixir for Viktor.  It was. But equally powerful was the effect that the forest exerted on him.

            Following that first walk to Bockhorn with Hans, on the day they went to meet the Kropps – the day of Viktor’s first creative contribution to the family business – Viktor felt drawn to learn about the trees he would eventually saw and carve and nail, shaping into furniture and walls and stairs. 

            Viktor’s father, who himself had thought of wood as material to be worked, rather than as a once-living source, never instilled a respect for trees in his son.  His approach to his work was much more utilitarian: he’d acquire already-prepared wood, and then create with it. But, as Viktor began working alongside Ulrich, he understood that his own father, as beautiful as his carving work had been, and as skillful a carpenter as he had been, had also lacked something. This something was clearly present in Ulrich. 

Viktor didn’t know quite how to describe it, at least not at first.  He’d never encountered it before in any of the master carpenters he’d trained with.  But it was powerful.  He sensed it already the first day, as Ulrich showed him around the workshop, indicating the various projects he was working on.  There was the care with which Ulrich touched the wood, a near caress when he picked up a table leg he’d been turning and brushed off the sawdust.  Viktor noticed this… this relationship of Ulrich’s to the wood, but it was only when Viktor went out with Ulrich into the forest for the first time that he began to understand what was going on.

One day at dinner, a couple of days after that first trip to Bockhorn, Viktor asked Ulrich to tell him about the forest, nd about his family’s connection to it.

“Our eleven hectares of heaven!” Ulrich said, and Viktor saw a sparkle come into his eyes.  “That’s what I call it.” He smiled, and as he did, Viktor noted that the Gassmann family patriarch seemed not the least bit sheepish about expressing how much he loved the forest. A less confident – or less loved – man might have looked to check Viktor’s response, to gauge whether he’d made a fool of himself. But Ulrich didn’t.

“That’s right,” Ethel said, as she bit off a piece of bread.  “It is!”

Renate and Hans nodded, too.

“Of course, it’s beautiful,” Viktor replied.  “But why ‘heaven’?” His question was sincere, but he didn’t want to look like an idiot. Perhaps everyone in the world except him knew about this.  So, he adopted an expression that he hoped would indicate casual interest instead of the yearning he was just beginning to realize he felt for the answer.

“Ah,” Ulrich said, holding up his right hand, index finger pointing at Viktor to indicate that the question was well-taken, perhaps even expected.  “Exactly. You cut to the core of it.  It really is heaven. It’s not just a figure of speech I was using there, meaning to say that I like being in the forest.”  He paused.   “Beauty.  Yes, there’s that. But beauty alone doesn’t indicate the heavenly.  In fact, I’d wager that it’s the heavenliness that creates the beauty.”  He turned and smiled at Renate.  “As with my dear wife.”

Renate shook her head and looked down at her lap, where her hands were smoothing her napkin. But a smile flitted across her lips.

Ulrich, more expansive and light-hearted than Viktor had seen him up to this point, leaned back in his chair, tipping back onto the two back legs, and cocked his head to one side.

“Why do I draw an equals sign between heaven and the forest?  I’m not saying I know what heaven feels like.  But if heaven does end up feeling like the forest, then I’ll be quite content when I take up residence over on the other side.”

That wasn’t a real answer to Viktor’s question, and everyone at the table knew it.  Only Ethel stepped in to help.

“I agree with Papa, but I, too, have a hard time saying what it is.  But I am completely sure it is heaven, and that the real heaven will feel that way, too, when I get there.”

“If it feels like heaven to you,” Viktor commented, slowly, “then maybe it actually is.

Ulrich was still resting back in his chair.  Ethel was chewing contemplatively.  Hans was saying nothing, focusing instead on his potato salad.  He took Viktor’s question as yet another attempt by the newcomer to worm his way into his father’s good graces by flattering the older man. (His father’s, not Viktor’s, as much as the young stranger might want to become like a son to Ulrich…).  Renate was eating slowly, while gazing at her husband with an expression Viktor hadn’t noticed on her face before.  She was smiling contentedly, clearly made happy by her dear husband’s sudden vibrancy and glowing face.  It was true: Renate was content. She so seldom saw Ulrich like this, free of his habitual undertone of melancholy, and she was delighted to bask in it, for as long as it lasted.  Seeing her husband come alive, her own heart opened a bit toward the young man whose genuine interest had drawn Ulrich out of his dark-lined shell. 

Ulrich laughed. “Precisely!” he nearly shouted. He leaned forward in his chair, so that its front legs clapped back into contact with the floor with a thwack.  “Come out into the forest with me tomorrow, Viktor, and you can tell me what you think makes it heaven.”

“Papa,” Ethel said playfully, “perhaps Viktor won’t find a speck of heaven in the forest.  What then?”

“Oh, I think I might, find it,” Viktor answered.  Especially if you are in the forest, too. “If you all are convinced it’s there, I’m game to search for it, too.”

Ulrich shook his head now, but not in a harsh way. “No need to search for it, son.  It’ll find you itself, if you let it. Put itself right in your very path.  And all around you.  It’ll find you all right.  If you’re still.” He paused again. “And if you wish it to.”

Hans, who was the first to finish his dinner – after all, he had been eating while the others had been philosophizing – thanked his mother and sister for the meal and put his dishes on the table by the sink.  “See you in the shop,” he told Ulrich, but without a glance at Viktor. Then he was gone, thinking to himself,  Son?

*          *          *

            The next day, Ulrich took Viktor out into the woods as he went to survey part of the forest. Thus began the younger man’s tutorial in the ways of heaven.

            Hans was not with them, having stayed behind to work on the Kropps’ cabinet.  And in any case, Viktor knew that Hans had more interest in what was made out of wood than in the trees the wood came from.  He wondered, though, when Hans’ focus had shifted.  After all, as a child, he and Ethel had spent days at a time in the forest, and Hans had told him about the treehouse and how much he’d loved being up in it.  Then again, Viktor realized, Hans had spoken most about what he and his father had made in the forest, how they’d constructed the treehouse, and not at all about how it had felt to him to be in the treehouse. Nothing at all about heaven.

            Viktor was correct about where Hans’ interests lay.  What gave Hans the most satisfaction was putting the wood of the forest to use in some way, perhaps even in a creative way.  Like other carpenters Viktor had encountered, although Hans knew the trees and how they could best be utilized – as material – he didn’t seem to know or care what else the trees and the forest had to offer, i.e., heaven.  This “what else”, Viktor surmised as he followed Ulrich into the woods along a dirt path wide enough for a cart and horse, was exactly what this forester knew.

            Viktor made a couple of attempts at starting a conversation as he and Ulrich walked, but Ulrich shook his head gently. 

            “Just walk for now,” the older man said softly.  “And notice.”

            So, for probably the first time in his life, Viktor made his way through a forest without talking to a person by his side.  As a child, he simply hadn’t played in the woods by himself, and hardly with other kids, either, to be truthful.  During his military training, his time in the woods had been about as far-removed as could be imagined from what he was experiencing now.  As for keeping silent, Viktor wasn’t used to being quiet with other people and had, in fact, never particularly liked it. He always preferred to talk, to get a sense of the other person or people he happened to be with.  So, now, at first, he had to contend with the voice in his own head, which, in the absence of words from other human interlocutors, provided both sides of the conversation. The thoughts came fast and furious: Notice what? Ask him.  No.  He said to just walk and notice.  But what?  Is this a test? God Almighty, what should I be looking at?

            Then, as if reading his mind, Ulrich said, “Don’t think.  Just walk. Forget about noticing for now.”

            Viktor relaxed a little, shook out his shoulders.  Just walk. Don’t think.  Easier said than done.  In an effort to not think, since he imagined Ulrich had a good reason for this instruction, Viktor turned his attention actively to what was around him.  To the slightly damp and still cool air.  He could feel the remnants of the morning’s mist, and it seemed to him as he looked in between the trees, that perhaps he could even see it.  Like the vaguest of thin, cottony shadows against the background of the leaves on the low branches of the young oaks.  Or maybe those were just spider webs?  Don’t think.

            As Viktor consciously looked here and there, his gaze took in the pine needles and the decayed, brown, last year’s leaves beneath his feet and in the underbrush off to the side of the path.  The pine needles sounded and felt different beneath his boots than the old leaves, and, naturally, they smelled different, too.  Both scents were rich, but the pine’s was lighter, and the smell of the leaves darker and heavier and sharper, more sour, even, he concluded.

            He felt his breathing deepen and slow, and his gait also shifted.  Up until this point, he had continually found himself having to consciously reduce his speed, so as not to bump into the older man just ahead of him.  But now, somehow, he noticed that his own pace had naturally attuned itself to Ulrich’s.   As he slowed, he began to take in the sounds of the woods. First he noticed the louder bird calls, although he had no idea what birds they were.  Then chirps of crickets and softer birds’ songs came into his ears, as if competing for his attention with the rustling of dry leaves close by and new ones further up in the trees.  At one point, Viktor was so captivated by a waving aspen leaf that, smiling, he stepped off the path and wrapped his fingers gently around it, wishing to test what it felt like.  Soft, it turned out. Softer on the top than on the bottom, where the ridges protruded.

            “Ah,” I see you’ve met one of the most welcoming trees of our forest,” Ulrich said, his voice transmitting his smile.  He had noticed that Viktor had stopped walking, and he’d turned to see what had caught his attention.

            “Welcoming?” Viktor asked.

            “I’ve always thought so,” Ulrich said, coming up alongside Viktor and grasping another leaf in what, to Viktor, resembled a handshake.  He smiled at the thought of trees and humans shaking “hands”.

            “Have you heard the phrase ‘quaking aspens’?” Ulrich asked him.  Viktor nodded.  “But they don’t look to me like they’re quaking,” Ulrich remarked. “If they were quaking, that’d be from fear, wouldn’t it?  But what’s to be afraid of here?” he asked, swiveling his head to look at the forest around them, and making a sweeping gesture with his arm. 

            “The forester’s axe?” Viktor asked, with a slight smile.  He looked down at the leaf in his hand.

            “Perhaps some foresters’ axes,” Ulrich agreed.  “But not in this forest.”

            “You don’t cut any aspens?” Viktor inquired, his eyebrows rising in surprise.

            “Oh, we do.  But not just at random. Not just to cut.”

            “How, then?”

            “That is a process of discussion between the forester and the tree,” Ulrich told him.  He ran his hand along the branch of the small aspen before him, patting it gently as his fingers progressed closer to the trunk.  Viktor waited for him to continue and followed Ulrich’s hand with his eyes. Ulrich rested his hand on the branch and spoke again:

            “They can communicate, you know.”

            “I didn’t know,” Viktor said simply.  It wasn’t that he didn’t believe what Ulrich had said, and that realization surprised him, actually.  He wasn’t sure how to respond, but Ulrich seemed to take his words as assent, as acceptance of the veracity of what the experienced forester was telling him.

            “Many people don’t,” Ulrich continued.  “I used to think they must.  I heard the trees talking to me from the time I was a boy, and figured everyone did.  Found out that wasn’t the case the first time I shared what I heard with my father.  Turned out my own father didn’t know these things. He didn’t believe it was possible for trees to communicate.  Didn’t accept it.  Tried to drum it out of me.”

            Here, Ulrich turned his gaze to meet Viktor’s.  Was he consciously telling Viktor this to gauge his response, his openness to this idea?  For once, Viktor wasn’t focused on trying to figure out what someone else was all about. He was just listening to the forester standing before him. And replying in a most natural and sincere way.

            “So, you ‘picked things up, too’,” he said simply, his voice full of a kindness that surprised him.  “And you still do.”

            Ulrich sighed deeply, and then nodded.  “My father tried to beat it out of me, but he failed.  No matter what he did, I could still communicate with the trees. I just learned not to talk to him about it.”

            “Did you tell anyone else?”

            Ulrich nodded again. “Renate.  Because she understood.  Not that she understands the trees, or even hears them, for that matter.  But she understands me, and she hears me.  And she hears and sees enough other things – like the fairies and the wood spirits – that she believed me about this.”

            Viktor thought back to the way he’d seen Renate looking at Ulrich the day before, at dinner, and he realized that Ulrich was a very lucky man, indeed. He told him as much.

            “Yes, that’s very true,” Ulrich agreed.  “Having a person with you who understands who you are, who believes what you believe to be true, even if she can’t understand it fully herself – now that is a gift from God. That is heaven.”

            “I imagine you’re right about that.”  Viktor didn’t speak from personal experience.  But he desperately hoped that this would someday be his personal experience.  Someday soon.

            “And so, the aspens…” Ulrich said, pointing to the leaf Viktor still held between his finger.  “They aren’t quaking in fear. They’re greeting us, welcoming us.  That leaf there, it was waving to you, inviting you to make its acquaintance.  And you did!  See there, son, you’re already communicating with the trees, too!”  He laughed. And as he did, Viktor once again saw a sparkling light come into the older man’s eyes, just the way it had done at dinner.  The difference was, that this time, Viktor grasped a bit about why it had appeared. He also sensed, without being able to put it into words – without even trying to do so! – a little bit about the nature of what constituted the heavenly in these woods.  And as the two men stood there, greeting the aspen, Ulrich saw something else that Viktor couldn’t possibly see: A sparkling light had come into the young man’s eyes, too.

*          *          *

            This was just the first of many mornings or afternoons in the next few weeks that Ulrich and Viktor spent together in the forest.  Having seen Viktor’s response to the trees, Ulrich correctly surmised that the newcomer could grow into a skilled forester, and that learning about the trees would only enhance his cabinetry work.  Discussion between them in the woods – about the personalities of this or that type of tree, and about why a given variety of wood was suited to being shaped into a particular piece of furniture – continued as the two men moved from forest to workshop to kitchen.  Although mealtime conversations had always been lively, with everyone present taking part, things now gradually shifted, subtly, but noticeably: Ulrich and Viktor brought an ebullience to the table, their joint enthusiasm spilling over.  Ethel and Renate and Hans all noticed the shift, but each had a unique take on what was happening.

            Hans, still suspicious of the new arrival (although Viktor had already been with them for more than two months at this point), was experiencing a combination of fear and jealousy.  It was true that he, himself, had no real interest in learning more about the forest than he already knew, more than what he had taken in as a child playing amongst the trees and using them for his own projects.  He knew which wood to use for which job, but, unlike his father – and now, Viktor – he couldn’t have explained the why of it.  He had always been eager – and content – to move ahead with whatever he was constructing. Why did he need to know more?  But despite the fact that he couldn’t have cared less about the particular properties of oak that made it suitable for cabinets and tables, it bothered him that Viktor did care about this, that Viktor’s desire to find out more clearly pleased his (his – Hans’) father.  With each meal where the conversation seemed dominated by this topic, Hans’ resentment of Viktor grew. He felt as if a wall were growing ever taller between him and his father.  What?­ he continued to ask himself.  What is this man up to?

            A different question kept popping into Renate’s mind.  Who is he? She often found herself wondering this, as she watched Viktor walk off into the forest with Ulrich of a morning, or saw their animated conversations as they emerged, hours later, full of joy, and smiling.  She couldn’t deny that a new lightness had come into Ulrich’s step since the younger man took an interest in the life of trees.  Nor did she want to deny it. She welcomed it!  It gladdened her heart to see the connection between the two of them, a connection fostered, it seemed, by their shared connection to the trees.  It was almost as if Ewald had come back, in Viktor’s form. Renate – as Ulrich had told Viktor that day in the forest – did understand this bond.  She knew from her own experience the joy and peace that come from time spent in stillness in the woods, and it pleased her that Viktor had come to know this, too.  She’d seen a shift in him since that first day, just as she’d seen it in her husband.  Viktor’s step had grown lighter, too. There was a greater ease about him, and that ease radiated from him more and more each day.  She felt it in the air around him.  She saw it reflected in the carvings he was doing on the furniture orders – of which there were more now, thanks to the Kropps’ delight with how their sideboard had come out.

            Renate was happy for Viktor, pleased that he was blossoming, both as a forester and a cabinet maker. But she could also see quite clearly that Hans felt threatened by Viktor’s steady transformation.  Hans’ habit of playing protector within the family was coming into play here, and along with it, his fear that his position in this family he loved was gradually being usurped by an outsider.  She felt, more than saw, him cringe each time Ulrich added “son” to a sentence directed to Viktor.  She even mentioned this to Ulrich one night as the two of them were undressing for bed.

            “How would you have me behave?” Ulrich asked her, a bit bewildered by his wife’s concern.  “Viktor understands the trees.  It’s natural for us to talk about that.”

            “I know it is,” Renate replied, nodding, as she buttoned up the front of her nightgown.  “And I am so happy that you two share this love of the forest.”

            “But?” Ulrich asked.

            “But do you not see how left out Hans feels when you and Viktor are lost in conversation about the beeches and the oaks?”

            Ulrich raised his eyebrows.  “I’m afraid I really haven’t noticed that,” he admitted.  Then he pursed his lips.  “I just feel so invigorated when we’re on that topic, that I guess I lose track of what else is going on around.”

            Without Renate needing to point it out, Ulrich realized where she was headed. “My dear,” he told her, coming over and wrapping his arms around her.  “Thank you.  I do not want to be my father. A father whose son feels abandoned.  You know how much I love Hans.”

            “I do,” Renate told him, leaning her head against his chest.  “But he may not.  Remember how Erich felt all those years.”

            It took Ulrich a minute to grasp what Renate was getting at.  Then he nodded.  “Yes. He felt that Aunt Claudia had somehow stolen our mother away and slipped into our house to take her place. Like a thief.”

            “Yes, that’s it.”

            Ulrich pulled back and looked down at Renate. “Do you think Hans feels that way about Viktor?”

            “I know the situation isn’t exactly the same, but it feels similar to me.”

            “I understand,” Ulrich told her, pulling her close to his chest again.  “That is the very last thing I would want.  For Hans to feel Viktor is taking his place in my heart.”

            Renate was unable to get to sleep right away after they set aside this topic for the night: Her thoughts kept circling back to Aunt Claudia.  To Erich.  And to the terrible sadness and terror Claudia had brought into the Gassmann household.  Renate remembered how, for the first fifteen years of her marriage to Ulrich, her husband had gone over and over the question of his mother’s disappearance from the household, and of her death in some location that had never been revealed to him.  How did she die? he would ask, both aloud, in his conversations with Renate, and in his own mind, silently.

Ulrich, too, lay awake for part of the night, long after he saw that Renate had finally drifted off to sleep.  Hearing Renate speak about interlopers, about abandonment, about jealousy, he thought back to the day, two years earlier, in 1919, when Aunt-Mother Claudia was on her deathbed. That was the day he finally received the answer to his decades -old question about what had happened to his mother.

Ulrich had gone to sit with Claudia at Renate’s urging, despite his old feelings of hurt. “You’ll regret it if you don’t,” she told him, although Ulrich was not at all sure she was right.   But at that point, after nineteen years of marriage, Ulrich trusted his wife’s judgment.  He went.  

Claudia, already within several days of passing, but her voice still strong, suddenly said to him, “Ulrich.  Your mother died of pneumonia.  When you were eight months old.” She paused, studying Ulrich’s face, which registered first shock, and then confusion.

“Pneumonia?” he asked. “But why not tell us that, me and Erich?  She got sick and died.  Why not tell us that?”  Ulrich was surprised to hear that he had overcome his decades-long habit of avoiding this subject and uttered these words. But Claudia herself had raised it…  Even so, Ulrich was not sure what would come from her mouth. The decades of angry outbursts had left him wary.

Claudia coughed long and noisily and painfully into her handkerchief, then squeezed the damp cloth in her fist.  “Because she wasn’t at home when she died.”  She wasn’t making eye contact with Ulrich. She delivered her words in a flat tone, as if it was all she could do to even utter them.

“I don’t understand. What difference does that make? Was she in the hospital?”

“No, Dear.” 

She’s calling me “Dear”? What’s this all about? Ulrich wondered.

“Not in the hospital,” Claudia continued in the same, flat tone.  “She was living with a man named Karl.  She caught the pneumonia and died there.”

“I still don’t understand,” Ulrich said.  “Who was this Karl? Why was she living with him?”

His aunt-not-mother took as deep a breath as she was able to do, and laid her damp hand, still holding the handkerchief, on top of Ulrich’s.  Even now, though, she would not meet his eyes.  Ulrich was so shocked by her hand on his that he sat as if frozen, listening to her answer.

“She left your father when you were just a few months old. Just ran away. Crazy, kind of.  No one could ever understand why. That happens sometimes, when a woman has a new baby. Sometimes they kind of go crazy for no reason.”

Ulrich waited for Claudia to condemn her sister, or this Karl, to launch into a tirade. But she didn’t.

“But who was Karl?” Ulrich asked again, even though he could see that Claudia was fatigued.  He understood that this was his only chance to learn the full How? of his mother’s death.

Claudia waved the hand with the handkerchief vaguely in the air and looked toward the window.  “Someone who courted her before she married your father.  She felt desperate, and he took her in.”

“But why didn’t she go back to you and your parents? And why did she leave Father in the first place? Was that the craziness? Or was there another reason she left?”

Claudia looked back down at the quilt on the bed, frowned. Then she chose one of the questions to answer quietly. “Our parents wouldn’t take her back.  We all tried to convince her to go back to Detlef.  Mother and Father were harsh, hoping she’d relent.  But she didn’t.” Another fit of coughing.  “I wish to God we had relented.  Perhaps it would all have turned out differently, Ulrich. For everyone.  Please forgive me.”

Ulrich was as shocked by Claudia’s tone of voice, which had softened and become plaintive, as he was by the sad look in her eyes when she raised them to him, finally.

“But why do you need forgiveness?”  Aside from forgiveness for all the screaming and criticism...

“Because I sided with our parents.” A pause.  A cough seemed ready to erupt, but then didn’t.  “For my own reasons.”  She dropped her eyes to the quilt.

Ulrich felt his chest and throat constrict.  “What reasons?”

“I was in love with Detlef, too, Ulrich.  But he chose your mother. My sister, Iris.”  She stopped, staring at the handkerchief, which she was now worrying with both hands.

“So, when she left my father, you saw your chance.” It wasn’t a question, and Ulrich was surprised by the icy cold tone in which the words came from his mouth.  He felt deep sadness rising in him, which was quickly replaced with anger, and he understood for the first time in his life why he had intuitively hated Claudia. 

After a lengthy pause, she raised her eyes to his.  “Yes.  That’s right.” Ulrich heard a hint of the old defiance in her voice.  But then bitterness, too, crept in, as she told him, “But you know, Ulrich, I never should have stayed.  Your father never loved me.  It was Iris he loved, and he loved her deeply.  As much as I thought I could replace her, I couldn’t.  I’d realized that by the time Inna was born, but I didn’t have the strength to leave.”  Her eyes narrowed, and she stared out the window.  “I was so angry at him.” Now the coughing fit did come, and Ulrich sat in silence until she was able to speak once again.  “Angry at him for not loving me.  Angry at Iris for leaving him and giving me hope.  Angry at myself for staying when he didn’t want me. For having Inna and Monika with him despite that fact.”  She finally looked back at Ulrich.  “He just tolerated me, you know.  I was a good cook and housekeeper.”

Not really, Ulrich objected, in his thoughts.  There was never any love in that food.  It tasted as bitter and flat as your words.  And the house may have been clean, but it was never the sanctuary a home should be. But you can tell yourself your own version of the story, I guess.

  Then Claudia softly repeated her request: “Please, forgive me.”  She even placed her hand atop his once more, hoping that this would sway him.

  Ulrich didn’t say anything for a few moments. Her seemingly-sincere confession of anger helped him see the way she had been all his life in a new light. Even so, he wasn’t yet ready to accept her words as genuine.  He saw in the way Claudia had placed her hand on his, the same kind of drama-infused manipulation he continually experienced growing up:  emotional displays calculated to either wrest pity from a family member, or terrify them into submission.  Not that Ulrich ever saw through her tactics at all before Renate gently clued him in about them. But now he was feeling the same churning in his gut that he had always felt, and he knew that he did not want to be drawn in to her game.  And yet, he thought, How can you not offer forgiveness to the woman who raised you when she asks it of you on her deathbed? Even if she raised you in that terrible way, she still raised you. Claudia.  Barely an aunt.  Certainly not a mother.  Not even a step-mother.  He couldn’t bring himself to refer to her using any of those words.  In this moment, it was as if he suddenly didn’t even know her at all, as if she were a complete stranger.  And in that moment, looking at this stranger, he was able to assent to forgiving her, the way you’d forgive a stranger who accidently tossed a still-burning match onto your thatched roof, with the result that your house burned to the ground with your entire family inside. 

“Yes, of course, I forgive you.”  That’s what he said, his tone wooden.  Claudia looked at him as if she believed him.  Perhaps she was willing herself to believe him, or perhaps she genuinely believed that Ulrich’s words were sufficient, even if he had uttered them insincerely.  Perhaps she thought she had discharged her duty by revealing these damning facts before exiting the earth. 

How could I tell her I forgave her?  This was another How? question Ulrich had occasionally asked himself in the two years since this deathbed conversation.  And yet, although part of him genuinely did forgive her – for, in effect, wishing for his mother to be out of the picture, and for not telling him the truth until now – there was still a part of him that had not forgiven her in the least.  Or his father, for that matter.  How had his father dealt with being abandoned by his wife, left with two little boys?  The thought had crossed Ulrich’s mind over the years that Detlef had been happy to have Claudia come, to replace the wife who had somehow just gone crazy, that he had been as unattached to Iris as he seemed to the whole rest of the family.  Maybe it had all been the same to him which wife he had, as long as he had one?  Really, the thought had often occurred to Ulrich in the past two years, that he and Erich had, in fact, been abandoned by both their parents. After all, their father was so focused on his own plans and thoughts most of the time that he seemed to hardly pay attention to the actual personalities and needs of the people around him. Detlef had an uncanny ability to focus on forestry work and carpentry, and to draw Ulrich and Ewald and others who worked with him into that work, but there was little personal connection between them.  They could have been anyone off the street, practically, as long as he could teach them what needed to be done.

Over the next couple of years, as he reflected on what Claudia had told him, Ulrich grew convinced that he had to give up blaming Erich for the way things had played out: he came to believe that Erich had known no more than he, Ulrich, had.  And once Ulrich found out the whole story, he couldn’t even tell his brother about it: Erich had died the year before, in 1918, strangely enough, also of pneumonia he had developed as a result of the flu.

But Ulrich did fault Erich for leaving the homestead to work in town.  That had felt like abandonment to him, too.  That whole series of events – Erich leaving the forestry work, Ulrich assuming the role of heir apparent to the family business, all the while knowing he wasn’t his father’s first choice for that – had left a bad taste in Ulrich’s mouth, and his spirit.  This was another layer of melancholy atop the one that had already settled in early in childhood.  Layers of abandonment and sorrow, with some bitterness mixed in. 

Then Ewald left.  A brother-in-law-brother-in-spirit.  That felt hardest of all to Ulrich.  Or maybe it just seemed that way because the two of them were so close.  That was in 1904, but it seemed like yesterday. And the hurt and sorrow connected with Ewald’s abandonment of him had not dulled in the past seventeen years, remaining so strong that when Erich passed away in 1918, Ulrich barely grieved. He felt he’d lost that brother years earlier. The loss of Ewald felt somehow much fresher.

Two brothers lost, and a sorrow that did not lift with the birth of his own son, Hans.  At first, when Hans was young, Ulrich would occasionally think, Ahh! A son!  He’ll work side by side in the forest with me. We’ll build furniture together. They would have the kind of relationship he never had with Detlef.  He would show Hans how much he loved him.  The family business would be full of joy.  Gassmann and son. 

But as Hans grew older, the wished-for strong bond, based on a shared love of the forest and the work, failed to take root in the space between son and father.  Hans appreciated the forest, certainly, but he felt none of the divinity there that Ulrich always talked to him about.  Our eleven hectares of heaven.  It was as if Hans saw the woods as our eleven hectares of future furniture.  As dense as Ulrich generally was when it came to reading people, he couldn’t not sense that Hans had no understanding of what the forest meant to his father, and that Hans didn’t care to learn about that, to experience it for himself.  When he considered this rationally, Ulrich knew that Hans’ lack of interest in this did not mean that Hans was not interested in him, Ulrich, as a person, as his father. But: Another abandonment.  That’s how Ulrich saw and felt it in his heart.

What a joy it was for Ulrich, then, when Viktor Bunke showed up.  Viktor Bunke, who did take an interest in the trees. He wanted to learn about them as trees, not as a source material. And he sensed the divinity in the forest.  To be honest, Ulrich felt that in Viktor, he had gained a second son, one who was more like him in his nature.  More a son than his son, the way Ewald had been more a brother to him than Erich.  How could that not make him happy?

At the same time, he knew that Renate was right about the perils of the situation. I have to make things right with Hans, he concluded. And then keep them right. So, he lay there awake for hours after he and Renate spoke, trying to work out in his mind – his mind – what he could do differently, so that Hans would not feel left out, relegated to second place in his own family and home.  How to make it all right??  In setting this goal for himself, what Ulrich did not know, was that he was, in fact, powerless to make Hans feel any way at all. He didn’t know that how Hans felt was not in his – Ulrich’s – control, but depended, instead, solely on Hans himself.  Lacking this key insight, Ulrich unconsciously opened the door for anxiety and melancholy to slip back into him, unnoticed, and to crouch – silently for the meantime – behind the joy hefound in his interactions with Viktor.  Now his conscious will – to help Hans feel loved and needed – began to operate at odds with his heart, whose only desire was to express the joy and love that had begun to warm it once Viktor had arrived.

Chapter 17

June 25, 1949

Gassmann-Bunke homestead

            The question that settled so strongly into Ulrich’s heart that night in 1921 as he and Renate discussed Hans and Viktor never entirely loosened its grip on his heart.  How to make it all right? Here it was, 1949, and in the intervening decades, Ulrich had, instead of learning how to answer this question, been faced with more and more situations that needed to be made right. Layer upon layer, they piled up.  He didn’t care to recount them to himself, but he was nonetheless fully aware of each of them, and he never stopped seeking ways to explain How? these situations had cropped up in the first place. Nor did he stop searching for ways out of them.  So, on that June evening, when Lina raised the topic of the plans God has for each of us, Ulrich felt inside him that there might be a road here to a solution.

            Clearly, Ulrich was not the only one in the family who held a deep interest in this topic, for it came up once again the next day. Except for that one time back in 1921, which we haven’t yet made our way to in the telling of our story, no one in this family had ever – not even once! – initiated a discussion of religion around the table, much less a discussion of faith, which is what this question seemed to come down to, at least partly.  Even so, the extended Gassmann-Bunke family had now ventured into uncharted territory, dragging along with them Kristina and young Ingrid, who must have wondered what had stirred up this hornet’s nest.

            It was Renate who started things off the second night. The queen of concocting plans for her family and figuring out the best way to implement them, Renate wanted to know how Lina thought it was that God worked out His plans.  Maybe, Renate thought, she could learn something from gaining insight into His methods. Hurriedly setting the bowls of food on the table and motioning to the family members to help themselves, Renate sat down, smoothed her skirts and, without even serving herself, began speaking. She was anxious to get back to this topic before anyone else started in on more frivolous questions of furniture orders or forest surveys.

            “Now, Lina, dear,” she began, “about God’s plans and our free will.”

            Ulrich glanced at his wife and smiled.  Her eagerness didn’t surprise him: The night before, she would have talked with him the whole night about this, if he hadn’t finally protested that he needed to get at least a little sleep before morning.

            “Yes, Grandma?” Lina replied.

            Content that the floor was now hers, Renate picked up a bowl of boiled carrots and spooned some onto her plate as she spoke.

            “So, there’s God’s plan. And there’s our free will.  And somehow they work together.” She waved the serving spoon to this and that side as she spoke, as if indicating God’s plan on the one side, and humans’ free will on the other.

            “That’s what I think,” Lina said, nodding, as she placed potatoes and sausage on her plate.

            “That’s not an explanation,” Marcus said testily. “It’s barely a theory.”  He paused to take a sausage, then added, reproachfully, “Since when do we talk about religion in this family?”

            Ethel shushed him. “Since now.”

            Sulking, he applied himself to his meal, but not before looking across at Kristina and rolling his eyes. This action was not lost on Viktor, who was disgusted by the way his confident, swaggering son was devolving into a sarcastic schoolboy before his very eyes.

            “But what I want to know,” Renate persisted, cutting a potato in two, “is, why does God have a plan for us at all?”

            “Exactly,” Marcus said, his mouth full of potatoes. He’d adopted a flippant tone, but in actual fact, he was as interested in this topic as the others.  He’d spent a large portion of the night reflecting on it.  But he didn’t want to let the others see this.  So, he chose to speak in a way he hoped would seem dismissive, rather than curious.  He pointed his fork in his grandmother’s direction.  “What good is God’s plan, if we can all just do what we want anyway? We’ve got free will.  Why can’t we just be deciding and handling everything on our own?”

            Renate looked at him in annoyance, although she did agree with the idea that we  could handle things on our own. Or, rather, she would have agreed with it until the day before, when the topic came up.  It was as if, while Renate listened to Lina’s musings on the possibility of God and humans working together, a tension long buried in her began to surface.  It was as if some tiny voice in her soul had been trying, throughout her whole life, to suggest she consider this. But she had been ignoring that little voice the whole time, choosing instead to solve every situation she faced on her own. Yes, to solve and manipulate it according to the conclusions that her rational mind, spurred on by whatever strong emotion was ruling her at the moment, offered her about what steps needed to be taken. 

Now, however, something in Renate had shifted: At some moment during the previous day’s conversation, a tiny entry point somehow opened up in her consciousness. The voice of Renate’s soul instantly seized this opportunity and slipped through this opening, this chink in the armor that had until now so fiercely repelled the soul’s every attempt to enter her rational mind.  And what did this voice say to Renate, once it was inside?  She couldn’t have expressed that now. But when Lina suggested the possibility of a collaboration between God and humans, Renate experienced deep inside her what she would later characterize as a feeling, first of curiosity, accompanied by a sense of recognition.

But how can it be a feeling of recognition, if I haven’t ever before had this conversation?  That’s what she would ask herself later, as she tried to work out for herself what had happened that day.  She would say that as this feeling of recognition – of remembering, even – grew inside her, she came to feel that Lina was absolutely right, even if she couldn’t rationally explain it.  She just knew somehow, and as this sense of knowing – knowing without words to express it – grew stronger, a certain lightness spread throughout her body.

At the same time, all the tension that had built up over decades of trying to do everything all on her own began to drain out of her.  As she listened to her granddaughter, Renate began to feel lighter and lighter in her physical body, so much so that she even felt a bit weak in the knees. At this very moment, joy began to fill her heart.  And relief.  Finally, she thought, although, rather, she just knew it, and again, she knew it without words: Finally, I no longer have to figure everything out on my own.

It seemed clear to her then, that the little voice inside her – the one she’d ignored her whole life – was actually the voice of God. He had been trying to speak to her all her life, trying to guide her.That was why, the night before, when Ethel began weeping, overcome with joy and hope at Lina’s belief that God could help her, Renate, too, fell to crying, just not as loudly as Ethel. She was full of gratitude for the message her soul had finally been able to deliver to her: God will help Lina. And He will help you, too. 

It was this last part of the message that surprised Renate the most, for what had made life so hard for her was not just the belief she’d always had – deep in her marrow – that she had to figure everything out herself.  That was difficult enough, but what underlay this belief was even harder for her to live with: her firm conviction that she was not worthy of being helped by God.  Renate had never allowed this thought to rise up into her conscious mind. It was not yet there at this moment, either, but it was making its way in that direction, encouraged – emboldened, perhaps? – by the upward movement of Renate’s recognition of a collaboration of the human with the divine.  And close behind this second thought, a third began stirring. This third one would reveal the link between a memory and her belief in her own unworthiness.  But for now, this third thought was just barely opening its eyes and beginning to get its bearings in the depths of Renate’s soul.  It would be some time before it followed the second thought’s lead and set Renate’s conscious awareness as its ultimate destination. 

Right now, though, hearing her grandson’s question about what good God’s plan is, if we can all do what we want anyway, Renate concluded that she could make use of his objection.

“Marcus,” she said, “I didn’t exactly mean my question that way. I understand now that if He does have plans for us, we often go against them. Or don’t want to know them in the first place.  So, knowing us well enough to know that we might fight Him tooth and nail, why does God still have plans for us?  That’s my question.  Not, What use is it for God to have plans for us?” 

            “Grandma,” Lina replied before Marcus could try to derail the conversation once more, “I think… I think maybe it has to do with… maybe God has a plan for what He wants us to do with our free will.”

            “That’s not a plan,” Marcus snapped, without raising his eyes from his plate. “That’s a wish.  Wishes won’t get you squat.  Even if you’re God. I don’t think God can run our lives. And besides, if we do have free will, then why does God even get to have a plan for us? I repeat, shouldn’t we be the ones to decide about our own lives?”

            The crux of the matter for Marcus was his sense of powerlessness to control the circumstances of his own life. If I accept Father’s logic, and Lina’s, he reasoned, What happens in life always comes down to what someone else wants – whether that’s your father or your God.  Marcus felt such a strong resistance, deep inside him, to this idea of God having some plan for his life without being able to have any input! If I got to sit down with God, talk over the options, and then pick one, of my own free will… that would be one thing. But that wasn’t the way Lina felt things worked. That’s what he really wanted to ask Lina, but once he poured out the beginning of his thought process, Marcus wished he could pull it back in: God forbid anyone should realize, despite his derisive tone, that these were his truest, most desperate questions.  Luckily, though, everyone around him at the table seemed to take in only his tone, and not his actual words.

            “For heaven’s sake, Marcus,” Peter said in a voice full of impatience, “Can’t you give it a rest for once?  Do you have to be telling everyone what to think every minute of the day?  You’re not in the Censorship Office any more, you know.”

            Marcus smirked and raised his hands in a gesture of surrender, while his eyes remained focused on his food. “Fine,” he said. “Have it your way.  Lay it all out for us, dear Sis.  Not another word from me,” he told them. But inside, he was eagerly awaiting the continuation of the conversation, while simultaneously feeling annoyed at Lina. Why the hell is she suddenly some expert on God?

            Lina, unperturbed, did continue.  “All right, then.  Marcus doesn’t seem to think God has any power over us. That all He can do is wish for us to do something with our free will and then sit by, powerless, and watch us.  Even if that’s true, and I, personally, don’t believe that’s all He can do – wish, that is – even if that were true, though, what would He wish for us to do?”

            “You tell us,” Marcus said, consciously adopting a self-satisfied tone. Everyone at the table except for Lina responded with frowns.

            “No,” Lina replied, “you tell me, Marcus, if you know everything.”

            “Lina, Sweetie,” her brother told her with a shrug, after wiping his mouth with his napkin, “your guess is as good as mine.  But I think even that question – what would God wish for us – is irrelevant. It’s only as relevant as asking what Mother or Father would wish for us.”  Renate drew in her breath sharply, but no one made a move to stop Marcus, so he kept on speaking.  “I mean, if God really does allow us free will, then why does he also get to have a plan for us? Why does he get to cause a bird to hurt its wing? Or Peter to get wounded? Or you to get paralyzed, Lina? That’s the real question, folks. Why do you all believe that God’s allowed to try to direct our lives? And, what’s more, that he can actually do it? Can you tell me that?” By the end of his speech, Marcus’ voice had once again acquired a taunting tone, and this pleased him: Although he really did care about the question he’d posed, he didn’t want to come off as a man who didn’t know his own mind.      Viktor, who had grown tired of the bickering between Marcus and Lina, finally spoke up.

“Marcus, give it a rest, Son.  You don’t want to talk about it? Then sit quietly and eat. Or you can take your supper out to the porch and eat there, if you want.”

            Ethel stole a look at her husband and smiled, even suppressed a laugh. His words had suddenly taken her back to when the kids were young. They would get to arguing, generally with Marcus provoking Peter and Lina for his own amusement.  Marcus knew that Peter, in particular, could be counted on to take the bait. When that happened, Viktor would always let Marcus know that he had a choice: to finish his meal in the kitchen, without antagonizing his siblings, or to eat it on the porch.

            “It’s your choice,” Viktor told Marcus and, noticing Ethel’s gaze, he allowed his lips to form a smile, too. 

            “No different now than it was when you were twelve, is it?” Ulrich put in, also smiling and leaning in Marcus’ direction. “There’s your free will for you, my boy!”

            By now everyone had fallen into gentle laughter, except for Kristina and Ingrid, who didn’t get the joke.  Marcus – at once annoyed that he was being treated as a child, by his father, no less, and also grateful that he hadn’t revealed the full depth of his spiritual questioning – sat for the rest of the meal in genuine sulky silence.

*          *          *

“I was so surprised to hear you talking about God at the table today,” Kristina told Lina later on, as they took their usual early evening stroll. 

She had gathered from Marcus’ eye-rolling and his words where he stood on the question of God’s plans for us.   But it was clear that she’d missed an important part of the conversation the day before, the part that explained why they’d begun talking about God and free will and divine plans in the first place.  That was why she asked Lina about it right away during their walk, without giving her friend the chance to deflect that conversation by talking about something else.  Lina’s mention of God at supper had genuinely surprised Kristina. Over the previous four years, they’d discussed pretty much everything about their lives, sharing their feelings and hopes with each other.  But they’d never gotten into theology. 

Lina could hear from Kristina’s voice that her friend was hurt, that what she’d not said at the end of her sentence was, “And that you never said a thing to me about this before.”  Lina sighed and stretched her hand up and back over her shoulder, reaching for Kristina’s hand.

“I’m sorry I didn’t mention any of this to you before,” she began when she felt Kristina’s hand in hers.

“So am I,” came the reply, chilly, despite the fact that Kristina had stopped pushing the wheelchair and taken Lina’s proffered hand.  After all, Kristina didn’t yet know where the conversation would lead, and whether Lina would actually reveal anything to her or not. The night before, as she laid awake in bed, struggling to fall asleep, despite repeating her mantra for what seemed like hours, she began steeling herself for a full rejection by Lina.  Why should Lina open up to me?  We’ve become friends of sorts, but we’re not family.  Better to keep the drawbridge to my heart up and locked in place. That’s what Kristina thought the previous night, as she replayed the details of her friendship with Lina, in between mantra repetitions.  Better to not risk being hurt further.  She was allowing this string of thoughts to run through her mind again now. She was almost completely convinced of Lina’s pending rejection of her, when Lina spoke.

“I’ve been wanting to talk to you about this,” Lina said, “about all of it.  It’s just that my thoughts weren’t at all clear until now… until yesterday afternoon. They just crystallized then, all of a sudden, and they burst out of me!”

Although Lina couldn’t see Kristina’s face, she guessed from the slight bob of the other woman’s hand in hers that Kristina was nodding slowly. Still, her friend said nothing.

“Would you like to hear about it all now?” Lina asked quietly.

“You don’t have to tell me,” Kristina told her, still cautious. Is she offering simply out of some feeling of guilt? Because she noticed I was hurt? She didn’t want that.

“No, but I want to,” Lina told her. “I really do.”

“All right, then.”  Kristina released Lina’s hand. “Then let me push you over to that bench by the forest.  We can talk there.”

“No, everyone can see us there,” Lina told her. “I don’t want anyone to watch us.  This is too personal.  Let’s just go a little further on.  There’s another path into the woods there.  Do you see it? Over on the left?”

Kristina pushed the wheelchair across the stubbly grass to an opening where a path led into another part of the Gassmanns’ forest.

“Really,” Lina said as Kristina came to a halt, “I wish we could go to the treehouse.  That would be a perfect place to talk, but…” she gestured at her legs. “But I can’t do that, not with these legs.  Not yet.”

Not yet? Kristina wondered.  Lina was facing into the woods. Kristina took a seat on a fallen log in front of her.  But then Lina asked Kristina to help her out of her wheelchair and maneuver her so that she, too, could sit on the log, next to her friend.

Once they’d settled next to each other, Kristina waited for Lina to begin the conversation. When Lina failed to speak, Kristina asked the question that had occurred to her during the suppertime conversation.

“So, you think God has a plan for each of us?”

Lina nodded, but didn’t yet say more.

“But that we have our own free will, too?”

“Mmmhmm.”

Kristina was beginning to get the impression that Lina didn’t want to talk about any of this after all. Irritation began rising up in her chest.

But then Lina turned to look at her and put her two hands before her and intertwined the fingers.

“And they fit together somehow,” she said, “in a way we – or at least I – can’t begin to understand.”

“You said at supper that you think God has a wish about how He wants us to use our free will.  But like your grandmother asked, why does God bother having plans for us at all, if we can just do what we want?”

Lina laughed. This struck Kristina as strange, until Lina continued.

“That’s right. Not that Marcus let us get anywhere with that discussion, did he?” She turned to Kristina, and they both smiled.  Kristina could see clearly by the look in Lina’s eyes that they were friends again.  Or still.  She relaxed.

“Really, Lina,” Kristina said, “what do you think? When bad things happen to us, is that God’s plan for us?  Or is it just that we’ve done something bad with our free will? Or that we haven’t allowed Him to guide us?  That we’re not good enough followers? And then He can’t help us get out of the mess?”  She looked intently into Lina’s eyes, hoping for an answer that would assuage her own feelings of despair and sadness about the events that had brought her to this homestead.

“That’s what we were talking about yesterday,” Lina told her. “More or less.  About whether, say, it was God’s plan for me to have my accident. Or for Peter to be wounded in the war…”

“Or for my husband to be killed at the front and for me and Ingrid to have to flee for our lives and…” Kristina left unsaid other thoughts that came to her.

Lina nodded.

“What did you decide about that?” Kristina asked softly, looking now at the dirt path that was overgrown with grass and still littered with some of the previous year’s fallen leaves.

“Not much, I’m afraid,” Lina told her. She recounted the conversation in as much detail as she could recall. She felt both that she owed this to her friend, and also that doing so would make it possible for them to continue discussing this topic which was so, so crucial for both of them.

“I guess the main thing for me,” Lina went on, “is that I believe God loves us and that He wants us to be happy.  And that He has a plan for each of us that can lead to us being happy.” 

“If we can only guess what the plan is and act according to it, to God’s wishes?  Is that what you think?” Kristina asked.

Lina nodded.

Kristina reached over and took Lina’s hand in hers. “And being happy – that means not just a feeling of happiness in our hearts… but also being healthy, yes? Is that what you think?”  She hadn’t wanted to openly mention Lina’s paralysis, but Lina intuited what she was really trying to ask.

“It is. Yes,” she replied.  Kristina squeezed her hand – whether in a show of confidence or pity, Lina didn’t know. Nor did Kristina, herself. Lina sat up straight, took in a deep breath and let it out again, nodding as she stared into the forest.  “And I believe we can learn what God wishes for us, wishes for us to do.  And then do it.”

“And then be happy,” Kristina said. 

Lina nodded.

“And whole,” Kristina added softy, moving the toe of her shoe back and forth in the dirt beneath her foot, as if wiping the spot clean.

“Yes.  I believe that’s possible.”

Kristina sat silent for a moment, her mind suddenly full of a wish of her own.  “I want to believe that, Lina.  I want to be whole again, too.”  When Lina looked over at her, a bit puzzled, she added, “Whole, instead of full of the holes made by everything I’ve lost and left, holes that fear and sorrow and despair have rushed in to fill.  Do you think God wants me to be whole?  Us to be?”  She turned her gaze hopefully to Lina and grasped her hand more tightly.

“Yes, yes!  Of course, He does,” Lina said, seeing the tears now flowing freely down Kristina’s cheeks.

“But how? How can we make His wish come true?  Our wish? And His wish for us?” She paused for a moment. “I – my whole family – we’ve gone through so much sorrow. Hearing all this, I feel like I must have done something terribly wrong.”

“Wrong?” Lina asked, a frown coming to her brow. “Why wrong?”

“Because otherwise, if I were a better follower of God, I’d have understood what He wanted me to do. And I would have tried to do it, Lina,” she cried. “I would have tried my best.”

“But you did try your best,” Lina reassured Kristina, wrapping an arm around her friend’s shoulder.

“Even if I did, it wasn’t good enough!” Kristina protested, shaking her head. “Ingrid and I went through so much… And my parents and brother, left behind…”

Lina now felt her own chest begin to heave. The two friends, leaning their heads together, sobbed in earnest.

“Kristina, I think that making God’s wish for us come true – it starts with our own wish,” Lina said finally, cautiously, as if she feared that this simple statement might leave Kristina feeling more discouraged, instead of inspired. “Like the swallow’s wish to fly free.”

Kristina nodded thoughtfully. Then she wiped her eyes and nose on the handkerchief she’d pulled from her pocket. She held the cloth out to Lina, who didn’t hesitate at all to take it.

“Do you have that wish?” Lina asked, her tone again cautious.

“Oh, yes, I do.”  Kristina squeezed Lina’s hand.  “But how, Lina? How can I know what to do? How to do things right?”

“I’m not quite sure yet.  But He’ll guide us. Somehow.”

Kristina nodded, squeezing her eyes shut tightly, so that she wouldn’t start sobbing once more. “Somehow.”

“In fact,” Lina said after a pause, “I think He already is.” Lina took the folded newspaper article from out of her apron pocket – she’d resolved to carry it with her always – and handed it to her friend.  “Here. Read this.”

*          *          *

As Kristina was settling Ingrid into bed a couple of hours later, the little girl sat back up in bed, pulling up the quilt – one of Ethel’s creations, but not the same one Viktor had slept beneath nearly thirty years earlier, when this had been his room – and wrapping her arms around her tucked-up knees.

“Mama, why was everyone arguing tonight?” Ingrid asked. She, too, had heard the shouting the day before, and her mother could tell she was uneasy that there had been more of the same this evening.  “I don’t like it.”

“I don’t like it either, Sweetheart,” Kristina said, sitting down on the bed and taking her daughter’s hand.

“What if they keep on fighting?  Will we have to leave?”

Kristina leaned over and took Ingrid in her arms. “No, Honey, no.  It’s not like that.”  But Kristina recalled how ill at ease she herself had been just the evening before, when Lina rebuffed her questions, when Marcus didn’t come out to say good night, when she concluded that there might not be a place for the two of them with this family, after all.  “This isn’t about us, Ingrid.”

Ingrid nodded, but it was clear she was not convinced.  “But the other places we stayed, Mama, along the way here – they let us stay, but they didn’t like it. Don’t you remember the way they argued about it, especially that one time…”

Of course, Kristina remembered.  The night they made it to a farmhouse after dragging themselves through frozen mud and ice all day long without eating and were taken in by the family.  But then she and Ingrid, who’d already bedded down for the night in the store room, following a grudgingly-offered meal of porridge and stale bread, heard the farmer and his wife arguing loudly.  Kristina couldn’t make out the words.  Within a few minutes, the wife came in and told them they’d have to pack up and get out – as if they had more than their rucksacks and a small suitcase that didn’t take any packing at all…

“This isn’t about us, Ingrid,” Kristina repeated softly, pulling back and looking Ingrid in the eye.  “They are very happy we’re here. Truly.”

“Then what is it?”

Kristina didn’t much want to get into the topic, but she could see that Ingrid needed the reassurance of a bit of truth at this moment. She could also see the lingering fear in her daughter’s eyes, and was reminded of the holes inside herself that she’d spoken of to Lina.

“Sweetheart, this is a very grownup thing they were talking about,” she began. “I think it was hard for you to understand what they were saying. Is that right?”

Ingrid nodded.

“Well, maybe we can think of it this way.  There’s me, your mama, and there’s you, Ingrid.  I have all sorts of wishes for you, for your life ahead. And you have your own wishes for your life.” Then, seeing that this was too abstract, she shifted her approach. “Like this: I want you to go to school every day, but sometimes you don’t want to go to school.”

Ingrid nodded.  “That’s right.”

“So, I have my wish for you, and you have your own things that you want to do, like playing or running around in the woods.”

“But what does that have to do with God?  That’s what everyone was talking about, isn’t it?”

“Yes, about God.  And about how God has His own idea of how He wants our lives to go, and we don’t always agree with that because we have our own ideas.”

“And who’s right?” Ingrid asked, frowning.

Kristina laughed.  “That’s what they were discussing, Sweetheart!  Whether God is allowed to want us to live the way He wants us to live, and to try to make us do that. And whether He even can do that.”

“The way you want me to live the way you want me to live?”

“Kind of.  Think of it like this: God loves us so much that He only wants the very best for us. But sometimes we do things He knows aren’t good for us.”

“Like Katie who poked a hole in the chicken feed bag when she got mad at her mama?”

“Yes, like that,” Kristina said with a smile.

“So Katie was wrong to spill the feed? And Katie’s mama was right to punish her by taking away her dollies for a week?”

“I can’t say, Ingrid, but sometimes we parents do think we need to punish our children.”

Ingrid thought for a moment, looked at the quilt and asked, “And so God punishes us when we do something He doesn’t like?”

“No, no, Ingrid, God doesn’t punish us.”

“But then why do the bad things happen to us, Mama? God can do everything, can’t He?”

Kristina paused, and then said, “Yes, Ingrid. I believe that He can.”

“Then why would He do something bad to us?  Is it because we’re bad?”

“That’s what folks were talking about tonight, Sweetheart.  They wonder that, too.  When something bad happens to us, is it our own fault – because we can do what we want, which means we can make mistakes – or did God somehow plan things that way so we could learn something from it?”

“But why does God plan something bad so we get hurt? Why doesn’t He keep us from getting hurt instead?”

Kristina sighed and spread her hands out before her. “See, it’s not so simple, is it?” she asked kindly.  “We don’t know what God can do and what God can’t do, or whether He can keep us from getting hurt. Some people think He can do whatever He wants.”

“But why would He want us to get hurt, Mama?” Ingrid asked, and her eyes suddenly filled with tears.  “Why would he want Daddy to get killed? Want us to have to leave Grandma and Grandpa behind and… all the rest of it?”  She paused. “Or Auntie Lina!  Why?”

Kristina took Ingrid in her arms and, as she rocked her, thought back to her conversation with Lina, about the sparrow.  “He never wants us to suffer, Ingrid.  I know that for sure.  Auntie Lina, she believes there’s a reason we go through the bad things we go through.  That it’s God’s way of trying to help us be happy.”

“I don’t like that kind of God,” Ingrid declared, pouting now, instead of crying.  “How can letting us get hurt help us?”

“I’m not sure, Honey.  But I believe in God, and I believe that He only wants to help us. That’s as much as I know.  So, let’s just ask God to help us.  Can we do that now? A little prayer?”

Ingrid shook her head.  “I don’t want to pray, if He’s only going to let us get hurt again.”

Kristine looked into Ingrid’s eyes once more, and squeezed her hands. “I’m not going to force you to pray if you don’t want to.  But tell me, what would you wish for, if you would wish for something?”

Ingrid rested her chin on her knees and looked out across the room to the wash stand and the towels hanging on pegs on the wall, then to the windows with the bright curtains.

“I wish for us to always be happy. To never have to run again.  To be safe, Mama. Safe and happy.  And for a new daddy to take care of us.”

Kristina smiled.  “All right, then. I like those wishes, too.  Now go to sleep, all right?  I’m going to go outside for a while.”

Ingrid stretched herself back out under the covers. Kristina tucked her in, fully this time, and then walked back out into the yard.

A wish.  First comes the wish, she thought.

*          *          *

            The evening was cool for late June.  The breeze that blew across grass, bushes, and gardens still moist from a strong late afternoon rain brought a chill to Kristina as she sat on the bench outside the workshop.  She couldn’t say she was cold, at least not the way she would have been had she been out here a month earlier; even so, she instinctively wrapped her arms loosely around her chest and stomach to keep the cool air out and her bodily warmth in. She could have gone back inside to get a shawl, but she didn’t move.  A holdover, she realized, from the period four years ago now, when she and Ingrid had moved across Eastern Prussia and then Poland before making their way by ship to this part of Germany.  They were never warm enough during those months, even when they wore nearly all their clothing each day as they walked, and each night as they slept. 

Kristina grew so used to the idea, back then, that she had no choice but to endure the cold, that even now, she had to consciously remind herself that she did have warmer clothes, and that she could go put them on.  Nonetheless, the habit of endurance persisted, a habit formed out of a feeling of powerlessness in regard to the elements.  Even now, some lingering feeling of helplessness and cold lingered in Kristina as she sat on the bench, rubbing her arms.

            She was so lost in recollection of that period in her life, that she didn’t notice Marcus until he sat down beside her.

            “You’re cold,” he said.  When Kristina shrugged, he took off his own sweater and laid it across her shoulders. She didn’t protest, but she did smile up at him.  She knew the sweater was a peace offering of sorts, and she felt the previous night’s anxiety begin to fade away. He came out!  He didn’t reject me after all!  He wouldn’t give me his sweater if he meant to drive me away, would he?

            “I had too much to do to come out last night,” Marcus began.  He’d been working on it all day: what to say to her about why he hadn’t come out. He was damned if he’d tell her he was sorry, even though he was.  Or that he’d been too angry at his whole family to be able to talk with her the way he wanted to. Even though this was the truth, too.  “My father and I needed to work out a plan,” he told her.  He figured she’d heard the shouting the evening before, but he hoped his words and his tone of voice now would give her the impression that he was an equal participant in deciding what was to be done, and how. Even though this was not the truth.  The truth was, that Viktor had, indeed, wanted to talk with him after supper. It hadn’t been to consult with him about the way they might make the changes, though, but to tell him how it was going to go.

            “A plan for you coming back here to work?” Kristina asked, trying to get a read on what Marcus was thinking, so that she could best support him.

            He nodded, but instead of looking at her, he stared off across the yard, past the clotheslines and the goat pen and the old outhouse.

            “So… What did you decide?” Kristina inquired finally. When Marcus turned to look at her, she could tell he’d been as far away in his thoughts as she’d been when he sat down a minute earlier.

            “I’ll be back here full-time in a month. Meanwhile, I’ll be helping with the forestry on the weekends and in the evenings a bit, too.”  He tried to keep the bitterness out of his voice.  He really wanted Kristina to believe he’d had a part in the decision, but it was all he could do to keep his frustration inside.  Why does Father have the right to tell me what to do? It’s not right. So much for free will.  This last sentence he actually said out loud.

            Kristina wasn’t surprised to hear this, since she knew Marcus was unhappy with having to give up his Civil Service position, but she hadn’t expected him to reveal his true feelings so easily.  “What do you mean?” she asked, so as to not let him know she understood his frustration. She was giving him the chance to shift the conversation, if he wanted to do so.

            Marcus looked at her, grateful, and waved his hand dismissively in the direction of the house, as if the whole family were still sitting at the supper table.  “Oh, nothing.  Just that nonsense about God’s plans and our free will.”

            Kristina had already had two conversations this evening on this topic – in addition to what she’d heard over supper. She didn’t really want to get into it again.  But, she was feeling buoyed up about the future by her discussion with Lina, hopeful, even, especially since her fears of rejection had faded into the background. So she asked Marcus, “What part of it do you think is nonsense?”

            He threw up his hands. “All of it: that God has a plan for us, that he can somehow influence us to enact, or that he can enact some of it himself – mostly the bad parts, mind you!” he said, turning to look at her again and shook his head. 

            Kristina recalled how he’d rolled his eyes at her during supper, clearly assuming that she was on his side in this matter. Now she regretted having opened the door to this topic. She wanted to shift the conversation, but Marcus was on a roll now.

            “Like I said tonight, why is God even allowed to have a plan for us, wishes for us, if we have free will? And why would we make it our goal to find out what God’s wishes are and act according to them? Why do we assume God knows what’s best for us? Aren’t we the best judges of what’s right for us to do?” 

            Kristina sat, listening in stunned silence, as Marcus sought to destroy the idea that had, just an hour earlier, given both her and Lina so much hope.  “How,” Marcus continued, “can there be a God who wants bad things to happen to us?  Kristina, I don’t get that.”

            Kristina summoned a smile now. “That’s exactly what Ingrid asked me when I was putting her to bed just now,” she replied.

            Marcus extended his index finger and snapped his hand in the air.  “Smart girl,” he said, smiling too. “Really,” he continued, assuming that Kristina’s thoughts were in line with his own, “A God who does something bad to us so we can learn something, so that we can be happy?  That doesn’t make any sense.  That God’s not for me. Why not just do something so we’ll be happy, cut straight to that part?”

            “Ingrid would agree with you,” Kristina told him, but without saying what she herself thought.

            “Like I said,” he told her, “Ingrid’s a smart girl.” He paused and adjusted his sweater around Kristina’s shoulders. “Warm enough now?” he asked, feeling calmer than he had at any point since the evening before, now that he was sitting next to Kristina. She supports me!  She’ll be an ally for me. He was certain of it.

            Kristina was relieved that Marcus let the topic go. Let him think I agree with him, Kristina thought.  At least for now.  She was still in the process of figuring out what she did believe about all of this. She had felt a new hope come into her heart while talking with Lina, a tender hope that she didn’t feel ready to share with Marcus, out of fear that he’d trample all over it. No, she needed that hope right now, needed it desperately. So she kept her opinions – and her wishes – to herself. Now she would concentrate on blocking out the doubts Marcus had tried – unintentionally – to sow in her heart. If he’d realized this was what he was doing, he would have kept his thoughts to himself.  The last thing he wanted to do was create any lack of harmony between himself and Kristina, the person on the homestead he saw as his strongest supporter.

            But since he didn’t realize that he’d misgauged Kristina’s views, Marcus was feeling happy how, happy enough to chat about something else. He asked about Ingrid and how school was going, and about what Kristina had done during the day.  He knew even without her telling him that her day was occupied with cleaning, sewing and making preparations for the canning season, plus helping Lina. Even so, he enjoyed hearing her tell about everything: She always added little details she’d noticed that intrigued him, or shared amusing moments and jokes that made him chuckle.  He imagined that her “reports” on her day consisted of whatever came to mind to her to tell him.  He didn’t know that throughout the day, Kristina was consciously taking note of this or that, committing this or that conversation or remark to memory, not for her own amusement, but so that she’d have something engaging to tell Marcus in the evening.  It was as if she was living not for herself, but for what she could share with this man she was growing steadily closer to.  And who appreciated hearing all of it, each and every day.

            He, in turn, stored up bits and pieces of his day at the office, carefully selecting the encounters and observations that would show him in the very best light – as smart, quick-witted, strong, and powerful.  He depended on these details to paint the kind of picture of himself for Kristina that he wanted her to see.  But now, as he related the latest installment, and enjoyed the sound of her laughter as she smiled at the funny parts, and the shine in her eyes as he described this or that triumph over his coworkers, he began wondering about various points, and not for the first time: How could he make her love him, or keep her loving him, if she already did, without his important position?  Would she still want him if he was just a forester?  Of course, he reminded himself when this questionrushed into his head again now, that Kristina’s husband had been a forester.  This wasn’t necessarily a comforting thought…

            With a strong effort, Marcus pushed these upsetting thoughts out by focusing his eyes on Kristina and laughing – very sincerely – as she described the way one of the nanny goats had greedily gobbled up a piece of cheese rind Kristina had offered her.  “I told her, here, back to the source! Make more milk for more cheese, please!”

            As the yard began to grow dark, Kristina removed Marcus’ sweater from around her shoulders and said, “Time for me to turn in.  Thank you for keeping me warm.” She placed the sweater back around his shoulders and laid one hand on his, leaving the other on his shoulder, where it smoothed the sweater.

            Marcus took her hand in both of his and rubbed it, as if to warm it up. “I can’t stand to see you looking cold.” He smiled and brought her hand to his lips and kissed it.  Then, surprising himself, he added, softly, “I’m sorry I didn’t come out last night.”

            Kristina looked down, blushing.  She understood that these words hadn’t come easily to Marcus, but she was so happy to hear them.  Caressing his shoulder with her free hand, she replied, equally softly, “I missed you.”  Marcus brought his free hand around her waist and pulled her gently toward him until their lips met.  The kiss was brief. It was not their first, but even so, it felt to them both that they were entering a new phase of their courtship.  For Kristina, this meant a feeling of greater confidence in Marcus’ devotion to her. Marcus, for his part, was already thinking ahead to the months to come, and worrying about whether he would be able to keep this woman’s love – if it was already his, that is.

Kristina squeezed Marcus’ hand one last time, stood up, and walked toward the doorway.  Pausing to turn in his direction, she saw that he was standing now, too, watching her. She smiled and waved, then walked inside. Marcus stood there for a minute more. Slipping his arms into his sweater, he felt her warmth clinging to it, and he was glad she’d been sitting out there too lightly dressed.

*          *          *

            As Kristina was settling herself into bed next to Ingrid, still feeling Marcus’ kiss, she heard movement on the other side of her door in the workshop and saw a thread of light flow through the space beneath her door.  At first she wondered whether Marcus had come back, but then decided that no, he wouldn’t have done that.  There were certain unspoken rules to their courtship. One of them was that he never came to her room when Ingrid was there, and really, almost never, even when Ingrid wasn’t.  Kristina listened intently for clues to who was in the workshop.  After a minute or so, she heard the scrape of a stool, and realized that Peter was back for another late evening of cabinetry work.

Peter did, indeed, pick up his project where he’d left off the previous evening.  He picked up his thinking at the same spot he’d left it, too, revisiting one of Lina’s ideas that he had been able to hold onto:  her suggestion that the painful things we go through are part of God’s plan for us.  Jesus, he had thought when she said that, and he thought it again now.  Are you out of your mind? That was just too much for him to bear. While the family was talking of this, he began feeling first agitated, and then angry. It surprised him that Marcus, too, was clearly angered by Lina’s suggestion. A rare moment of agreement between the two of them!  But Peter assumed that he and his brother were probably angry for different reasons.  He concluded that Marcus didn’t want anyone else – not other people, and not even God – telling him how to live his life, because he believed himself quite capable of figuring everything out on his own.  Which was why he felt so angry that their father had told him to come back to working at home. That was Peter’s explanation of his brother’s dissatisfaction.

Peter himself was growing angry for another reason.  Here was his own sister – his own paralyzed sister – suggesting that God allows us – no, forces us – to go through hell on earth and then wants to work with us so we can be happy.  No! Peter had felt during supper. This No! most likely arose out of Peter’s firm belief – adopted and nurtured over the nearly 26 previous years of his life, that complete responsibility and blame for every single painful thing that ever happened to him lay squarely with him and no one else. 

As Lina spoke and the others asked her questions, Peter was thinking. If all that happened to me was God’s plan… Does that mean it wasn’t all my fault? He didn’t know where to go with this possibility. He felt, without words, that certain conclusions followed from this idea, but he had absolutely no desire to explore them.  Rather, he suddenly noticed himself beginning to feel angry.  But why?  Shouldn’t he feel comforted that his suffering might not be his fault after all? All he knew was that when Lina suggested that there was a way to get free of suffering by asking God to help us, it was all he could do to keep from overturning the table and rushing out into the fresh air.  When supper was over, he was the first one out the door. 

Walking briskly into the forest, he followed the path, ignoring the nagging pain in his right leg, until he came to a grove of aspens.  Their leaves were dancing in the light evening breeze. Peter’s mood did not match their lightheartedness. All the same, he sat down heavily amongst the trees and leaned back against one of them.

Peter wanted to scream, but he knew that would bring the whole family running. So, instead, he took out the matchbox and small pack of cigarettes from his shirt pocket. He lit a cigarette. Then, holding the spent match in one hand, he held the lit cigarette to his lips with the other and took a long drag on it.  Once he’d exhaled and began feeling some measure of calm beginning to flow through his body, he carefully wiped the end of the match with a fallen leaf, still damp from the day’s rain, to make sure it was fully extinguished, and then slipped it back into the matchbox.  He toyed with the matchbox as he smoked, tossing it absentmindedly up and down in his hand.

After the second cigarette, he was no longer feeling possessed by anger.  Having wrapped the cigarette butts in another fallen leaf, he slipped them into his pocket along with the match box: He’d put them in the sand bucket outside the workshop.  Then he sat for a few more minutes, casting his eyes aimlessly about the forest that surrounded him. His gaze fell upon a fallen aspen branch that was lying within arm’s reach of where he was sitting. 

A few inches thick, its bark was still intact, and a few dead leaves still clung to one of three smaller branches radiating off from the central section.  Peter reached over and, taking the branch in his hand, placed it upright on the ground next to him.  It reached nearly to his head when he stood up next to it.  Wrapping his hand around the branch, Peter tapped it lightly on the forest floor once or twice, and then strode out the forest, using the branch in his left hand as a walking stick.

In the workshop, Peter laid the branch down flat along the rear of the workbench. Then he spread out his sketches, so that they lay between him and the branch.  Now, sitting at the workbench, doodling aimlessly on the scrap of paper before him, Peter gazed at the aspen branch. He brought his focus to the mottled bark whose task in life was to protect the delicate, living wood tissues beneath it.  This branch had recently fallen, and its bark was still tightly pressed to the pulp.  Peter took the branch in his two hands, resting it atop his open palms, and continued to gaze at it.  It seemed to him that he felt something in his hands.  A slight tingling, perhaps. 

He sometimes felt this when he was holding or touching wood he was planning to work with, but he’d rarely felt it in recent months, maybe even for a year.  Even when he did experience this sensation, it was fleeting, barely perceptible.  Now, though, the longer he held the branch, the more strongly he felt the tingling. It grew into a gentle pulsing that seemed to him to be flowing from the branch itself into his hands. Is that even possible?  he wondered, before turning his attention back to the branch, to its beautiful gray bark mottled with bumps and spots of darker gray. 

But then Peter ceased to notice the thoughts. He felt a calm come over him, as the tingling spread up into his whole hands, then up his arms.  Tears began to flow, although he stifled them, not wanting to give voice to what he was feeling, not while Kristina and Ingrid were sleeping in the the next room.   Peter closed his hands gently around the branch and raised it slightly off the bench. At the same time, he leaned his head down until it rested on the cool aspen bark.  He closed his eyes and opened his heart to the sensation of the bark against his forehead. His tears continued to fall, and without even consciously realizing he was doing so, Peter began to speak to the branch, in a soft, anguished voice. Help me.  Please. Help me.

Enter your email address to subscribe to this blog and receive notifications of new posts by email.